UAD Plug-Ins Manual

UAD PLUG-INS MANUAL
SOFTWARE VERSION 7.4

Manual Version 131107
Universal Audio, Inc. 4585 Scotts Valley Drive Scotts Valley, CA 95066-4517 www.uaudio.com Customer Support USA (toll-free): 1-877-698-2834 International: +1-831-440-1176
NOTICES
Disclaimer
This manual provides general information, preparation for use, installation and operating instructions for the Universal Audio UAD Powered Plug-Ins. The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Universal Audio, Inc. makes no warranties of any kind with regard to this manual, or the product(s) it refers to, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Universal Audio, Inc. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material or the product(s).
Damage Requiring Service The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: The AC power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; Objects have fallen or liquid has been spilled into the unit; The unit has been exposed to rain; The unit does not operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; The unit has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
FCC Compliance
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Caution: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Universal Audio could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Important Safety Instructions

Before using this unit, be sure to carefully read the applicable items of these operating instructions and the safety suggestions. Afterwards keep them handy for future reference. Take special care to follow the warnings indicated on the unit, as well as in the operating instructions. Water and Moisture Do not use the unit near any source of water or in excessively moist environments. Object and Liquid Entry Care should be taken so that objects do not fall, and liquids are not spilled, into the enclosure through openings. Ventilation When installing the unit in a rack or any other location, be sure there is adequate ventilation. Improper ventilation will cause overheating, and can damage the unit. Heat The unit should be situated away from heat sources, or other equipment that produces heat. Power Sources The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions, or as marked on the unit. Power Cord Protection AC power supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them. Pay particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit. Never take hold of the plug or cord if your hand is wet. Always grasp the plug body when connecting or disconnecting AC. Cleaning The external unit should be cleaned only with a damp cloth and mild soap if necessary. Chemical cleaners may damage the silkscreen and/or finish. Nonuse Periods The AC power supply cord of the unit should be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time.
Warranty
Universal Audio warrants that its hardware will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for one (1) year after it has been acquired by the original enduser purchaser or authorized transferee, subject to normal use, as more fully set forth on the web page at the URL below: www.uaudio.com/support/warranty.html
Service & Support

Even the best-built audio equipment in the world will sometimes fail. In those rare instances, our goal here at UA is to get you up and running again as soon as possible. If you are experiencing problems with your UAD product, please visit the Universal Audio website at http://www.uaudio.com to validate compatibility, and read the FAQs regarding UAD products. If you still require service, contact UA Tech Support at 877-MY-UAUDIO, or visit http://www.uaudio.com/support/contact.html to create a help ticket, and we will help troubleshoot your system. (Canadian and overseas customers should contact their local distributor, which can be found using the Dealer Locator at http://www.uaudio.com.) When calling Tech Support for assistance, please have the product serial number available, and have your unit set up in front of you, turned on, and exhibiting the problem. This will help us diagnose and solve any problems as quickly as possible. Thank you. The user should not attempt to service the unit beyond that described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel.
Universal Audio, Inc. End User License Agreement

By installing the software and clicking through this window, you confirm your acceptance of the Universal Audio End User License Agreement, as well as the Universal Audio terms of service and privacy policy, and any additional Third-Party Software terms, all of which can be found at: http://www.uaudio.com/eula This Universal Audio End-User License Agreement ("Agreement") is between Universal Audio, Inc. ("Universal Audio") and you. IMPORTANT - PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING THIS SOFTWARE. By using the Universal Audio software ("Universal Audio Software"), you accept these terms. The Universal Audio Software may be distributed with software or components from third-parties ("Third-Party Software"). Use of Third-Party Software is also subject to the terms of this EULA, although certain third parties may have additional terms found at: http://www.uaudio.com/eula. The Universal Audio Software and Third-Party Software shall be collectively referred as "Software" in this Agreement. If you do not accept these terms, do not use the Software provided with this installation. Instead, return the Software to the reseller for a refund or credit or, if you purchased your Software license directly from Universal Audio, contact Universal Audio for information at 1-877-698-2324. For a list of authorized resellers, see: http://www.uaudio.com/whereto-buy.html 1. Limited Use License. The Software is licensed, not sold, by Universal Audio or its Third-Party Software suppliers ("Suppliers") to the original end user for use only on the terms set forth in the Agreement. If and only if your Software is purchased through a Universal Audio Authorized Dealer or Distributor, Universal Audio, as Licensor, grants you, as an end user Licensee, a non-exclusive license to use the Software (which includes computer software, updates and any bug fixes subsequently delivered and associated media, printed materials and "online" or electronic documentation) with a single computer unit at a single location. 2. Title. The Software is owned by Universal Audio or its Suppliers as applicable, and is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions, as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. Universal Audio (or its Suppliers, as applicable) retains title to and ownership of the Software and all copies, as well as any rights not specifically granted. This Agreement only gives you certain rights to use the Software and related documentation, which may be revoked if you do not follow these terms. 3. Limited Rights to Install and Use the Software. (i) Permitted use and restrictions. You may install the Software into the memory of a single computer for your internal business use or your own personal enjoyment, but may not redistribute or electronically transfer the Software to someone else's computer or operate it in a time-sharing or service-bureau operation. Additionally, you may only use the Software on a computer that contains a maximum of eight (8) UAD Devices, specifically four UAD-1 devices and four UAD-2 devices. "UAD Devices" includes UAD-1 and UAD-2 cards, as well as the UADXpander, UAD-2 Satellite and Apollo products. The sole exceptions areif you are a licensee of the UAD-2 Solo/Laptop card, UAD-2 Satellite or Apollo, you may link those UAD Devices to an existing computer previously registered. (ii) Reverse engineering and copying limitations. You may make one copy of the Software for backup purposes only (and replacement backup copies in the event of loss of or damage to a backup copy), provided you include all copyright notices contained on the original media on the backup copy. You may not modify, translate, adapt, reverse engineer, decompile, create other works from, or disassemble the Software or any portions thereof (except and to the extent that applicable law expressly permits reverse engineering, decompilation or disassembly). Similarly, you may not copy, modify, adapt, transfer, or create other works based upon the printed materials and "online" or electronic documentation accompanying or published for use with the Software (the "Documentation"). (iii) Technical limitations. The Software may include technological measures, whether in the Software or in bundled hardware or both, that are designed to prevent or detect unlicensed use of the Software. Circumvention of these technological measures is prohibited, except and only to the extent that applicable law expressly permits, despite this limitation. Any attempt to circumvent technical limitations may render the Software or certain features unusable or unstable, and may prevent you from updating or upgrading the Software. (iv) No reconfiguration. The Software is licensed for installation and use only in the manner it was provided to you, as configured by an automated installation program provided with the Software, or as described in Universal Audio's Documentation. You may not separate the components contained in the Software or otherwise reconfigure the Software to circumvent technical limitations on the use of the Software or to otherwise exceed the scope of your license. 4. Export, Renting and Transfer Restrictions. You may not export, convey, rent, sublicense, or otherwise distribute the Software or any rights therein to any person or entity. You may, however, transfer the Software license, but only under the following limited terms and conditions: (i) Eligible transferees. You may transfer the license and remainder of the Limited Warranty to a transferee, only if (a) the Software license transfer is done in connection with a permitted Hardware transfer, as detailed at http://www.uaudio.com/support/uad/transfer-faq; (b) You have provided registration details (your name, hardware ID(s), user e-mail ID, buyer's name and buyer's e-mail address) to Universal Audio at [email protected] in advance of the transfer; and (c) the transferee has agreed to be bound by the terms of this license by registering with Universal Audio at http://www.uaudio.com/my. Any permitted transferee may not subsequently transfer this license. (ii) Eligible products. The Software may only be transferred in connection with up to four (4) UAD-1 devices and four (4) UAD2 devices per user account. Special exceptions may arise where the use of more than eight (8) UAD Devices is required. These cases are generally related to areas of education and multi-room facilities, and require advanced approval if requesting to sell or transfer over eight (8) UAD Devices per account. If you have questions or are seeking an exception, please contact customer support at 1-877-698-2324. 5. Limited Warranty. Universal Audio and its Suppliers grant solely to you a limited warranty for a period of ninety (90) days from the original purchase date that the media on which the Software is distributed shall be substantially free from material defects. Your exclusive remedy under this warranty (at Universal Audio's option) is to return and have replaced the inaccurate media containing the Software or receive a refund of the price paid. NEITHER UNIVERSAL AUDIO NOR ITS SUPPLIERS WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT ITS OPERATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED HEREIN, UNIVERSAL AUDIO AND ITS SUPPLIERS MAKE NO
WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION, OR MEDIA, AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. FURTHERMORE, UNIVERSAL AUDIO DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION IN TERMS OF THEIR CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY UNIVERSAL AUDIO OR A UNIVERSAL AUDIOAUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED HEREIN, SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU (AND NOT UNIVERSAL AUDIO OR A UNIVERSAL AUDIO-AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR SUPPLIER) ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 6. Excluded Products. Universal Audio and its Suppliers give NO warranty for Software free of charge, including Software designated as "limited release," "pre-release," "loan," "beta" or "test." This Software is provided "AS IS." 7. Limitation of Liability. UNIVERSAL AUDIO AND ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY TO YOU WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, NEGLIGENCE OR PRODUCTS LIABILITY, FOR ANY CLAIM, LOSS, OR DAMAGE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOST DATA, OR LOST FILES, OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION, OR THE PERFORMANCE OR OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF UNIVERSAL AUDIO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL UNIVERSAL AUDIO'S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES, LOSSES, AND CAUSES OF ACTION WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE. 8. Termination. To the extent permitted by law, and without prejudice to any other rights Universal Audio may have, Universal Audio may terminate your license if you materially breach these terms and conditions. Upon termination by Universal Audio, you will return to Universal Audio, at your expense, the Software, including Documentation, and any copies thereof. 9. Notice to U. S. Government End Users. The software is a "commercial item" as that term is defined in 48 CFR 2.101 (Oct. 2005), consisting of "commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48 CFR 12.212 (Sept. 2005). Consistent with 48 CFR 12.212 and 48 CFR 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 2005), all U.S. Government End Users acquire the software with only those rights set forth herein. All software provided to the U.S. Government pursuant to solicitations issued prior to December 1, 1995 is provided with "Restricted Rights" as provided for in FAR, 48 CFR 52.227-14 (June 1987) or DFAR, 48 CFR 252.227-7013 (Oct. 1988) as application. This provision does not apply if you are not affiliated with the government of the United States of America.
10. Export restrictions. The Software is subject to United States export laws and regulations. If you are subject to U.S. laws, you must comply with these laws, which include restrictions on destinations, end users and end use. For further information, please see http://www.bis.doc.gov. 11. Consent to Use Data. Universal Audio may collect and use technical information about the Software and hardware devices you use in connection with the Software in a manner that does not personally identify you. Universal Audio may use this information to improve our products or to provide customized services or technologies. Universal Audio may also disclose this information to third parties so that they may improve the way their products or services interact with the Software. 12. Third-Party Software and Information. This EULA governs any Third-Party Software distributed by Universal Audio. Universal Audio may include information about third party products and services, including links to Web sites run by others. Universal Audio is not responsible for, and does not endorse or sponsor, this third-party information. 13. Miscellaneous. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the United States and the State of California, as applied to agreements entered into and to be performed entirely within California between California residents. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision of this Agreement or portion thereof to be unenforceable, that provision or part thereof shall be enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to effect the intent of the parties, and the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the Software and Documentation, and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding such subject matter. No amendment to or modification of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a duly authorized representative of Universal Audio. Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement, please contact Universal Audio at 4585 Scotts Valley Drive, Scotts Valley, CA, 95066 USA, +1-831-440-1176 voice, +1831-461-1550 fax, www.uaudio.com web Copyright 2013 Universal Audio, Inc. All rights reserved. Trademarks Universal Audio, the Universal Audio diamond logo, UAD, UAD Series, UAD-1, UAD-2, UAD-2 SOLO, UAD-2 DUO, UAD2 QUAD, UAD-2 OCTO, Powered Plug-Ins, 1176LN, 1176SE, Teletronix, LA-2A, LA-3A, LA-610, LA-610MkII, 2-1176, 610, 2-610, 6176, 710 Twin-Finity, 2192, 4-710d, Cambridge EQ, DreamVerb, Plate 140, Precision Limiter, RealVerb Pro, Precision Buss Compressor, Precision De-Esser, Precision Maximizer, Satellite, Satellite DUO, Satellite QUAD, Apollo, Apollo DUO, Apollo QUAD, Apollo 16, and Analog Ears | Digital Minds, are trademarks or registered trademarks of Universal Audio, Inc. The impulse responses provided by Universal Audio are licensed by Ocean Way Recording Inc. solely for use in connection with the Ocean Way Studios plug-in. Your use of these impulse responses, for any other purpose, other than in connection with the Ocean Way Studios plug-in, is strictly prohibited and a violation of this Agreement. Other company and product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners. Last Updated April 9, 2013
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1. Documentation & Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
UAD Documentation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Chapter 2. Ampex ATR-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19
Mastering Tape Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Ampex ATR-102 Screenshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Operational Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Primary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Secondary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Manual Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Manual Calibration Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Parameter Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Chapter 3. API 500 Series EQ Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 API 500 Series EQ Collection Screenshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Operational Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 API 550A Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 API 560 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Historical Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Chapter 4. API Vision Console Channel Strip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 API Vision Console Channel Strip Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Operational Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 API Vision Console Channel Strip Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Historical Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Chapter 5. Cambridge EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Cambridge EQ Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Cambridge EQ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Low Cut / High Cut Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 EQ Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Parametric EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Shelf EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Chapter 6. Cooper Time Cube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
Dual Mechanical Delay Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Cooper Time Cube Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual -5Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Design Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Cooper Time Cube Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Channel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Cooper Time Cube Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Chapter 7. CS-1 Channel Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 EX-1 Equalizer and Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 EX-1 Equalizer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 EX-1 Compressor Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 EX-1M Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 DM-1 Delay Modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 DM-1 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 DM-1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 RS-1 Reflection Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 RS-1 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Chapter 8. dbx 160 Compressor/Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 dbx 160 Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 dbx 160 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Chapter 9. DreamVerb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

99
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Signal Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Resonance (Equalization) Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Shape Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Materials Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Reflections Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Reverberation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Positioning Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Levels Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Spatial Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 DreamVerb Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Preset Design Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Chapter 10. Empirical Labs EL7 FATSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 FATSO Screenshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 FATSO Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 FATSO Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Channel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Global Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 FATSO Sr. Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Chapter 11. EMT 140 Plate Reverb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 EMT 140 Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 EMT 140 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Reverb Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Stereo Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 EQ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Modulation Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Blend Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Chapter 12. EMT 250 Electronic Reverberator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 EMT 250 Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Program Mode Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Global Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Chapter 13. EP-34 Classic Tape Echo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
EP-34 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 EP-34 Tape Echo Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 EP-34 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 EP-34 Hardware History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Chapter 14. Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
The Gold Standard in Vintage Tube Limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection Screenshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Fairchild Plug-In Family. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Fairchild 670 Operational Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Fairchild 670 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Fairchild Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Historical Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Chapter 15. Harrison 32C EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
173
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Harrison 32C EQ Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Harrison 32C EQ and Harrison 32C SE Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Harrison 32C SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Harrison 32C Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Chapter 16. Helios Type 69 Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Helios Type 69 Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Helios Type 69 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Helios 69 Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Chapter 17. LA-3A Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
184
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 LA-3A Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 LA-3A Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Chapter 18. Lexicon 224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
186
Classic Digital Reverb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Lexicon 224 Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Operational Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Primary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Hidden Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Program Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Chapter 19. Little Labs IBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
206
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Little Labs IBP Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Little Labs IBP Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Little Labs IBP Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Chapter 20. Little Labs VOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
209
Bass Resonance Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Little Labs VOG Screenshot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Operational Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Little Labs VOG Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Chapter 21. Manley Massive Passive EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
214
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Massive Passive Screenshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Unusual EQ Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Massive Passive Mastering EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Standard vs. Mastering Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Massive Passive Band Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Channel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Other Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Massive Passive Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Notes from Manley Laboratories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Chapter 22. Moog Multimode Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Moog Filter Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Moog Filter Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Moog Filter SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Moog Filter Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Chapter 23. MXR Flanger/Doubler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
236
Classic Electronic Flanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 MXR Flanger/Doubler Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Operational Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 MXR Flanger/Doubler Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 MXR Flanger/Doubler Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Chapter 24. Neve 1073 Equalizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
244
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Neve 1073 Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Neve 1073 and 1073SE Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Neve 1073SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Neve 1073 Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Chapter 25. Neve 1081 Equalizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
249
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Neve 1081 Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Neve 1081 and 1081SE Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Neve 1081SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Neve 1081 Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Chapter 26. Neve 31102 Console EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
256
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Neve 31102 Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Neve 31102 and 31102SE Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Neve 31102SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Neve 31102 Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Chapter 27. Neve 33609 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
262
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Neve 33609 Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Neve 33609 and 33609SE Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Other Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Neve 33609SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Neve 33609 Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Chapter 28. Neve 88RS Channel Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
273
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Neve 88RS Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Neve 88RS Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Gate/Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Limiter/Compressor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Cut Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Chapter 29. Ocean Way Studios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
288
Dynamic Room Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Ocean Way Studios Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 What Is Ocean Way Studios? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Operational Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Modes Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Microphones Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Using Ocean Way Studios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Ocean Way Studios Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Display Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Microphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Master Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Master EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 The History of Ocean Way Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Chapter 30. Precision Buss Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
320
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Precision Buss Compressor Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Precision Buss Compressor Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Chapter 31. Precision De-Esser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
326
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual - 10 Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Precision De-Esser Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Precision De-Esser Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Chapter 32. Precision Enhancer Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
330
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Precision Enhancer Hz Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Precision Enhancer Hz Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Precision Enhancer Hz Usage Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Chapter 33. Precision Enhancer kHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
335
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Precision Enhancer kHz Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Precision Enhancer kHz Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Chapter 34. Precision Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
339
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Precision Equalizer Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Precision Equalizer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Control Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Band Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Precision Equalizer Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Chapter 35. Precision K-Stereo Ambience Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
345
Precision K-Stereo Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Operational Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Blog Article by Bob Katz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Precision K-Stereo Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Ambience Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Ambience Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Mid/Side Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Output Gain Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Output Level Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Factory Preset Notes by Bob Katz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Chapter 36. Precision Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
356
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Precision Limiter Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Controls Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Precision Limiter Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Precision Limiter Meters Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Precision Limiter Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Chapter 37. Precision Maximizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
364
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Precision Maximizer Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Precision Maximizer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Precision Maximizer Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Chapter 38. Precision Multiband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
370
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Precision Multiband Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Precision Multiband Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Band Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Band Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 EQ Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Frequency Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Dynamics Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Global Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Precision Multiband Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Chapter 39. Pultec Passive EQ Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
384
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Pultec Passive EQ Collection Screenshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Pultec Plug-In Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Operational Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Pultec EQP-1A Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Pultec MEQ-5 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Pultec HLF-3C Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Chapter 40. RealVerb Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
396
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 RealVerb Pro Background. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Spectral Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Resonance (Equalization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Morphing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 RealVerb Pro Preset Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 RealVerb Pro Preset List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Chapter 41. Boss CE-1 Chorus Ensemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
411
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Boss CE-1 Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Boss CE-1 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Chapter 42. Roland Dimension D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
415
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Roland Dimension D Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Roland Dimension D Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Chapter 43. Roland RE-201 Space Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
417
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Roland RE-201 Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Roland RE-201 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Roland RE-201 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Chapter 44. SPL Transient Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
424
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 SPL Transient Designer Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 SPL Transient Designer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Chapter 45. SSL E Channel Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
435
Large Format Mix Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 SSL E Channel Strip Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 SSL E Channel Strip Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Compressor/Limiter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Gate/Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Usage Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Chapter 46. SSL G Bus Compressor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
449
Large Format Console Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SSL G Bus Compressor Screenshot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 SSL G Bus Compressor Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 General Usage Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Chapter 47. Studer A800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
454
Multichannel Tape Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Studer A800 Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Operational Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Primary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Secondary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Studer A800 Latency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Chapter 48. Teletronix LA-2A Leveler Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
468
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Teletronix LA-2A Leveler Collection Screenshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 LA-2A Plug-In Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Operational Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 LA-2A Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Historical Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Chapter 49. Trident A-Range EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
477
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Trident A-Range EQ Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Operational Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Trident A-Range EQ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Trident A-Range Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Chapter 50. UA 1176 Classic Limiter Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
483
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 UA 1176 Screenshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 1176 Plug-In Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Operational Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 1176 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual
- 14 -
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
Documentation & Support

UAD Documentation Overview
This section describes the various instructional and technical resources that are available for installing, using, and troubleshooting UAD Powered PlugIns. Documentation for the product line is available in written, video, and online formats. ReadMe The ReadMe contains information that may not be available in other locations. Please review all the information in the ReadMe before installing or using UAD Powered Plug-Ins. The ReadMe.rtf file is presented for viewing during the software installation process, and installed to: Start Menu>All Programs>UAD Powered Plug-Ins Startup Disk/Applications/Powered Plug-Ins Tools Documentation for UAD-2 and Powered Plug-Ins are separated by areas of functionality, as described below. The user manuals are on the software disc, and also placed inside the Powered Plug-Ins Documentation folder on the hard drive during software installation. All manuals are in PDF format. PDF files require a free PDF reader application such as Adobe Reader (Windows) or Preview (Mac).
UAD System Manual
Windows Mac Operation Manuals
The UAD System Manual is the complete operation manual for UAD functionality and applies to the entire UAD product line. It contains detailed information about installing and configuring UAD devices, the UAD Meter & Control Panel application, how to use UAD Powered Plug-Ins within a DAW, obtaining optional plug-in licenses at the UA online store, and more. It includes everything about UAD except Apollo-specific information and individual UAD Powered Plug-In descriptions.
UAD Plug-Ins Manual
The features and functionality of all the individual UAD Powered Plug-Ins is detailed in the UAD Plug-Ins Manual. Refer to this document to learn about the operation, controls, and user interface of each plug-in.
- 15 -
Chapter 1: Documentation & Support
Direct Developers
UAD Powered Plug-Ins includes plug-ins from our Direct Developer partners. Documentation for these 3rd-party plug-ins are separate files that are written and provided by the plug-in developers themselves. The filenames for these plug-ins are the same as the plug-in names.
Installed Locations
The UAD and Direct Developer manual files are copied to the hard drive by the software installer to the following locations: Windows Mac Manual Conventions Start Menu>All Programs>UAD Powered Plug-Ins>Documentation /Applications/Powered Plug-Ins Tools/Documentation UAD Powered Plug-Ins is a cross-platform solution for both Windows and Mac computers. The UAD hardware device can be installed into either platform; it is the exact same hardware for both platforms. Operation of the plug-ins is practically identical regardless of the host system platform and application. However, certain platform-specific instructions will differ according to the host system you are using. Instructions in this guide that are platform-specific are indicated with a heading in red letters. Instructions that are identical regardless of platform are not differentiated. Instructions specific to the Windows platform use this red Windows heading. Instructions specific to the Mac platform use this red Mac heading. Unless specified otherwise, for descriptive purposes within this manual, UAD-2 means all UAD-2 family products (SOLO, DUO, QUAD, OCTO, UAD-2 Satellite, and Apollo audio interface). Screenshots in this manual may be taken from the Windows and/or Mac version of the software, and are used interchangeably when the content and functionality of the screenshot is the same on both platforms. Slight variations in the appearance of a screenshot between operating systems are inevitable. When the content of and function of the software represented in a screenshot is identical on both platforms, no differentiation is made in the screenshot title. If there is a significant difference between platforms, screenshots from both platforms are included.
Platforms
Windows Mac UAD Nomenclature
Screen Shots
- 16 -
Online Documentation
The technical support pages on our website offer a wealth of helpful information that is not included in the documentation contained within the software bundle. Please visit our support pages for important technical information including the latest release notes, host application notes, and more. The main UAD Powered Plug-Ins support website is: www.uaudio.com/support/uad Our support website contains many helpful videos that explain how to install UAD hardware and software, register and authorize the products, obtain optional plug-ins, and more: www.uaudio.com/videos
Support Website Videos
Blog
Our online magazine is published regularly and contains lots of useful and interesting information. How-to pages, artist/producer/engineer interviews, support Q & A, detailed scientific notes, and other fascinating articles make the Webzine a great place to routinely visit: www.uaudio.com/blog
Users Forum
The unofficial UAD Powered Plug-Ins users forum, for the exchange of tips and information, is on the world wide web at: www.uadforum.com
- 17 -
Customer Support
Customer support is provided by Universal Audio staff to all registered UAD Powered Plug-Ins users. Support Hours Our support specialists are available to assist you via email and telephone during our normal business hours, which are from 9am to 5pm, Monday through Friday, Pacific Standard Time. Customer Service & Technical Support USA toll-free: +1-877-698-2834 International: +1-831-440-1176 To request online support, please visit our support page, then click the Submit Support Ticket button to create a help ticket: www.uaudio.com/support/uad Factory Address Universal Audio, Inc. 4585 Scotts Valley Drive Scotts Valley, CA 95066-4517 USA www.uaudio.com Your feedback on the performance and features of UAD Powered Plug-Ins is very important to us. Please send your comments and suggestions to us. Comments (not technical support issues) may be sent to [email protected].
Phone Support
Online Support
Main Website Feedback
- 18 -
CHAPTER 2
Ampex ATR-102
Mastering Tape Recorder
It's Not a Record Until it's Mastered on an Ampex Tape Machine.
For more than three decades, the two-channel Ampex ATR-102 Mastering Tape Recorder has turned music recordings into records. With its cohesive sound, punch, and ability to provide subtle-to-deep tape saturation and color, the Ampex ATR-102 is a fixture in major recording and mastering studios and is considered by many engineers to be the best-sounding tape machine for final mixdown. The perfect complement to the workhorse Studer 800 Multichannel Tape Recorder, the Ampex ATR-102 plug-in can provide the final analog polish on your music, turning songs into albums. Impeccably modeled in the renowned UAD engineering tradition and incorporating presets from noted Ampex ATR-102 users Chuck Ainlay, Richard Dodd, Buddy Miller, Mike Poole, and more the Ampex ATR-102 Mastering Tape Recorder plug-in emulation for UAD-2 faithfully replicates the unique dynamics, frequency response, and saturation characteristics of the original hardware. Scrutinized and fully authenticated by the Ampex Corporation, the sound of the Ampex ATR-102 plug-in for UAD-2 is virtually indistinguishable from its analog cousin. History Introduced in 1976, the Ampex ATR-102 2-Track Tape Recorder was a near-instant hit, thanks to its revolutionary servo-controlled reel motors and capstan, which provided smooth, continuous tape tension and handling. The large capstan, and absence of pinch rollers, provided nearly non-existent speed drift and ultra-low flutter. The clever ATR-102 design allowed users to change out heads and guides in mere minutes, with a 1 head being a very popular hot-rod modification in more recent years especially when running at 15 IPS (inches per second). The ATRs role in modern recording history is so prevalent, that it would be easier to list classic albums that werent mixed down on this machine, rather than to try to list all those that were.
All visual and aural references to the Ampex Product and all use of Ampexs trademarks are being made with written permission from Ampex Corporation. Any references to third party tape formulations are used solely for identification and do not imply any endorsement by, or affiliation with, any tape manufacturer.
- 19 -
Chapter 2: Ampex ATR-102
Ampex ATR-102 Screenshots
Figure 1. The UAD Ampex ATR-102 plug-in window
Figure 2. Ampex ATR-102 secondary controls in open mode
- 20 -
Operational Overview
Famous Tape Sound The UAD Ampex ATR-102 provides all of the original units desirable analog sweetness. Like magnetic tape, users can dial in a clean sound, or just the right amount of harmonic saturation. The primary purpose of the UAD Ampex ATR-102 is to obtain tape mixdown sonics within the DAW environment. To obtain the classic tape mixdown sound, instantiate the plug-in as the last insert on the output bus, after other processing is applied (or possibly as the second-to-last insert, before a brick-wall processor such as the (UAD Precision Limiter). Of course, creative non-standard results can be obtained by placing the Ampex ATR-102 in any channel insert or on busses in a send/return configuration. The UAD Ampex ATR-102 models seven popular magnetic tape formulas. Each type has its own subtle sonic variation, distortion onset, and tape compression characteristics. The tape types that can be selected depend on the active tape speed and head type; all tape types are not available for all tape speeds and head types. Lower fidelity types are included to facilitate more signal coloration options. The original hardware machine was manufactured with an interchangeable head block system which enabled the system to be quickly converted to use either 1/4 or 1/2 tape stock by simply swapping out the heads and recalibrating the electronics. As track width increases, subtle improvements to stability, fidelity, and noise become apparent. A popular custom aftermarket tape head is available which enables the use of 1 tape stock, enabling even higher fidelity with its greater track widths. All three tape head widths are accurately modeled and selectable in the UAD Ampex ATR-102. All four tape speeds in the original hardware are modeled in the UAD Ampex ATR-102. Speeds of 3.75, 7.5, 15, and 30 inches per second (IPS) are available. Each speed provides distinct frequency shift, head bump, and distortion characteristics. Higher speeds have higher fidelity; 3.75 IPS has a distinctively lo fi character. Tape machines can be setup with different calibration levels, which entails setting unity gain from input through output based on the magnetic flux (amount of magnetic field) of a given tape formulation. Different calibration levels provide different tape response characteristics for a given level into the recorder. Four selectable calibration levels are available in the UAD Ampex ATR-102.
Mixdown Tape Deck
Multiple Tape Types
Multiple Tape Heads
Multiple Tape Speeds
Multiple Calibration Levels
- 21 -
Ancillary Noises
Tape recorders have inherent signal noises that are a by-product of the electro-mechanical nature of the machine. While undesirable tape system noise is historically considered a negative and was an attribute that pushed the technical envelope for better machine design and tape formulas (and ultimately, noiseless digital recorders), noise is still an ever-present characteristic of the sound of using tape and tape machines. The UAD Ampex ATR-102 models the hum, hiss, wow, flutter, and crosstalk characteristics of the original hardware. These noise components can be individually disabled, adjusted, and/or exaggerated for creative purposes (even though the servo-controlled, direct-drive capstan tape transport of the original hardware provides excellent wow and flutter specifications).
Modeled Transformer
The original hardware was manufactured with isolation transformers, which can color the signal. A common modification to the hardware tape machine eliminates the transformers from the signal path to produce a (subjectively) cleaner sound. UAD Ampex ATR-102 simulates the behavior of the transformers in the hardware circuit, and can be optionally disabled in the plug-in, providing both sonic options. A popular application of multi-head tape recorders is to employ them for slapback tape echo effects. If the machine is running in record mode but the recorded signal is monitored from the repro head (as opposed to the sync head), the physical space between these two heads results in a short delay between the signal sent to the recorder and the monitored signal. When these signals are combined with mixer routings, the classic slapback echo is manifest. The UAD Ampex ATR-102 implements the ability to reproduce this classic effect with a simple set of controls, and expands the capabilities by extending the available delay times beyond what is possible in the physical realm. The ability of a magnetic tape recorder, which has inherently non-linear response characteristics, to accurately reproduce an audio signal with a minimum of noise and distortion requires precise adjustments to the system electronics. The calibration settings are based on the current tape speed, formulation, emphasis EQ, and tape width. The hardware must be meticulously re-adjusted each time a different tape, speed, emphasis EQ, or head width is used (and for system wear and drift, even if these variables are not changed). UAD Ampex ATR-102 has an automatic calibration feature that tunes all calibration electronics with a single button.
Tape Delay
Automatic Calibration
- 22 -
Low Level Tuning
Even though automatic calibration is available, the individual controls that adjust calibration are exposed for sonic manipulation. Playback EQ, record (tape) EQ, and record bias can easily be altered for manual calibration and/or creative purposes. UAD Ampex ATR-102 includes the full suite of tools required to manually calibrate the recorder. Manual calibration tools are provided so expert users can calibrate the system to their preferred methods for obtaining desired results. The manual calibration tools consist of a tone generator (with multiple test tones and levels), a distortion meter with digital readouts, and a full suite of Magnetic Reference Laboratory (MRL) alignment tapes, which are used to calibrate playback electronics. While the UAD Ampex ATR-102 is a true stereo processor designed primarily for use in stereo-in/stereo-out configurations, it will also operate in mono-in/stereo-out and mono-in/mono-out modes. When used in a mono-in/stereo-out configuration, the mono input signal is sent to both channels of the processor, which can then be adjusted independently. When used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration, adjusting any left or right control will change both the left and right controls (the left/right controls are always linked in mono mode).
Manual Calibration Tools
Mono/Stereo Operation
Quick Setup
Set up the plug-in by first adjusting Tape Speed, Tape Type (tape formulation), and Emphasis EQ, or simply select a factory preset. Note that as you lower the tape speed, the tape sound becomes more audible. Once this basic setup is made, adjust the L/R Record (gain) levels, for more or less tape/circuit coloration/saturation. UAD Ampex ATR-102 includes artist presets from prominent ATR-102 users. Some of the artist presets are in the internal factory bank and are accessed via the host applications preset menu. Additional artist presets are copied to disk by the UAD installer. The additional presets can be loaded using the Settings menu in the UAD Toolbar. The graphical interface panel has two modes; open and closed. In closed mode, the primary controls (those that are typically most used) are available on the main panel interface and the tape reels are visible. Additional (typically less used) controls are available on the secondary panel in open mode. The secondary controls panel (Figure 4 on page 32) is accessed by clicking the OPEN button beneath the AMPEX label.
Artist Presets
Primary & Secondary Controls
- 23 -
Primary Controls
Meters The two Meters display signal levels of the plug-in for the left and right channels. Meter ballistics of the original hardware are modeled. The Meters can be switched to display input or output levels in peak or VU modes.
Figure 3. One side of the Ampex ATR-102 penthouse showing meter and I/O controls
The plug-in operates at an internal level of 12 dBFS. Therefore a digital signal with a level of 12 dB below full scale digital (0 dBFS) at the plug-in input will equate to 0 dB on the Meters when Reproduce is in its calibrated position, which is marked with the red arrow sticker. When Path Select is set to Thru, the Meters indicate signal levels at the input of the plug-in prior to processing. Note: Although there are separate left/right Meter controls for VU/Peak and Input/Output, these controls are permanently linked and cannot be switched individually for the left and right channels. Input/Output These switches change the Meter to display levels at the input or output of the plug-in. Input metering is a UAD-only feature which is unavailable in the original hardware.
Input
When in Input mode, the Meter reflects the signal level after the Record (input) gain when Path Select is set to Sync or Repro. In Input mode when Path Select is set to Thru, the Meter reflects the pre-processed (raw input) signal level.
Output
When in Output mode, the meter reflects the signal level at the output of the plug-in, which is just after the Reproduce (output) gain. Peak/VU This switch is used to change Meter behavior between Peak or VU modes.
- 24 -
Clip LED
The left and right channels each have a Clip LED, just above the Meter. The Clip LED is not in the original hardware; it is a UAD-only feature. The Clip LED illuminates only when the machines audio electronics clip. The Clip LED is not affected by the recorded tape signal, even if the tape is overloaded and distorting.
Reproduce
Reproduce adjusts the signal level coming off the virtual tape before the signal is sent to the Meters. There are two Reproduce controls, one each for the left and right channels. The left/right Reproduce controls can be adjusted individually, or simultaneously adjusted when Link mode (page 26) is active. The available range is dB (off) to +9.48 dB. The default value of 0 dB is the calibrated position which is marked with a red arrow sticker. Reproduce is not affected by Auto Cal. Tip: Click the REPRODUCE label text to return Reproduce to 0 dB. The Meters accurately reflect the output level (when set to Output mode) even if Reproduce is not in its calibrated position. However, if Reproduce is moved from the cal position, the Meters will no longer correspond to a particular level being recorded onto the virtual tape. In this case, the Meters will not reflect the actual operating level of the tape because Reproduce changes the signal level coming off the tape before it is sent to the Meters. Note: The graphical interface panel values for Reproduce, which range from 0 10, are arbitrary and do not reflect a particular dB value.
Record
Record adjusts the signal level into the plug-in and the tape circuitry. There are two Record controls, one for the left channel and one for the right. These left/right Record controls can be adjusted individually, or simultaneously when Link mode (page 26) is active. The available range is dB (off) to +9.3 dB. The default value is 0 dB. The graphical interface panel values, which range from 0 10, are arbitrary and do not reflect a particular dB value. Tip: Click the RECORD label text to return the Record value to 0 dB.
- 25 -
Record is a primary color control for the plug-in. Just like genuine magnetic tape, lower Record levels will have a cleaner sound, while higher levels result in more harmonic saturation and coloration. Higher Record levels will also increase the output level from the plug-in. The Reproduce control can be lowered to compensate if unity gain operation is desired.
Reproduce/Record Controls Arrangement
Note that the Reproduce control is to the left of the Record control, which is atypical of most signal flow designs, where inputs usually precede outputs (flowing from left to right). This quirky arrangement of the Ampex ATR-102 I/O controls, where the input control follows the output control, is true to the original hardware design. In Controls View, the Record (input) control precedes the Reproduce (output) control. Open/Close The secondary controls (Figure 4 on page 32) are accessed by clicking the OPEN button beneath the AMPEX label. Conversely, the panel is closed by clicking the CLOSE button.
Link/Unlink
Link mode is a software-only addition that enables controls that are identical for the left and right channels to be linked for ease of operation when both channels require the same values, or unlinked when independent left/right control is desired. In other words, left/right channel controls are ganged together in link mode. The Link parameter is stored within presets and can be accessed via automation. Note: Although there are separate left/right Meter controls for VU/Peak and Input/Output, these controls are permanently linked and cannot be switched individually for the left and right channels, even if Unlink mode is active.
Link
In Link mode, modifying any left or right channel control causes its adjacent stereo counterpart control to snap to the same position. Important: When Unlink mode is active and Link is enabled, the left channel control values are copied to the right channel. Control offsets between channels are lost in this case.
- 26 -
When Link is active, automation data is written and read for the left channel only. In this case, the automation data for the left will control both channels. Additionally, changing the right channel parameters from a control surface or when in controls only (non-GUI) mode will have no effect.
Unlink
When Unlink is active, the controls for the left and right channels are independent. When unlinked, automation data is written and read by each channel separately. Emphasis EQ The Emphasis EQ buttons determine the active Emphasis EQ values and the frequency of the Hum noise. NAB or CCIR curves can be selected when the Tape Speed is 7.5 or 15 IPS. When the Tape Speed is 30 IPS, neither value is available (the LEDs are dimmed) because the EQ is fixed with the AES emphasis curve, per the original hardware. At 3.75 IPS, only NAB is available (as it is with the hardware). When the value is set to NAB (traditionally the United States standard), the Hum Noise frequency is 60 Hz. When set to CCIR (traditionally the standard in Europe and other regions), the Hum Noise frequency is 50 Hz. See Noise Enable on page 34 and Hum on page 34 for more information about Hum. Tape Speed and Emphasis EQ were originally practical controls for recording duration versus noise and local standards. Historically, the origin of the tape machine (US or European) dictated the built-in EQ emphasis, but later machines like the Ampex ATR-102 had both circuits available. CCIR (also known as IEC1) is the EQ pre-emphasis made famous on British records and is considered the technically superior EQ; many say this EQ was part of the British sound during tapes heyday. NAB (also known as IEC2) was the American standard with its own sound. AES is truly standardized at 30 IPS and is the sole EQ found on the Ampex ATR-102 at 30 IPS. Power Power is the plug-in bypass control. When set to OFF, emulation processing is disabled, the Meters and control LEDs are dimmed, the Bypass LED illuminates, and DSP usage is reduced. Power is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal.
- 27 -
OFF is similar to the Thru position in the Path Select control (page 30) except that the Meters are still active when the Thru control is used. However, in this state, the Meters indicate signal levels at the input of the plug-in prior to processing. Note: DSP usage is reduced only when DSP LoadLock is disabled. If DSP LoadLock is enabled (the default setting), activating OFF will not reduce DSP usage. Tape Speed The Tape Speed control determines the speed of the tape transport, in inches per second (IPS). Tape Speed affects the recorders fidelity and associated head bump sonics. Head bump is bass frequency build-up that occurs with magnetic tape; the dominant frequencies shift according to transport speed. To change the Tape Speed value, click the IPS text values, or drag the knob, or click the knob then use the mouse scroll wheel. 15 IPS is considered the favorite for rock and acoustic music due to its low frequency head bump (low frequency rise) and warmer sound, while 30 IPS is the norm for classical and jazz due to its lower noise floor, greater fidelity and flatter response. 7.5 and 3.75 IPS are also available for an even more colored experience, with even greater frequency shift and other artifacts. Note: The available parameter ranges of Tape Type, Head Width, and Emphasis EQ are affected by Tape Speed. See Table 6 on page 44 for details. Tape Type Tape Type selects the active tape stock formulation. Seven Tape Types are modeled in the UAD Ampex ATR-102. To select the Tape Type, click the TAPE button to cycle through the available types, or click directly on the Tape Type value label. The active Tape Type is highlighted in yellow. Note: The available Tape Types and defaults are dependent on the current Tape Speed and Head values. The available Tape Types, and the associated Tape Speed and Head values, are shown in Table 6 on page 44. Each type has its own subtle sonic variation, distortion onset, and tape compression characteristics. Generally speaking, the lower the Cal Level for each formula, the higher the signal level required to reach saturation and distortion.
- 28 -
Cal Level
Cal Level automatically sets tape calibration/fluxivity. The Cal Level setting takes care of the setup one would need to make under equivalent hardware operation, and sets the reference tape/flux level without disturbing the (unity) gain of the plug-in. To select the Cal Level, click the CAL button to cycle through the available levels, or click directly on the calibration value label. The active Cal Level is highlighted in yellow. The default value is +6 dB. Because Cal Level affects the operating levels in the plug-in, it can be used to compensate for overly high (or low) levels at the input of the plug-in. For example, if the input is too hot, lowering the Cal Level will reduce the signal level without changing Record, which can affect the tape saturation characteristics. Note: The noise floor is affected by the Cal Level when Noise Enable (page 34) is active. As tape formulas advanced, their output level increased, thus lowering relative noise floor. Under normal use, the machine would be calibrated to the tapes output level. However, sometimes the machine is under-calibrated to leave more headroom for a broader sweet spot or to prevent electronics from clipping. Therefore, one can go traditional and calibrate to the recommended levels (Table 1), or select a non-corresponding calibration setting. As an example, if 456 is the selected Tape Type and when Cal is set at +6 (6 dB higher than the NAB tape standard), the reference flux level is 355 nWb/m (nanoweber per meter) and is 10 dB below the point where THD reaches 3% (referred to as the maximum operating level). Therefore, with a 1 kHz test tone at 12 dBFS sent to the plug-in, with Tape Type set to 456, Cal set to +6, and Auto Cal enabled, output levels of the plug-in will match the input level and fluxivity on the tape will be 355 nWb/m. The tape manufacturers recommended calibration settings for each Tape Type are shown in Table 1.
Table 1. Tape Manufacturers Recommended Calibration Levels Tape Type 111 35-90 250 Calibration +0 dB +3 dB +3 dB Flux Level 177 nWb/m 251 nWb/m 251 nWb/m
- 29 -
Table 1. Tape Manufacturers Recommended Calibration Levels 456 468 900 GP9 +6 dB +6 dB +9 dB +9 dB 355 nWb/m 355 nWb/m 502 nWb/m 502 nWb/m
Tip: The UAD Ampex ATR-102 default presets bank offers a variety of preset Tape Type, Tape Speed, CAL level, and EQ configurations that are commonly used for the recording of specific genres. Head Width This control specifies the active tape head model. Head Widths of 1/4, 1/2, or 1 can be selected. To select the Head Width, click the HEAD button to cycle through the available values, or click directly on the value label. The active Head Width is highlighted in yellow. Note: At tape speeds of 3.75 and 7.5 only the 1/4 head can be used. At these speeds, the 1/2 and 1 heads cannot be selected. Path Select The Path Select buttons specify which of the four possible signal paths is active in the Ampex ATR-102. The active mode is indicated by an illuminated LED above its associated button. The default value is Repro.
Sync
Sync mode models the sound of direct tape recording and playback via the sync/record head, plus all corresponding machine electronics. Sync mode is generally not used for playback due to its poorer frequency response, but it is included for authenticity and creative purposes.
Repro
Repro mode models the sound of tape recording through the record head and playback through the reproduction head, plus all corresponding machine electronics.
Input
Input mode emulates the sound of the Ampex ATR-102 through the machine electronics only, without tape sonics. This is the scenario when the machine is in live monitoring mode but the tape transport is not running.
- 30 -
Thru
Thru is a processor bypass control. When Thru is enabled, all controls are inactive, emulation processing is disabled, and DSP usage is reduced. Thru behavior is similar to that of the OFF position in the POWER control (page 27), except that the Meters are still active in Thru mode. In this state, the Meters indicate signal levels at the input of the plug-in prior to processing. Note: DSP usage is reduced only when DSP LoadLock is disabled. If DSP LoadLock is enabled (the default setting), activating Thru will not reduce DSP usage. Tape Reels Animation When the secondary controls panel is closed (Figure 1 on page 20), by default the graphi- Click capstan to start/stop cal tape reels spin if the DAW transport is reels animation running. The tape reels animation can be disabled by clicking the capstan graphic. Re-clicking the capstan will re-start the animation. The spin state is saved until it is changed again. Note: Spinning reels automation is not supported in all hosts. In Sonar, the plug-in must be configured as a tempo-based effect for reels animation.
- 31 -
Secondary Controls
The secondary controls (Figure 4 below) adjust the various calibration, ancillary noise, tone generator, and tape delay parameters. The secondary controls panel is accessed by clicking the OPEN button beneath the AMPEX label.
Figure 4. UAD Ampex ATR-102 secondary controls
Auto Cal
The Ampex ATR-102 has individual calibration controls for adjusting sync (record) EQ, reproduction (playback) EQ, and record bias, which are used to compensate for the inherent non-linearities of tape systems. On the hardware, these controls are typically adjusted to calibrate the system for optimum response compensation due to tape non-linearities whenever the tape type, tape speed, emphasis EQ, or head width are changed. When the Auto Cal (Automatic Calibration) ON button is clicked, the calibration EQ and bias controls are automatically adjusted to their flat calibrated position for the currently active Tape Type, Tape Speed, Emphasis EQ, and Head Type. The Auto Cal ON LED illuminates green when the calibration parameters (Shelf EQ, HF EQ, Repro HF, Repro LF, and Bias) are in their calibrated position. Auto Cal is enabled by default. When Auto Cal is ON, the calibration parameters (Shelf EQ, HF EQ, Repro HF, Repro LF, and Bias) change values whenever Tape Type, Tape Speed, Emphasis EQ, or Head Type is modified. When Auto Cal is OFF, the calibration parameters do not change values when Tape Type, Tape Speed, Emphasis EQ, or Head Type is modified. Important: Any calibration settings made manually are lost when Auto Cal is activated. Consider saving manual settings as a preset before activating Auto Cal.
- 32 -
After Auto Calibration occurs, the automatically adjusted parameters can be modified to any other value if desired. If a calibration parameter is adjusted while Auto Cal is ON, the ON LED illuminates in red instead of green, indicating that the system is no longer in the calibrated state. If the moved controls are subsequently returned to their original position, the LED will return to its green state, indicating the unit is back in calibration. Tip: To return any of the individual calibration controls to their flat (calibrated) position, click the label text adjacent to the control (or, simply re-click Auto Cal to return all calibration controls to their flat position). The Manual Calibration Procedure on page 40 has instructions for performing system calibration manually. Record EQ The Record EQ controls (HF EQ and Shelf EQ) are applied in the tape recording circuit and affect tape saturation characteristics. They compensate for common residual HF loss due to bias optimization and system filtering, and affect HF content in the signal prior to the tape non-linearity.
HF EQ
HF EQ provides high frequency emphasis in the signal recorded to tape.

Shelf EQ
Shelf EQ is another control (in addition to HF EQ) provided to compensate for tape non-linearity. Although adjustment of this control is not part of the Ampex factory calibration procedure, it can be used for customized manual calibrations or creative purposes. Repro EQ The Repro EQ controls (Repro HF and Repro LF) are post-head controls for tape playback calibration. They affect the signal coming out of the tape circuitry in both Repro and Sync modes. The Repro EQs are used as filters to shape the frequency response of the system in maintaining a flat response and enable compensation for any tape frequency loss or head wear.
- 33 -
Repro HF
Adjusts the tape playback high frequency content when Path Select is set to Sync or Repro.
Repro LF
Adjusts the tape playback low frequency content when Path Select is set to Sync or Repro. Bias This control adjusts the amount of bias in the record signal. Bias is defined as an oscillator beyond the audible range applied to the audio at the record head, allowing for adjustment of the record behavior. Ideal bias voltage settings provide maximum record sensitivity and low distortion. Intentionally overbiasing is a common technique especially for tape compression which produces a warmer, gently saturated sound. Underbiasing can also be used to add distortion and other nonlinear responses, similar to gate chatter or cold solder joints; extremely low voltages may even cause audio to drop out entirely. Bias voltage, HF/Shelf EQ, and Emphasis EQ (CCIR, NAB, AES) all work together to provide a linear response to the recorded signal. The flat (calibrated position) is determined by tape speed, tape type, emphasis EQ, and head width. Noise Enable This is a global enable control for the Hum and Hiss effect. When Noise is ON, the level of Hum and Hiss can be independently adjusted using the Hum and Hiss Level controls. The default values of 0 dB for Hum and Hiss are the actual modeled level in the original hardware. Noise is not affected by automatic calibration. Hum Determines the amount of Hum in the signal. Hum is added after the tape circuitry. This control affects both the left and right channels. Noise Enable must be ON for the Hum control to function. The default value of 0 dB for Hum is the actual modeled level in the original hardware. This default value can be offset by 25 dB. The Hum frequency is dependent on the Emphasis EQ control (page 27). The frequency is 60 Hz when set to NAB (US) and 50 Hz when set to CCIR (European).
- 34 -
When Tape Speed is set to 30 IPS, the green Emphasis EQ LEDs are not illuminated (and cannot be switched), indicating that the Emphasis EQ is set to AES. However, the Hum frequency can still be set for 30 IPS mode by setting Emphasis EQ to NAB (for 60 Hz) or CCIR (for 50 Hz) prior to setting Tape Speed to 30 IPS. Note: When Tape Speed is 3.75 IPS, only 60 Hz is available. Hiss Hiss determines the amount of tape hiss in the tape playback signal. The default value is 0 dB and can be offset by 25 dB to +50 dB for creative purposes. Noise Enable must be ON for this control to function. Like the hardware, the amount of hiss is dependent on settings of the various controls and may subtly change based on the values of Path Select, Tape Type, Emphasis EQ, Cal Level, Bias, Playback EQs, and Output Level. Hiss Level is not affected by automatic calibration, so its level does not change with Tape Speed. When Hiss Level is at its default position (0 dB), the amount of hiss present in the signal is as if the Tape Speed is 15 IPS. To emulate the amount of hiss at the other tape speeds, enter the offsets from Table 2.
Table 2. Hiss Level Offsets Tape Speed 30 IPS 15 IPS 7.5 IPS 3.75 IPS Hiss Level Setting 8 dB 0 dB 12.5 dB 17 dB
Note: Because hiss noise is an element of tape playback, Hiss is disabled when Path Select is set to Input. Wow & Flutter Enable These buttons are global enable/disable controls for the Wow and Flutter effects. When Wow & Flutter is ON, the level of Wow and Flutter can be independently adjusted using the Wow and Flutter Level controls. Wow and Flutter are undesirable pitch modulations induced by the mechanical components of the tape transport. Wow is a by-product of capstan irregularities, while flutter is a by-product of tape stretching and sticking. Both can be effectively used for creative purposes.
- 35 -
Wow usually refers to very low frequency fluctuations, while Flutter refers to faster fluctuations. Wow and flutter is measured as the percentage of deflection from the original pitch. Both are more pronounced at lower tape speeds. Note: Wow and Flutter levels change with Tape Speed, but they are not affected by automatic calibration. Wow Determines the amount of Wow in the signal. Wow & Flutter Enable must be ON for this control to function. Determines the amount of Flutter in the signal. Wow & Flutter Enable must be ON for this control to function. These buttons are global enable/disable controls for the Crosstalk Level (XTALK) parameter. When Crosstalk is ON, the amount of Crosstalk can be adjusted using the Crosstalk Level control. Crosstalk is the amount of signal bleed between the left and right channels. Crosstalk sonics can vary based upon the Tape Speed and Head Width parameters, however the amount of crosstalk does not vary with these settings.
Crosstalk Level
Flutter
Crosstalk Enable
This control determines the amount of signal crosstalk. Crosstalk Enable must be ON for the Crosstalk Level control to function. The default value of 45 dB is the actual modeled level in the original hardware. The available range is 50 dB to 10 dB. Crosstalk Level is not affected by automatic calibration. Transformer Enable These ON/OFF buttons enable and disable the transformer circuit of the Ampex ATR-102. For an overview of this feature, see Modeled Transformer on page 22. These parameters control the built-in Tape Delay, which creates tape echo effects. For an overview of this feature, see Tape Delay on page 22. The Tape Delay controls are not available in the original hardware. Note: Tape Delay is not available when Path Select is set to Input or Thru, nor when the Manual Calibration Tools are active.
Tape Delay
- 36 -
Tape Delay Enable
These buttons are global enable/disable controls for the Tape Delay effect. When Tape Delay is ON, its red numerical display is active, and other Tape Delay parameters can be adjusted.
Dry/Wet Mix
The Dry/Wet pushbuttons control the mix of the Tape Delay effect. The amount of dry and wet signals are displayed as percentages. Click the Dry button to increase the dry signal level by 1%, or the Wet button to increase the delayed signal level by 1%. Tip: Hold the Dry/Wet buttons down to rapidly change the mix values. For fine control in increments/decrements of 0.1%, hold down Shift while changing values.
Delay Time
The left and right channel delay times can be independently adjusted with these controls. Click the + or buttons to change the delay times in increments of 10 milliseconds. The available range is 0 1000 milliseconds. Tip: Hold the +/ buttons down to rapidly change the delay times. For fine control in increments/decrements of 1ms, hold down Shift while changing values. The default Delay Time values depend on the current Tape Speed, and represent the actual delay time that would occur in the physical realm, reflecting the elapsed time between the signal put on tape at the record/sync head and its reproduction at the playback/repro head. These physical default times are shown at right.
Delay Time Defaults 30 IPS: 62 ms 15 IPS: 124 ms 7.5 IPS: 248 ms 3.75 IPS: 496 ms
Important: When the tape speed is changed, the current delay time is changed to reflect the new physical time between the sync and repro heads for the new tape speed, and previously set values are lost (see tip below). Tip: To retain custom delay times when changing Tape Speed, hold Shift when changing Tape Speed.
- 37 -
Manual Calibration Tools
These controls are the suite of tools included to perform manual calibration of the recorder. These UAD-only tools are not in the original hardware. Manual calibration is entirely optional, as the Auto Cal feature can quickly and automatically calibrate the system. The manual calibration tools consist of an external tone generator with multiple test tones and levels, a distortion meter with digital readouts, and a full suite of modeled Magnetic Reference Laboratory (MRL) alignment tapes. Note: The Manual Calibration Tools are operational only when Path Select is set to Sync or Repro. Additionally, the tools may not operate in some hosts unless audio is present on the track containing the plug-in and the transport is running. Placing the plug-in on an aux, bus, or master output may eliminate this host limitation. This section describes the functions of the manual calibration tools. For instructions on how to use the tools to perform a manual system calibration, see the Manual Calibration Procedure on page 40.
About MRL Alignment Tapes
Alignment tapes are carefully recorded with accurate and consistent flux levels and test tone frequencies. They are constant companions to all well-maintained professional tape machines. Different alignment tapes are required for each tape speed, head width, equalization standard (CCIR/IEC or NAB), and fluxivity level. Alignment tapes are required for system calibration and adjustment so that playback of previously-recorded session tapes will have correct and consistent equalization and levels, regardless of when, or where, the session tape was originally recorded. After tape playback system EQ and levels are calibrated to match the known-to-be-correct values of the alignment tape(s), the record-side alignment is performed. The entire record/playback system will then have proper EQ and gain structuring. Magnetic Reference Laboratory (MRL) is a company that produces alignment tapes. The MRL tapes used in the UAD Ampex ATR-102 are fringing compensated. In-depth discussions about fringing compensation and system alignment are beyond the scope of this manual; thorough resources are available from the MRL website at: http://www.mrltapes.com
- 38 -
Manual Cal Knob
The Manual Cal knob performs two functions: it sets the signal level of the external test tone generator for record calibration, and specifies when alignment tapes are to be used for playback calibration. When set to 16 dB, 6 dB, or +4 dB, a generated sine wave test tone at the frequency specified by the Tones buttons is sent to the input of the record circuitry. This mode emulates sending external test tones into the system. The level of the test tone is set by the knob position and remains static regardless of other parameter values. When set to MRL, a test tone from the alignment tape is sent into the playback circuitry. The MRL frequency is also specified by the Tones buttons, but the levels used are from the calibrated alignment tape. Therefore the MRL tone levels are dependent on other tape parameter values.
Tones
The Tones buttons set the frequency of the external test tone generator and the MRL tape test tones. Tone frequencies of 50 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 5 kHz, 10 kHz, 15 kHz, and 20 kHz are available. Click a button to specify that frequency; the active frequencys button is shadowed gray as if in the down position.
Distortion Meter
The red numerical display, between the Manual Cal knob and the Tones buttons, represents the amount (displayed as a percentage) of third harmonic distortion present in each of the left and right channels. This feature can be useful for custom calibration techniques. When the Manual Cal knob is set to 16 dB, 6 dB, or +4 dB, the value represents third harmonic distortion in the tape playback circuit. Generally speaking, increasing Record (input) will increase distortion while in this mode, as tape saturation increases. If Bias is set very low, distortion may increase at lower Cal Levels. Note: When the Manual Cal knob is set to MRL, the Distortion Meter is inactive (there is no distortion display in this mode).
- 39 -
Manual Calibration Procedure

Manual calibration tools are provided so expert users can calibrate the system to their preferred methods for obtaining desired results. For example, some technicians may prefer adjustments for lowest distortion at a certain frequency; setting bias for maximum sensitivity (instead of overbiasing); or other non-standard techniques. The calibration procedure described here is the most commonly used technique, and is the (albeit simplified) method recommended by the Ampex Operation and Service Manual. Important: Manual calibration is not required to use UAD Ampex ATR-102. Following this procedure will result in the same (or nearly the same) values obtained by simply using the Auto Cal feature. Tip: When making manual calibration settings, consider disabling Auto Cal so the manually calibrated values are not accidentally lost if any of the controls that force automatic calibration (Tape Type, Tape Speed, Emphasis EQ, and Head Width) are inadvertently modified. Preparation Reduce monitoring system volume to avoid loud sine wave Tones. Insert UAD Ampex ATR-102 on the DAW output bus (see note below). Set Path Select to Repro mode (Sync mode is not supported for manual cal). Set left and right Meter Input/Output switches to the OUTPUT position. Set left and right Meter Peak/VU switches to the VU position. Set Tape Speed, Tape Type, Cal Level, and Head Width to desired values. If Tape Speed is set to 3.75 IPS, set Cal Level to +3 dB. Disable Noise Enable (excessive Hiss may contribute to incorrect results). Do not change the above settings throughout the procedure. For related information, see the Manual Calibration Notes at the end of this chapter. Note: The Manual Calibration Tools are operational only when Path Select is set to Sync or Repro. Additionally, the tools may not operate in some hosts unless audio is present on the track containing the plug-in and the transport is running. Placing the plug-in on an aux, bus, or master output may eliminate this host limitation.
- 40 -
To manually calibrate UAD Ampex ATR-102:
Repro Level Calibration
1. Set the Manual Cal Knob to the MRL position. The built-in alignment tape tone will sound and its level can be viewed on the Meters. 2. Set the Tones frequency to 1 kHz. 3. Adjust Reproduce (output) so the Meters display 0 dB.
Repro EQ Calibration
4. Set the Tones frequency to 10 kHz. 5. Adjust Repro HF (not to be confused with HF EQ) so the Meters display 0 dB. 6. Set the Tones frequency to 100 Hz. 7. Adjust Repro LF so the Meters display 0 dB (or as close as possible).*
*Because the MRL alignment tapes we used have fringing compensation, it may not be possible to increase Repro LF enough to make the meter reach 0 dB at low frequencies. If a flat response is desired, you can switch the Manual Cal knob from MRL mode to the external tones then readjust Repro LF for flat response (0 dB) using the external tones instead of the MRL tones.
Note: If Repro HF and/or Repro LF EQs are adjusted by a large amount, it may be necessary to recalibrate the output level (steps 13). Record Bias Calibration 8. Set the Manual Cal Knob to the tone level position in Table 3 below (the tone level depends on tape speed). 9. Set the Tones frequency to the value in Table 3 below (the frequency depends on tape speed).
Table 3. Record Bias Calibration Frequencies and Levels Tape Speed 3.75 IPS 7.5 IPS 15 IPS 30 IPS Tone Frequency 2.5 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 20 kHz Tone Level 16 dB 6 dB +4 dB +4 dB
10. Adjust Bias throughout its range until the Meters reach the maximum level achievable with the Bias control.*
*If the meters reach their maximum pinned value, you may temporarily reduce the Reproduce level to lower the meters, so the maximum achievable level can be accurately viewed (the maximum achievable level may be higher than the pinned value of 3 dB).
- 41 -
11. Increase Bias (clockwise) until the meter level is reduced by 3.5 dB from its maximum (for 3.5 dB of overbias; see Manual Calibration Notes).*
*When calibrating at 3.75 or 7.5 IPS, the tone generator is at a lower level, therefore meter resolution is decreased. To increase meter precision when adjusting bias at the lower tape speeds, consider temporarily increasing the reproduce level.
Record Level Calibration
12. Set the Tones frequency to 1 kHz. 13. Adjust Record (input) so the Meters display the level in Table 4 below (the level depends on tape speed).
Table 4. Meter Levels for Record and HF EQ Adjustments Tape Speed 3.75 IPS 7.5 IPS 15 IPS 30 IPS Meter Level 20 dB 10 dB 0 dB 0 dB
Record EQ Calibration
14. Set the Tones frequency to the value in Table 5 below (the frequency depends on tape speed).
Table 5. Record HF EQ Calibration Frequencies and Levels Tape Speed 3.75 IPS 7.5 IPS 15 IPS 30 IPS Tone Frequency 5 kHz* 10 kHz 15 kHz 20 kHz Tone Level 16 dB 6 dB +4 dB +4 dB
*Note: 7.5 kHz is specified in Ampex manual.
15. Adjust Record HF EQ (not to be confused with Repro HF) so the Meters display the level in Table 4 above (the level depends on tape speed). Note: If HF EQ is adjusted by a large amount, it may be necessary to recalibrate the record level (steps 12, 13).
The manual calibration procedure is complete.
For related information, see the Manual Calibration Notes in the next section.
- 42 -
Manual Calibration Notes

0 dB on the output meter represents +4 dBm (and 12 dBFS digital) when Reproduce is in its calibrated position, which is marked with the red arrow sticker. For proper calibration, follow the entire calibration procedure in order. This example uses 3.5 dB overbias. The amount of gain reduction in step 12 determines the amount of overbias. In some cases we used more than 3.5 dB of overbias to achieve a atter response. Generally speaking, higher Cal Level values will have higher Distortion Meter values for a given reading on the Meters. If Bias is set very low, distortion may increase at lower Cal Levels. We recommend leaving the record SHELF EQ control in its default position. The Ampex ATR-102 hardware has an additional gain control via a setscrew (like Repro HF/LF, Bias, etc) which is usually used for manual gain calibrations. This control is not available in the plug-in because it would be redundant the Reproduce control performs the same function. We chose to calibrate our reference machine using MRL fringing-compensated calibration tapes, without later adjusting the Repro LF EQ for unity gain using external test tones. Therefore the calibrated values in the plug-in reect this alignment method. In-depth discussions about fringing compensation and system alignment are beyond the scope of this manual; thorough resources are available from the MRL website at: http://www.mrltapes.com Tape Type 111 uses a calibration level of 0 dB. This value is not available in the plug-in, but it can be emulated by setting the CAL level to +3 dB, then reducing the input level (Record knob) by 3 dB and increasing the output level (Reproduce knob) by +3 dB. The plug-in operates at an internal level of 12 dBFS. Therefore a digital signal with a level of 12 dB below full scale digital (0 dBFS) at the plug-in input will represent 0 dB on the plug-in meters (if the plug-in is calibrated). The included artist presets demonstrate how manual calibration can be used to obtain sonic variations (see Artist Presets on page 23). Tip: For easy recall in future sessions, save unique calibrations as a preset.
- 43 -
Parameter Dependencies
Available Settings Some ATR-102 parameter value ranges depend on the value of other parameters. These dependencies are listed in Table 6 below.
Table 6. Ampex ATR-102 parameter dependencies Tape Speed 30 IPS 30 IPS 30 IPS 15 IPS 15 IPS 15 IPS 15 IPS 15 IPS 15 IPS 7.5 IPS 7.5 IPS 3.75 IPS 3.75 IPS Head Width 1 1/2 1/4 1 1 1/2 1/2 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 Tape 1 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 Tape 2 456 456 456 456 456 456 456 456 456 456 456 456 456 Tape 3 468 900 900 468 468 900 900 900 900 35-90 35-90 35-90 35-90 Tape 4 GP9 GP9 GP9 GP9 GP9 GP9 GP9 GP9 GP9 111 111 111 111 Emphasis EQ AES AES AES NAB CCIR NAB CCIR NAB CCIR NAB CCIR NAB CCIR
Ampex ATR-102 Latency
The Ampex ATR-102 uses an internal upsampling technique. This upsampling results in a larger latency than most other UAD plug-ins. See UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information.
- 44 -
Original Ampex ATR-102 Mastering Recorder Brochure
- 45 -
CHAPTER 3
API 500 Series EQ Collection

Introduction
The 550A and 560 modular EQs are some of the most popular and enduring mixing and tracking processors ever made. The 500 series modules from API are true industry standards, found in professional multi-channel consoles to Lunchbox racks in the humblest of project studios. Designed by the now legendary Saul Walker in the late 60s, the combination of Walker's 2520 op amp and his Proportional Q circuitry gave the 550 and 560 an uncomplicated way to generate acoustically superior equalization. Universal Audio now offers the UAD-2 platform true best-in-class emulations of these two audio production staples. With UAs industry-leading circuit modeling that captures the filter shapes, band interactions, and unique filter amplifier clipping behaviors providing full suspension of disbelief, these plugins fulfill sonic requirements that previously only the API hardware could provide. Based on vintage units provided by Ross Hogarth and Capitol Studios, both plug-ins provide era-specific features and behaviors, and a remarkable model of APIs custom 2520 and output transformer the results are fantastic low-frequency transparency and tight imaging, which is that legendary API punch in your gut sound. Like with the hardware, the EQs are extremely fast to set, reliable and uniform, and deliver that one-of-a-kind API high headroom precision. If you want the sound of classic American music, you need the API EQs.
- 46 -
Chapter 3: API 500 Series EQ Collection
API 500 Series EQ Collection Screenshots
Figure 5. The API 550A EQ (left) and API 560 EQ (right) plug-in windows
- 47 -
API 500 Series Collection The API 500 Series EQ Collection includes the UAD API 550A and UAD API 560 plug-ins, which are officially licensed from and endorsed by Automated Processes Inc. Both plug-ins meticulously model the entire electronic path, including custom API 2520 op-amps, transformers, band interactions, and internal clipped filter nonlinearities. The API 550A provides reciprocal equalization at 15 points in five steps of boost or cut to a maximum of 12 dB of gain at each point. The fifteen fixed equalization points are divided into three overlapping band ranges. The high and low frequency bands are individually selectable to function as either peaking or shelving filters. A bandpass filter may be inserted independently of all other selected equalization settings. The 10 precision EQ bands make the 560 ideal for signal sweetening and mix tuning. The boost and cut characteristics are identical, allowing previous actions to be undone if desired. The 550A and 560 filters feature APIs Proportional Q which continuously narrows the bandwidth of the filter as band gain is increased, providing (as stated by API) an uncomplicated way to generate acoustically superior equalization. The API 500 Series EQ Collection includes artist presets from prominent API users. The artist presets are in the internal factory bank and are accessed via the host applications preset menu. The artist presets are also copied to disk by the UAD installer so they can be used within Apollos Console application. The presets can be loaded using the Settings menu in the UAD Toolbar (see Using UAD Powered Plug-Ins in Chapter 7 of the UAD System Manual). These plug-ins use an internal upsampling technique to achieve sonic design goals. The upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than most other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information.
API 550A
API 560
Proportional Q
Artist Presets
API 500 Series Latency
- 48 -
API 550A Controls

Band Controls The three EQ bands (HF/MF/LF) are controlled by dual-concentric switches. The inner knob controls the band frequency and the outer knob controls the band gain. Available values for these controls are listed in Table 7 below.
Table 7. API 550A Frequency and Gain Values Band High Frequency (HF) Mid Frequency (MF) Frequency Values 5, 7, 10, 12.5, 15 (kHz) 0.4, 0.8, 1.5, 3, 5 (kHz) Gain Values 0 2 4 6 9 12 (dB)
Low Frequency 50, 100, 200, 300, 400 (LF) (Hz)
Default values are in bold.
Frequency
Frequency determines the center frequency of the band when the filter is in peak mode and the cutoff frequency when the filter is in shelf mode. The frequency for the band can be set using any of these four methods:
1. Drag
the inner concentric knob to the desired value, or over the inner concentric knob then use the mouse scroll wheel, or
2. Hover 3. Click 4. Click
directly on the frequency value label to switch to that value, or
on the band label (HF/MF/LF) or units label (kHz/Hz) to cycle through available values.
Gain
The gain for the band can be set using any of these three methods:
1. Drag 2. Click
the outer concentric knob handle to the desired value, or the + or text labels to increment/decrement values, or over the outer concentric knob then use the mouse scroll wheel, or
3. Hover 4. Click
directly on the gain value label to switch to that value (this method works only when Controls Mode is set to Circular in the UAD Control Panel Conguration panel).
- 49 -
Bandpass Filter
This switch (FLTR) applies a 50 Hz 15 kHz bandpass filter to the entire signal. The bandpass filter is completely independent from the from the three main band filters. The HF and LF bands are normally in bell mode. When the Bell/Shelf button is engaged for the band (in the darker down position), the band is switched to shelving mode.
LF Shelf
Bell/Shelf Switches
When the LF Shelf button is engaged, the low frequency band is switched to shelving mode.
HF Shelf
When the HF Shelf button is engaged, the high frequency band is switched to shelving mode. Output This control provides 24 dB to +12 dB of clean uncolored gain at the output of the plug-in. Tip: Click the 0 text label to return Output to the 0 dB position.
EQ In
The EQ In switch enables the three band filters and the bandpass filter. All filters are active when the switch is engaged and the IN LED is illuminated. When disengaged, the filters are bypassed but other hardware circuitry is still modeled.
Power
The plug-in is active when the POWER switch is engaged and its associated LED is illuminated. When this switch is off, all plug-in processing is disabled and UAD DSP usage is reduced (unless UAD-2 LoadLock is enabled).
- 50 -
API 560 Controls

Note: Like the original 560 hardware, the signal is boosted by approximately 1 1.5 dB even when all gain sliders are set to 0 dB. Gain Sliders Each of the 10 sliders controls the gain for one frequency band. Each band can be adjusted to boost or cut the frequency by up to 12 dB. The available band frequencies are listed in Table 8 below.
Table 8. API 560 Frequencies 16 kHz 8 kHz 4 kHz 2 kHz 1 kHz 500 Hz 250 Hz 125 Hz 63 Hz 31 Hz
Tip: To return a slider to the 0 dB position, click the sliders frequency text label. To reset all sliders to 0 dB, click the 0 text label above the sliders. Output This control provides -24 dB to +12 dB of clean uncolored gain at the output of the plug-in. Tip: Click the 0 text label to return Output to the 0 dB position.
EQ In
The EQ In switch enables the filter sliders. The EQ bands are active when the switch is engaged and the associated IN LED is illuminated. When disengaged, the EQ bands are bypassed but other hardware circuitry is still modeled.
Power
The plug-in is active when the POWER switch is engaged and its associated LED is illuminated. When this switch is off, all plug-in processing is disabled.
- 51 -
Historical Background
API (Automated Processes Inc.) was formed in 1968 with Saul Walker and Lou Lindauer. API is perhaps most noted for their modular approach to equipment manufacturing and for their now legendary 2520 amplifier. To this day, the extraordinary headroom made possible with the 2520 offers consistent analog performance even when using radical EQ curves. API quickly became the leading audio broadcast console manufacturer for radio and television networks and high profile stations. Soon after, recording studios both large and small began using API. The API brand and the companys commitment to excellent audio design endures to this day. The 550A became APIs standard channel module EQ when the company began manufacturing consoles in 1971. As the industry rapidly embraced the sonic quality of the 550A, it quickly found it's way into many custom console designs by Frank DeMedio and other leading engineers. Many of these consoles are still in use today. Forty years later, the 550A remains the standard against which other EQs are measured, and it has played a major role in the recording industry for decades. With virtually all existing units spoken for, popular demand for this EQ resulted in API finally resuming production in 2004.
The API 500 Series EQ Collection Original Hardware
- 52 -
CHAPTER 4
API Vision Console Channel Strip

Introduction
The API Vision Console Channel Strip plug-in for the UAD platform is based on APIs flagship console found in studios and sound stages across the globe. The plug-in includes five indispensable modern production API modules available in the Vision console: The custom 2520 op-amp based 212L Preamp, 215L Sweep Filters, 550L EQ, 225L Compressor/Limiter, and the 235L Gate/Expander. The tone of the 212L mic preamp has its roots in the classic API 2488 series all-discrete recording consoles, best known for the famed LA sound. The API 212L incorporates the API 2520 op-amp and the same circuit as the legendary API console input modules dating from the 1970s. This mic preamp articulates high frequencies with great detail, while delivering the big sounding, warm bottom end that API is famous for. With identical features as the modern API 550B EQ, the API 550L (L for long frame) is a continuation of the 550A EQs that have played a major role in the history of record making, but with an additional filter band and several new frequencies. The 550L artfully blends the past with the present, and is only available in modern API consoles. Making use of API's Proportional Q innovation, the 550L intuitively widens the filter bandwidth at minimal settings and narrows it at higher settings without the need for additional bandwidth controls. Ideal for almost any application, the widely versatile API 225L Compressor's auto-output level remains at unity regardless of the threshold or ratio settings. This feature allows for real-time adjustments without the need for changing the output level. Both New (feed-forward) and Old (feed-back) methods are selectable via the front panel, providing two choices of gain reduction. Soft provides a more subtle compression resulting in a natural sound, while Hard results in a sharp knee type with a severe limiting effect.
- 53 -
Chapter 4: API Vision Console Channel Strip
The 235L Noise Gate/Expander is one of the fastest noise gates available. The API 235L can reduce noise in any type of program without losing any part of the source. Its extreme flexibility and superb sound make it ideal for all recording or mixing studio applications. The Expander function uses a 1:2 ratio, allowing the signal to sneak up to the full signal level without any loss of under threshold vocal or percussion nuances. Setting the threshold in the Gate function to the desired level, then switching to the Expander mode is the perfect workflow. The API 215L is a unique passive, sweepable cut filter, designed specifically to contour the sound in a way that preserves the natural tone of the signal. The 215L is a low pass filter with a slope of 6 dB per octave, and a high pass filter with a slope of 12 dB per octave. The filters are isolated from each other with the same discrete transistor buffer used in the famous 550 series equalizers.
API Vision Console Channel Strip Screenshot
Figure 6. The API Vision Console Channel Strip plug-in window
- 54 -
Modular Design Like the original hardware, the API Vision Console Channel Strip plug-in has a modular design. Each module controls a different signal processing function, and associated controls are grouped within each module. The following modules are contained in the API Vision Console Channel Strip plug-in: 212L 215L 235L 225L 550L Signal Flow Microphone Preamplier High/Low Sweep Filters Gate/Expander Compressor/Limiter Four-Band Equalizer
A simplified view of the default signal flow routing within the plug-in is illustrated in the diagram below. The audio path is shown with solid lines, and the side chain control keys for the dynamics modules are shown with dotted lines.
Figure 7. Simplified default signal flow within the API Vision Console Channel Strip
The signal flow can be re-routed via options in the plug-in. The 550L EQ can be placed before the dynamics modules via the PREDYN (pre-dynamics) button, and the 215L and/or 550L modules can be moved out of the audio path and into the dynamics side chain path via the SC (side chain) buttons in those modules. Note that the side chains for the dynamics modules are in series by default (as in diagram above). However, when the 215L and/or 550L are moved into the side chain (via the SC buttons), the side chain inputs for the dynamics modules are in parallel, as shown in the diagram below.
Figure 8. Simplified signal flow illustrating parallel side chain inputs with 215L SC enabled
- 55 -
Displayed Values
Knob settings, when compared to the graphical user interface silkscreen numbers, may not match the actual parameter values. For example, in the 215L Sweep Filters module, the highest value shown in the plug-in window is 20 kHz. However, the actual value when the knob is at maximum is 40 kHz. This behavior is identical to the original hardware, which is modeled exactly. When the plug-in is viewed in parameter list mode (controls and/or automation views), the actual parameter values are displayed.
Artist Presets
The API Vision Console Channel Strip includes artist presets from prominent API users. The artist presets are in the internal factory bank and are accessed via the host applications preset menu. The artist presets are also placed by the UAD installer so they can be used within Apollos Console application. The presets can be loaded using the Settings menu in the UAD Toolbar (see Using UAD Powered Plug-Ins in Chapter 7 of the UAD System Manual). This plug-in includes additional artist presets that are not available in the internal factory bank. These additional presets can also be accessed using the Settings menu in the UAD Toolbar.
API Vision Console Channel Strip Latency
These plug-ins use an internal upsampling technique to achieve sonic design goals. The upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than most other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information.
- 56 -
API Vision Console Channel Strip Controls

212L Microphone Preamplier
212L Gain
This knob adjusts the amount of gain applied to the input signal. The available range is 30 dB to 65 dB. The default value is 40.5 dB.
212L Pad
When enabled, the input signal level is attenuated (lowered) by 20 dB. The pad is engaged when the red indicator is lit. Pad can be used to reduce signal levels when undesirable overload distortion is present at low preamp gain levels.
212L Meter
The Meter indicates the signal level at the output of the 212L preamp module.
212L Phase
The Phase () button inverts the polarity of the signal. The polarity is inverted when the green indicator is lit. Leave the button off (unlit) for normal polarity. 215L High/Low Sweep Filters The 215L offers two sweepable cut filters, one each for low and high frequencies. The original hardware is transformer coupled and uses a passive filter circuit design for smooth tone.
215L Lo-Pass
The Lo-Pass (high cut) filter has a continuous range of 643 Hz to 40.8 kHz. The slope of this filter is 6 dB per octave. The default value is 40 kHz.
215L Hi-Pass
The Ho-Pass (low cut) filter has a continuous range of 12 Hz to 596 Hz. The slope of this filter is 12 dB per octave. The default value is 12 Hz.
- 57 -
215L SC (Dynamics Side Chain)
This button enables the side chain function for the 215L Sweep Filters. When the 215L side chain is active, signal output from the 215L module is removed from the audio path, and is instead routed to control the 235L and 225L dynamics modules in parallel as shown in the diagram below.
Figure 9. Signal flow with 215L Sweep Filters SC enabled
To listen to the side chain key, simply disengage SC to hear the equalized signal. Note: The 215L module must be enabled for the 215L side chain to function.
215L On
This button enables the 215L module. The module is active when the buttons green indicator is lit. Note: UAD DSP load is reduced when this module is inactive (unless DSP LoadLock is enabled).
- 58 -
235L Gate/Expander
The 235L Gate/Expander module operates in either gate or expansion mode. Two attack speeds and a continuously variable release time are available in both modes.
235L Threshold
Threshold defines the input level at which expansion or gating occurs. The available range is from +25 dB to -45 dB. The default value is 0 dB. Signals below the threshold level are processed by the module. Signals above the threshold are unaffected. Rotate this control clockwise to increase the gate/expand effect.
235L Depth
Depth controls the difference in gain between the gated/expanded and nongated/expanded signal. Higher values increase the attenuation of signals below the threshold. When set to zero, no gating or expansion occurs. The available range is 0 dB to -80 dB. The default value is -80dB.
Scaled Control
Although the Depth control has a full range of -80 dB, the scale is expanded in the first half of rotation so 0 to -9 dB is available for fine tuning of subtle, undetectable gating. The second half of rotation is from -10 to -80 dB for more drastic noise reduction.
235L Attack
This two-position switch determines how quickly the onset of gating/expansion occurs when the signal exceeds the threshold. Normal (25 milliseconds) and Fast (100 microseconds) settings are available. The default setting is Normal.
235L Release/Hold Knob
The function of Release/Hold knob (R/H) depends on the setting of the Release/Hold switch (Rel/Hld). With both switch settings, the available range of the knob is 50 milliseconds to 3 seconds. The default value is 0.5 seconds. Note: Hold mode is only available when the 235L module is set to Gate mode with the Gate/Expander switch.
- 59 -
Release
When the input signal drops below the threshold level and the Release/Hold switch is set to Release, this knob sets the amount of time it takes for signals to decay to the Depth level. Slower release times can smooth the transition that occurs when the signal dips below the threshold, which is especially useful for material with frequent peaks. Fast release times are typically only suitable for certain types of percussion and other instruments with very fast decays. Using fast settings on other sources may produce undesirable results.
Hold
When the input signal drops below the threshold level and the Release/Hold switch is set to Hold, this knob sets the amount of time that signals are held at normal levels before signals return to the Depth level. Note: When set to Hold, the release time is fixed at 100 milliseconds.
235L Release/Hold Switch
This two-position switch (REL/HLD) determines the behavior of the Release/Hold knob when the 235L module is set to Gate mode with the Gate/Expander switch. The default value is Release. Note: This switch is locked in the Release position when the module is in Gate mode (Hold mode is unavailable in Expander mode).
235L Gate/Expander Switch
This switch (GTE/EXP) toggles the module between Gate and Expander modes. The default value is Expander.
GTE
When set to Gate mode, signals below the threshold are attenuated by the Depth amount.
EXP
When set to Expander mode, the gate applies downwards expansion at a fixed 1:2 ratio, with the amount of gain reduction determined by the Depth control.
- 60 -
Expansion allows the signal to sneak up to the full signal level without any loss of under threshold nuances.
235L Meter
This meter displays, in dB, the amount of gain attenuation (downward expansion) occurring in the 235L module.
235L On
This button enables the 235L module. The module is active when the buttons green indicator is lit. Note: UAD DSP load is reduced when this module is inactive (unless DSP LoadLock is enabled). 225L Compressor/ Limiter The 225L Compressor/Limiter offers a continuously variable ratio between 1:1 (no compression) and infinity:1 (limiting). Three attack speeds and continuously variable release times are available. A hard/soft knee setting and a unique new/old setting are also available in the module.
225L Threshold
Threshold defines the input level at which compression begins. The available range is +10 dB to -20 dB. The default value is 0 dB. Signals that exceed the threshold are processed by the Ratio value. Signals below the threshold are unaffected. Rotate this control clockwise to increase the compression effect. Note: The 225L compressor automatically increases makeup gain to compensate for levels that are reduced during compression. However, just like the original hardware, the plug-ins compensated makeup gain levels are not perfectly linear.
- 61 -
225L Ratio
Ratio defines the amount of gain reduction applied to signals above the threshold. For example, a value of 2 (expressed as a 2:1 ratio) reduces the signal level above the threshold by half, with an input signal level of 20 dB being reduced to 10 dB. A value of 1 yields no gain reduction. When the control is at maximum (), the ratio is effectively infinity to one, yielding the limiting effect. The available range is 1:1 to infinity. The default value is 4:1.
225L Attack
This three-position switch defines the attack time of the compressor. Available values are Fast (2 milliseconds), Medium (18 milliseconds), and Slow (75 milliseconds). The default value is Medium.
225L Release
Release sets the amount of time it takes for processing to cease once the input signal drops below the threshold level. The available control range is 50 milliseconds to 3 seconds. Note: Actual release times are program dependent. Slower release times can smooth the transition that occurs when the signal dips below the threshold, which is especially useful for material with frequent peaks. However, if the release is too long, compression for sections of audio with loud signals may extend to sections of audio with lower signals. Fast release times are typically only suitable for certain types of percussion and other instruments with very fast decays. Using fast settings on other sources may produce undesirable results.
225L Knee
The knee (onset) characteristic of the compressor/limiter can be set to Soft (SFT) or Hard (HRD) with this two-position switch. The default value is Hard. Soft provides a more subtle compression resulting in a very natural, less compressed sound. Hard results in a more typical, sharp knee type compression that has a more severe limiting effect.
- 62 -
225L Type
The Type control switches the 225L compressors control side chain signal to use either a feed-back (OLD) or feed-forward (NEW) design, providing two types of gain reduction. The default value is Old. Compressors typically have a side chain control signal based on either feedback or feed-forward designs. NEW feed-forward gain reduction is typical of newer VCA type compressors that rely on RMS detectors for the side chain circuit. The OLD feed-back method is what most classic compressors use for the side chain circuit. Note: Unlike the original hardware, side chain processing via the 215L and 550L modules can be performed with this switch in the OLD position (the hardware cannot use side chain filtering with feedback compression).
225L Meter
This meter displays, in dB, the amount of gain attenuation occurring in the 225L module.
225L On
This button enables the 225L module. The module is active when the buttons green indicator is lit. Note: UAD DSP load is reduced when this module is inactive (unless DSP LoadLock is enabled).
- 63 -
550L Four-Band Equalizer
The 550L EQ is divided into four frequency bands: High Frequency (HF), High Midrange Frequency (HMF), Low Midrange Frequency (LMF), and Low Frequency (LF). The 550L features APIs Proportional Q which continuously narrows the bandwidth of the filter as band gain is increased, providing (as stated by API) an uncomplicated way to generate acoustically superior equalization. The boost and cut characteristics are identical, allowing previous actions to be undone if desired.
Band Controls
The four EQ bands (HF/HMF/LMF/LF) are controlled by dual-concentric switches. The inner knob controls the band frequency (values in blue text) and the outer knob controls the band gain (values in white text). Available values for these controls are listed in the table below.
Table 9. API 550L Frequency and Gain Values Band High Frequency (HF) Low Mid Freq (LMF) High Mid Freq (HMF) Low Frequency (LF) Frequency Values 20, 15, 12.5, 10, 7, 5, 2.5 (kHz) 12.5, 10, 8, 5, 3, 1.5 (kHz), 800 (Hz) 1000, 700, 500, 240, 180, 150, 75 (Hz) 400, 300, 200, 100, 50, 40, 30 (Hz) Gain Values 0 2 4 6 9 12 (dB)
Default values indicated in bold text above.

Frequency
Frequency determines the center frequency of the band when the band is in peak mode (all bands) and the cutoff frequency when the band is in shelf mode (available with HF/LF bands only). The frequency for the band can be set using any of these four methods: Drag the inner concentric knob to the desired value Hover over the inner concentric knob then use the mouse scroll wheel Click directly on the frequency value label to switch to that value Click on the band label (HF/HMF/LMF/LF) to cycle through available values (shift+click to cycle in reverse)
- 64 -
Gain
The gain for the band can be set using any of these four methods: Drag the outer concentric knob handle to the desired value Click the + or - text labels to increment/decrement values Hover over the outer concentric knob then use the mouse scroll wheel Click directly on the gain value label to switch to that value (this method works only when Controls Mode is set to Circular in the Conguration panel of the UAD Meter & Control Panel application)
Peak/Shelf Switches
The HF and LF bands are in shelf mode by default (switches in down position). When the Peak/Shelf switch is engaged for the band (in up position), the band is changed to peak mode. The default value is Shelf.
550L Pre-Dynamics
The Pre-Dynamics button (PREDYN) re-routes the 550L signal. By default, the audio signal is routed into the 550L module after dynamics processing. When PREDYN is enabled (when the green indicator is lit), this routing is swapped, and the EQ module precedes the dynamics processors instead. When550L PREDYN is active, the dynamics side chain is always tapped after the 550L module, regardless of the state of the 215L modules SC function. Note: PREDYN has no effect when the 550Ls SC button is active. The effect of the PREDYN button is shown in the diagrams below.
Figure 10. PREDYN routes the 550L before the dynamics modules
- 65 -
Figure 11. The 550L always precedes the side chain tap when PREDYN is active
550L SC (Dynamics Side Chain)
This control enables the side chain function for the 550L EQ. When the 550L side chain is active, signal output from the 550L module is removed from the audio path, and is instead routed to control the 235L and 225L dynamics modules. The default value is Off.
Figure 12. Signal flow with 550L SC enabled
Note: Both the 550L and 215L modules can both be routed simultaneously to the dynamics side chain. In this case, the 215L precedes the 550L in the side chain path, as shown below.
Figure 13. Signal flow with SC enabled in both 215L and 550L modules
- 66 -
550L EQ
This button enables the 550L module. The module is active when the buttons green indicator is lit. Note: UAD DSP load is reduced when this module is inactive (unless DSP LoadLock is enabled). Global Module
Output Meter
The vertical LED-style metering provides a visual indication of relative signal peak levels at the output of the plugin.
SC Link (Side Chain Link)
When the plug-in is used on a stereo signal, this button links the side chains of the left and right channels of the 225L and 235L dynamics modules so both channels are compressed by the same amounts. SC Link is active when the buttons green indicator is lit. The default value is enabled. Linking the side chains prevents signals which appear on only one channel from shifting the stereo image of the output. For example, any large transient on either channel will cause both channels to compress, and the amount of compression will be similar to the amount of compression for a transient which appears on both channels at the same time. Note: The SC Link button cannot be engaged when the plug-in is used in a monophonic configuration.
Output
This control provides 24 dB to +12 dB of clean uncolored gain at the output of the plug-in. The default value is 0 dB. Tip: Click the 0 text label to return Output to the 0 dB position.
- 67 -
Power
The plug-in is active when the POWER switch is engaged and its associated LED is lit. When this button is off, all plug-in processing is disabled and UAD DSP usage is reduced (unless DSP LoadLock is enabled).
API (Automated Processes Inc.) was formed in 1968 with Saul Walker and Lou Lindauer. API is perhaps most noted for their modular approach to equipment manufacturing and for their now legendary 2520 amplifier. To this day, the extraordinary headroom made possible with the 2520 offers consistent analog performance even when using radical EQ curves. API quickly became the leading audio broadcast console manufacturer for radio and television networks and high profile stations. Soon after, recording studios both large and small began using API. The API brand and the companys commitment to excellent audio design endures to this day.
The API Vision Console
- 68 -
CHAPTER 5
Cambridge EQ
Overview
The UAD Cambridge EQ plug-in is a mastering-quality, no-compromise equalizer that enables powerful tonal shaping of any audio source. Its algorithm was modeled from various high-end analog filters, providing a sonically rich foundation for timbral manipulation. Special attention was given to the handling of higher frequencies, resulting in a much smoother and more satisfying high-end response than is found in most digital filters. Cambridge EQ is highly flexible, offering a broad spectrum of options facilitating surgical precision and delivering superior aural results in every application. This may be the most satisfying, full-featured equalizer in your arsenal of creative tools.
Cambridge EQ Screenshot
Figure 14. The UAD Cambridge EQ plug-in window
- 69 -
Chapter 5: Cambridge EQ
Cambridge EQ Controls
Each feature of the Cambridge EQ interface is detailed below. Response Curve Display The Response Curve Display plots the frequency response of the current Cambridge EQ settings. It provides instant visual feedback of how audio is being processed by the equalizer.
Figure 15. Cambridge EQ Response Curve display
The entire audio spectrum from 20 Hz to 20 kHz is displayed along the horizontal axis. Gain and attenuation of frequencies (up to 40 dB) are displayed along the vertical axis. The vertical resolution of this display can be modified with the Zoom buttons.
Response Curve Color
The color of the response curve depends on the value of the A/B Selector control. When A is active, the curve is yellow. When B is active, the curve is green (see A/B Selector Button on page 72). When Cambridge EQ is disabled, the response curve is grey.
- 70 -
Zoom Buttons
The vertical scale of the Curve Display can be increased or reduced with the Zoom buttons. This function allows the resolution of the Curve Display to be changed for enhanced visual feedback when very small or very large amounts of boost or cut are applied. Four vertical ranges can be selected with the Zoom buttons: 5, 10, 20, and 40 dB.
Figure 16. Vertical resolution of the Response Curve can be changed with the Zoom buttons
Curve Control Bats
There are five control bats on the curve display. Each bat is color coded and corresponds to each of the five EQ bands. The position of the bat on the curve display reflects the frequency and gain of its corresponding band, even if the band is disabled.
Figure 17. The Curve Control Bats can be used to control EQ band frequency, gain, and Q
The gain and frequency of an EQ band can be modified simultaneously by dragging its bat with the mouse. If a band is disabled when its bat is touched for the first time, the band is enabled.
Note: To modify the Q of a band with its bat, hold down the Control key while
dragging vertically. When a band is enabled, the EQ curve usually touches the bat. However, because the EQ curve always displays the actual frequency response of Cambridge EQ, if two bands are close together in frequency and/or at extreme gain values, the bat may not touch the curve itself.
- 71 -
Master Level Knob
This control adjusts the signal output level of Cambridge EQ. This may be necessary if the signal is dramatically boosted or reduced by the EQ settings. The available range is 20 dB.
A/B Selector Button
The A/B Selector switches between two separate sets of Cambridge EQ plug-in values. This feature enables easy switching between two completely independent EQ curves which can be useful for comparison purposes or for automating radical timbre changes. Both the A and B curves reside within a single Cambridge EQ preset. Click the A/B Selector button to switch between the two curves. When A is displayed, the button and the EQ response curve is yellow. When B is displayed, the button and the curve is green. To reset the A or B curve to a null (flat) response, control-click the A/B Selector button. The active curve will be nulled.
Note: Note: To copy one curve to another, shift-click the button. The active curve will
be copied to the inactive curve.
EQ Enable Button
This button enables or disables the Cambridge EQ altogether. You can use this switch to compare the processed settings to that of the original signal, or to bypass the plugin to reduce UAD DSP load (load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled).
- 72 -
Low Cut / High Cut Filters

The Low Cut and High Cut filters are offered in addition to the five parametric/shelf bands. A wide range of filter types is provided to facilitate tonal creativity. Many filters that are available are represented. Three controls are offered: Cut Type, Enable, and Frequency. Each control is detailed below.
Cut Type Menu
The Cut Type menu determines the sound of the low and high cut filters. To view the Cut Type menu, click and hold the green cut type button. Four types of responses are provided: Coincident Pole, Bessel, Butterworth, and Elliptic. The numbers represent the filter order, i.e. Bessel 4 is a fourth-order filter. Each offers a different sound. To select a new cut response, drag to the desired response and release. The responses are more gentle on filters with lower numbers, and get steeper and more aggressive as the numbers increase. The coincident-pole filters are first-order filters cascaded in series and offer gentle slopes. Bessel filters are popular because of their smooth phase characteristic with decent rejection. Butterworth filters offer even stronger rejection. The Elliptic setting is about as brick wall as you can get. Generally speaking, more phase shifting occurs as the response gets steeper. UAD DSP usage does increase some as the filters get stronger (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled).
Note:
Cut Enable Button
This button activates the cut filters. The filters are enabled when the In button is green. UAD DSP usage is slightly reduced when the cut filters are disabled (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled).
- 73 -
Cut Frequency Knob
This knob determines the cutoff frequency for the Cut filters. The available range is from 20 Hz 5 kHz for the low cut filter, and 20 Hz 20 kHz for the high cut filter.
EQ Bands
All five of the EQ bands can be used in parametric or shelf mode. Each band has identical controls, the only difference is the frequency range values. The function of the controls is similar in both parametric and shelf modes. The two modes are described separately (see Parametric EQ on page 75 and Shelf EQ on page 78).
Figure 18. The EQ Band controls
Enable Button
Each band can be individually engaged with the Enable button. The button is green when the band is enabled. All bands default to disabled. To enable any band, click the Enable button. You can use these buttons to compare the band settings to that of the original signal, or to bypass the individual band. UAD DSP usage is slightly decreased when a band is disabled (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled).
Frequency Knob
This parameter determines the center frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the Gain setting. The available range for each of the five bands is the same for both parametric and shelf modes. The ranges are shown in Table 10 on page 75.
- 74 -
Table 10. Available ranges for the Band Frequency parameter Low Frequencies (LF) Low-Mid Frequencies (LMF) Mid Frequencies (MF) High-Mid Frequencies (HMF) High Frequencies (HF) 20-400 Hz 30-600 Hz 100-6 kHz 900-18 kHz 2k-20 kHz
Note:
When operating at sample rates less than 44.1 kHz, the maximum frequency will be limited.
Gain Knob
This parameter determines the amount by which the frequency setting for the band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 20 dB. The behavior of the Q parameter varies depending on the band mode and the gain. For this reason Q is detailed separately in the parametric and shelf mode sections (see Parametric Q on page 75 and Shelf Q on page 78).
Q (Bandwidth) Knob
Parametric EQ
A band is in parametric mode when shelf mode is disabled (see Shelf Enable Button on page 78). Three types of parametric EQ are available, as determined by the Parametric Type selector. Parametric Type Selector The Parametric Type selector changes the response of the band controls to reflect the behavior of various analog equalizers. It is a global control for all 5 bands, and has no effect on the low and high cut filters. Click the Parametric Type display to rotate between Types I, II, and III. The filter algorithm is the same in all three parametric types. The difference is in the dependency between the gain and Q parameters. Each parametric type has its own response characteristics. In Type I mode, the Q remains constant regardless of the gain setting. In Type II mode, the Q increases as gain is boosted, but remains constant as gain is attenuated. In Type III mode, the Q increases as gain is boosted and attenuated. See Figure 19, Figure 20, and Figure 21. Parametric Q The Q (bandwidth) knob sets the proportion of frequencies surrounding the center frequency to be affected by the gain control. The Q range is 0.2516; higher values yield sharper slopes.
- 75 -
Note that the Q numeric value in relation to its knob position is warped (i.e. not linear) and varies according to the parametric type. Type I When set to Type I, the bandwidth remains at a fixed Q regardless of the gain setting for the band; there is no Q/Gain interdependency. In addition, there is a finer resolution of the Q knob in the middle of its range. This makes it easier to achieve subtle bandwidth changes. Note that the Q value and knob positions do not change as the gain is modified. See Figure 19.
Figure 19. Parametric Type I response
Type II
When set to Type II, there is a Q/Gain dependency on boost. The bandwidth increases continuously as the gain is boosted, but not when attenuated. The Q knob position determines the maximum Q at full gain. Filter bandwidth is broader at lower boost settings and narrower at higher boost settings. This can produce a smoother, more natural response when boosting filter gain.
- 76 -
Note that the Q value increases as gain is boosted but the knob position does not change The Q value is approached as gain increases, and reaches the knob position at maximum gain. See Figure 20.
Figure 20. Parametric Type II response
Type III
When set to Type III, there is a Q/Gain dependency on boost and attenuation. The bandwidth increases continuously as the gain is boosted and attenuated. The Q knob position determines the maximum Q at full gain. Filter bandwidth is broader at lower gain settings and narrower at higher gain settings. This can produce a smoother, more natural response when adjusting filter gain. Note that the Q value increases as gain is increased but the knob position does not change The Q value is approached as gain increases, and reaches the knob position at maximum gain. See Figure 21.
Figure 21. Parametric Type III response
- 77 -
Shelf EQ
Shelf Enable Button Each band can be switched from parametric mode to shelf mode by clicking the shelf enable button. The button is off by default. To enable shelving on any band, click the shelf button. The button is green when shelving is enabled. Additionally, the control bat associated with the band has a horizontal shelf indicator line in the response curve display (see Figure 23 on page 79) when shelf mode is active. Shelf Type Button When a band is in shelf mode and its Q is above the minimum value, a resonant peak occurs in the filter response. The Shelf Type button affects where this resonant peak occurs in relation to the shelf frequency. Its purpose is to emulate the response curves of classic highend analog mixing consoles. Its yet another tool to help you find the exact sound you are looking for. The Shelf Type button places the resonant peak at (A) the edge of the stopband (Figure 22 on page 79), (B) the edge of the passband (Figure 23), or (C) at the edge of the stopband and the passband (Figure 24). Shelf Q When a band is in shelf mode, the Q knob sets the resonance of the band. The range of the Q knob is 0-100% when in shelf mode.
Note:
When a band is in shelf mode, the Gain setting will affect the Q of the
band. When the Q is at its minimum value, there is no resonant peak. The resonance increases and becomes more prominent as the Q is increased. Therefore, for the shelf type to have any effect the Q must be above its minimum value. order for this button to have any affect, the band must be in shelving mode, some gain must be applied, and the Q must be above its minimum value.
Note: In
- 78 -
Figure 22. Shelf Type A
Shelf Mode Indicator Line

Figure 23. Shelf Type B
Figure 24. Shelf Type C
- 79 -
CHAPTER 6
Cooper Time Cube

Dual Mechanical Delay Line
The original Cooper Time Cube was a Duane H. Cooper and Bill Putnam collaborative design that brought a garden hose-based mechanical delay to the world in 1971 and has achieved cult status as the most unique delay ever made. The Cooper Time Cube is famous for its spectacular short delay and doubling effects and its uncanny ability to always sit perfectly in the mix. However, the CTC had limited practicality as a full-featured delay; only 14, 16 or 30 ms settings were available. Over the years this quirky device has grown a strong following and finds a home in the most prestigious studios in the world, such as Blackbird and Sunset Sound. Top producers and engineers such as Richard Dodd, Vance Powell and Joe Chicarelli still swear by the Cooper Time Cube for its unique character. The Cooper Time Cube MkII has all the sound of the original delay system design and offers all the necessary features expected from a modern delay device. The distinct sound of the single or double hose Coil is preserved regardless of delay setting, and either sound is available at the flick of a switch. The Cooper time Cube MkII also incorporates other enhanced tone shifting features such as the Color switch that presents the user with the original (A) or leveled (B) frequency response, plus tone controls and a 2-Pole High Pass Filter. Lastly, a switch is presented for soloing the Wet signal, and the Send switch disables the signal being sent into the delay processor.
Cooper Time Cube Screenshot
Figure 25. The UAD Cooper Time Cube plug-in window
- 80 -
Chapter 6: Cooper Time Cube
Design Overview
The original UREI/Universal Audio Model 920-16 Cooper Time Cube hardware (see Cooper Time Cube Hardware on page 85) has two audio channels, A and B. Each channel is transduced to/from a coiled length of plastic tubing which provides the acoustic sound columns that define its distinctive sonic character. The coils for each channel are at fixed but different lengths, which define the available single delay times of 16ms for channel A and 14ms for channel B. The two channels can be cascaded in series via external routing, for a total available delay time of 30ms at reasonable fidelity for its era, which (according to the original product brochure) brings complete respectability to the heretofore marginally feasible acoustical delay line. The UAD Cooper Time Cube plug-in has all the vibe of the original, with modern feature enhancements. It is a true stereo plug-in with two independent delay processors. Each channel has its own set of controls, and there are global controls that affect the plug-in overall.
Cooper Time Cube Controls

Global Controls The global controls affect both channels of the processor simultaneously.
Figure 26. The global controls (Wet Solo and Power, also global controls, are not shown here)
Gain
Gain controls the signal input level to the plug-in for both A (left) and B (right) channels. Gain affects the combined wet and dry signals. The available range is 15 dB and the 12 o'clock position is unity gain.
- 81 -
HP Filter
The 12 dB per octave high pass filter is used to reduce low frequencies at the input to the delays when desired. The high pass filter affects the delayed (wet) signals only. The available frequency range is from 20 Hz to 12 kHz. Turn the knob clockwise to reduce low frequencies into the delay processors. Full processor bandwidth is obtained with the knob in the fully counter-clockwise position.
Echo A/B
These two windows display the current delay times of channels A and B. Displayed values are defined by the Delay parameter (Delay A/B on page 84). Delay values can be entered here directly using the text entry method. When Sync mode is off, delay times are expressed in milliseconds. When Sync is on, delay times are expressed as a fractional bar value. When the beat value is out of range, the value is displayed in parentheses. This occurs in Sync mode when the time of the note value exceeds 2500ms (as defined by the current tempo of the host application).
Sync
This switch engages Sync mode for both channels of the plug-in. In Sync mode, delay times are synchronized to (and therefore dependent upon) the master tempo of the host application. When Sync is toggled, parameter units are converted between milliseconds and beats to the closest matching value. See Tempo Sync in Chapter 8 of the UAD System Manual for detailed information about tempo synchronization.
Send
Send determines whether or not signals are sent into the delay processors. When Send is ON, the input signals are delayed. When OFF, the delay inputs are muted. When both coiled tubes of the original hardware are cascaded to increase the available delay time (when both channels are serially connected), the sonics are slightly different than when only one coil is used. The Coils switch toggles between these two sounds available on the hardware, regardless of the Delay value. Tip: Longer decays are available when Coils value is set to 1.
Coils
- 82 -
Color
The Color switch toggles between the original filter emphasis of the hardware in position A and the leveled filter in position B which allows for greater Decay ranges. Unlike the other parameters, the A and B labels for Color are for reference only. They do not represent the left and right channels. Note: Color can be subtle, and its affect can vary depending on the value of Coils and/or Decay.
Treble
Treble controls the high frequency response in the delayed portion of the signals. It does not affect the dry signal. Treble is a cut/boost control; it has no effect when in the 12 oclock position. Bass controls the low frequency response in the delayed portion of the signals. It does not affect the dry signal. Bass is a cut/boost control; it has no effect when in the 12 oclock position. The Wet Solo switch puts the Cooper Time Cube into 100% Wet mode. When Wet Solo is on (in the up position), it mutes the dry unprocessed signal. Wet Solo is optimal when the plug-in is used on an effect group/bus that is configured for use with channel sends. When the plug-in is used on a channel insert, this control should be deactivated. Note: Wet Solo is a global (per plug-in instance) control. Its value is saved within the host project/session file, but not within individual preset files.
Bass
Wet Solo
Power
The Power switch determines whether the plug-in is active. It's useful for comparing the processed sound to the original signal. The VU Meter provides a visual indication of the output level of the plug-in (the meter is not calibrated). The meter needle drops to minimum when the plug-in is disabled with the Power switch.
Meter
- 83 -
Channel Controls
The channel controls affect each channel of the processor independently. The control functionality is identical for each channel. A indicates the left channel and B is the right channel.
Figure 27. The channel controls
Delay A/B
Delay controls the delay time for each channel of the processor. The selected value is shown in the Echo display (Echo A/B on page 82). The available delay range for each channel is 5 milliseconds to 2.5 seconds (2500ms). When Sync is active, beat values from 1/64 to 3/1 can be selected. When the beat value is out of range, the value is displayed in parenthesis. This occurs in Sync mode when the time of the note value exceeds 2500ms (as defined by the current tempo of the host application). See Temp Sync in Chapter 8 of the UAD System Manual for detailed information about tempo synchronization. Tip: Click the knob then use the computer keyboard arrow keys to increment/decrement beat values in Sync mode.
Decay A/B
Decay sets the amount of processed signal fed back into its input (feedback). At the minimum value, one delayed repeat is heard. Higher values (clockwise) increase the number of repeats and intensity of the processed signal, with near infinite repeats available at the maximum setting. Pan sets the position of the delayed (wet) signal in the stereo field; it does not affect the unprocessed (dry) signal. Tip: Click the PAN label text to return the control to center. Note: When the plug-in is used in a mono-in/mono-out (MIMO) configuration, the Pan knobs do not function and cannot be adjusted.
Pan A/B
- 84 -
Echo Volume A/B
This control determines the volume of the delayed signal. Rotate the control clockwise for louder echo. Up to +10 dB of gain is available at the maximum setting. Reducing the control to its minimum value will mute the delay. Tip: Click the ECHO VOL label text to mute/unmute the delayed output.
Cooper Time Cube Hardware
Figure 28. The original Cooper Time Cube hardware front panel
Figure 29. The opened acoustic module and the complete system
- 85 -
CHAPTER 7
CS-1 Channel Strip

Overview
The CS-1 Channel Strip provides the EX-1 Equalizer and Compressor, DM-1 Delay Modulator, and RS-1 Reflection Engine combined into one plug-in. Individual effects in the CS-1 Channel Strip can be bypassed when not in use to preserve UAD DSP use. The CS-1 effects can also be accessed individually by using the individual plug-ins. This is useful if you want to use the plug-ins in a different order, or if you want to use multiple instances of the same plug-in (such as a flange routed to a ping-pong delay with the DM-1 plug-in).
Figure 30. The CS-1 Channel Strip plug-in window
- 86 -
Chapter 7: CS-1 Channel Strip
EX-1 Equalizer and Compressor
Figure 31. The EX-1 EQ/Compressor plug-in window
The EX-1 plug-in consists of a five-band parametric EQ and compressor.
EX-1 Equalizer Controls

The Equalizer portion of the EX-1 is a five-band fully parametric EQ. Each band has its own set of controls. The first two bands can also be enabled to function as low-shelf or high-pass filter. Similarly, the last two bands can be enabled to function as either a high-shelf or low-pass filter. Band Disable Button Each band can be individually deactivated with the Band Disable button. All bands default to enabled (brighter blue). To disable any band, click the Disable button. The button is darker blue when the band is disabled. You can use these buttons to compare the band settings to that of the original signal, or to bypass the individual band.
- 87 -
Gain (G) Knob
The Gain control determines the amount by which the frequency setting is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 18 dB. Determines the center frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the Gain setting. The available range is 20 Hertz to 20 kiloHertz. When operating at sample rates less than 44.1kHz, the maximum frequency will be limited. Sets the proportion of frequencies surrounding the center frequency to be affected. The Bandwidth range is 0.0332; higher values yield sharper bands. In either of the first two bands, when the Bandwidth value is at minimum the band becomes a low-shelf filter, and at maximum the band becomes a highpass filter. Similarly, in either of the last two bands, when the Bandwidth value is at minimum the band becomes a high-shelf filter, and at maximum the band becomes a low-pass filter.
Frequency (fc) Knob
Bandwidth (Q) Knob
Enable/Bypass Switch
Globally enables or disables all bands of the Equalizer. You can use this switch to compare the EQ settings to the original signal or bypass the entire EQ section to reduce UAD DSP load (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Adjusts the signal output level of the plug-in. This may be necessary if the signal is dramatically boosted or reduced by the EQ and/or compressor settings.
Output Knob
EX-1 Compressor Controls

Attack Knob Sets the amount of time that must elapse, once the input signal reaches the Threshold level, before compression will occur. The faster the Attack, the more rapidly compression is applied to signals above the Threshold. The range is 0.05 milliseconds to 100.00 milliseconds. Sets the amount of time it takes for compression to cease once the input signal drops below the Threshold level. Slower release times can smooth the transition that occurs when the signal dips below the threshold, especially useful for material with frequent peaks. However, if you set too large of a Release time, compression for sections of audio with loud signals may extend to lengthy sections of audio with lower signals. The range is 25 milliseconds to 2500 milliseconds (2.5 seconds).
Release Knob
- 88 -
Ratio Knob
Determines the amount of gain reduction used by the compression. For example, a value of 2 (expressed as a 2:1 ratio) reduces the signal by half, with an input signal of 20 dB being reduced to 10 dB. A value of 1 yields no compression. Values beyond 10 yield a limiting effect. The range is 1 to Infinity. Sets the threshold level for the compression. Any signals that exceed this level are compressed. Signals below the level are unaffected. A Threshold of 0 dB yields no compression. The range is 0 dB to 60 dB. As the Threshold control is increased and more compression occurs, output level is typically reduced. However, the EX-1 provides an auto-makeup gain function to automatically compensate for reduced levels. Adjust the Output level control if more gain is desired.
Threshold Knob
Meter Pop-up Menu
Determines whether the VU Meter monitors the Input Level, Output Level, Gain Reduction, or Meter Off. Click the menu above the meter display to select a different metering function. Enables or disables the Compressor.You can use this switch to compare the compressor settings to that of the original signal or bypass the entire compressor section to reduce UAD DSP load (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Adjusts the signal output level of the plug-in.
Compressor Output Knob
EX-1M Overview
The EX-1M is a monophonic version of EX-1 that enables independent left and right EQ settings in master effects chains and allows Logic Audio users to conserve UAD DSP resources. EX-1M requires half the processing power compared to that of EX-1 when used on a mono audio track within Logic Audio. Therefore, EX-1M should be used on monophonic audio tracks within Logic whenever possible to conserve UAD resources.
- 89 -
DM-1 Delay Modulator
Figure 32. The DM-1 Delay Modulator plug-in window
The DM-1 Delay Modulator provides stereo effects for delay, chorus, and flange.
DM-1 Controls
Sync Button This button puts the plug-in into Tempo Sync mode. See Chapter 8 in the UAD System Manual for more information. Sets the delay time between the original signal and the delayed signal for the left channel. When the Mode is set to one of the delay settings, the maximum delay is 300 msec. When the Mode is set to one of the chorus or flange settings, the maximum delay is 125 msec. Sets the delay time between the original signal and the delayed signal for the right channel. When the Mode is set to one of the delay settings, the maximum delay is 300 msec. When the Mode is set to one of the chorus or flange settings, the maximum delay is 125 msec. In the flanger modes, the L and R delay controls have slightly different functions than when in the chorus modes. The high peak of the flanger is controlled by the settings of the L and R delay controls. The low Peak of the flanger is determined by the setting of the Depth control. When delay times longer than 300ms are desired, use the DM-1L plug-in instead. DM-1L has a maximum time of 2400ms per channel.
L-Delay Knob
R-Delay Knob
- 90 -
Mode Pop-up Menu
Determines the DM-1 effect mode. The available modes are: Chorus, Chorus180, QuadChorus, Flanger1, Flanger2, Dual Delay, and Ping Pong Delay. In addition to reconfiguring the DM-1s settings, the Mode also determines the available parameter ranges for L/R Delay and Depth. In Chorus mode, both oscillators (or modulating signals) are in phase. In Chorus 180 mode, both oscillators (the modulating signals) are180 degrees out of phase (inverted). In QuadChorus mode, both oscillators (the modulating signals) are 90 degrees out of phase. In Ping Pong delay mode, you will only get a ping-pong effect if you have a mono source feeding the DM-1 on a stereo group track or send effect. On a mono disk track, it works exactly like Dual Delay.
Rate Knob Depth Knob
Sets the modulation rate for the delayed signal, expressed in Hertz. Sets the modulation depth for the delayed signal, expressed as a percentage. In Dual Delay and Ping Pong Delay modes, adjusting the Depth and Rate controls can offer some very otherworldly sounds.
LFO Type Pop-up Menu
Determines the LFO (low frequency oscillator) waveshape and phase used to modulate the delayed signal. The waveshape can be set to triangle or sine, each with a phase value of 0, 90, or 180-degrees. Sets the amount of processed signal fed back into its input. Higher values increase the number of delays and intensity of the processed signal. Recirculation allows both positive and negative values. The polarity refers to the phase of the delays as compared to the original signal. If Recirculation displays a positive value, all the delays will be in phase with the source. If it displays a negative value, then the phase of the delays flips back and forth between in phase and out of phase. In the flanger mode, Recir has the potential to make some very interesting sounds. Try turning RECIR fully clockwise or counter-clockwise, and set the delay to very short but different values.
Recirculation (RECIR) Knob
- 91 -
The RECIR units are expressed as a percentage in all Modes except Dual Delay and Ping Pong. In these modes, RECIR values are expressed as T60 time, or the time before the signal drops 60 decibels. Damping Knob This low pass filter reduces the amount of high frequencies in the signal. Turn down this control to reduce the brightness. Higher values yield a brighter signal. Damping also mimics air absorption, or high frequency rolloff inherent in tape-based delay systems. This control determines the balance between the delayed and original signal. Values greater than 50% emphasize the wet signal, and values less than 50% emphasize the dry signal. A value of 50% delivers equal signals. A value of 0% is just the dry signal. Wet/Dry Mix allows both positive and negative values. The polarity refers to the phase of the delays as compared to the original signal. If a positive value is displayed, then all the delays will be in phase with the source. With a negative value, the delayed signal is flipped 180 degrees out of phase with the source. L-Pan Knob Sets the stereo position for the left channel, allowing you to adjust the width or balance of the stereo signal. For a mono signal, L-Pan behaves as the level control for the left delay tap. Sets the stereo position for the right channel, allowing you to adjust the width or balance of the stereo signal. For a mono signal, R-Pan behaves as the level control for the right delay tap. Enables or disables the Delay Modulator. You can use this switch to compare the DM-1 settings to the original signal or bypass the entire DM-1 section to reduce UAD DSP load (load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Adjusts the signal output level of the plug-in.
Wet/Dry Mix Knob
R-Pan Knob
Output Knob
DM-1L
DM-1L is identical to the DM-1 except that the maximum available delay time per channel is 2400milliseconds. DM-1L requires significantly more memory resources of the UAD than the DM-1. Therefore, we recommend using the DM1L only when very long delay times are needed.
- 92 -
Link Button
This button links the left and right delay knobs so that when you move one delay knob, the other follows. The ratio between the two knobs is maintained.
Figure 33. The DM-1L includes a Link button
RS-1 Reection Engine
Figure 34. The RS-1 Reflection Engine plug-in window
Overview
The RS-1 Reflection Engine simulates a wide range of room shapes, and sizes, to drastically alter the pattern of reflections. While similar to that of the RealVerb Pro plug-in, the RS-1 does not offer the same breadth of features (such as room hybrids, room materials, morphing, and equalization). However, if you do not need the advanced capabilities that RealVerb Pro offers, you can use the RS-1 to achieve excellent room simulations, while also preserving DSP resources on the UAD device. The Delay control sets the time between the direct signal and the first reflection. The Size parameter controls the spacing between the reflections. The Recir control affects the amount of reflections that are fed back to the input and controls how many repeats you hear.
- 93 -
RS-1 Controls
Sync Button This button puts the plug-in into Tempo Sync mode. See Chapter 8 in the UAD System Manual for more information. Determines the shape of the reverberant space, and the resulting reflective patterns.
Table 11. Available RS-1 Shapes Cube Box Corr Cylinder Dome Horseshoe Fan Reverse Fan A-Frame Spring Dual Spring Square Plate Rectangular Plate Triangular Plate Circular Plate Echo Ping Pong Echo 2 Fractal Gate 1 Gate 2 Reverse Gate
Shape Pop-up Menu
Delay Knob
Sets the delay time between the original signal and the onset of the reflections. Sets the size of the reverberant space (from 199 meters) and defines the spacing of the reflections. You may notice that when Delay is set to its maximum value and the Size control is moved to its maximum value, the Delay value is decreased, and vice versa. This occurs because the maximum delay time available to the plug-in has been reached the available delay time is limited and is divided among the Delay and Size values. Therefore, if the value of the Delay or Size setting is increased towards maximum when the other control is already high, its complementary setting may be reduced. Sets the amount of processed signal fed back into its input. Higher values increase the number of reverberations/delays and intensity of the processed signal.
Size Knob
Delay/Size Settings Interaction
Recirculation (RECIR) Knob
- 94 -
Recirculation allows both positive and negative values. The polarity refers to the phase of the delays as compared to the original signal. If Recirculation displays a positive value, all the delays will be in phase with the source. If it displays a negative value, then the phase of the delays flips back and forth between in phase and out of phase. Damping Knob This low pass filter reduces the amount of high frequencies in the signal. Turn down this control to reduce the brightness. Higher values yield a brighter signal. Damping also mimics air absorption, or high frequency rolloff inherent in tape-based delay systems. This control determines the balance between the delayed and original signal. Values greater than 50% emphasize the wet signal, and values less than 50% emphasize the dry signal. Wet/Dry Mix allows both positive and negative values. The polarity refers to the phase of the delays as compared to the original signal. If a positive value is displayed, then all the delays will be in phase with the source. With a negative value, the delayed signal is flipped 180 degrees out of phase with the source. L-Pan Knob Sets the stereo position for the left channel, allowing you to adjust the width or balance of the stereo signal. For a mono signal, set both the L-Pan and RPan to the left. Sets the stereo position for the right channel, allowing you to adjust the width or balance of the stereo signal. For a mono signal, set both the L-Pan and RPan to the left. Enables or disables the Reflection Engine. You can use this switch to compare the RS-1 settings to the original signal or bypass the entire RS-1 section to reduce UAD DSP load (load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Adjusts the relative output of the plug-in.
Wet/Dry Mix Knob
R-Pan Knob
Output Knob
- 95 -
CHAPTER 8
dbx 160 Compressor/Limiter
Overview
The dbx 160 Compressor/Limiter is an officially licensed and faithful emulation of the legendary dbx 160 hardware compressor/limiter still widely considered the best VCA compressor ever made. Originally designed and sold by David Blackmer in 1971, this solid-state design set the standard for performance and affordability. The dbx 160 (commonly referred to as the VU) is a highly regarded studio staple, famous for its simple control set and firm, distinct compression characteristics. Unlike later monolithic IC units, the VU uses a series of discrete components for gain reduction resulting in unique nonlinearities not found in other VCA compressors a sonic distinction from later models. The UAD Powered Plug-In version of the dbx 160 captures all of the sonic nuances from our golden modeling unit, plus the simple control set of the original hardware, including Threshold, Compression (Ratio) and Output Gain. Just like with the hardware, LED threshold indicators are provided in the plug-in, as well the Input/Output/Gain Change VU meter for which the unit is famous.
dbx 160 Screenshot
Figure 35. The dbx 160 plug-in window
- 96 -
Chapter 8: dbx 160 Compressor/Limiter
dbx 160 Controls

The minimal controls on the UAD dbx 160 make it very simple to operate. Threshold
Knob
The Threshold knob defines the level at which the onset of compression occurs. Incoming signals that exceed the Threshold level are compressed. Signals below the Threshold are unaffected. The available range is from 55 dB to 0 dB. The numbers on the graphical interface indicate volts, as on the original hardware. As the Threshold control is decreased and more compression occurs, output level is typically reduced. Adjust the Output Gain control to increase the output to compensate if desired.
Below
When the input signal is below the compression threshold value, the Below LED illuminates. No compression is occurring when Below is lit.
Above
The Above LED illuminates when the input signal has exceeded the Threshold value, indicating that compression is occurring. The higher the signal is above the Threshold, the brighter the LED glows. Compression The Compression parameter determines the ratio for the compressor. Less compression occurs at lower values. The available range is continuous, from 1.00:1 to Infinity:1.
Note:
For compression to occur, signals must exceed the Threshold value.
At values above approximately 10:1, the compressor behaves more like a peak-limiter. See The LA-2 captures one of the earliest Teletronix examples. This exceedingly rare unit preceded the LA-2A by a few years and incredibly, still has the original T4A fully intact. The LA-2 provides the slowest response and a unique mellowed sound due to 50 years of luminescent panel aging
- 97 -
inside the T4 module. Use the LA-2 with legato tempos and your most vowellike sources for a transparency and sublime mood unlike any other compressor. on page 470 for more information about compressor/limiter theory of operation. Output Gain Output Gain controls the signal level that is output from the plug-in. The available range is 20 dB. Generally speaking, adjust the Output control after the desired amount of compression is achieved with the Threshold and Compression controls. Output does not affect the amount of compression. Meter Buttons The Meter buttons define the mode of the VU Meter. The buttons do not change the sound of the signal processor. The active button has a darker appearance when compared to the inactive buttons. When set to Input, the VU Meter indicates the plug-in input level in dB. When set to Output, the VU Meter indicates the plug-in output level in dB. When set to Gain Change, the VU Meter indicates the amount of Gain Reduction in dB.
VU Meter
Power
The Power switch determines whether the plug-in is active. Click the button to toggle the state. When the Power switch is in the Off (lighter) position, plug-in processing is disabled and UAD DSP usage is reduced (load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled).
- 98 -
CHAPTER 9
DreamVerb
Overview
DreamVerb, Universal Audios unique stereo reverb plug-in, draws on the unparalleled flexibility of RealVerb Pro. Its intuitive and powerful interface lets you create a room from a huge list of different materials and room shapes. These acoustic spaces can be customized further by blending the different room shapes and surfaces with one another, while the density of the air can be changed to simulate different ambient situations. DreamVerb also features a flexible 5-band active EQ and unique level ramping for the early and late reflections for ultra-realistic dynamic room simulation. And with Universal Audios proprietary smoothing algorithm, all parameters can be adjusted with automation or in real-time without distortion, pops, clicks, or zipper noise. DreamVerb provides two graphic menus for selecting preset room shapes. The shapes can be blended according to the demands of your mix. Room materials are selected with two graphic menus containing preset Materials. A third menu specifies the air density for further spectral control. As with the room shapes, the materials and air can be blended as desired. DreamVerb also includes intuitive graphic control over equalization, timing and diffusion patterns. To maximize the impact of your recording, we put independent control over the direct path, early reflections, and late-field reverberation in your hands. Capitalizing on the psychoacoustic technology that went into the design of RealVerb Pro, we have incorporated some of these principles into DreamVerb. Our proprietary Stereo Soundfield Panning allows you to spread and control the signal between stereo speakers creating an impression of center and width. The ability to envelop your listener in a stereo recording is an entirely new approach to reverb design.
- 99 -
Chapter 9: DreamVerb
Screenshot
Figure 36. The DreamVerb plug-in window
Signal Flow
Figure 37 illustrates the signal flow for DreamVerb. The input signal is equalized then delay lines are applied to the early reflection and late field generators. The resulting direct path, early reflection, and late-field reverberation are then independently positioned in the soundfield.
Pan Source Input Direct Path Wet/Dry Mix Early Reflections Pans & Distance Delay LateField Reverb
EQ Gain & Mute
Delay
Gain Output
Figure 37. DreamVerb signal flow
- 100 -
The DreamVerb user interface (Figure 36 on page 100) is similarly organized. Reflected energy equalization is controlled with the Resonance panel. The pattern of early reflections (their relative timing and amplitudes) is determined by the room shapes in the Shape panel (Figure 40 on page 103). Early reflection pre-delay, slope, timing, and amplitude are specified in the Reflections panel (Figure 42 on page 108). The Materials panel (Figure 41 on page 105) is used to select relative late-field decay rates as a function of frequency. The late-field predelay, decay rate, room diffusion, slope, and level is specified in the Reverberation panel (Figure 43 on page 109). Finally, the Positioning panel (Figure 44 on page 111) contains controls for the placement of the source, early reflections, and late-field reverberation.
Resonance (Equalization) Panel

The Resonance panel (Figure 38 on page 102) is a five-band equalizer that can control the overall frequency response of the reverb, effecting its perceived brilliance and warmth. By adjusting its Amplitude and band Edge controls, the equalizer can be configured as shelving or parametric EQs, as well as hybrids between the two. The EQ curve effects the signal feeding both the early reflections and the late field reverberations, but not the direct path. Bands 1 and 5 are configured as shelving bands. Bands 2, 3, and 4 also have an Edge control for adjusting its bandwidth. Generally speaking, a lot of high-frequency energy results in a brilliant reverberation, whereas a good amount of low-frequency content gives a warm reverberation. Note: The values for the EQ parameters are displayed in the text fields at the bottom of the Resonance panel. The values can also be entered directly using the text entry method.
- 101 -
Bypass switch
Band Amplitude control bats
Band 1 (low shelving) control Figure 38. DreamVerb Resonance panel
Band 2, 3, and 4 Edge control bats
Band 5 (high shelving) control
Bypass
The equalizer can be disabled with this switch. When the switch is off (black instead of grey), the other resonance controls have no effect. This switch has no effect on the direct signal path. Each of the five bands has its own amplitude (gain) control. The amplitude range of each band is 30 dB to +20 dB. To adjust the amplitude of bands 2, 3, and 4, grab the control bat for the band and drag vertically or use the direct text entry method. For bands 1 and 5, drag the horizontal line (these do not have a control bat).
Band Amplitude
Band Edge
Bands 2, 3, and 4 have an Edge control. This parameter effects the bandwidth of the band. To adjust the band edge, grab its control bat and drag horizontally or use the direct text entry method. The effect of the band edge on the filter sound can depend upon the settings of the adjacent bands. For example, the sonic effect of this parameter is more pronounced if the amplitude of adjacent bands is significantly different than that of the band whose edge is being adjusted.
- 102 -
Shelving
The simplest (and often most practical) use of the equalizer is for low and/or high frequency shelving. This is achieved by dragging the left-most or rightmost horizontal line (the ones without control bats) up or down, which boosts or cuts the energy at these frequencies.
Drag these control handles up or down for shelving EQ. Figure 39. DreamVerb Resonance Shelving Bands
Shape Panel
The parameters in the Shape panel, in conjunction with the Materials panel (Figure 41 on page 105), effect the spatial characteristics of the reverb. The pattern of early reflections in a reverb is determined by the room shape(s) and the ER start and end points. Two shapes can be blended from 0100%. All parameters can be adjusted dynamically in real time without causing distortion or other artifacts in the audio. 21 shapes are available, including various plates, springs, rooms, and other acoustic spaces. Note: The Shape parameters effect only the early reflections. They have no effect on the late field reverberation.
First shape display
First shape selector menu
Blending bar
Second shape display
Second shape selector menu
First shape percentage
Second shape percentage
Figure 40. DreamVerb Shape panel
- 103 -
Shape Menus
DreamVerb lets you specify two room shapes that can be blended to create a hybrid of early reflection patterns. The first and second shape each have their own menu. The available shapes are the same for each of the two shape menus. The first shape is displayed in the upper area of the Shape panel, and the second shape is displayed in the lower area. To select a first or second shape, click its shape pop-up selector menu to view the available shapes, then drag to the desired shape and release.
Shape Blending Bar
The Shape Blending Bar (see Figure 40 on page 103) is used to blend the two shapes together at any ratio. The two shapes are not just mixed together with this parameter; the early reflections algorithm itself is modified by blending. Blend the early reflection patterns of the two rooms by dragging the Blending Bar. Drag the bar to the bottom to emphasize the first shape; drag to the top to emphasize the second shape. The relative percentages of the two rooms appear at the bottom of the Shape panel. To use only one room shape, drag the Blending Bar so a shape is set to 100%. The resulting early reflection pattern is displayed at the top of the Reflections panel (Figure 42 on page 108), where each reflection is represented by a yellow vertical line with a height indicating its arrival energy, and a location indicating its arrival time.
- 104 -
Materials Panel
The parameters in the Materials panel, in conjunction with the Shape panel (Figure 40 on page 103) and Reverberation panel (Figure 43 on page 109) effect the spatial characteristics of the reverb. The material composition of an acoustical space effects how different frequency components decay over time. Materials are characterized by their absorption rates as a function of frequencythe more the material absorbs a certain frequency, the faster that frequency decays. Note: While materials are used to control decay rates as a function of frequency, the overall decay rate of the late-field reverberation is controlled from the Reverberation panel (see Figure 43 on page 109). 24 real-world materials are provided, including such diverse materials as brick, marble, hardwood, water surface, and audience. Also included are 24 artificial materials with predefined decay rates, and seven air densities. Note: The parameters in the Materials panel always effect the late-field reverberations. However, the materials parameters effect the early reflections ONLY if the Filtering parameter in the Reflections panel (Figure 42 on page 108) is set to a non-zero value.
Air Density selector menu
Air percentage Air Density display
First material display
Air Blending Bar Second material display First material percentage Second material selector menu
Solid materials Blending Bar
First material selector menu
2nd material percentage Figure 41. DreamVerb Materials panel
- 105 -
Materials Menus
DreamVerb lets you specify two room materials, which can be blended to create a hybrid of absorption and reflection properties. The first and second room material each has its own menu. The available materials are the same for each of the two materials menus. The first material is displayed in the lower left area of the Materials panel, and the second material is displayed in the lower right area. To select the first or second material, click its material pop-up selector menu to view the available materials, then drag to the desired material and release. For a discussion of the various materials, see About the Materials on page 401. In addition to the perfect materials marked with a K, DreamVerb provides J materials that are not found in RealVerb Pro. These perform the inverse of the K materials. The materials marked with a J preferentially absorb low frequencies; they give the selected decay time at high frequencies, and a much shorter decay time at low frequencies.
Air Density Menu
DreamVerb allows you to specify the density of the air in the reverberant space with this menu, enabling another dimension of sonic control. The more dense the air is, the more it absorbs high frequencies. At the top of the Air Density menu is Ideal Gas, where no frequencies are absorbed. The air quality increases in density with each selection as you go down the menu. Inverse Air and Inverse Thick Fog absorb more low frequencies instead of high frequencies.
- 106 -
Materials Blending Bars
The Materials Blending Bars (see Figure 41 on page 105) are used to blend the three materials together at any ratio. The materials are not just mixed together with the bars; the reverberation algorithm itself is modified by blending.
Materials Blending
Blend the two materials by dragging the vertical Blending Bar horizontally. Drag the bar to the right to emphasize the first material; drag to the left to emphasize the second material. The relative percentages of the two materials appear next to each menu in the Materials panel. To use only one material, drag the Blending Bar so a material is set to 100%.
Air Blending
Blend the air density with the materials by dragging the horizontal Blending Bar vertically. Drag the bar to the top to emphasize the solid materials; drag to the bottom to emphasize the air. The percentage of air used appears next to the Air Density menu. To use only solid materials, drag the horizontal Blending Bar to the top so air is set to 0%. To use only air, drag the horizontal Blending Bar to the bottom so air is set to 100%.
Reections Panel
The Reflections panel (Figure 42 on page 108) offers control over the timing and relative energies of the reverb early reflections (ER). These parameters effect the reverbs perceived clarity and intimacy. Each early reflection is visually represented by a yellow vertical line with a height indicating its arrival energy and a location indicating its arrival time. Unique to DreamVerb is independent control of the amplitude at the early reflection start and end points which facilitates envelope shaping of the reflections. This allows the ability to fade-in or fade-out the reflections to more accurately emulate acoustic environments or for special effects. Note: The values for the Start and End bats are displayed in the text fields at the bottom of the Reflections panel. These values can also be entered directly using the text entry method.
- 107 -
ER End control bat (time & amplitude) Bypass switch Materials Filtering control bat ER Start control bat (predelay & amplitude)
Late-field relative timing display
Figure 42. DreamVerb Reflections panel
Bypass
The early reflections can be disabled with this switch. When the switch is off (black instead of grey), the other Reflections controls have no effect. This switch has no effect on the direct signal path. This bat controls two early reflections start parameters. Dragging the bat horizontally controls the ER predelay (the delay between the dry signal and the onset of the ER). Dragging it vertically controls the amplitude of the reflections energy at the ER start time. This bat controls two ER end point parameters. Dragging the bat horizontally controls the ER end time (the time at which the ER is no longer heard). Dragging it vertically controls the amplitude of the reflections energy at the end point. This parameter determines the amount of filtering from the Materials panel to be applied to the early reflections. The Materials effect upon the ER is most pronounced when Filtering is set to 100%. Note: The parameters in the Materials panel have no effect on the early reflections unless this parameter value is above 0%.
Reections Start
Reections End
Filtering
- 108 -
Late-Field Relative Timing
To highlight the relative timing relationship between the early reflections and late-field reverberation components, the shape and timing of the late-field is represented as an outline in the Reflections panel. The shape of this outline is modified by parameters in the Reverberations panel, not the Reflections panel.
Reverberation Panel
The Reverberation panel (Figure 43) contains the parameters that control the late-field (LF) reverb tail for DreamVerb. The primary spectral characteristics of the late-field reverberation are determined by the parameters in the Materials panel (page 105) in conjunction with the Reverberation panel settings. Note: The values for the late-field controls are displayed in the text fields at the bottom of the Reverberations panel. These values can also be entered directly using the text entry method.
Bypass switch
Amplitude and Slope control bat
Early reflections relative timing display
Diffusion control
Late-field start time control bat
Decay Time control bat
Figure 43. DreamVerb Reverberation panel
Bypass
The late-field reverberations can be disabled with this switch. When the switch is off (black instead of grey), the other Reflections controls have no effect. This switch has no effect on the direct signal path.
- 109 -
Late-Field Start
This parameter defines when the late-field reverb tail begins (the delay between the dry signal and the onset of the LF) in relation to the dry signal. This bat controls two late-field parameters. Dragging the bat vertically controls the maximum amplitude of the LF reverb energy. Dragging it horizontally controls the LF slope (fade-in) time. This control effects the length of the reverb tail. Drag the bat to the left for a short decay, or to the right for a long decay. This slider effects how quickly the late-field reverberations become more dense. The higher the Diffusion value, the more rapidly a dense reverb tail evolves. To highlight the relative timing relationship between the early reflections and late-field reverberation components, the shape and timing of the early reflections is represented as an outline in the Reverberation panel. The shape of this outline is modified by parameters in the Reflections panel, not the Reverberation panel.
Amplitude & Slope
Decay Time
Diffusion
ER Relative Timing
Positioning Panel
DreamVerb has the ability to separately position the direct path, early reflections, and late-field reverberation. The Positioning panel (Figure 44 on page 111) provides panning controls for each of these reverb components. In addition, a proprietary Distance control adjusts perceived source distance. These controls allow realistic synthesis of acoustic spacesfor instance listening at the entrance of an alley way, where all response components arrive from the same direction, or listening in the same alley next to the source, where the early reflections and reverberation surround the listener. Note: When DreamVerb is used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration, all Positioning controls except Distance are unavailable for adjustment.
- 110 -
Figure 44. DreamVerb Positioning panel
Direct
These two sliders control the panning of the dry signal. The upper Direct slider controls the left audio channel, and the lower Direct slider controls the right audio channel. A value of <100 pans the signal hard left; a value of 100> pans the signal hard right. A value of <0> places the signal in the center of the stereo field. Note: If the DreamVerb Mix parameter (page 112) is set to 100% wet or the Wet button is active, these sliders have no effect.
Early
This slider, which contains two control handles, adjusts the stereo width of the early reflections. This slider, which contains two control handles, adjusts the stereo width of the late-field reverberations.
Early & Late Adjustment
Late
The left and right slider handles are dragged to adjust the stereo width. For a full stereo spread, drag the left handle all the way to left and right handle all the way to the right. When the slider handles are not set to maximum width, the center of the slider can be dragged left or right to set the positioning of the signal. To pan a mono signal hard left or right, drag the slider all the way to the left or right.
- 111 -
Distance
DreamVerb allows you to control the distance of the perceived source with this slider. In reverberant environments, sounds originating close to the listener have a different mix of direct and reflected energy than those originating further from the listener. Larger percentages yield a source that is farther away from the listener. A value of 0% places the source as close as possible to the listener.
Levels Panel
This panel is where DreamVerb input/output levels, wet/dry mix, and reverb mute controls can be modified.
Figure 45. DreamVerb Levels panel
Input
Modifies the signal level at the input to DreamVerb. A value of zero is unity gain. Modifies the signal level at the output of DreamVerb. A value of zero is unity gain.
Output
- 112 -
Mute
This switch mutes the signal at the input to DreamVerb. This allows the reverb tail to play out after mute is applied, which is helpful for auditioning the sound of the reverb. Mute is on when the button is gray and off when the button is black. The wet and dry mix of DreamVerb is controlled with this slider. The two buttons above this slider labeled D and W represent Dry and Wet; clicking either will create a 100% dry or 100% wet mix. When this button (labeled D) is enabled, DreamVerb is 100% dry. It has the same effect as moving the Mix slider to 0%. Dry is on when the button is gray and off when the button is black. When this button (labeled W) is enabled, DreamVerb is 100% wet. It has the same effect as moving the Mix slider to 100%. Wet is on when the button is gray and off when the button is black.
Mix
Dry
Wet
Spatial Characteristics
Size The apparent size of a reverberant space is dependent on many factors. Most reverbs on the market have a size parameter, which usually modifies several facets of the reverb algorithm at once. You may notice DreamVerb does not have a size parameter. Instead, the elements that control the reverberant space are available to the user. In DreamVerb, room size is determined by the interaction between all the parameters in the Reflections and Reverberation panels. To get a larger-sounding space, increase the T60 (reverberation time), use proportionally more air, increase the pre-delays, and slightly shift the Resonance transition frequencies to lower values. Pre-Delay Intimacy and remoteness are largely controlled by the pre-delays. Generally speaking, use shorter pre-delays for more intimate spaces. Clear spaces have most of their energy in the first eighty milliseconds or so; muddy spaces have a lot of late arriving energy. In some sense, Shape determines the spatial characteristics of the reverberator, whereas Materials effects the spectral characteristics.
Space
- 113 -
DreamVerb Presets
DreamVerb includes 100+ presets in addition to the internal factory bank. Presets in the internal factory bank are accessed via the host applications preset menu. The additional presets are copied to disk by the UAD installer and can be loaded using the Settings menu in the UAD Toolbar (see Using UAD Powered Plug-Ins in Chapter 7 of the UAD System Manual).
Preset Design Tips

Here are some practical tips for creating useful reverbs with DreamVerb. These are not rules of course, but techniques that can be helpful in designing the perfect sonic environment. ER = Early Reflections LF = Late-field Reverberation
General Tips (a tour):
Hf = High frequency Lf = Low frequency
Start by setting a general timing on the ER and LF graphs to give a rough reverb size. This timing ordinarily needs to be tweaked several times along the way. The materials and air density dene the frequency decay of the LF, and also the coloration of the ER if ER ltering is used (the slider on the right of the Reections panel). Typically, materials should be blended. Try blending contrasting high frequency roll-off materials with high-frequency reecting materials or inverse materials. This tends to add nice dimension to the LF tail. Start with one useful material and experiment with blending. Materials can have an extreme ltering effect if no air density is used. Most presets sound better with an air blending. If you don't want the additional coloration of air, blend with Ideal Gas which performs no ltering. The room shapes dene the ER pattern; they do not effect the LF. Solo the ER and choose a shape that works well for your source or environment. Blending shapes does not always yield desirable results. Use shape blending with discretion, or to dene a more complex room. Start with the EQ at, set the approximate sound with the materials, then EQ the input to cut or boost specic frequencies.
- 114 -
The EQ is often most useful for a simple Lf or Hf roll-off/boost, or to notch out bothersome frequencies for particular sources. For full mix ambience/mastering presets, use the EQ to cut most of all LF input, which yields added ambience without mucking up the mix. This is a powerful EQ, so experiment! Try different diffusion settings for your preset (the slider on the right of the Reverberation panel). Diffusion radically alters the reverberation sound and is source dependent. Higher diffusion values yield a fuller sound, good for percussive sounds; lower diffusion values yield a less dense sound, good for vocals, synths, etcetera. When monitoring your preset, try switching from Dry solo, Wet solo, and a useful mix. Solo the reections and reverberation, and disable/enable EQ. Try different sources and mixes. Reach for the headphones every now and then. In general just keep things moving, as ear fatigue can be particularly deceiving with reverb sounds. The Positioning panel is generally only needed for automation. Ignore these settings for preset design unless going for a panning effect or monitoring real-world use. Often when you've got a really great preset designed, all it takes are a few subtle changes to make a number of other great presets.
Tips for designing a natural environment sound:
Make timing proportional. As the size of the simulated environment increases, the length of the pre-delay for the EF, LF, and LF tail should increase proportionally. Typically, ER and LF pre-delay should be not too far apart, with LF starting shortly after ER. Place the ER timing preceding/leading into the LF ER amplitude naturally decays. Slope the amplitude down from left to right. Use ER ltering, as this improves the reverb sound in almost all situations. Try a gradual Lf or Hf roll-off (or boost) with the EQ section. The left and right-most EQ bands are shelf lters, which are perfect for this job. The adjacent bands can be used to shape the roll-off. Try natural materials and air densities before the unnatural custom or inverse materials and air densities. Try adding onset (slope) to the LF, as many environments naturally have an LF onset.
For additional info:
Read Chapter 40, RealVerb Pro (page 396) of this manual.
- 115 -
CHAPTER 10
Empirical Labs EL7 FATSO

Introduction
FATSO Jr. Endorsed and scrutinized for accuracy by designer Dave Derr of Empirical Labs (originator of the hugely popular Distressor), UA has painstakingly recreated the highly regarded FATSO Jr. as a plug-in, capturing the sonic nuances of the hardware. The FATSO (Full Analog Tape Simulator and Optimizer) is designed to musically integrate frequencies and transients and increase the apparent volume of your source material in the same way classic analog equipment does. It achieves this through an ingenious design and a creative feature set, giving users the ability to impart the wonderfully warm and pleasing sonic characteristics of magnetic recording tape and class A transformer and tube circuits. The Input control gives the ability to dial in harmonic generation/distortion while Tranny and Warmth allow the user to dial in just the right amount of tape and tube tone. The FATSO also operates as a highly versatile compressoruseful for mixing and stereo buss compression. From tame to trashed, the FATSO offers a wide palette of possibilities for adding character and cohesiveness to your DAW tracks. Dubbed the FATSO Sr., UA has also worked closely with Dave Derr to bring you his never-before-available original concept of the FATSO, bundled at no additional charge. Adding his own custom mods that turn the original FATSO into an unbelievable powerhouse of tonal-shaping possibilities, the FATSO Sr. offers a Tranny saturation control, sidechain filtering, and deeper compression parameters including Threshold, Attack and Release. These special FATSO Sr. mods are only available with Universal Audios plug-in version of this unique studio tool. Note: The additional controls in the FATSO Sr. do not add to the DSP functionality of the FATSO Jr. Therefore, both plug-ins use the same amount of UAD DSP.
FATSO Sr.
- 116 -
Chapter 10: Empirical Labs EL7 FATSO
FATSO Screenshots
Figure 46. The FATSO Jr. plug-in window
Figure 47. The FATSO Sr. plug-in window
FATSO Functional Overview

Four Processing Types The FATSO was essentially designed to integrate frequencies in a musical manner and provide some foolproof vintage sounding compression. Generally, it is difficult to make the unit sound unnatural due to its vintage topology. FATSO provides four types of processing.
Harmonic Generation & Soft Clipper
Saturation and Distortion Processor
Basically, this is a distortion generator associated with the Input knobs. Anytime you pass a signal through the FATSO, it passes through this part except in bypass. This processing is useful to softly but instantly clip peaks and transients, allowing a higher average level. Aggressive distortion can also be achieved through the same controls. It is well known that the triode distortion in tube circuits produces lots of 2nd order and 3rd order harmonics, in somewhat varying ratios. Analog tape also saturates in this manner. The 3rd order harmonic is induced in the FATSO by increasing the level through two discrete distortion circuits and is usually the result of flattening the tops and bottoms of waveforms. Second order harmonics are also added especially while compressing in the FATSO. The FATSOs input clipping will give you the same result. These lower order harmonics form the octave and the octave and a fifth to the fundamental musical tones. They are actually musical distortion. Harmonics above the
- 117 -
2nd and 3rd get increasingly harsh and unmusical, and therefore should be lower in amplitude (<-60 dB) to keep within our line of thinking. Second harmonic is considered to be the warmest and most consonant harmonic distortion. Warmth Processor
High Frequency Saturation
This circuit is meant to simulate the softening of the high frequencies that occurs with analog tape. Basically, as the Warmth is increased, overly bright signals and transients will be quickly attenuated. The time constants are very nearly instant, so the high frequencies return very quickly after a loud burst. The Warmth circuit is by far the most complex part of the FATSO. Basically, it is a very strange high frequency (HF) gain control circuit or HF limiter. It is very unobtrusive in operation since it gets in and out of the way very quickly. The desired result is akin to the HF saturation that analog tape exhibits when the HF amplitude interacts with the tape recorder bias to produce self erasure of certain frequencies. The nature of the filter allows the corner frequency to move as attenuation occurs. There is only one control for Warmth but there are other ways to control the overall action of this circuit. If you do decide to use the compressor, set it up first because it affects the operation of Warmth. There is heavy interaction between the compressor and Warmth settings. Perhaps the best way to think of the settings is as compressor threshold, with 7 having the lowest threshold and the most Warmth, responding quickly and often to high frequency content. Just remember that instead of controlling the overall level, the Warmth compressor threshold only affects the high frequencies.
The Tranny Processor
Transformer & Tape Head Emulation
The Tranny circuit (Tranny is short for transformer) is a simulation of the effect of input and output transformers of older devices and adds the low frequency harmonics that characterize analog tape. This is extremely useful on pure low frequency type tones that don't cut through small speakers. It adds upper warm harmonics to frequencies below 150 Hz, especially those even lower such as 40 Hz, the low string on a bass guitar, helping it to cut through on smaller speakers.
- 118 -
Transformer design and use is an art, and there are always trade-offs. However, it has been widely known that a good audio transformer circuit can do wonderful things to an audio signal. This was the goal of the Tranny circuit. The hardware designers tried to emulate the desirable characteristics of the good old input/output transformers in a consistent musical way, and in a selectable fashion. The addition of harmonics and peak saturation along with frequency and phase changes on the low frequencies occurs. They found that they could capture the low frequency effects of large and now expensive older output transformers in a weird, internally buffered switchable design. To sum up the musical results of the Tranny circuit, there will be a little more edge in the midrange, and the super low frequencies will have been harmonically altered in a way that allows them to sound louder, even though the peaks are less than the original. Playback on small speakers will show an improved audibility of low end from the result of the psycho-acoustically-pleasing distortion the Tranny adds. Compression Processor
Classic Knee Compression, Empirical Labs Style
These are your typical automatic leveling devices that you find used on just about every instrument and vocal track, as well as on the overall buss. Only it's Empirical Labs compression smooth and sweet, but in your face! There are essentially four discrete compressors in the FATSO: Buss, General Purpose (G.P.), Tracking, and Spank. Switching modes simultaneously sets the compressor threshold, ratio, attack, and decay. This was done to provide an easy-to-set, yet versatile group of curves. The release curve of all types is logarithmic, meaning it lets off quickly at first and then slows. This release curve is a big part of the FATSO's compressor sound. Note: Threshold, attack, and decay values can be modified in the FATSO Sr.
Buss
Buss mode (green LED) is a very gentle 2:1 type ratio with slow attack, fast release, and very soft knee. One to four dB of gain reduction is typical for this compressor type. Five or more dB of Buss compression is hitting it hard!
G.P.
General Purpose mode (yellow LED) is medium attack slow release type that sounds pretty invisible while able to maintain a consistent RMS level. The slow release will not pull things into your face unnaturally.
- 119 -
Tracking
Tracking mode (green and yellow LED) is an 1176 type compressor that is great for tracking instruments and vocals during the recording process or during mixdown.
Spank
Spank mode (red LED) is a radical limiter type compressor that was specifically designed to emulate the nice squeeze of the older SSL talkback compressors from the 70's & 80's, but with quite a bit of higher fidelity. Note that Spank's aggressive nature will tend to dominate when combined with any of the other modes.
FATSO Controls
General notes about FATSO controls are below, followed by a detailed description of each channel-specific control, the global controls, and the FATSO SR. controls. Mono/Stereo Operation The FATSO is a two-channel device capable of running in stereo or dual-mono modes. Controls for both channels can be linked for ease of stereo operation when both channels require the same values (see Link Controls on page 124), or unlinked when dual-mono operation is desired. Each of the channel functions has its own separate group of controls (one set each for channels 1 and 2). Since the controls for each of the two channels are identical, they are detailed only once. Note: When the FATSO is used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration, the channel 2 controls have no effect and the LINK parameters (page 124) are disabled. Pushbuttons All FATSO pushbuttons are momentary. The value of the parameter increments by one step each time the button is clicked (holding the button down does not continue to increment the value). The value cycles to the beginning when the end of the range is reached. Clicking on the control LED indicators has no effect, with the exception of the LINK parameters (page 124). Tip: Shift+click any pushbutton to decrement its value by one.
- 120 -
Channel Controls
Input The Input knob defines the signal level going into the plug-in. Higher levels result in a more saturated signal. Levels above 0 VU provide dramatically higher distortion characteristics, especially when clipped (as indicated by the Pinned LED). See THD Indicators below. When the compressor is active (see Compressor Mode below), higher input values also result in more compression, as indicated by the gain reduction meters (page 122). Note: This control has no effect when Bypass (page 123) is active. THD Indicators The Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) LED's provide some reference operating levels. The yellow 0 VU LED light indicates around 1% THD, and the red Pinned LED indicates 5% THD or more. These LED's are an excellent guide to where the user is in the Grunge Department. You will find that the harmonic distortion is generally more obvious on overall mixes and complex programs. On individual instruments, sometimes 10% distortion sounds fat and analog and isn't heard as distortion at all. The COMP button defines which compressor mode is active. See Compression Processor on page 119 for a description of the modes. Spank mode can be combined with any of the other three modes for a total of seven available compressor modes. Note: Generally speaking, the Input and compressor Mode controls should be set before the other FATSO processor settings, because of the high degree of interaction between the compressor and the other processors. Mode LEDs The three Mode LED's indicate the active mode. Refer to Table 12 on page 122 for each specific value. The compressor is inactive when all Mode LEDs are off.
Compressor Mode
- 121 -
Table 12. Compressor Mode LED States Compressor Mode LED State All Unlit Green Yellow Green + Yellow Red Red + Green Red + Yellow Red + Green + Yellow Active Compressor Mode(s) Compressor inactive Buss General Purpose (G.P.) Tracking (most versatile ratio) Spank Spank + Buss Spank + General Purpose Spank + Tracking
GR Meter
The Gain Reduction Meter displays the amount of gain reduction occurring within the FATSO compressor, expressed as negative dB values.
Note: At extreme settings, the GR Meter may indicate gain reduction is occurring even when the compressor is disabled. This behavior is identical to the hardware unit. Warmth This button defines the Warmth amount. Warmth simulates the softening of the high frequencies that occurs with analog tape saturation (see Warmth Processor on page 118 for detailed Warmth description). Higher values increase the Warmth, as indicated by the Warmth Meter. Values of 1 to 7 are available. The current value is indicated by the arc of Warmth LEDs. Warmth is off when all LEDs are unlit. Warmth Meter The Warmth Meter is a very accurate display of the amount of high frequency attenuation, as defined by the Warmth button. The meter shows the amount of HF gain reduction occurring at 20 kHz.
Note: At extreme settings, the Warmth Meter may indicate activity even when Warmth is disabled. This behavior is identical to the hardware unit.
- 122 -
Bypass/Tranny
This black button is a multifunction control. Clicking the button repeatedly cycles through Tranny, Bypass, and Tranny Off modes. The currently active mode is indicated by the adjacent LED's.
Tranny (green LED)
The Tranny processor is active in this mode (see The Tranny Processor on page 118 for a detailed description of this mode). The Tranny circuit adds frequency rounding, low order clipping, intermodular distortion and transient clipping. On FATSO Sr., the Tranny amount can be set with the Tranny Level control (page 128). Note: Disabling Tranny will yield a significant reduction in UAD DSP usage when DSP LoadLock is disabled. If DSP LoadLock is enabled (the default setting), disabling Tranny will not reduce DSP usage.
Tranny Off (red and green LED's off)
In this mode, the Tranny processor is inactive but the other processors are active. This mode requires less UAD DSP than when Tranny is active.
Bypass (red LED)
All FATSO controls and processing for the channel are inactive in this mode. Note: UAD DSP load is not reduced in Bypass mode. If you want to reduce UAD DSP usage when bypassing both channels of the FATSO, use the Power switch instead (page 125). Output The Output knob controls the signal level that is output from the plug-in. Note: This control has no effect when Bypass (Bypass/Tranny on page 123) is active.
- 123 -
Global Controls
The global controls are not channel-specific; they apply to both channels. Link Compress The control signal sidechains of the gain reduction processors for channels 1 and 2 can be linked using the Link Compress function. To activate Link Compress, click the LINK COMPRESS text or LED on Ch1, on the left. The feature is active when the LED is illuminated. In typical use on stereo signals, Link Compress should be active so the stereo imaging is maintained. If the compressor is inactive (Compressor Mode on page 121), or when FATSO is used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration, this control has no effect. Important: Unlike the other controls for channels 1 and 2, which are identical on the left and right sides of the interface, the Link COMPRESS function is on the left side only (not to be confused with Link CONTROLS, which is on the right side only). Link Controls The parameter controls for channels 1 and 2 can be linked using the Link Controls function. To activate Link Controls, click on the LINK CONTROLS text or LED on Ch2, on the right. The feature is active when the LED is illuminated. Note: Although the left/right Warmth and Tranny controls are linked when Link Controls is active, the actual Warmth and Tranny processors are not stereo linked. This behavior is identical to the original hardware.
Controls Linked
Link Controls is provided for stereo operation when both channels require the same values. When enabled, the right channel controls snap to match the left channel control values, and modifying any channel control causes its stereo counterpart control to move to the same position (channel 1 & 2 controls are ganged together in this mode). Important: Right channel parameter values are lost the moment Link Controls is enabled.
- 124 -
Controls Unlinked
Unlink the controls when dual-mono operation is desired. Channel 1 and 2 controls are completely independent in this mode, and automation data is written and read by each channel separately. Link Controls is disabled when the FATSO is used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration. Important: Unlike the other controls for channels 1 and 2, which are identical on the left and right sides of the interface, the Link CONTROLS function is on the right side only (not to be confused with Link COMPRESS, which is on the left side only). Power The Power toggle switch determines whether the plug-in is active. It is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal. When Power is in the Off (down) position, plug-in processing is disabled, UAD DSP usage is reduced, and all LED's are unlit. Note: UAD-2 DSP usage is reduced only when DSP LoadLock is disabled. If DSP LoadLock is enabled (the default setting), disabling Power will not reduce DSP usage. Click the lower portion of the switch to disable the plug-in; click the upper portion to activate (or click+drag up/down on the switch).
FATSO Sr. Controls

These controls are unique to the FATSO Sr. However, because the additional controls in the FATSO Sr. do not add to the DSP functionality of the FATSO Jr., both plug-ins use the same amount of UAD DSP. Threshold This knob enables manual threshold control of the FATSO compressor. Higher values lower the threshold, and therefore increase the amount of compression. A value of 5 is the unity setting. The Input control (page 121) also affects the compression threshold. Generally speaking, set the amount of desired signal saturation with Input first, then adjust Threshold as desired.
- 125 -
Filter (HP SIDE FILT)
Filter regulates the cutoff frequency of the filter on the compressor's control signal sidechain. When active, frequencies below the filter value are not passed to the sidechain. Values of 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, 480 Hz, and Off are available. The filter slope is 6 dB per octave. When the compressor is disabled, Filter has no effect and its LED turns off. When the compressor is enabled, Filter returns to its original value. Tip: Removing low frequency content from the sidechain can reduce excessive gain reduction and/or pumping on bass-heavy audio signals without reducing bass content of the audio signal itself. Note: The Filter parameter affects the control signal (sidechain) of the compressor only. It does not filter the audio signal.
Attack
Attack sets the amount of time that must elapse once the input signal reaches the threshold level before compression is applied. The faster the attack, the more rapidly compression is applied to signals above the threshold. The available attack time values are 0.9ms, 10ms, 30ms, 60ms, and Default (unlit). The unlit behavior is depends upon whether or not the compressor is active. These behaviors are described below. Note: Attack values are approximations. Actual attack and release times may vary depending on the compressor mode selected.
Attack LEDs Unlit Compressor Active
When the compressor is enabled and all Attack LEDs are unlit, the attack characteristic of the active compressor mode in FATSO Jr. is used. This default FATSO Jr. behavior can then be manually overridden with the Attack button. However, when pure Spank mode is active, Attack cannot be modified. When Spank mode is combined with another compressor mode, Attack can be changed, but the results are typically very subtle. Tip: After experimenting with other time constants, one can return to the default attack setting of the FATSO Jr. if desired by cycling the attack control until NO LEDs are lit (which indicates the default FATSO Jr. time constant).
- 126 -
Attack LEDs Unlit Compressor Inactive
When the compressor is disabled and all Attack LEDs are unlit, the button is disabled. Note: This control has no effect when the compressor is inactive, or when it is in pure Spank mode (see Compressor Mode on page 121). Release Release sets the amount of time it takes for compression to cease once the input signal drops below the threshold level. Slower release times can smooth the transition that occurs when the signal dips below the threshold, especially useful for material with frequent peaks. However, if you set too large of a Release time, compression for sections of audio with loud signals may extend to lengthy sections of audio with lower signals. The available release time values are 0.05s, 0.1s, 0.s, 0.5s, and Default (unlit). The unlit behavior is depends upon whether or not the compressor is active. These behaviors are described below. Note: Release values are approximations. Actual attack and release times may vary depending on the compressor mode selected.
Release LEDs Unlit Compressor Active
When the compressor is enabled and all Release LEDs are unlit, the release characteristic of the active compressor mode in FATSO Jr. is used. This default FATSO Jr. behavior can then be manually overridden with the Release button. However, when pure Spank mode is active, Release cannot be modified. When Spank mode is combined with another compressor mode, Release can be changed, but the results are typically very subtle. Tip: After experimenting with other time constants, one can return to the default release setting of the FATSO Jr. if desired by cycling the release control until NO LEDs are lit (which indicates the default FATSO Jr. time constant).
Release LEDs Unlit Compressor Inactive
When the compressor is disabled and all Release LEDs are unlit, the button is disabled. Note: This control has no effect when the compressor is inactive, or when it is in pure Spank mode (see Compressor Mode on page 121).
- 127 -
Tranny Level
This control determines the amount of Tranny processing (see The Tranny Processor on page 118 for a detailed description). Higher values make the Tranny effect more prominent. Increasing the Tranny level also increases the signal THD (see THD Indicators on page 121), and the sensitivity of the Warmth processor (page 122). A value of 5 is the unity setting. Note: This control has no effect when the Tranny processor is inactive (see Bypass/Tranny on page 123).
LF Sat LED
The LF Sat (Low Frequency Saturation) LED indicates the amount of LF saturation in the Tranny processor. Higher Tranny Level values increase the LF saturation. When loading presets created on the FATSO Jr. into the FATSO Sr., the parameters that are unique to FATSO Sr. are set to their default control values. The default values of the unique FATSO Sr. parameters are: Threshold/Tranny knobs at 5, and Filter/Attack/Release buttons off.
FATSO Jr. Presets
The Empirical Labs EL7 FATSO Jr. hardware unit

All visual and aural references to the FATSO and all use of EMPIRICAL LABSs trademarks are being made with written permission from EMPIRICAL LABS. Special thanks to Dave Derr for assistance with this project.
- 128 -
CHAPTER 11
EMT 140 Plate Reverb

Overview
EMTs founder Wilhelm Franz made a breakthrough in 1957 with the release of the EMT 140, which utilized a resonating metal plate to create ambience. Nothing is quite like the wonderfully lush and distinctive tone of plate reverb that still endures as part of the fabric of modern music. However, plate reverb systems are large, expensive, require maintenance, and need to be isolated from external vibration; therefore plates are usually found only in commercial studios. Universal Audios uncanny representation of that unmistakable sound can be found in the EMT 140 plug-in. Measured and analyzed by UAs DSP circuit modeling experts and then tuned by ear over a four month period, the EMT 140 replicates the sonic signature of three uniquely different EMT 140s formerly installed at the Plant Studios in Sausalito, CA. Thats nearly two thousand pounds of sound in one plug-in! Impractical or impossible for most before, Universal Audio brings this classic mix tool within the reach of everyone. Licensed and endorsed by EMT Studiotechnik GmbH as the worlds only authentic plate reverb emulation. We thoughtfully combined the look of various elements from the EMT 140 system into one convenient panel, replicating the original damper controls for decay, and adding additional controls for the convenience of the modern DAW user.
EMT 140 Screenshot
Figure 48. The UAD EMT 140 plug-in window
- 129 -
Chapter 11: EMT 140 Plate Reverb
EMT 140 Controls

The EMT 140 interface is an amalgam of controls found at the plate amplifier itself and the remote damper controls, plus a few DAW-friendly controls that we added for your convenience. The GUI incorporates the original look and feel of those controls, and utilizes that look for the DAW-only controls.
Note: When
adjusting parameters, keyboard shortcuts are available for fine, coarse, and other control methods. See Shortcuts in Chapter 7 of the UAD System Manual for details.
Input Filter
The Input Filter is a dedicated equalizer that is used to reduce low frequency content in the reverb. On hardware plate systems, this setting is rarely modified because it is found at the plate amplifier unit itself and is not easily accessed from the control room. EMT 140 contains two types of filters: original EMT electronics and Martech electronics which was/is a common plate system retrofit. In the modeled source units at The Plant, plates A and B use the EMT electronics while Plate C utilizes the Martech electronics. In EMT 140, you can use either filter type with any of the three available plates. The original EMT filter (indicated by black text) is a cut filter centered at 80 Hz, with three available levels of attenuation: 4 dB, 10 dB, and 16 dB. In controls mode, these values are prefaced with an E to designate the original EMT electronics model. The Martech filter (indicated by red text) is a shelf filter, therefore all frequencies below the frequency are reduced. Six shelving frequencies are available: 90 Hz, 125 Hz, 180 Hz, 250 Hz, 270 Hz, and 360 Hz. In controls mode, these values are prefaced with an M to designate the aftermarket Martech electronics model.
Note: There is one Input Filter per plug-in instance. Each plate model (A, B, C)
within a preset cannot have a unique Input Filter value.
- 130 -
Reverb Controls
Plate reverb systems are extremely simple: A remote damper setting, and a high pass or shelf filter found at the plate itself. Additional manipulation is often used, including reverb return equalization, which is typically achieved at the console. Predelay is/was often achieved when necessary with tape delay, sending the return to a tape deck. Different tape speeds allowed different pre-delay amount. The original damper controls are remote control devices, usually found somewhere near the control room for quick access. Our hybrid panel combines three remotes into the panel, with a switch to select each of the three available systems.
Note:
The reverb controls (Plate Select and Reverb Time) are completely independent from all other plug-in controls. Three plate models (algorithms) are available for reverb processing. This switch specifies which plate will be active. Each setting is a model of a completely separate and unique plate system. Three 140s for the price of one!
Note:
Plate Select
You can also switch the active plate by clicking the A, B, or C letters above the Plate Select switch and the Reverb Time meters.
Reverb Time Meters
The Reverb Time Meters display the reverb time of plates A, B, and C in seconds. The meter for the active plate model (as specified by the Plate Select switch) is illuminated. The Damper Controls (the buttons beneath the Reverb Time Meters) change the reverb time for each plate. The range is from 0.5 to 5.5 seconds, in intervals of 0.1 sec. Click the buttons to increment or decrement the reverb time.
Note:
Damper Controls (Reverb Time)
The reverb time can be changed by dragging a Reverb Time Meter needle in addition to its corresponding Damper controls.
- 131 -
Stereo Controls
Width Width allows you to narrow the stereo image of EMT 140. The range is from 0 100%. At a value of zero, EMT 140 returns a monophonic reverb. At 100%, the stereo reverb field is as wide as possible.
Balance
This control balances the level between the left and right channels of the reverb return. Rotating the knob to the left attenuates the right channel, and vice versa (it is not a mono pan control).
EQ Controls
This group of parameters contains the controls for EMT 140s onboard utility equalizer. It is a two band (low and high) shelving EQ that uses analog-sounding algorithms for great tonal shaping options. The EQ section is independent from the reverb algorithms and the Input Filter on the modeled plate systems. See Input Filter on page 130. The frequency parameters specify the center of the transition band, which is defined as the frequency at which the level in dB is the midpoint between DC and the band edge level. There is one EQ per plug-in instance. Each plate model (A, B, C) within a preset cannot have unique EQ values.
Note:
EQ Enable
The EMT 140 equalizer can be disabled with the EQ Enable switch. UAD DSP usage is not increased when EQ is enabled. This parameter specifies the low shelving band transition frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the low band Gain setting. The range is 20 Hz to 2 kHz.
Low Frequency
- 132 -
Because this is a shelving EQ, all frequencies below this setting will be affected by the low band Gain value. Low Gain This parameter determines the amount by which the transition frequency setting for the low band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 12 dB, in increments of 0.5 dB (fine control) or 1.0 dB (coarse control). This parameter determines the high shelving band transition frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the high band Gain setting. The range is 200 Hz to 20 kHz. Because this is a shelving EQ, all frequencies above this setting will be affected by the high band Gain value. High Gain This parameter determines the amount by which the frequency setting for the high band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 12 dB, in increments of 0.5 dB (fine control) or 1.0 dB (coarse control).
High Frequency
Modulation Controls
The EMT 140 reverb time can be modulated by a low frequency oscillator using rate and depth controls. The effect is subtle but it can increase dispersion and reduce ringing on some source material, such as loud signals with sudden endings and percussive content.
Mod Rate
Mod Rate controls the rate of reverb time modulation. The available range is from 0.01 Hz to 1.0 Hz.
Mod Depth
This parameter controls the amount of reverb time modulation. The available range is from 0 10 cents.
- 133 -
Output Meter
The vintage-style VU Meter represents the plug-in output level. It is active when the Power switch is on, and slowly returns to zero when Power is switched off.
Blend Controls
Predelay The amount of time between the dry signal and the onset of the reverb is controlled with this knob. The range is 0.0 to 250 milliseconds. This control uses a logarithmic scale to provide increased resolution when selecting lower values. When the knob is in the 12 oclock position, the value is 50 milliseconds.
Mix
The Mix control determines the balance between the original and the processed signal. The range is from Dry (0%, unprocessed) to Wet (100%, processed signal only). This control uses a logarithmic scale to provide increased resolution when selecting lower values. When the knob is in the 12 oclock position, the value is 15%.
Note:
If Wet Solo is active, adjusting this knob will have no affect.
Wet Solo
The Wet Solo button puts EMT 140 into 100% Wet mode. When Wet Solo is on, it is the equivalent of setting the Mix knob value to 100% wet (and the Mix value is ignored). Wet Solo defaults to On, which is optimal when using EMT 140 in the classic reverb configuration (placed on an effect group/bus that is configured for use with channel sends). When EMT 140 is used on a channel insert, this control should be deactivated.
Note:
Wet Solo is a global (per EMT 140 plug-in instance) control.
- 134 -
Power Switch
This toggle switch enables or disables EMT 140. You can use it to compare the processed settings to the original signal, or to bypass the plug-in which reduces (but not eliminates) the UAD DSP load (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). The red EMT power indicator glows brighter when the plug-in is enabled.
EMT 140 distills 1800+ pounds of classic vintage reverb into a single plug-in. Exercise caution when lifting.
Note: The
- 135 -
CHAPTER 12
EMT 250 Electronic Reverberator

Introduction
Unveiled by EMT at the AES convention in 1976 and inducted into the TEC Hall of Fame in 2007, the EMT 250 was the first digital reverberation device to create ambience through a purely electronic system. With its single reverb program and iconic lever-driven control surface, the EMT 250 is still an indispensable tool within the record-making elite and is widely considered one of the best-sounding reverbs ever made. Although only around 250 were built, the EMT 250 has made an immeasurable impact on record making history in the hands of studio legends like George Massenburg, Bruce Swedien, Allen Sides and many others. Captured from Allen Sides unit at Ocean Way Recording, endorsed by EMT Studiotechnik GmbH in Germany, and re-engineered for plug-in use by EMT 250 creator Dr. Barry Blesser from his original documentation, the UAD version of the EMT 250 goes beyond emulation and is the very same algorithm found in the original unitsfor a fraction of its original $25,000 price! Besides the coveted reverb program, the EMT 250 for UAD provides the five additional effects (Delay, Phasing, Chorus, Echo and Space) also included in the original unit. Lighted pushbuttons select the desired program, while four click-stop levers provide the primary reverb parameters of delay time, predelay, and high and low Filtering. LED ladders provide additional visual reinforcement of program selection and parameter positioning. Like the hardware, the plug-in operates in quad, with two discrete stereo output pairs accessed through the added front/rear output switch. Additional digital only features include dry/wet mix, wet solo, reduced noise (if desired), and hard bypass via the EMT power icon.
- 136 -
Chapter 12: EMT 250 Electronic Reverberator
EMT 250 Screenshot
Figure 49. The EMT 250 plug-in window
Functional Overview
Program Modes The EMT 250 offers six effect types: Reverb, Delay, Phase, Chorus, Echo, and Space. These effects are called program modes in the EMT 250. Only one mode can be active at a time. Each program mode has up to five parameters that can be modified by the four main control levers plus the front/rear switch. The function of these controls varies per program mode (see below). Additionally, there are several global controls that have the same function in all modes. Variable Control Functions The function of control levers 1, 2, 3, and the Front/Rear switch depends upon which program mode is active. This is a primary consideration to remember when operating the EMT 250. Table 13 on page 140 details the varying functions of the control levers and the front/rear switch in each mode. Important: The function of the levers and the front/rear switch changes depending on the program mode.
- 137 -
Each unique parameter in the plug-in retains a distinct value, but only the parameters that are active in the current program mode are visible in the graphical user interface. All parameters are always visible in Controls View (see Chapter 7 of the UAD System Manual), even when they are not active in the current program mode. Important: The value of lever parameters that are not active in the current program mode are not saved in sessions or presets. The unsaved parameters are marked with an asterisk in Table 13 on page 140. When switching between program modes that have different parameters mapped to the same control, parameter values are retained within each mode (controls jump back to the prior value that was set in each respective mode). Lever 4 Predelay In all program modes, lever 4 controls the predelay (the initial delay before other processing occurs) of both channels (left and right). Predelay times of 0ms, 20ms, 40ms, and 60ms are available in 4 steps. The green LEDs on the right side of lever 4 display the current predelay value. The EMT 250 hardware unit has one (mono) input. For accurate emulation when the plug-in is used in a stereo-in/stereo-out configuration, stereo signals at the plug-in input are summed to mono before processing; the dry signal is passed in stereo. Four channels of processed audio, selectable with the Front/Rear Outputs switch, are generated from this mono input in all modes (with the exception of Echo, which has mono output only). Front/Rear Outputs The EMT 250 hardware unit has four discrete outputs. Two outputs were designed to be used as the main stereo left/right outputs, or the front left/right outs in quadraphonic applications. The other two outputs were used for the rear left/right signals in quad (or other creative applications). The UAD EMT 250 fully models the individual sonics of all four outputs. The name of the Front/Rear Outputs switch is derived from the original hardware design. This control (which is unique to the plug-in) enables access to the processed quadraphonic signal in pairs, at either the front L/R or rear L/R outputs. When a different sound is available at the front and rear outputs, the yellow LED ring around the control is illuminated. For program modes that do not offer quadraphonic processing (e.g., Delay), the switch is re-purposed to sum the processed outputs to mono. In Echo mode, it functions as an input mute.
- 138 -
In some program modes, the yellow LED ring around the control is illuminated to indicate that changing the switch position will change the sound. For program modes that do not offer quadraphonic processing (e.g., Delay), the switch is re-purposed to sum the processed outputs to mono. In Echo mode, it functions as an input mute. Automation Some EMT 250 control functions change depending on the active mode (see Variable Control Functions on page 137 and Table 13 below). To accommodate this design, all EMT 250 parameters are exposed for automation and external control surfaces even if the parameter is not active in the current program mode. Important: Parameters that are automated and/or externally controlled will have no effect if those parameters are not active in the current program mode. Modeled I/O All input and output characteristics of the EMT 250 are fully emulated in the plug-in. This includes all of its idiosyncrasies, such as the A/D and D/A anti-aliasing filters (which are not linear-phase), system latency, input clipping, and limited frequency response. All these quirks embellish the unique sonic signature. The EMT 250's anti-aliasing filters for its A/D and D/A conversion are not linear-phase filters; therefore our emulation does not have a latency that is the same at all frequencies. Thus, we cannot report to the delay compensation engines a delay that is correct for all frequencies. The value we report is good at low frequencies, but becomes off at high frequencies. For example, when the plug-in is in Delay program mode and set with zero delay time and predelay values, the plug-in output will not be completely cancelled when mixing with flipped phase against an unprocessed track; high frequencies will leak through. However, the latency through the dry side of the wet/dry mix, and the latency when the plugin is bypassed via the EMT 250 Power switch (page 147), do not have this issue and will be fully compensated by the DAW.
EMT 250 Latency
- 139 -
Program Mode Controls

The details of each unique program mode are below, followed by descriptions of the global controls, which affect all program modes. Control Functions Table 13 displays the parameter that each control is mapped to for each of the EMT 250 program modes. See Variable Control Functions on page 137 for details.
Table 13. The variable control functions of the EMT 250 Program Mode Reverb Delay Phase Chorus Echo Space Lever 1 Reverb Decay Coarse Delay Time Phase (curve) (none)* Coarse Delay Time (none)* Lever 2 LF Decay Fine Delay Time (none)* (none)* Fine Delay Time (none)* Lever 3 HF Decay (damping) Selects L/R channel for time adjustment* (none)* Variation HF Decay (damping) (none)* Lever 4 Predelay Predelay Predelay Predelay Predelay Predelay Front/Rear Output Pair Stereo/Mono Output Pair Stereo/Mono Input Mute Output Pair
*Note: The parameter values of lever positions marked with an asterisk are not saved in sessions or presets.
Program Mode
The Program Mode buttons define which of the available program modes is active. The six program modes are: Reverb (REV), Delay (DEL), Phase (PHAS), Chorus (CHOR), Echo, and Space (SPC).
Click a Mode button to activate that program mode; the button is illuminated for the currently active mode (only one mode can be active at a time). Each program mode and its associated parameters are described in detail below. Tip: See Table 13 on page 140 for a matrix of controls that are available in each program mode.
- 140 -
Reverb
Reverb program mode offers the same all-time classic reverb algorithm that made the EMT 250 famous.
Decay Time (Lever 1)
Lever 1 controls the main reverb tail decay time. The red LEDs on the left side of lever 1 indicate the current decay time; the green LEDs on the right side of lever 1 are inactive. The decay time range (at 1 kHz) is 0.4s to 4.5s, selectable via 16 steps.
LF Decay (Lever 2)
Lever 2 controls the low frequency decay time (at 300 Hz). The red LEDs on the left side of lever 2 display the current value; the green LEDs on the right side of lever 2 are inactive. Four multipliers are available: x 0.5, x 1.0, x 1.5, and x 2.0. The multiplier refers to a factor of the main decay time (lever 1). Higher values (upper lever positions) generally result in more low frequency content in the reverb tail.
HF Decay (Lever 3)
Lever 3 controls the high frequency decay time. The red LEDs on the left side of lever 3 display the current value; the green LEDs on the right side of lever 3 are inactive. Four multipliers (at 6 kHz) are available: x 0.25, x 0.33, x 0.5, and max. At the max position, the HF decay factor is x 1.0 at approximately three seconds. The multiplier refers to a factor of the main decay time (lever 1). Higher values (upper lever positions) generally result in more high frequency content in the reverb tail.
Predelay (Lever 4)
Lever 4 is used as a typical reverb predelay parameter. See Lever 4 Predelay on page 138 for more information.
Front/Rear
In Reverb mode, the Front/Rear Outputs switch is illuminated. Changing the switch setting will yield a slightly different effect. See Front/Rear Outputs on page 138 for more information.
- 141 -
Delay
Delay program mode offers two independent delay processors, one each for the left and right output channels. Up to 375ms delay time is available for each channel. Delay repeats (feedback) are not available in Delay mode; use Echo mode if delay feedback is desired. Note: The maximum per-channel delay time of 375ms in Delay mode is obtained by setting the coarse, fine, and predelay times to their respective maximum values.
Coarse Delay Time (Lever 1)
Lever 1 controls the coarse delay time for the currently selected channel (left or right). The currently selected channel is defined by lever 3. The coarse delay time range is 0 to 300ms, selectable via 16 steps. The green LEDs on the right side of lever 1 display the current value; the red LEDs on the left side of lever 1 are inactive.
Fine Delay Time (Lever 2)
Lever 2 controls the fine delay time for the currently selected channel (left or right). The currently selected channel is defined by lever 3. Fine delay times of 0ms, 5ms, 10ms, and 15ms are available. The green LEDs on the right side of lever 2 display the current value; the red LEDs on the left side of lever 2 are inactive. Note: Levers 1 and 2 both control the delay time, but these parameters are not individually exposed for external control surfaces and automation. Instead, a single delay time parameter is exposed for each channel, and levers 1 and 2 in the plug-in interface are both updated to match the value.
Channel Select (Lever 3)
In Delay mode, lever 3 selects which channel (left or right) the delay time parameters (levers 1 and 2) will affect. When lever 3 is in position L the left channel delay time can be adjusted; when in position R the right channel delay time can be adjusted. The green LEDs on the right side of lever 3 display the channel selected for delay time adjustment; the red LEDs on the left side of lever 3 are inactive. Note: Lever 3 position I is a duplicate of position II L in Delay mode. Likewise, position IV is a duplicate of position III R. All positions can be used to select a channel for delay time adjustment.
- 142 -
Important: In Delay mode, lever 3 does not control a real parameter; it is only used to select the active channel for other parameters in the graphical user interface. For this reason, the parameter is not exposed for external control surfaces or automation, nor is it saved in sessions or presets.
Predelay (Lever 4)
Lever 4 can be used as a common predelay to both channels (the predelay time is added to the delay times of both channels). See Lever 4 Predelay on page 138 for more information.
Front/Rear
In Delay mode, the Front/Rear Outputs switch is not illuminated (the sound is identical in both pairs of outputs). When moved to the Rear position, the plug-in output is summed to mono. See Front/Rear Outputs on page 138 for more information. Phase Phase program mode creates a comb filter curve that results from the addition and subtraction of two signals with a small time shift between them. The comb filter changes the amplitude of the source signal's harmonic overtones, resulting in interesting tonal variations. Tip: Phasing is most apparent when the plug-in is set to 100% wet (or when Wet Solo (page 148) is active). In the EMT 250, the input is fed to two delay processors; one with a fixed delay time of 15ms, and the other which is variable from 015ms, controlled by lever 1. By changing this variable time shift the phase (shape) of the comb filter, and therefore the timbre of the output signal, is changed. Note: Unlike many phasors, the EMT 250 does not modulate the variable time shift with a low frequency oscillator (LFO), which results in the continuously varying swooshing effect that is often associated with the process name. This conventional phasor effect can be reproduced (with outstanding results) by moving lever 1 back and forth, either manually or with automation.
Phase (Lever 1)
In Phase program mode, lever 1 controls the delay time (the phase time shift) between the two signals that create the comb filter. Phase values of 0ms to 15ms are available, selectable via 16 steps.
- 143 -
In Phase mode the green LEDs to the of right lever 1 are active, but the panel markings (0300ms) do not represent the actual phase delay time values. Instead, the LEDs indicate the relative value between 015ms.
Predelay (Lever 4)
Lever 4 can be used as a common predelay to both phase delays. See Lever 4 Predelay on page 138 for more information. Note: Levers 2 and 3 have no effect in Phase program mode.
Front/Rear
The Front/Rear Outputs switch is illuminated in Phase program mode. Changing the switch setting will yield a different comb filter phase. Due to the nature of the effect in Phase mode, when the switch is in the Rear position and the Phase time (lever 1) is at minimum and maximum values, the signal is only output on one side (right-only at minimum, left-only at maximum). This behavior is identical to the original hardware. See Front/Rear Outputs on page 138 for more information. For more information about phasing, see the Flangers and Phasors article in our December 2008 Webzine: http://www.uaudio.com/webzine/2008/december/doctors.html Chorus Chorus program mode creates an ensemble effect by simulating the impression of multiple imprecisions added to the original signal. In EMT 250, this is accomplished by routing the same signal to four delay processors, each having short delay times that are continuously and randomly modulated. While it was necessary to combine the various physical outputs for variations of Chorus complexity, the EMT 250 plug-in is pre-mixed in four popular combinations. Note: Levers 1 and 2 have no effect in Chorus program mode.
Chorus Mode (Lever 3)
Four subtle variations of the chorus effect are available (I, II, III, and IV). Lever 3 specifies the current variation.
- 144 -
Positions I and II are of a simpler nature, while III and IV are more complex. Position I duplicates the Left Front and Right Front outputs of the hardware. II duplicates Left Rear and Right Rear outputs of the hardware. III combines both the Left Front and Left Rear on the left side, and Right Front and Right Rear on the right. IV combines Left Front, Left Rear and Right Rear on the left side, and Left Rear, Right Front and a phase inverted Right Rear on the right. IV imparts a pseudo-quadraphonic sound.
Predelay (Lever 4)
Lever 4 is can be used as a common predelay to all four delays. See Lever 4 Predelay on page 138 for more information.
Front/Rear
In Chorus mode, the Front/Rear Outputs switch is not illuminated (the sound is identical in both pairs of outputs). When moved to the Rear position, the plug-in output is summed to mono. See Front/Rear Outputs on page 138 for more information. Echo Echo program mode produces a single monophonic delay effect, with feedback and adjustable delay time. Up to 375ms of delay is available. The feedback (recirculation) circuit is always active in Echo mode. The feedback signal path is attenuated by approximately 10% per loop circulation, and includes an adjustable high frequency attenuator for damping. Note: The maximum delay time of 375ms in Echo mode is obtained by setting the coarse, fine, and predelay times to their respective maximum values.
Coarse Echo Time (Lever 1)
Lever 1 controls the coarse delay time. The coarse delay time range is 0 to 300ms, selectable via 16 steps. The green LEDs on right side of lever 1 display the current value; the red LEDs on the left side of lever 1 are inactive.
Fine Echo Time (Lever 2)
Lever 2 controls the fine delay time. Fine delay times of 0ms, 5ms, 10ms, and 15ms are available. The green LEDs on right side of lever 2 display the current value; the red LEDs on the left side of lever 2 are inactive.
- 145 -
Note: Levers 1 and 2 both control the echo time, but these parameters are not individually exposed for external control surfaces and automation. Instead, a single echo time parameter is exposed, and levers 1 and 2 in the plug-in interface are both updated to match the value.
HF Decay (Lever 3)
Lever 3 controls the high frequency damping in Echo mode. The red LEDs on left side of lever 3 display the current value; the green LEDs on the right side of lever 3 are inactive. Four multipliers are available: x 0.25, x 0.33, x 0.5, and max. Higher values (upper lever positions) result in more feedback.
Predelay (Lever 4)
Lever 4 is used as a predelay to the echo processor in this mode. The predelay time is added to the echo times, but not to the HF decay feedback loop. See Lever 4 Predelay on page 138 for more information.
Front/Rear
The Front/Rear Outputs switch is not illuminated in Echo mode (the same monophonic signal is generated at the front and rear outputs). However, the Front/Rear Outputs switch has a special function in Echo mode. In the Front position, the program behaves normally. In the Rear position, the input to the echo processor is muted, while still allowing the echo output to be passed. This feature is useful for adding echo to specific passages only, by flipping the switch to Front when echo is desired. The behavior is identical to the popular dub switch on the Roland RE-201 (Echo/Normal on page 422). See Front/Rear Outputs on page 138 for more information. Space Space mode is a special reverb program with an extremely long decay time and linear distribution of the reverberation time with frequency (all frequencies decay at the same rate). Because this condition doesn't exist in nature, and the program was originally intended for science fiction productions, the reverberation in outer space moniker was derived. The reverb decay time is approximately 10 seconds in Space mode. Predelay and Front/Rear are the only adjustable parameters in this program mode. Note: Levers 1, 2, and 3 have no effect in Space mode.
- 146 -
Predelay (Lever 4)
Lever 4 is used as a typical reverb predelay parameter. See Lever 4 Predelay on page 138 for more information.
Front/Rear
In Space mode, the Front/Rear Outputs switch is illuminated. Changing the switch setting will yield a slightly different effect. See Front/Rear Outputs on page 138 for more information.
Global Controls
The global controls are not program-specific; they apply to all program modes. Power The Power button (the red EMT logo) determines whether the plug-in is active. It is useful for comparing the processed signal to the original signal. Click the button to disable the plug-in; click it again to enable it. When Power is in the Off (unlit) position, plug-in processing is disabled, and UAD DSP usage is reduced. Note: UAD-2 DSP usage is reduced only when DSP LoadLock is disabled. If DSP LoadLock is enabled (the default setting), disabling Power will not reduce DSP usage. Input Meter The Input Meter indicates the level going into the plug-in. On the original hardware, the red Register LED illuminates when digital full code is reached, at 6 dB above 0 dB (i.e., there is 6 dB of headroom on the hardware, as the meaning of 0 dB digital wasn't yet standardized in those days). The distortion characteristics of the A/D converters are modeled, therefore EMT 250-style clipping can be heard when the EMT 250 input is overdriven.
- 147 -
Dry/Wet
The Dry/Wet slider control determines the balance between the original and the processed signal. The range is from 0% (dry, unprocessed) to 100% (wet, processed signal only). This control uses a logarithmic scale to provide increased resolution when selecting lower values. When the slider is in the center position, the value is 15%. Note: If Wet Solo is active, adjusting Dry/Wet will have no effect.
Wet Solo
The Wet Solo button puts the EMT 250 into 100% Wet mode. When Wet Solo is on, it is the equivalent of setting the Dry/Wet control to 100% wet. Wet Solo defaults to On, which is optimal when using the EMT 250 in the classic reverb configuration (placed on an effect group/buss that is configured for use with channel sends). When the EMT 250 is used on a channel insert, this control should be deactivated. Note: Wet Solo is a global (per EMT 250 plug-in instance) control.
Noise
When Noise is active, the noise characteristics of the original hardware unit are fully intact. Disabling Noise eliminates the modeled noise characteristics for quieter operation. Noise is active when the yellow LED is illuminated; it is enabled by default. Click the LED to change the setting. The Noise parameter is unique to the UAD EMT 250 plug-in. Noise is dynamic to the response of the effect processing, and the noise level differs from program to program. The noise floor of the hardware EMT 250 may seem a bit high when compared to modern digital processors, but it adds to the EMT 250s quirky character.
- 148 -
CHAPTER 13
EP-34 Classic Tape Echo

EP-34 Overview
The EP-34 combines EP-3 and EP-4 sonics and features to achieve the best of the later solid-state Echoplex* designs. The Echoplex uses an infinite tape loop combined with a sliding record head that allows the user to achieve the desired delay length. EP-34 emulates the great idiosyncrasies of these tape-based echo units such as the unique Echo Delay record head slider that can be moved in real-time while used in conjunction with the Echoplexs Echo Repeats control to create echo and pitch chaos. The distinct and musical input clipping is captured in the units Record Volume control making the EP-34 a tone box for distortion. Echo Volume allows the blending of the original and effected signal, however even the dry signal is affected by the unit. The Echoplex self-oscillation capabilities are captured as well, including the squelch effect (an interruption in self-oscillation) achieved at extreme settings when processing low-frequency material like drum loops with heavy kick drum. All this makes the EP-34 more than just a delay, but an instrument that can be played by manipulating the controls while in chaotic oscillation. Just like the hardware, faster-than-tape-path speeds can also be achieved, leading to sonic-boom/tape squeal effects again adding to chaotic but musical attributes of the original hardware. The EP-34 also has other warts-and-all artifacts of tape such as self-chorusing due to speed variations caused by random friction in the tape path plus pinch roller wow and flutter. The EP-34 includes the metering and unusual but uniquely musical tone controls found on the EP-4, but removes its undesirable in-line noise reduction circuit that users often electronically disabled (Maestro removed this circuit soon after the products release). Extras not found on the original hardware include Tempo Sync, Input Select (allows for a cleaner sound [LO] or a dirtier sound [HI]), Tension (the Echoplex has an adjustable tension nut underneath the delay time slider for a snappy or sludgy response time), Echo Send (identical in function to RE-201 dub switch), Wet Solo, Pan (wet signal only), and Power (plug-in bypass).
*EP-34 Tape Echo is not affiliated with, sponsored nor endorsed by any companies currently using the Echoplex name. The EP-34 Tape Echo name, as well as the EP-3 and EP-4 model names, are used solely to identify the classic effects emulated by Universal Audios product.
- 149 -
Chapter 13: EP-34 Classic Tape Echo
EP-34 Tape Echo Screenshot
Figure 50. The UAD EP-34 Tape Echo plug-in window
EP-34 Controls
Echo Delay Echo Delay controls the delay time of the unit. The selected value is shown in the Echo display (page 151). The parameter can be adjusted by using the metallic slider handle or the slider nose (both sliders control the same parameter; see Figure 51).
Figure 51. The Echo Delay sliders
- 150 -
The available delay range is 80 to 700 milliseconds. When Sync is active, beat values from 1/64 to 1/2 can be selected. When the beat value is out of range, the value is displayed in parenthesis. This occurs in Sync mode when the time of the note value exceeds 700ms (as defined by the current tempo of the host application). See Chapter 8 in the UAD System Manual for more information about tempo synchronization. Tip: Click the control slider(s) then use the computer keyboard arrow keys to increment/decrement the sync value. Echo Display This window displays the current delay time of the EP-34. Displayed values are defined by the Echo Delay parameter (page 150). Delay values can be entered here directly using the text entry method. When Sync mode is off, delay times are expressed in milliseconds. When Sync is on, delay times are expressed as a fractional bar value. When the beat value is out of range, the value is displayed in parentheses. This occurs in Sync mode when the time of the note value exceeds 700ms (as defined by the current tempo of the host application). Echo Repeats This knob controls the repeat level (feedback) of the echo signal. At the minimum (fully counter-clockwise) position, only one repeat is heard. Rotating the control clockwise increases the number of echoes. Higher values will cause self-oscillation. The self-oscillation of the EP-34 is one of the magic features that really makes it more than a mixing tool, its also an instrument to be played. The effect may be used subtly, sending the unit into gentle oscillation on held notes, or can be put into over the top oscillation with extreme settings. The EP-34s oscillation qualities are heavily dependent upon program material and control settings. Different sources of audio, gain, tone, repeat rate and input settings will all effect oscillation performance. The EP-34 can also achieve oscillation with no signal, making the it a truly unique instrument.
- 151 -
Echo Volume
This knob determines the wet/dry mix of the delayed signal. In the minimum position, the dry signal is colored by the circuitry of the modeled emulation. Rotate the control clockwise for louder echo. Reducing the control to its minimum value will mute the delay. The EP-34 models the unusual taper of this control that is found on the original hardware. It is normal operation to have the control in the 8595% range to get a 50/50 wet/dry balance. Note: When the Wet switch (page 154) is in the On position, Echo Volume has no effect.
Recording Volume
Recording Volume adjusts the input gain and clipping characteristics of the delayed tape signal. Increasing this control will increase the tape distortion and grit that is an important element of the famous hardware sound. The Recording Volume is indicated by the Input Meter. The Input Meter in the EP-34 is a three-segment horizontal LED array (two green, one red) that indicates the recording level at the input of the tape recorder. The yellow LED indicates that the plug-in is active. When the Power switch (page 154) is enabled, the yellow LED is illuminated.
Input Meter
Echo Tone
The frequency response of the delayed (wet) signal can be modified with the Echo Tone controls. These knobs are cut/boost controls; they have no effect when in the 12 oclock position. The available range is 10 dB of gain. Note: The Echo Tone controls do not affect the dry signal.
Treble
Controls the high frequency response in the delayed signals.

Bass
Controls the low frequency response in the delayed signals.
- 152 -
Echo Pan
Pan sets the position of the delayed (wet) signal in the stereo field; it does not affect the unprocessed (dry) signal. Tip: Click the Echo control text to return the knob to center. Note: When the plug-in is used in a mono-in/mono-out (MIMO) configuration, the Pan knob does not function and cannot be adjusted.
Input
The original hardware unit had two inputs: Instrument and Microphone. The Input switch on the EP-34 toggles between the gain levels of these two inputs. The LO position captures the gain structure of the Instrument input, while the HI position captures the gain structure of the Microphone input. This allows for a cleaner (LO) or dirtier (HI) sound depending on the switch position. Important: Depending on the source material and gain structuring, switching between LO and HI may cause a significant jump in output levels.
Tension
The original hardware provides a tension adjustment screw on the bottom of the Echo Delay slider. Adjusting this tension screw varies the pitch shifting effects (technically, the slew rate) that are obtained when the Echo Delay parameter is manipulated in realtime. The Tension switch emulates two different tension adjustments of this adjustment screw.
LO
The LO position emulates a loose tension adjustment. With this setting, realtime adjustments to the Echo Delay parameter have a faster slew rate, resulting in snappier pitch shifting effects.
HI
The HI position emulates a tight tension adjustment. With this setting, realtime adjustments to the Echo Delay parameter have a slower slew rate, resulting in sluggish pitch shifting effects. Send The Send switch disables the signal sent into the echo portion of the unit when set to OFF. This control is sometimes affectionately referred to as the dub switch.
- 153 -
Sync
This switch engages Sync mode for the plug-in. In Sync mode, delay times are synchronized to (and therefore dependent upon) the master tempo of the host application. When Sync is toggled, parameter units are converted between milliseconds and beats to the closest matching value. See Chapter 8 in the UAD System Manual for more information about tempo synchronization.
Wet
The Wet switch puts the EP-34 into 100% Wet mode. When Wet is on, it mutes the dry unprocessed signal. Wet is optimal when the plug-in is used on an effect group/bus that is configured for use with channel sends. When the plug-in is used on a channel insert, this control should be deactivated. Note: Wet is a global (per plug-in instance) control. Its value is saved within the host project/session file, but not within individual preset files. Important: Depending on the source material and gain structuring, engaging Wet may cause a significant jump in output levels.
Power
Power determines whether the plug-in is active. This is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal, or to bypass the plug-in to reduce the UAD DSP load (load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Note: The yellow LED in the Input Meter (page 152) is illuminated when the plug-in is active.
EP-34 Hardware History

Originally designed by Mike Battle in the late 50s as a portable echo device as an answer to the problem of tying up studio tape machines often employed for echo effects. Legendary artists such as Jimmy Page, Miles Davis, Brian May, Andy Summers, Eddie Van Halen among many others have used the hardware to add simple slap echo effects all the way to self-oscillation chaos to their sonic creations.
- 154 -
The EP-3 is the favored unit by guitarists, and EP-4 is the last unit that was released and has an improved feature set over its predecessors such as metering and tone controls making it even more useful as a mix tool. Some didnt like the EP-4 because of a noise reduction circuit that was added that was not implemented correctly. Unfortunately in a production mistake, the circuit was placed in across both the direct signal and the tape playback causing the dry source signal sustain to be cut off prematurely. Most modded their units to remove the noise compressor, and Maestro quickly removed the compressor design from the design.
The Echoplex EP-3 hardware unit
*EP-34 Tape Echo is not affiliated with, sponsored nor endorsed by any companies currently using the Echoplex name. The EP-34 Tape Echo name, as well as the EP-3 and EP-4 model names, are used solely to identify the classic effects emulated by Universal Audios product.
- 155 -
CHAPTER 14
Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection
The Gold Standard in Vintage Tube Limiters

In the annals of compressor history, the products produced by Fairchild are some of the best built and most highly prized on the vintage market. The most famous Fairchild products produced were the 660 and 670 limiters, which are famous for their fantastic sound quality. The stereo Fairchild 670 is probably the Holy Grail of limiters in studio gear esoterica, not only because of its price, but also its extreme rareness and the difficulties in maintaining such a unit. With its 14 transformers, 20 vacuum tubes (including 8 of the venerated 6383 gain reduction tubes) and weighing 65 pounds, the Fairchild 670 is truly the heavyweight champion of compression. Originating from the late 1950s, the design of the 670 uses a single push/pull stage of amplification with an exceptionally high control voltage. Tube limiters are unique in that they use tubes for gain reduction and not just as amplifiers. The audio path is quite simple, and compression happens directly in the audio path, rather than sending out to a separate compression circuit. The unit can be used as a limiter or compressor, depending upon personal taste and program material. It can go from a 2:1 ratio as a compressor to a peak limiter with a 30:1 ratio. The unit can also be adjusted to operate anywhere between these two extremes using the Threshold and DC Threshold controls. The Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection was created by meticulously modeling (down to the component level) carefully selected hardware. Our golden reference channels were modeled from engineer/producer Allen Sides collection from Ocean Way Recording. The Fairchild plug-ins incorporate all of the features from the original units. Several new UAD-only features round out this offering, giving the UAD Fairchild 670 added flexibility for modern audio production. With a broad range of functionality in the analog world, the Fairchild Tube Limiter Collections feature set allows for critical master fader uses, and individual sources or subgroups under extreme gain reduction. And you dont have to let it warm up for 30 minutes before use.
- 156 -
Chapter 14: Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection
Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection Screenshots
Figure 52. The Fairchild 660 plug-in window
Figure 53. The Fairchild 670 plug-in window
- 157 -
Figure 54. The Fairchild 670 Legacy plug-in window
Fairchild Plug-In Family

The complete Fairchild family is comprised of three individual plug-ins, as seen in the screenshots above and described below. Each variation has its own unique sonic characteristics. Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection The Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection, introduced in UAD v7.4, includes two plug-ins: Fairchild 660 and Fairchild 670.
Fairchild 660
The original Fairchild 660 hardware is a single-channel monophonic processor. The UAD Fairchild 660 plug-in was faithfully modeled from the original 660 hardware, independently from the Fairchild 670 plug-in modeling. The Fairchild 660 may be handy with mono sources, or when less control is required via its simpler interface. The Fairchild 660 controls are identical to one of the channels of the Fairchild 670.
- 158 -
Fairchild 670
The Fairchild 670 is the two-channel stereo workhorse revered by engineers and producers worldwide.
Second-Generation Algorithms
The newer state-of-the-art algorithms in the Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection take full advantage of the extra processing power available on UAD-2 devices, along with the design sophistication and expertise gained since the original Fairchild Legacy plug-in was developed.
Sonic Differences
Like the differences between the original Fairchild 660 and 670 hardware units, the UAD models in the Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection offer variations in threshold behaviors, total gain, input attenuation range, distortion amount, distortion structure, program dependence, time constant subtleties and more. These differences provides an expanded palette within the Fairchild sound.
Artist Presets
The Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection includes artist presets from prominent Fairchild users. The artist presets are in the internal factory bank and are accessed via the host applications preset menu. The artist presets are also copied to disk by the UAD installer so they can be used within Apollos Console application. These presets can be loaded using the Settings menu in the UAD Toolbar (see Using UAD Powered Plug-Ins in Chapter 7 of the UAD System Manual). The Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection includes additional artist presets that are not available in the internal factory bank. These additional presets can also be accessed using the Settings menu in the UAD Toolbar. Note: Presets created with the original Fairchild Legacy plug-in are incompatible with the newer Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection plug-ins.
Upsampling
The Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection plug-ins (but not the Fairchild 670 Legacy) use an internal upsampling technique. The upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than most other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information.
- 159 -
Fairchild 670 Legacy
The original version of the Fairchild 670 was released in January of 2004 for the UAD-1 platform. To accommodate the limited DSP resources of the firstgeneration UAD-1 hardware, the transformer and I/O distortion characteristics were not modeled in this version of the plug-in. The Fairchild 670 Legacy has a great sound and is very usable, especially in situations where less distortion is desirable, or when there are not enough DSP resources to use the second-generation models in the newer Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection. It also has slightly less overall latency since it is not an upsampled plug-in. Note: The Fairchild 670 Legacy is included with the purchase of the Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection if it is not already owned.
Although the Fairchild 660 original hardware is a single-channel processor and the Fairchild 670 original hardware is a dual-channel processor, all plugins in the UAD Fairchild family can each be used on either mono or stereo sources.
Fairchild 670 Operational Overview

Unique Controls Controls in the UAD Fairchild plug-ins are original Fairchild hardware controls with the following exceptions: The VU meter and the Meter Switch are re-purposed, enabling the ability to monitor input and output levels (the original hardware does not have this ability). In the hardware, the function the meter switch is to enable calibrating the bias currents; this function is achieved automatically in the plug-in when the Balance control is in the default position. The Headroom (HR) control replaces the VU meters Zero control, which originally corrected for component wear offsets in the VU meter pin. The Sidechain Link control is a common modication which had been performed on the unit we modeled. Output Level, Controls Link, Sidechain Filter, Mix, and Headroom controls are digital-only additions for the UAD plug-ins. The D.C. Threshold controls are original controls, however on the Fairchild 660 they were located on the rear panel. Note: Not all controls are available in the Fairchild 670 Legacy plug-in.
- 160 -
Lateral/Vertical
One of the design goals of the Fairchild 670 hardware was to facilitate its use as a limiter when producing vinyl phonograph masters. The terms lateral (side-to-side) and vertical (up-and-down) refer to the mechanical modulations in a vinyl record groove that are transduced into electrical audio signals by the phonograph stylus and cartridge. The Fairchild 670 can perform dynamics processing on the lateral (Lat) and vertical (Vert) components of stereo signals independently. In other words, the monophonic (middle) and/or stereo (side) components of a stereo source signal can be compressed or limited separately from the other component. Lat/Vert processing facilitates maximum usable levels and efficient use of available groove space in phonograph mastering, resulting in higher volume recordings with longer playing times. Of course, the feature can also be used for creative effects outside of the phonograph environment. Note: Lat/Vert processing is an operating mode of Fairchild 670. For additional details on the modes and how to access them, see Fairchild 670 Modes on page 162. Lat/Vert processing is accomplished by first routing the stereo source signal through a sum/difference (mid/side) matrix which separates the stereo source into lateral (middle, or center without stereo) and vertical (side, or stereo without mono) signal components. The lateral/vertical components are then compressed or limited independently. Finally, the mid/side components are recombined into a normal stereo signal via a second sum/difference matrix. In the Fairchild 670, the left+right (sum) middle signals are routed to the Lat channel, and the leftright (difference) side signals are routed to the Vert channel. The two channels can work independently of each other, or the sidechain control signals can be optionally linked. Tip: Controls related to Lat/Vert processing contain red Lat/Vert text labels.
Operating Levels
The Headroom (HR) control enables adjustment of the internal operating reference level for Fairchild 670 and Fairchild 660. This feature enables more sonic range and the ability to fine-tune the non-linear I/O distortion and compression response characteristics to be tailored independently of signal input levels. By increasing the Headroom (by rotating the HR control counter-clockwise), signals at the input can be pushed higher before they compress. For complete details about this feature, see Headroom on page 167.
- 161 -
Fairchild 670 Modes

2 Compressors, 4 Modes There are two independent compressors within the Fairchild 670. Depending on the state of the AGC Switch and the Sidechain Link switch, four operating modes are possible. The modes are detailed in this section. The switch positions required for each operating mode is shown in Table 14 below. See Lateral/Vertical on page 161 for an overview of these terms.
Table 14. Fairchild Operating Modes AGC Switch Setting Left Right Lat Vert Left Right Lat Vert Sidechain Link Setting Unlinked Unlinked Linked Linked Operating Mode Dual Mono Dual Lateral/Vertical Stereo Left/Right Stereo Lateral/Vertical
Modes Table
Dual Mono
In dual mono mode, the Fairchild 670 operates as two separate monophonic compressors with independent control of the left and right channel signals. There is no interaction between the two compressors. In dual lateral/vertical mode the Fairchild 670 operates as two monophonic compressors with independent control of the middle and side components of the two input signals. The input signals are processed by the sum/difference (mid/side) matrix before and after the compressors, but there is no interaction between the two compressors. In this mode, the Fairchild 670 operates as a typical stereo dynamics processor. The left input is fed to the one compressor, and the right input is fed to the other. The dynamics control signal sidechain of the two compressors are linked so that they both compress the same amount at any instant, preventing transients which appear on only one channel from shifting the stereo imaging of the output. Any transient above the threshold (on either channel) will cause both channels to compress, and the amount of compression will be similar to the amount of compression for a transient which appears on both channels at the same time. Additionally, the attack and release times for the two compressors will be the same, and attack and release behavior will be the average of the settings for the two channels. Mono transients will have an effective attack time of about one half the attack time for transients on only one of the two channels.
Dual Lat/Vert
Stereo Left/Right
- 162 -
Stereo Lat/Vert
Stereo lateral/vertical (mid/side) mode, like stereo left/right mode, causes the two compressors to be linked together so that they always compress the same amount. In this mode however, the inputs to the two compressors are fed with the middle and side components of the signal respectively. This generally means that a transient which occurs in both channels will cause a bit more compression than a transient which only appears on left or right. The attack and release behavior is determined by the average of the settings for the two channels.
Fairchild Controls
The control functions are essentially identical across all three UAD plug-ins in the Fairchild family, so they are described only once. Any control differences between the three plug-ins are noted in the control descriptions. Power Switch This switch determines whether the plug-in is active. When the Power switch is in the Off position, plug-in processing is disabled and UAD DSP usage is reduced (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled).
Power Lamp
The lamp beneath the Power switch is illuminated when the plug-in is active. Tip: Click the Power Lamp to toggle the enable/disable state of the plug-in. VU Meters There are two VU meters, one for each channel. The VU meters can display input levels, output levels, or gain reduction levels, as determined by the Meter Switch.
- 163 -
Meter Switch
This switch determines what is displayed on the VU meters. Input, output, or gain reduction (GR) levels can be selected. The default value is GR. If GR is selected, the meter will show gain reduction in dB for the corresponding compressor channel. If the AGC Switch is set to left/right, the GR shown will be for the left or right channel. If the AGC switch is set to Lat/Vert, the GR shown will be for the middle (upper meter) or side (lower meter) channel. In GR mode, the upper labels show gain reduction in dB. If the meter select switch is set to IN or OUT, then that meter will reflect the relative level of the right or left input or output signal (the I/O meters are not calibrated).
Channel Input Gain
This is a stepped attenuation control which always applies to left or right input, regardless of the AGC control setting. The steps are approximately 1 dB apart.
Fairchild 670
The available range is 20 to 0 dB with a default value of 4 dB (unity gain).

Fairchild 660
The available range is Infinity (off) to 0 dB with a default value of 14 dB (unity gain). Note: Like the 660 hardware, there is some signal leakage even when Input Gain is set to -Inf.
Fairchild 670 Legacy
The available range is 20 to 0 dB with a default value of 18 dB (unity gain). Threshold This continuously variable control determines the amount of compression to be applied to the channel. Rotate clockwise for more compression (increasing the control lowers the threshold). In the Fairchild 670, the default value is 1.5. In the Fairchild 660, the default value is 5.
- 164 -
Input Gain versus Threshold
The amount of signal compression is determined by both the Input Gain and Threshold controls. If one is increased and the other decreased, the compression characteristics wont change much, but the distortion characteristics will. The input control is located ahead of the tubes, directly behind the input transformer. Therefore as the input control is increased, the input tube (the gain-varying stage) is hit with more signal which can increase distortion (which may or may not be desirable). Tip: For less distortion with the same amount of compression, lower the input gain and increase the threshold control. Time Constant This 6-position switch provides fixed and variable time constants (attack and release times) to accommodate various types of program material. Positions 1-4 provide successively slower behavior, and 5 and 6 provide program dependent response. The values published by Fairchild for each position are in Table 15 below. The actual measured times are a bit different, but the overall trend is the same. The default value is Position 5. Tip: When Sidechain Link is enabled and Controls Link is disabled, the Time Constant settings of the two channels are interactive, which enables the ability to have many other attack/release variations than those listed in the table.
Table 15. Fairchild Time Constants Time Constant Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position 5 Attack Time 200 microseconds 200 microseconds 400 microseconds 800 microseconds 200 microseconds Release Time 300 milliseconds 800 milliseconds 2 seconds 5 seconds Program dependent: 2 seconds for transients 10 seconds for multiple peaks Program dependent: 300 milliseconds for transients 10 seconds for multiple peaks 25 seconds for consistently high program level
Position 6
400 microseconds
- 165 -
AGC Switch
This switch determines whether the two compression channels will receive left/right or lateral/vertical (mid/side) signals as the inputs. In conjunction with the Sidechain Link switch, this control determines the operating mode of the Fairchild 670. See Fairchild 670 Modes on page 162 and Table 14 on page 162 for detailed mode descriptions. Note: This control is unavailable on the Fairchild 660.
Left/Right
If Left/Right is selected and Sidechain Link is off, the compressor is in dual mono mode. If Sidechain Link is on, the mode is stereo left/right.
Lat/Vert
If Lat/Vert (mid/side) is selected and Sidechain Link is off, the compressor is in dual lateral/vertical mode. If Sidechain Link is on, the mode is stereo lateral/vertical. Sidechain Link When this control is set to Link, it causes the two channels of the compressor to compress in equal amounts. This does not mean that the compressor will be equally sensitive to either channel however; that depends on the settings of the other controls. Note: This control is unavailable on the Fairchild 660. Linking the sidechains simply means that the instantaneous amount of compression for the two channels will always be the same, thereby preventing leftright image shifting at the output. Threshold and input gains can be set independently to cause the compressor to be more sensitive to instruments which are panned to one side or the other. Output controls can be set separately in order to correct an overall image shift at the output. Tip: In conjunction with the AGC Switch switch, the Sidechain Link switch determines the operating mode of the Fairchild 670. Controls Link This switch allows the two sets of controls for the interface to be stereo linked. The control is unavailable on the Fairchild 660. Important: When unlink is switched to link, the left channel values are copied to the right channel, and any control offsets between channels are lost.
- 166 -
Headroom
Overview
The Fairchild hardware units can accept an analog signal level of approximately +27 dBm before undesirable signal clipping occurs. As the signal increases up to this point however, desirable audio-path nonlinearities and good harmonic distortion characteristics occur. This musically pleasing warmth at higher levels is what gives the unit much of its revered sonic character. Because analog mixing consoles can typically output high signal levels, audio engineers often take advantage of the ability to push the hardware unit into the colorful arena. This complete pallet of sonic nuance, including the dynamic input response, is captured in the Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection models (but not the Fairchild 670 Legacy). The 660 and 670 plug-ins are calibrated internally so that when the Headroom control is at its nominal value of 16 dB, 0 dBFS at their input is equivalent to an input level of approximately +20 dBu on the hardware, where the coloring is more prominent. The result is that a typical signal within a DAW will drive the UAD Fairchild 660/670 into these virtual higher levels, resulting in fairly high amounts gain reduction.
Headroom Control
The Headroom control (labeled HR) is provided to accommodate applications where high amounts of gain reduction are not desired. Headroom simply lowers the internal operating level so that the plug-in is not pushed into gain reduction as much. Note: There is only one headroom parameter. Although the HR control appears twice in the Fairchild 670 window, they are permanently linked. Headroom can be set (in dB) to 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, or 28. The default value is 16 dB (when the set screw dot is in the straight up 12 oclock position). Note that Headroom is increased as the dB value decreases. Tip: Click the HR text label to return the control to the default value. At higher dB values (clockwise rotation), signals will push the plug-in into gain reduction (and more non-linearity and good harmonic distortion color) more easily. Set the control to a lower value (counter-clockwise rotation) when less gain reduction and less color is desired. Note: To avoid the temporary gain increases that can result when adjusting Headroom, automating this control is not recommended.
- 167 -
Keep in mind there are no hard and fast headroom rules. Feel free to experiment with the various positions of the HR control regardless of the audio source. If it sounds good, use it! Note: The HR control does not exist on the Fairchild 670 Legacy. On the hardware unit, the Zero screw (as displayed in the Fairchild 670 Legacy) adjusted the meter pointer to compensate voltage fluctuation and component wear. Balance Balance controls the bias current balance. It always controls one channel of the compressor, regardless of what the nearby Meter Switch is set to. The point of perfectly calibrated bias currents is achieved when the screw slot is at the 12 oclock position (the default value). At this setting, the amount of additive signal deflection (thud) which happens due to an attack is minimized. Setting this control counterclockwise from this position results in a thud of one polarity on transients, and going clockwise produces a thud of opposite polarity. Tip: Click the BAL text label to return the control to the default position. Note: To avoid the DC settling artifacts that can result when adjusting Balance, automating this control is not recommended. Sidechain Filter The Sidechain Filters (one each for the Left/Lat and Right/Vert channels) control the cutoff frequency of a low-cut filter on the compressor's control signal sidechain. They have a slope of 12 dB per octave. The available range is 20 Hz to 500 Hz, and Off. The default value is Off. Tip: Click the OFF label to disable the sidechain filter. Removing low-frequency content from the sidechain can reduce excessive gain reduction and/or pumping on bass-heavy audio signals without reducing bass content of the audio signal itself.
Auditioning the Sidechain Filter
To quickly switch back and forth between OFF and the last set value, click the OFF label. This feature is handy for comparing the filtered and unfiltered sidechains. Note: The Sidechain Filter affects the control signal of the compressor only. It does not filter the audio signal.
- 168 -
DC Threshold
DC Threshold controls the ratio of compression as well as the knee width. As the knob is turned clockwise, the ratio gets lower and the knee gets broader. The threshold also gets lower as the knob is turned clockwise. Its more technically accurate to say that this control simply changes the knee width, since no matter where its set, the ratio always approaches true limiting eventually. However, the knee becomes so broad that it becomes more practical to speak of the ratio changing, because for reasonable amounts of compression (less than 25 dB), this is the case. Note: This control is labeled DC Bias on the Fairchild 670 Legacy.
CAL
To calibrate the plug-in to factory specifications (the default value), align the white CAL mark with the black dot on the adjustment screw. Tip: Click the CAL text label to return the control to the factory calibrated position.
OWR
To calibrate the plug-in to the setting used by Ocean Way Recording (the source unit for the plug-in modeling), align the white OWR mark with the black dot on the adjustment screw. Tip: Click the OWR text label to return the control to the Ocean Way Recording position. Output Gain These controls provide clean, uncolored gain to the output signals. The available range is 20 dB. The default value is 0 dB. Tip: Click the OUTPUT text label to return the control to the default position. Note: In the Fairchild 670 Legacy this is a stepped control, with each step being separated by 0.5 dB, and an available range of -18 dB to +6 dB.
- 169 -
Mix
The output balance between signal processed by the plug-in and the original dry source signal can be adjusted with the Mix control. Mix facilitates parallel compression techniques without having to create additional routings in the DAW. When set to 0%, only the unprocessed (dry) source signal is output. When set to 100% (the default value), only the processed (wet) signal is output. When set to 50%, an equal blend of both the dry and wet signals is output. The balance is continuously variable throughout the control range. Tip: Click the MIX text label to set the control to the 50% position. Click the 0 text label to set the control to the minimum position. Click the 100% text label to set the control to the maximum position.
- 170 -
The origins of the Fairchild 660/670 design come from Estonian-born immigrant Rein Narma. Les Paul hired Narma to modify his first 8-track Ampex machine. Later, Narma built consoles for Olmsted Recording, Rudy Van Gelder, and Les Paul, who then asked him to build an all-new, sonically reliable audio limiter. In the post-war years, this refugee from Soviet Russia worked for the U.S. Army as a broadcast/recording tech during the Nuremberg trials, then later immigrated to the New York and took a job at Gotham Recording. Narma and others founded Gotham Audio Developments to build recording gear. The compressors Fairchild connection begins with Sherman Fairchild, the son of Congressman George Winthrop Fairchild, one of the founders of IBM. Sherman Fairchild built and designed the first aerial photography equipment during World War I. After that war ended, he started the Fairchild Aerial Camera Corporation in 1920. Sherman Fairchild eventually went on to design a multitude of products, from aircraft to semiconductors, and opened several more companies, including Fairchild Recording Equipment Corporation. After Narma began the limiter project for Les Paul, Sherman Fairchild heard about it, licensed the design, and hired Narma as the companys chief engineer. After his time at Fairchild, Narma moved to Northern California and was a vice-president at Ampex. The Fairchild was advertised as The World Accepted Standard for Level Control back in the 1950s when it was originally sold. It is still revered for its extremely smooth, artifact-free sound.
- 171 -
The Fairchild 660 and 670 Original Hardware
- 172 -
CHAPTER 15
Harrison 32C EQ
Overview
The Harrison 32C is the EQ channel module from the prestigious Harrison 4032 console. Countless hit records have been made with Harrison consoles, with artists from Abba to Sade. Most notably, the 4032 is famous as the mixer from which many Michael Jackson records including Thrillerthe best-selling album of all timewere made. An original 4032 still resides in Florida with Thriller engineer and Bill Putnam protg Bruce Swedien, where he continues his love affair with the desk he calls marvelous sounding. Universal Audios plug-in version of the all-important 32C EQ module is measured from Mr. Swediens personal console. This colorful 4-band EQ with high and low cut filters will impart the same warm and rich sound from his Harrison, and will impart the same impact, sonic clarity and creativity as he experienced making some of the best-loved records of our time. The Harrison 32C contains four overlapping parametric peaking bands. Each band has fully sweepable Frequency and Gain controls. Instead of traditional Q controls, the 32C has special circuitry that, according to the original hardware documentation, automatically adjusts the effective bandwidth under all conditions. This dynamic property, and the interplay between the overlapping bands, contribute to the devices musicality and unique sonic signature. The low EQ band can be switched from peak to shelf mode, and high/low pass filters are available. Additional digital only features not included on the original hardware include gain, phase invert, and a global power switch. An SE version is also provided for higher instance counts.
Harrison 32C EQ Screenshot
Figure 55. The Harrison 32C EQ plug-in window
- 173 -
Chapter 15: Harrison 32C EQ
Harrison 32C EQ and Harrison 32C SE Controls

Note: Knob settings, when compared to the graphical user interface silkscreen numbers, may not match the actual parameter values (e.g., if a knob is pointing to 8 kHz, the actual frequency may not be 8 kHz). This behavior is identical to the original hardware, which we modeled exactly. When the plug-in is viewed in parameter list mode (Controls View), the actual parameter values are displayed. Power The Power switch determines whether the plug-in is active. Click the button to toggle the state. When the Power switch is in the Off (lighter) position, plug-in processing is disabled and UAD DSP usage is reduced (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). The Power LED is illuminated when the plug-in is active. The Phase () button inverts the polarity of the signal. The signal is inverted when the button is engaged (darker). Leave the button inactive (lighter) for normal phase. In addition to the four-band EQ, the Harrison 32C offers two cut filters, one each for low and high frequencies. The slope of the cut filters is 12 dB per octave.
Cut Enable
Power LED Phase
Cut Filters
The high and low pass filters are engaged with the Cut Enable switch. The Cut Filters are active when the In switch is engaged (darker). When the Cut Filters are engaged, circuit coloration is modeled even when set to zero cut frequency values (25 Hz and 20 kHz respectively). The Cut Enable In switch is to the left of the EQ In switch on the graphical interface.
High Pass (low cut)
This control determines the cutoff frequency for the high pass filter. The available range is 25 Hz to 3.15 kHz.
- 174 -
Low Pass (high cut)
This control determines the cutoff frequency for the low pass filter. The available range is 1.6 kHz to 20 kHz. Four EQ Bands Each of the four EQ bands have similar controls. The band center frequency is controlled the top row of knobs, and the band gain is controlled by the bottom row. The low EQ band can be operated in either peak or shelf mode. When the Low Peak switch is in the out position, the low EQ band operates in shelf mode. When the Low Peak switch is engaged (darker), the low EQ band operates in peak mode (the other bands always operate in peak mode). This control determines the low band center frequency (or the edge frequency when in shelf mode) to be boosted or attenuated by the band Gain setting. The available range is 40 Hz to 600 Hz. This control determines the amount by which the frequency setting for the low band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 10 dB. This control determines the low midrange band center frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the band Gain setting. The available range is 200 Hz to 3.1kHz. This control determines the amount by which the frequency setting for the low midrange band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 10 dB. This control determines the low midrange band center frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the band Gain setting. The available range is 400 Hz to 6 kHz. This control determines the amount by which the frequency setting for the high midrange band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 10 dB. This control determines the high band center frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the band Gain setting. The available range is 900 Hz to 13 kHz.
Low Peak
Low Frequency
Low Gain
Low Mid Frequency
Low Mid Gain
High Mid Frequency
High Mid Gain
Hi Frequency
- 175 -
Hi Gain
This control determines the amount by which the frequency setting for the high band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 10 dB. The Gain knob controls the signal level that is output from the plug-in. The default value is 0 dB. The available range is 10 dB.
Gain
Harrison 32C SE
Figure 56. The Harrison 32C SE plug-in window
Overview
The UAD Harrison 32C SE is derived from the UAD Harrison 32C. Its algorithm has been revised in order to provide sonic characteristics very similar to the Harrison 32C but with significantly less DSP usage. It is provided to allow Harrison-like sound when DSP resources are limited. Nobody with golden ears will say it sounds exactly like the full version, but it still sounds great and is very usable in most situations. The Harrison 32C SE interface can be differentiated from the Harrison 32C by knob color and the module name. The Harrison 32C SE blue knobs instead of the Harrison 32Cs ivory knobs, and the module name on the upper right of the interface panel includes SE.
Harrison 32C SE Controls
The Harrison 32C SE controls are exactly the same as the Harrison 32C. Please refer to the Harrison 32C section for Harrison 32C SE control descriptions (see Harrison 32C EQ and Harrison 32C SE Controls on page 174).
- 176 -
Harrison 32C Latency

The Harrison 32C (but not the Harrison 32C SE) uses an internal upsampling technique to facilitate its amazing sonic accuracy. This upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information. The Harrison 32C SE does not require additional latency compensation because it is not upsampled. Note: Compensating for Harrison 32C is not required if the host application supports full plug-in delay compensation throughout the signal path, or when it is used only on the outputs.
The Harrison 4032 Console, featuring the Harrison 32C EQ
Special thanks to Bruce Swedien for his gracious cooperation with the UAD Harrison 32C project.
- 177 -
CHAPTER 16
Helios Type 69 Equalizer
Overview
Helios consoles were used to record and mix some of the finest rock, pop and reggae classics ever produced. The Beatles, Led Zeppelin, The Rolling Stones, The Who, Roxy Music, Queen, Jimi Hendrix and Bob Marley are just a few that recorded with these amazing wrap-around consoles. Moreover, many great musicians of the era purchased Helios consoles for their personal use. Of all the Helios consoles produced between 1969 and 1979, the original Type 69 is considered the most musical. Universal Audio modeled the EQ section of the very first Type 69. This console was originally found at Islands Basing Street Studio in London; it now resides with Jason Carmer in Berkeley, California, where it continues to record multi-platinum albums.
Helios Type 69 Screenshot
Figure 57. The Helios Type 69 plug-in window
- 178 -
Chapter 16: Helios Type 69 Equalizer
Helios Type 69 Controls

Overview The simple yet powerful Helios Type 69 Passive EQ adds a unique sonic texture to the music that passes through it. It can be pushed to its most extreme boost settings while retaining openness and clarity. The Type 69 Passive EQ replicates all the controls of the original hardware. The Treble band is a fixed 10 kHz shelf EQ, while the Bass band functions as a stepped 50 Hz shelf filter (-3,-6,-9,-12,-15 dB) or frequency selectable Peak EQ (60, 100, 200, 300 Hz). The Mid band operates as a frequency selectable Peak or Trough (Notch) EQ with eight frequencies (.7, 1, 1.4, 2, 2.8, 3.5, 4.5, 6 kHz). Other features include Level Adjust, EQ Cut (bypassing the EQ circuit while retaining the native sound of the unit), and Phase Reverse.
Band Layout
Bass band Figure 58. Helios 69 band control layout
Midrange band
Treble band
Global controls
The Helios Type 69 design works in such a way that (depending on the settings) entire EQ circuits are switched in and out. In the hardware that often meant audible popping. For the plug-in we use smoothing to reduce these audio spikes, but they may be more audible than with other UAD plugs-ins. This is most audible when engaging the Bass or 10 kHz band from OFF to any other setting. Each feature of the UAD Helios 69 interface is detailed below.
- 179 -
Bass
The Bass knob has a dual purpose. It specifies the amount of attenuation when the low band is in shelving mode, and specifies the frequency of the low frequency peak filter when the Bass Gain knob is not zero. When Bass is set to one of the frequency values (60 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz, or 300 Hz) the low band is in peak mode. In this mode, the amount of gain (bass boost) applied to the specified frequency is determined by the Bass Gain knob. When this knob is set to one of the decibel values (3, 6, 9, 12, 15 dB) the low band is in bass cut shelving mode with a set frequency of 50 Hz.
Note: Like the original hardware, simply putting this control on any frequency
will yield approximately 3.5 dB in gain increase even if the Bass Gain control is set to 0. Bass Gain The Bass Gain knob determines the amount of low band gain to be applied when the Bass knob is in one of the frequency positions. Up to +15 dB of boost is available. Bass Gain has no effect when the Bass knob is in shelving mode (when Bass set to one of the dB positions).
Note:
Mid Freq
This control determines the frequency of the midrange band. The following frequencies can be specified: 700 Hz, 1 kHz, 1.4 kHz, 2 kHz, 2.8 kHz, 3.5 kHz, 4.5 kHz, and 6 kHz. The gain for the mid band is determined by the Mid Gain control. MidFreq has no effect if the Mid Gain control is set to zero.
Note:
In the graphic interface of this control, what may appear to be a dash (-) actually represents a decimal point. This anomaly mimics the original hardware. Mid Gain This control determines the amount of gain or attenuation to be applied to the mid band. Up to 15 dB of boost or cut is available. The Q (bandwidth) on the midrange band is fairly wide and gentle at low settings, but gets progressively narrower as the gain value is increased.
- 180 -
Note:
Whether gain or attenuation is applied is determined by the Mid Type control. Mid Type specifies whether the midrange band is in Peak or Trough mode. When switched to Peak, the Mid Gain control will boost the midrange. When switched to Trough, Mid Gain will cut the midrange.
Mid Type
Note: When using Trough, a 1 dB loss occurs on the overall output of the plug-
in. This is normal; the behavior is the same in the original hardware. High Shelf Gain The High Shelf Gain knob offers fixed frequency shelving equalization at 10 kHz. This stepped control can cut the treble by 3 dB or 6 dB, or boost it in 2 dB increments up to +16 dB.
EqCut
This switch is an EQ bypass control. It allows you to compare the processed and unprocessed signal. The EQ is active when in the in (up) position. The EQ is bypassed when in the out (down) position. EqCut does not reduce UAD DSP load. In the original Helios hardware, the audio is still slightly colored even when the EQ switch is in the Cut position. This is due to the fact that the signal is still passing through its circuitry. Because the plug-in emulates the hardware in every regard, the signal will be slightly processed when this switch is in the Cut position. If a true bypass is desired, use the Line switch instead.
Phase
The Phase () switch inverts the polarity of the signal. When the switch is in the Inverted (up) position, the phase is reversed. Leave the switch in the Normal (down) position for normal phase. This control adjusts the signal output level of Helios Type 69. This may be necessary if the signal is dramatically boosted or reduced by the EQ settings. The available range is 20 dB to +10 dB.
Level Adjust
Line
The Line switch determines whether the plug-in is active. This is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal, or to bypass the plug-in to reduce the UAD DSP load (load is not re-
- 181 -
duced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Click the switch to toggle the state; the switch is illuminated in green when the plug-in is active.
Helios 69 Latency
The Helios 69 uses an internal upsampling technique to facilitate its amazing sonic quality. This upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information.
Note:
Compensating for Helios 69 is not required if the host application supports full plug-in delay compensation throughout the signal path, or when it is used only on the outputs.
- 182 -
Basing StreetHome of the original Type 69 Helios desk
The same desk, now in Berkeleys Morningwood, nearly 40 years later
- 183 -
CHAPTER 17-
LA-3A Compressor
Overview
The original Teletronix LA-3A Audio Leveler made its debut at the 1969 New York AES show. Marking a departure from the tube design of the LA-2A Leveling Amplifier, the solid-state LA-3A offered a new sound in optical gain reduction, with faster attack and release characteristics that were noticeably different from its predecessor. Immediately embraced as a studio workhorse, the LA-3A is still widely used today. Engineers and producers the world over favor the LA-3A for its unique compression characteristics and sonic signature. Modeled from a unit in UA's vintage collection, our digital emulation of the LA-3A faithfully captures the hardware's sound, working magic on vocals, guitars and drums.
LA-3A Screenshot
Figure 59. The LA-3A plug-in window
- 184 -
Chapter 17: LA-3A Compressor
LA-3A Controls
Background For detailed information about compressors, see The LA-2 captures one of the earliest Teletronix examples. This exceedingly rare unit preceded the LA2A by a few years and incredibly, still has the original T4A fully intact. The LA2 provides the slowest response and a unique mellowed sound due to 50 years of luminescent panel aging inside the T4 module. Use the LA-2 with legato tempos and your most vowel-like sources for a transparency and sublime mood unlike any other compressor. on page 470. This switch changes the characteristics of the compressor I/O curve. When set to Compress, the curve is more gentle, and presents a low compression ratio. When set to Limit, a higher compression ratio is used. The Gain knob adjusts the output level (by up to 50 dB). Make sure to adjust the Gain control after the desired amount of compression is achieved with the Peak Reduction control. The Gain control does not affect the amount of compression. This control adjusts the amount of gain reduction, as well as the relative threshold. A Peak Reduction value of 0 yields no compression. Rotate this control clockwise until the desired amount of compression is achieved (to monitor the Peak Reduction, set the VU Meter to Gain Reduction). The Peak Reduction should be adjusted independently of the Gain control. This switch sets the mode of the VU Meter and also disables the plug-in. When set to Gain Reduction, the VU Meter indicates the Gain Reduction level in dB. When set to output, the VU Meter represents the output level (the output meter is not calibrated). When in the Off position, the plug-in is disabled and UAD DSP usage is reduced. only) UAD-2 DSP usage is reduced only when DSP LoadLock is disabled. If DSP LoadLock is enabled (the default setting), setting the switch to Off will not reduce DSP usage. Stereo Operation Phase-coherent stereo imaging is maintained when the LA-3A plug-in is used on a stereo signal.
Note: (UAD-2
Comp/Lim
Gain
Peak Reduction
Meter
- 185 -
Chapter 17: LA-3A Compressor
CHAPTER 18
Lexicon 224
Classic Digital Reverb
From the moment it was unleashed on the audio industry in 1978, the original Lexicon 224 Digital Reverb with its tactile, slider-based controller and famously lush reverb tail almost single-handedly defined the sound of an entire era. It served as a major player in the sound of highly influential classics such as Talking Heads' Remain In Light, Grandmaster Flash & The Furious Five's The Message, Vangelis' incredible Blade Runner soundtrack, U2's Unforgettable Fire, and Peter Gabriel's So. With such a refined legacy, it's no surprise that the Lexicon 224 remains one of the most popular digital reverb units of all time. The result of using the very same algorithms and control processor code from the original hardware, the UAD-2 Lexicon 224 precisely captures all eight reverb programs and the chorus program based on the Lexicon 224's final and hard-to-find firmware version 4.4. In UA's exhaustive modeling tradition, the Lexicon 224 plug-in also incorporates the original unit's input transformers and early AD/DA 12-bit gain stepping converters nailing the entire analog and digital circuit paths right down to the last detail. Additionally, the Lexicon 224 emulation for UAD-2 features direct input and presets from famous Lexicon 224 users, including Chuck Zwicky (Prince, Jeff Beck), Eli Janney (Jet, Ryan Adams), David Isaac (Eric Clapton, Luther Vandross), E.T. Thorngren (Talking Heads, Bob Marley), and Kevin Killen (U2, Peter Gabriel). History Developed by renowned physicist/engineer Dr. David Griesinger, the Lexicon 224 is the most ubiquitous and best-selling studio digital reverb ever made. The original 224 was a landmark achievement in digital reverb and served as the very product to put Lexicon on the studio map and a remote control on every console. The 224's Concert Hall A program is considered to be one of the finest reverbs ever made, and its plate programs practically defined the 80's drum sound.
- 186 -
Chapter 18: Lexicon 224
Parameters
Every tunable parameter from the original is present in the Lexicon 224 plug-in, and exposed as dedicated controls inviting easy experimentation and sonic exploration. All seven algorithms/nine programs are available under the Program selection. Lexicons distinctive Bass/Mid split decay adjustments and Crossover control set the highly tunable reverb image, along with the Treble Decay for rolling off high frequencies. Depth sets the apparent distance between source and reverb, while Predelay produces a short delay between the sound source and the onset of reverberation. Diffusion affects how quickly the echo density in the reverb builds up over time. For total authenticity, the UAD-2 only System Noise control enables or disables the inherent dynamic system noise of the original Lexicon 224 hardware. Specifically, disabling System Noise enables a more modern (i.e., cleaner) sound, removing the modeled gain stepping, parameter zippering, and quiescent noise. The unique Lexicon 224 Mode Enhancement and Decay Optimization controls improve reverb clarity. For insert use, the UAD-2 only Dry/Wet and Solo parameters control the effect mix within the plug-in. Clicking the OPEN text to the right of the display panel exposes several hidden controls, including Input/Output gain and Pitch Shift, and even a selectable Bug Fix mode which enables/disables historical bugs fixes from the Hall B and Chorus programs. Taken together, the Lexicon 224 emulation for UAD-2 is the worlds most exhaustive and authentic model of a true studio classic.
The original Lexicon 224 Digital Reverberator hardware
All visual and aural references to Lexicon products and all use of Lexicon trademarks are being made with written permission from Harman International Industries, Inc.
- 187 -
Lexicon 224 Screenshot
Figure 60. The Lexicon 224 plug-in window
- 188 -
Graphical User Interface The original Lexicon 224 consists of two hardware elements. The mainframe rack-mountable 4U chassis contains the power supply, circuitry, and audio input/output connectors. The remote control unit has a display, buttons, and sliders which control the 224 parameters and functionality. Some of these buttons and sliders have dual and even triple functionality, which makes using certain buried functions a tricky procedure. The UAD Lexicon 224 interface resembles the appearance and functionality of the original hardware remote control. Operation has been simplified however by reassigning the buried shift functions to the buttons that are no longer necessary in a plug-in (such as managing saved programs). Additional parameters are exposed by opening a panel cover. Lexicon 224 Programs The original Lexicon 224 hardware has programs that are defined by the firmware ROM (Read-Only Memory chip) installed in the unit. A Lexicon 224 program is comprised of a unique DSP algorithm and an initial set of factory parameter values voiced by Lexicon. In modern terminology, these initial values would be called a preset. In Lexicon 224 hardware-speak, a program is called (loaded) which selects the DSP algorithm and sets the default recommended factory parameter values. These settings can then be modified with the various controls and saved in a user register for later recall. The plug-in behaves the same way, except user registers are not implemented. Instead, user settings are stored within the session file or they can be saved as a preset for later recall (like all other UAD plug-ins). Lexicon 224 version 4.4 firmware contains nine programs (the maximum available for the unit), consisting of eight reverb programs and one chorus program. Descriptions of the various programs can be found on page 203. Lexicon 224 Algorithms The active algorithm determines the inherent sonic character of the current program. Algorithms are changed by selecting a different program; the algorithm cannot be changed within the same program. Lexicon 224 v4.4 contains seven unique algorithms. All seven algorithms and the nine factory programs have been authentically modeled in the UAD Lexicon 224 plug-in. There are more programs than algorithms because some programs use the same algorithm. See Program Descriptions on page 203 for details.
- 189 -
Lexicon 224 Buttons
Like the original hardware, UAD Lexicon 224 buttons are momentary-style and dont latch in a down position. When a function is unavailable within a particular program, the buttons LED will not illuminate when clicked (the LEDs also dont illuminate for the increment/decrement buttons). The first click of an increment/decrement button displays the current value of the parameter; the value is actually changed only with subsequent clicks. This feature enables viewing the current setting without changing it. Tip: For the inc/dec buttons (e.g., Reverb Diffusion), the value can be continuously changed by holding the button down.
Lexicon 224 Sliders
The six sliders control the main reverb parameters within a program. These are the most obvious controls to reach for when fine-tuning a reverb program to best suit the material at hand. In P9 Chorus A, the first four sliders dont control the labeled parameters. See P9 Chorus A on page 204 for descriptions of the sliders in this program. Tip: Clicking a slider cap will show its value in the Numerical Display. Clicking the text label of any slider will return that slider to the default value for the active program.
Inputs & Outputs
The Lexicon 224 hardware has two inputs (see Mono/Stereo below), and four discrete outputs, labeled as A, B, C, and D. Outputs A and C were designed to be used as the main stereo left/right outputs. The other two outputs, B and D, are implemented in some programs for use as quadraphonic reverb. The UAD Lexicon 224 fully models the individual sonics of all four outputs when available in the program algorithm. The alternate B and D outputs are available via the Rear Outs control (page 197). Note: The dry signal at the Lexicon 224 output is completely unprocessed.
The Lexicon 224 hardware has dual channel inputs (left and right) and is a true stereo processor. Like the hardware, when the UAD Lexicon 224 plug-in is used in a stereo-in/stereo out configuration, the left and right channel signals are both processed. When used in a mono-in/stereo out configuration, the mono input is sent to both channels of the stereo processor.
- 190 -
When configured as mono-in/mono-out (MIMO), output A is used exclusively except in programs 2, 4, and 9, where outputs A and C are summed into one monophonic signal. This implementation is recommended in the original hardware manual. If Rear Outs is enabled in MIMO mode, outputs B and D are used instead of A and C. See Table 17 on page 205 for a list of outputs used with each program in this configuration. Primary & Hidden Controls The primary controls (those that are most typically used) are on the main remote control panel interface. Additional (less typically used) controls are available in a hidden control panel. The hidden control panel (Figure 63 on page 200) is accessed by clicking the OPEN text label to the right of the Display Panel. For detailed descriptions of all parameters, see Primary Controls on page 193 and Hidden Controls on page 200. Parameter Ranges & Default Values The parameter value ranges, default values, and availability of particular parameters within a given program may vary depending on which program is active. Parameter ranges are listed in the individual control descriptions. Default parameter values for each program are listed in Table 18 on page 205. Note: Extreme parameter settings can cause Lexicon 224 to self-oscillate or cause other unexpected sounds. This behavior is identical to the original hardware. Display Panel The Lexicon 224 display panel (Figure 61 below) consists of four display elements: Numerical Value, LED Value, Stereo Level Meters, and Overflow indicator. Exactly what is displayed here is dependent on the parameter being edited (if any) and the state of the Display Hold switch (page 202).
Figure 61. The Lexicon 224 Display Panel
Numerical Value
The three-character Numerical Value Display shows the value of parameters as they are being edited. The value of the edited parameter is displayed for 1.5 seconds unless the Display Hold switch is set to infinite, in which case the last edited parameter value continues to be displayed.
- 191 -
If Display Hold is set to 1.5 (the default value), after parameters are edited, the value displayed here reverts after 1.5 seconds to a reverb time which is related to the combined Bass and Mid slider values. This relationship is based on approximations designed by the original Lexicon engineers; the actual decay times may not match the displayed value.
Value LED
The Value LED shows the units of the numerical value being displayed for a particular control. For parameters in the time domain, the sec (seconds) or ms (milliseconds) LED is lit. For parameters in the frequency domain, the Hz (Hertz) or kHz (kilohertz) LED is lit. For parameters that have no units value (e.g., Dry/Wet Mix), the value LED does not illuminate.
LED Meters
The six-segment LED meters display the left and right signal input levels at the Lexicon 224 analog-to-digital converters, which are fully modeled. The Meter LEDs indicate levels at 24 dB, 18 dB, 12 dB, 6 dB, and 0 dB. When the 0 dB LED illuminates, input clipping has occurred.
Overow LED
The Overflow LED illuminates when an arithmetic processor overflow has occurred. Overflows can happen when loud signals are present at the input, when reverb decay times are long, and/or when self-oscillation occurs. Unexpected sonic artifacts and/or ringing can occur when the processor overflows. Overflow behavior in the hardware is fully modeled in the plug-in. If processor overflows are causing undesirable sounds, overflow can usually be eliminated by reducing the levels with the Input controls, or by reducing the value of the Bass, Mid, and/or Treble Decay controls.
- 192 -
Primary Controls
Program The Program buttons (Figure 62) are used to specify which of the nine default Lexicon programs, and its associated algorithm, is active. See Lexicon 224 Programs on page 189 for an overview. Eight reverb programs and one chorus program are available. Click a reverb program button 1 8 to select that program. To select the chorus program, shift+click any program button, or click the CLK=CHORUS text label. The program button LED indicates which program is active except in chorus mode, when all eight program button LEDs are illuminated.
Figure 62. The Lexicon 224 Program Buttons
When a program is loaded, the original default Lexicon recommended factory settings for that algorithm are also loaded at the same time, overwriting previous settings (except when Immediate mode is active; see page 196 for details). Program settings can then be adjusted to taste using any available controls. Program Descriptions on page 203 contains details about each program. Important: If the program is changed when Immediate mode is disabled, settings from the previously selected program are lost. To retain custom program settings for future use, save the settings as a plug-in preset by using the UAD Toolbar or host application preset management techniques. Reverb Time Reverb Time is the duration of the decay of the reverberant sound (the reverb tail). The reverb tail time is separated into two frequency component bands, Bass and Mid. The separation frequency of the two bands is defined by the Crossover control.
- 193 -
Bass
The Bass slider defines the reverb decay time for the frequencies below the Crossover value. Higher Bass values result in longer bass frequency decay times (when Crossover is not set too low). The Bass reverb decay time value, in seconds, is shown in the Numerical Display. The available range is 0.6 seconds to 70 seconds. This control works in conjunction with the Crossover parameter, which defines the range of the bass frequencies affected by the Bass control. Therefore adjusting Bass may have little audible effect if Crossover is set to a very low value.
Mid
The Mid slider defines the reverb decay time for the frequencies above the Crossover value. Higher Mid values result in longer high frequency decay times (when Crossover is not set too high). The Mid reverb decay value, in seconds, is shown in the Numerical Display. The available range is 0.6 seconds to 70 seconds. Mid works in conjunction with the Crossover parameter, which defines the range of high frequencies affected by the Mid control. Therefore adjusting Mid may have little audible effect if Crossover is set to a very high value. Mid is a slightly misleading label, because this control actually affects the reverb decay for all frequencies above the Crossover value (not just the midrange). However, because the highs in the reverb can be rolled off with the Treble Decay control (and usually are), the midrange frequencies are often more prominent than a full-range tail.
Crossover
This control defines the crossover frequency (the split point) between the bass and upper frequency bands in the reverb tail. Higher Crossover values make the Bass parameter control a wider range of frequencies. Conversely, lower values make the Mid parameter control a wider range of frequencies. The available range is 100 Hz to 10.9 kHz. Crossover affects the reverb decay because it works in conjunction with the Bass and Mid reverb time parameters, which both define the length of the reverb tail (one control for each frequency band). If those parameters are set to very short times, the result of adjusting Crossover may be very subtle. Note: Crossover will have no apparent effect if Bass and Mid are set to the same value.
- 194 -
Treble Decay
Treble Decay sets a frequency above which decay is very rapid. Lower values will produce a darker reverb with less high frequency content. If Treble Decay is set very low, then adjusting Bass, Mid, and Crossover may have little to no audible effect. The available range is 100 Hz to 10.9 kHz. Tip: Treble Decay adjusts the AMOUNT of reverb tail highs, while Mid adjusts the TIME.
Depth
Depth sets the apparent distance between a source and its reverb, much like the positioning of microphones in an echo chamber. As the value is increased, the apparent distance from the source increases. The available range is 0 71, with zero being close and 71 being far (the numbers are arbitrary). The default value is program dependent. Note: Depth is not available in P9 Chorus A. In this program the display is not updated when the Depth slider is moved.
Diffusion
In most programs, Diffusion affects how quickly the echo density in the reverb builds up over time. In the original hardware, this parameter was usually referred to as Shift-Depth (changing the diffusion value required holding down the shift button while adjusting the depth amount). Click the left (<) decrement button to decrease the Diffusion value; click the right (>) increment button to increase the value. The available range is 0 63 (the numbers are arbitrary). The default value is program dependent; Table 18 on page 205 lists the default values for each program. Note: Diffusion is unavailable in P4 Acoustic Chamber. Zero is the least dense setting. Density increases as the Diffusion value is increased, but setting Diffusion higher than 40 can actually sound less dense. The fastest density buildup is achieved with Diffusion values near the middle of the range (approximately 32-37).
- 195 -
Higher Diffusion values are frequently desirable when the material has a lot of percussion. Higher Diffusion can also contribute to a smoother-sounding reverb. With low Diffusion values the early reverb will be grainy and sparse, but will produce a clear, bright sound that is very useful with strings, horns, and vocals. Low Diffusion is also useful in classical music or in adding a sense of depth to an overall mix. Note that in Lexicon 224, lower frequencies are generally less diffuse. Note: If Immediate mode is active, the Diffusion value is retained when changing programs. Predelay Predelay produces a short delay between the sound source and the onset of reverberation. Higher Predelay values increase the time before reverb onset. The range of this parameter varies depending on the active program; see Table 16 on page 196 for the available values. The default value is program dependent.
Table 16. Lexicon 224 Predelay Ranges Program 1. Small Concert Hall B 2. Vocal Plate 3. Large Concert Hall B 4. Acoustic Chamber 5. Percussion Plate A Predelay Range 24 - 152 0 - 107 24 - 152 25 - 255 0 - 107 Program 6. Small Concert Hall A 7. Room A 8. Constant Density Plate A 9. Chorus A Predelay Range 24 - 152 24 - 255 5 - 185 0 - 253
Note: Predelay values are in milliseconds.
Immediate
When Immediate (IMMED) is enabled, current parameter values are retained when a new program is selected. When Immediate is inactive and a program is selected, the Lexicon default factory preset parameter values for the program are loaded and the control sliders move to the preset values. Enabling Immediate mode is convenient for quickly auditioning the various program algorithms using the same persistent parameter values. Disabling Immediate mode is convenient for quickly auditioning the various programs with the Lexicon factory default settings. The default Immediate value is OFF. Immediate affects the following parameters: Bass, Mid, Crossover, Treble Decay, Depth, Predelay, Diffusion, Mode Enhancement, Pitch Shift, Decay Optimization, and Rear Outs.
- 196 -
Important: When Immediate is off and a program is changed, previously modified parameter values are lost, unless the settings were saved as a preset or if the session file was previously saved so it can be recalled. System Noise This UAD-only control enables or disables the modeled inherent dynamic system noise of the original Lexicon 224 hardware. Disabling System Noise enables a more modern-sounding (i.e., cleaner) 224. Click the button to toggle the state; System Noise is active when the button LED is lit. The default state is ON. The elements of the modeled System Noise include quantization effects (at input A/D, output D/A, and within the algorithm), zipper/stepping noise when adjusting parameters, transformer distortion, and the quiescent noise floor. Zipper/stepping noise when adjusting parameters can be defeated by disabling System Noise. However, zipper/stepping noise in delay modulation (i.e., Mode Enhancement) can only be reduced, but not completely defeated, by disabling System Noise. Note: System Noise is a global (per instance) parameter; its state does not change when different programs are selected. Rear Outs The Rear Outs control is available to select the alternate pair when the algorithm has alternate sonics at outputs B and D. See Inputs & Outputs on page 190 for an overview of the hardware implementation.
Rear Outs Notes
The left/right outputs of the plug-in always reect hardware outputs A and C respectively when Rear Outs is inactive, and outputs B and D respectively when Rear Outs is active. Outputs A and C are recommended for stereo use (the rear outs are generally not used in typical applications). Outputs A and C are identical to D and B respectively in the following programs: P2 Vocal Plate A, P5 Percussion Plate A, P8 Constant Density Plate A, and P9 Chorus A. Consequently, the Rear Outs control effectively swaps the left/right outputs in these programs.
- 197 -
Mode Enhancement
Mode Enhancement makes the sound of the Lexicon 224 programs more natural by preventing room modes from ringing in the reverb tail. Mode Enhancement works by continuously modulating certain delay lines (taps) within the program algorithms, which increases the effective density without thickening the reverb itself. Mode Enhancement is factory-optimized for each program and should not require adjustment in typical use. For this reason, it was deliberately made difficult to access in the original hardware. However, creative use of the parameter is encouraged by making it easier to access in the plug-in. Mode Enhancement has three control elements: Enable, Amount, and Pitch Shift. As in the original hardware, lower values of Mode Enhance Amount and higher values of Pitch Shift increase movement and make the result more prominent. Note: The Mode Enhance Amount and Pitch Shift controls have no effect unless the Mode Enhance Enable control is active.
Mode Enhance Enable
This button enables or disables Mode Enhancement for the active program. Mode Enhancement is active when the button LED is lit. The default state is ON for all programs. Tip: This control, just as with the original hardware, resets the algorithm. Therefore Mode Enhance Enable can be used to quickly kill the reverb tail while staying in the same program.
Mode Enhance Amount
These two adjacent buttons control the amount of Mode Enhancement, or technically speaking, the amount of time between delay line updates. Click the left (<) button to decrement the value; click the right (>) button to increment the value. The available range is 1 through 16. Lower values increase the effect. Pitch Shift is a secondary parameter of Mode Enhancement that controls the size of the delay line update steps. Lower values produce smaller steps, while higher values produce larger steps. Click the left (<) button to decrement the value; click the right (>) button to increment the value. The available range is 1 through 16. Higher values increase the effect.
Mode Enhance Pitch Shift
- 198 -
The Pitch Shift controls are accessed in the Hidden Controls panel. See page 200 for access details. Decay Optimization Decay Optimization improves the Lexicon 224 reverb clarity and naturalness by dynamically reducing reverb diffusion and coloration in response to input signal levels. However, if set too high, it can make the decay less even. Decay Optimization has two control elements: Enable and Amount. Decay Optimization is factory-optimized for each program and should not require adjustment in typical use. For this reason, it was deliberately made difficult to access in the original hardware. However, creative use of the parameter is encouraged by making it easier to access in the plug-in. Decay Optimize Enable This button enables Decay Optimization for the active program. Decay Optimization is active when the button LED is lit. The default state is ON. Note: Decay Optimization is unavailable for P8 Constant Density Plate A and P9 Chorus. Decay Optimize Amount These two adjacent buttons control the amount of Decay Optimization. Click the left (<) button to decrement the value; click the right (>) button to increment the value. The available range is 1 through 16. As in the original hardware, lower values make the result more prominent. Note: The Decay Optimization Amount controls have no effect unless the Decay Optimization Enable control is active. Mix Controls The Dry, Wet, and Solo parameters control the effect mix in the plug-in. These controls are not available in the original hardware. Note: The Mix controls are global parameters; their state does not change when different programs are selected.
- 199 -
Solo
When Solo is activated, the Dry/Wet mix is set to 100% wet and the Dry/Wet controls are deactivated. Solo mode is optimal when using Lexicon 224 in the classic reverb configuration (placed on an effect group/bus that is configured for use with channel sends). When Lexicon 224 is used on a channel insert, Solo should be deactivated. The default state is ON. Note: Solo is a global (per Lexicon 224 plug-in instance) control.
Dry/Wet
These two buttons control the balance between the reverb processor and the source signal when Solo mode is inactive. Click the DRY button to reduce the reverb amount; click the WET button to increase the reverb amount. The Dry/Wet mix is indicated in the Numerical Display as a percentage. A value of 50 produces an equal blend of the wet and dry signals. Values greater than 50 emphasize the wet signal, and values less than 50 emphasize the dry signal. Clicking the DRY button once will decrement the value by one percent; clicking WET once will increment the value by one percent. To increase the fine resolution when adjusting these controls, hold SHIFT (on the computer keyboard) when clicking the controls. Shift+click will decrement (DRY) and increment (WET) by a value of 0.1 percent instead of one percent. The Dry/Wet controls are typically used when Lexicon 224 is inserted on individual channels. When Lexicon 224 is used on a group/bus in a typical reverb send/return configuration, set to 100% WET or activate SOLO mode.
Hidden Controls
Additional UAD controls are available in a hidden control panel. Refer to Figure 63 in parameter descriptions.
Figure 63. The Lexicon 224 Hidden Controls
- 200 -
Access
The hidden controls are exposed by clicking the OPEN text to the right of the Display Panel. Conversely, the exposed panel is closed by clicking the CLOSE text while the panel is open. Note: The last-used state of the Hidden Controls panel (open or closed) is retained when a new Lexicon 224 plug-in is instantiated.
Pitch Shift
Pitch Shift is a component of Mode Enhancement. See Mode Enhance Pitch Shift on page 198 for parameter details. The independent left (L) and right (R) Input Gain parameters control the signal levels at the input to the reverb processor. They do not affect the dry signal, so Input Gain can be used to adjust the wet/dry mix. The default value is 0 dB. The available range is 12 dB. The right channel control is unavailable when Lexicon 224 is used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration. As signal levels into the Lexicon 224 increase, the analog and digital response of the device becomes increasingly nonlinear. If signals are too high, the Lexicon 224 A/D inputs and/or processor can overload, lighting the Overflow LED and causing sonic artifacts. See Overow LED on page 192 for more information. Tip: Click the text label (Input Gain) to return the value of both channels to zero.
Input Gain
Output Level
The independent left (L) and right (R) Output Level parameters control the signal levels at the output of the plug-in. The default value is 0 dB. The available range is (infinite) dB to +12 dB. The right channel control is unavailable when Lexicon 224 is used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration. Tip: Click the text label (Output Level) to return the value of both channels to zero.
Link
Link/unlink allows the left and right controls for Input Gain and Output Level to be unlinked (non-ganged) in order to apply a different value for each channel. Link is inactive when the LED is unlit. Click the Link LED to toggle the state. The default state is ON.
- 201 -
If the left and right controls have different values when link is inactive and Link is engaged, the left channel value is copied to the right channel (thereby overwriting the right channel value). When Link is active, automation data is written and read for the left channel only. The automation for the left channel controls both channels in Link mode. Note: When link is active, modifying the right channel parameters will have no effect when changed from a control surface or when in controls only (non-GUI) mode. Bug Fixes The original Lexicon 224 code contains programming errors in the Hall B and Chorus algorithms. These computer code bugs can cause incorrect Bass decay times (Hall B programs) and undesirable pops and/or thumps in the right channel (Chorus program) with certain source signals and parameter configurations. The bugs have been corrected in the UAD implementation of the plug-in, but we have provided the option of using the original code for the sake of pure authenticity. The UA logo is actually a switch. When the UA logo is illuminated, the source code bugs are fixed. The default state is ON. Click the UA logo to disable the UA bug fixes and revert to the original hardware behavior. Display Hold The Display Hold switch alters the behavior of the Numerical Display (page 191). In the original hardware, the values of parameters that are being modified are displayed for 3 seconds before reverting back to displaying the average decay time. The Hold switch changes this behavior. When set to infinite (), the Numerical Display will continue to show the last modified parameter value. When set to infinite and a program is changed, the average decay time is displayed until a parameter is modified. Note: The last-used state of the Display Hold parameter is retained when a new Lexicon 224 plug-in is instantiated. Power The Power switch is a bypass control. Click the switch to change the Power state. When bypassed, plug-in processing is disabled, and the Display Panel and all button LEDs are dimmed.
- 202 -
Program Descriptions
P1 Small Concert Hall B This program emulates the sound of a small concert hall, with moderate initial density and moderately non-uniform decay. It is optimized for reverb times of 1.5 to 5 seconds (for longer decay times, P3 Large Concert Hall B is recommended instead). The most natural sound is obtained when Bass and Mid are relatively close to the same setting. This program uses the exact same algorithm as P3 Large Concert Hall B. This is a plate reverb emulation optimized for voice. It has low initial density and coloration, resulting in a clear, bright sound. This program uses the exact same algorithm as P5 Percussion Plate A, but with slightly different inherent diffusion. This program emulates the sound of a large concert hall, with low density and minimal coloration. It is optimized for long reverb times. With percussive sounds, increasing the diffusion value is recommended. This program uses the exact same algorithm as P1 Small Concert Hall B. This program sounds like a chamber, but with less initial density. It tends to sound best with shorter reverb times (2 to 5 seconds). The most chamber-like sound is obtained with Depth at a value of zero. Diffusion is preset in this program and cannot be modified. Unlike all other Lexicon 224 programs, this algorithm has monophonic input. This is a plate reverb emulation optimized for percussive sounds. It has high initial density and coloration, and sounds best with shorter reverb times. This program uses the exact same algorithm as P2 Vocal Plate, but with slightly different inherent diffusion. This program is similar to P1 Small Concert Hall B, except it is brighter overall and the Treble Decay control is more gentle. The original hardware manual recommends equalizing this reverb return about +3 dB below 200 Hz to add to the richness and naturalness of the reverb. Program 7 is a room simulator with moderate to high initial density and low to moderate coloration. It sounds great on speech and many types of music. This program presents an especially wide output when used with a stereo input source.
P2 Vocal Plate
P3 Large Concert Hall B
P4 Acoustic Chamber
P5 Percussion Plate A
P6 Small Concert Hall A
P7 Room A
- 203 -
P8 Constant Density Plate A
In naturally occurring reverb, new reflections are continuously added to the decaying sound over time. This sonic build-up increases density and coloration in the reverb tail. P8 Constant Density Plate A has high initial density and coloration (giving a plate type of sound), however the density does not increase over time and remains inherently constant. This can result in less swoosh in the reverb tail and provides another creative option. Decay Optimization and true stereo input are unavailable in this program (inputs are always summed to mono, even in stereo-in/stereo-out configurations). The Chorus A program is an eight-voice chorus with four voices on each stereo channel. Each voice has a time delay which varies randomly and independently, resulting in a thick, rich sound. When Chorus is active, each of the first four sliders controls the gain level for a stereo pair of voices. The sliders are linear faders, not log faders, so the default positions of all four sliders (about 1/2 way up) correspond to gains 6 dB below maximum. The first two voice pairs have overlapping delay ranges. Phasing/flanging effects can be achieved by setting their gains to similar levels. Phasing/flanging can also be achieved (with a mono or centered input) when the left and right channels are mixed together, such as when used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration. The Diffusion control is active in this program. Diffusion acts upon the third and fourth pair of stereo voices, producing a cluster of tightly spaced echoes whose shape is governed by the Diffusion control. The Lexicon 224 is one of the few processors that has diffusion on chorus voices; this feature is a primary factor in its distinctive character. Note: The Bass, Mid, Crossover, and Treble Decay behaviors are unavailable in P9 Chorus A. Instead, each of these sliders controls the level of a stereo voice pair.
P9 Chorus A
MIMO Program Outputs
When Lexicon 224 is used in a mono-in/mono-out (MIMO) configuration, the hardware outputs that are used for the plug-in are listed in Table 17 on page 205. These software assignments are per the guidelines in the original hardware manual and cannot be modified.
- 204 -
Table 17. Lexicon 224 Outputs Used With Monophonic Output Program 1. Small Concert Hall B 2. Vocal Plate 3. Large Concert Hall B 4. Acoustic Chamber 5. Percussion Plate A Output(s) A A+C A A+C A+C Program 6. Small Concert Hall A 7. Room A 8. Constant Density Plate A 9. Chorus A Output(s) A A A A+C
Default Parameter Values
Table 18 below lists the default values of all available parameters for each program.
Table 18. Lexicon 224 Default Parameter Values Program 1. Small Concert Hall B 2. Vocal Plate 3. Large Concert Hall B 4. Acoustic Chamber 5. Percussion Plate A 6. Small Concert Hall A 7. Room A 8. Constant Density Plate A 9. Chorus A Bass Mid 3.0 2.2 3.4 2.8 2.2 3.0 1.8 1.8 N/A 2.0 2.2 2.6 2.2 2.2 2.0 1.8 1.8 N/A Crossover 540Hz 1kHz 540Hz 1kHz 1kHz 540Hz 540Hz 540Hz N/A Treble PrePitch Decay Depth Diffusion Enhance Decay delay Shift Opt. 4.40 10.9 4.00 6.60 10.9 6.60 4.40 10.9 N/A 23 00 21 00 00 23 23 23 N/A 21 04 01 N/A 37 28 24 37 22 024 000 024 025 000 024 024 005 012 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 07 02 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 01 02 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 N/A N/A
Lexicon 224 Latency
The Lexicon 224 uses an internal resampling technique to facilitate its sonic quality. This resampling results in a slightly larger latency than other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information.
- 205 -
CHAPTER 19
Little Labs IBP
Overview
The Little Labs IBP Phase Alignment Tool easily eliminates the undesirable hollow comb-filtered sound when combining out-of-phase and partially out-of-phase audio signals. Designed as a phase problem-solving device, the award-winning Little Labs IBP (In-Between Phase) has established itself with audio engineers as not only a fix it tool, but as a device for manipulating audio phase as a creative, tonal color tool as well. Whether combining direct and microphone signals, acoustic guitar and vocal mics, drum kit mics, or multiple split-guitar amps, the recorded audio signal phase can be quickly and easily controlled with the Little Labs IBP Phase Alignment Tool.
Little Labs IBP Screenshot
Figure 64. The UAD Little Labs IBP plug-in window
- 206 -
Chapter 19: Little Labs IBP
Little Labs IBP Controls

All parameters are clearly labeled with control names. Please refer to Figure 64 on page 206 for control descriptions. Delay Adjust The Delay Adjust parameter is unique to Universal Audios workstation version of the Little Labs IBP. Delay Adjust is a continuously variable control that simply delays the input signal from 0.0 to 4.0 milliseconds. Unlike the analog Phase Adjust parameter, which is frequency dependent, Delay Adjust is purely digital and shifts all frequencies equally. Delay Adjust accomplishes the same function as manually moving an audio region forwards in the timeline so it plays back a little later in relation to other regions. Delay Adjust Bypass Phase Adjust This switch bypasses the Delay Adjust parameter. Delay Adjust is bypassed when the switch is engaged (darker). Phase Adjust is the main parameter in the Little Labs IBP. It is a continuously variable control that shifts the phase of the input signal. The range of Phase Adjust is either 90 or 180, dependent on the Phase Adjust 90/180 switch. The Little Labs IBP hardware is an all-analog device that uses analog allpass filters to produce phase shifting. Allpass filters displace signals in time as a function of frequency (they are frequency dependent). The modeled UAD version accurately models the hardware along with all its idiosyncrasies. Therefore phase shifting using the Phase Adjust knob is not perfect like mathematically-manipulated signals in the digital domain. When Phase Adjust is set to 180 on one of two identical tracks side-by-side, the signals will not cancel as you may expect. Note: If a standard 180 phase shift is desired, use the Phase Invert switch. If digitally pure frequency-independent phase shift is desired, use the Delay Adjust parameter. Phase Adjust Bypass Phase Invert This switch bypasses the Phase Adjust parameter. The signal phase is normal when the switch is engaged (darker). This switch inverts the polarity of the input signal, like the phase button on a mixing console. Phase is inverted when the switch is engaged (darker).
- 207 -
Phase Adjust 90/180
This switch determines the range of the Phase Adjust parameter. This is useful when finer Phase Adjust resolution is desired. When the switch is disengaged, the Phase Adjust range is 180. When the switch is engaged (darker), the Phase Adjust range is 90.
Phase Center Lo/Hi
This switch sets the range of frequency emphasis. When the switch is disengaged (lighter), the Phase Center range is Hi. When the switch is engaged (darker), the Phase Center range is Lo. Note: Use of the 90/180 and Lo/Hi parameters are typically used for individual tone signals such as a kick drum or toms as opposed to program material.
Power
This switch disables the plug-in. When the switch is disengaged, the plug-in is bypassed. When the switch is engaged (darker), the plug-in is active and the green LED is illuminated.
Little Labs IBP Latency

The Little Labs IBP uses an internal upsampling technique. This upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information. Note: Compensating for Little Labs IBP is not required if the host application supports full plug-in delay compensation throughout the signal path, or when it is used only on the outputs.
- 208 -
CHAPTER 20
Little Labs VOG

Bass Resonance Processor
For many top engineers, the Little Labs VOG (Voice Of God) is the ultimate bass resonance tool for mixing. Available for the first time as a plug-in, the Little Labs-authenticated VOG for the UAD-2 platform accurately models the sonic characteristics of this unique 500-series hardware audio processor in every detail. The VOG is used to accurately target and accentuate low frequency material, from vocals to bass guitar and drums adding both heft and precision beyond a simple EQ. Put simply, its like a magnifying glass for the bottom end of your mixes. One of the most important components of any good mix is blending the low frequencies together in such a way that they dont conflict. No matter what style of music you make from rock to reggae, to hip-hop to hardcore few tools are as easy to use and effective as the popular Little Labs VOG. History Little Labs has a knack for creating problem-solving tools for the studio that perform equally well as creative coloration effects and tone-boxes. The original collaboration between UA and Little Labs saw the release of the UAD Little Labs IBP plug-in widely recognized as one of the most versatile phase correction plug-ins available today. Continued collaboration between Universal Audio and Little Labs now provides another instant studio classic, the VOG. Upon its introduction in 2009, owners of the hardware VOG quickly realized multiple units are a must have one for bass, kick drum, toms, low frequency percussion, and especially vocals. Fortunately, with the Little Labs VOG plug-in for the UAD-2, customers can have as many instances as they need to make the low end come to life.
- 209 -
Chapter 20: Little Labs VOG
Little Labs VOG Screenshot
Figure 65. The UAD Little Labs VOG plug-in window
Two simple knobs allow you to dial in the VOGs desired frequency and effect amplitude. The center of the sweepable frequency range is selected via two push-buttons of 40 Hz and 100 Hz, or you can set the center to 200 Hz by pressing both buttons simultaneously. Everything below the targeted frequency peak is rolled off in a smooth curve up to 24 dB per octave ensuring that the low end is always tight and out of the mud, while the frequen-
- 210 -
cies above remain intact. The higher the amplitude of the peak resonance frequency, the more you cut off the mud below, effectively performing two functions at once. A dedicated flat button allows you to quickly audition A/B comparisons. In Use The VOG is intended for mixing, mastering, post-production sweetening, sound design, and audio restoration. Use it to easily simulate proximity effect for adding chest resonance and heft to vocals. Simple adjustments will also yield enormous sounding drums just like tweaking the tension of a drumhead. Or, completely transform the tonal characteristics of electric bass tracks for example, go from a solid body sound to a chambered body sound in seconds. The VOGs flexibility makes it the right choice on a wide range of musical sources; its the perfect way to tune the low end of any mix for incredible detail and punch. Unlike the original hardware (which is monophonic), the plug-in enables stereo use with one control set, providing perfectly matched stereo response. When the plug-in is used in mono-in/stereo-out and stereo-in/stereo-out configurations, the controls affect both the left and right signals.
Stereo Functionality
Little Labs VOG Parameters

Amplitude Amplitude adjusts the amount of the effect. Increasing the control boosts the gain of the frequencies determined by the Frequency and Center controls. Note: The control values for Amplitude, which range from 0 10, are arbitrary and do not reflect a particular dB value. Frequency This control adjusts the target frequency of the effect. Frequencies above the current setting are boosted by the amount set with the Amplitude control. Frequencies below the current setting are attenuated by 24 dB per octave. The available frequency range is determined by the Center button settings, and are shown in Table 19 on page 212.
- 211 -
Like the original hardware, increasing the Frequency value (rotating clockwise) actually lowers the target frequency (increases the low end). Changes to this setting are heard only if Amplitude is set above zero. Note: The control values for Frequency, which range from 0 10, are arbitrary and do not reflect a particular frequency value. Center The two Center switches define the active center frequency of the effect, which in turn determines the available frequency range. The four available center frequencies, and resulting frequency ranges, are shown in Table 19 below. A switch is ON when its LED is red. A green LED indicates the switch is OFF.
Table 19. Center Switch Frequency Values 40 Button LED Green Red Green Red 100 Button LED Green Green Red Red Center Frequency (Hz) 40 42 100 200 Frequency Range (Hz) 18 60 20 62 50 180 100 305
Flat
The EQ circuitry is bypassed when Flat is enabled (red LED); the circuit is active when Flat is disabled (green LED). When Flat is on, the dry signal path of the hardware is still being modeled and DSP is used. For true bypass, use the Power switch. Power is the plug-in bypass control. When set to OFF, emulation processing is disabled, the LEDs are dimmed, and DSP usage is reduced (if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is disabled). Power is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal.
Power
- 212 -
The Little Labs VOG hardware unit
- 213 -
CHAPTER 21
Manley Massive Passive EQ

Overview
Universal Audios UAD Powered Plug-In versions of the Manley Massive Passive EQs represent UAs most ambitious and detailed EQ model to date. The two-channel, four-band Manley Massive Passive tube EQ utilizes design strengths from choice console, parametric, graphic, and Pultec EQs delivering a fundamentally different sounding EQ that is beyond compare. The incredibly natural, organic results of the Manley design method evidenced on albums such as Wilcos Yankee Hotel Foxtrot, Amon Tobins Foley Room and Tori Amos A Piano: The Collection demonstrate how the Massive Passives natural treatment of a signal lends itself to both radical tonal shaping as well as delicate vocal shading or subtle mastering enhancement. Painstakingly modeled over a six-month period, and rigorously scrutinized for authenticity by Manleys engineering team, Universal Audios standard and mastering versions of the Massive Passive EQ plug-in are included. Both capture the behavior of the original hardware; from the unusual filter curves, to the multiple band interdependencies, right down to the tube amplifier distortion, and all-important transformer/inductor hysteresis. Passive refers specifically to the tone shaping elements of the equalizer, which use only resistors, inductors, and capacitors to create all frequency changes. The Massive Passive utilizes older parallel concepts rather than non-interactive series designs as defined by George Massenburgs original parametric EQ. The Frequency controls intentionally interact with one another, as do the Gain and Bandwidth controls. While this may result in the appearance of some unorthodox knob positions, it is specifically these band interdependencies between all bell, shelf and cut filters that allow for the Massive Passives natural and organic sound.
- 214 -
Chapter 21: Manley Massive Passive EQ
Massive Passive Screenshots
Figure 66. The Massive Passive plug-in window
Figure 67. The Massive Passive Mastering plug-in window
Unusual EQ Conventions
The Massive Passive has design and operation characteristics that make it unique in the EQ world. Some of these factors mean the Massivo may not respond in a manner that you would expect from typical EQs. Keeping these points in mind may help you obtain more satisfactory results. See Notes from Manley Laboratories on page 224 for more tips. Passive EQ No active components are used in the EQ circuits, just like revered vintage EQs. This can make some adjustments respond in more subtle ways. The EQ bands are routed in parallel instead of serially, so gain values for the bands dont add up like most EQs. For example, if two bands in the same channel are boosted 20 dB at 2.7kHz, youll get much less than 40 dB of boost at 2.7kHz.
Parallel Topology
- 215 -
Unique Shelves
Most EQs offer a shelving mode for the edge bands only. Massive Passive offers the shelving option on all bands for expanded sonic possibilities, such as staircase EQ curves. One result of not using negative feedback loops in the design is that the gain control for a band cannot have a bipolar boost and cut control. Only band gain is available; how that band gain is applied, either as a boost or as a cut, is specified with a separate toggle switch. Due in large part to the above points, the Massive Passive controls are much more interactive with, and interdependent upon, each other. We encourage experimentation with an open mind, without expectations of what a visual interpretation of what control settings should do.
No negative feedback loops
Control Interaction
Massive Passive Mastering EQ

Manley Labs developed the Massive Passive Mastering EQ to better address the specific needs of mastering engineers. Your UAD Massive Passive license includes both the standard and mastering versions, available as two individual plug-ins. The Massive Passive Mastering has nearly the same features and control set (plus all the musicality of) the standard version with a few tweaks that offer more practical functionality for program material. The Mastering version features include: Stepped channel gain, band gain, and bandwidth controls for repeatability. Channel gain and band gain ranges are reduced for ner resolution. Low/high pass lter frequencies and slopes are optimized for mastering. The Mastering Massive Passive is identified by the all-black flat top band gain and bandwidth control knobs and the word MASTERING near the center of the interface (Figure 67 on page 215).
- 216 -
Standard vs. Mastering Versions

The layout and function of the Massive Passive controls are essentially identical for both the Standard and Mastering versions. The exact control differences between the controls are detailed in Table 20 below.
Table 20. Control differences between Massive Passive versions Standard Channel Gain Range Band Gain Range High Pass Filter Values (Hz) Low Pass Filter Values (kHz) Low Pass Filter Slope Channel Gain, Band Gain, Bandwidth -6 dB to +4 dB 20 dB 22, 39, 68, 120, 220 6, 7.5, 9, 12, 18 18 dB/oct (6K, 7K5, 9K) 30 dB/oct (12K) Modified Elliptical (18K) Continuous Mastering 2.5 dB (0.5 dB steps) 11dB (16 steps) 12, 16, 23, 30, 39 15, 20, 27, 40, 52* 18 dB per octave* (*30 dB/oct @ 52K) Stepped
Massive Passive Band Controls

Massive Passive has two identical channels (left and right). Each channel has four EQ bands, with five controls in each band. Because both UAD Massive Passive plug-ins operate the same way (and the bands of each channel are identical), the control descriptions for each band are only detailed once. Important: See Standard vs. Mastering Versions on page 217 for the exact differences between the Massive Passive parameters. Boost/Cut/Out This three-position toggle switch determines whether the frequency band will be boosted, cut, or disabled altogether. The amount of boost or cut to be applied to the band is determined by the Band Gain control. When Boost or Cut is selected, its label illuminates (green for Boost, red for Cut). When the switch is in the OUT position, the band is disabled. Note: When set to OUT, the other band controls have no effect.
- 217 -
Shelf/Bell
The Shelf/Bell toggle switch defines the shape of the filter band. A unique aspect of this control is that unlike other EQs where only the edge frequencies offer a shelving mode, with Massive Passive all bands can be used in either mode for expanded sonic possibilities. Note: The Bandwidth control (page 219) affects the slope of the band filters in both Shelf and Bell modes.
Shelf
The two lowest (leftmost) bands can each be in Low Shelf mode; the two highest (rightmost) bands can each be in High Shelf mode. Shelf slopes generally boost or cut towards the highs or lows (thus the high shelves and low shelves). The two middle shelves are almost the same as the outer ones but just have other (interleaved) frequency choices.
Bell
Bell curves focus their boost and cut at a given frequency (the Frequency on page 221) and the further away the signal is from that frequency, the less boost or cut is applied. Band Gain This control determines the amount of EQ gain to be applied to the band. The range is from zero gain (flat) at the fully counter-clockwise position, to the maximum value at the fully clockwise position. Whether the gain is applied as a boost or cut is defined by the Boost/Cut/Out switch (page 217). The range for the standard version is continuously variable at up to 20 dB; the range for the Mastering version is up to 11 dB in 16 steps (in both versions the maximum value depends on the Bandwidth control). Important: When Gain for the band is set to zero, the other band controls have no effect. Unlike most EQs, this control is not flat at the center position with the gain cut or boosted by moving the control to left or right of center. This design allows the band gain to operate at twice the knob resolution as that of a conventional dual-purposed control, as well as facilitating a quicker and more accurate return to zero.
- 218 -
Gain has a fair amount of interaction with the Bandwidth control. The maximum band gain is available in Shelf mode when Bandwidth is fully counter-clockwise; less band gain is available in Shelf mode as the Bandwidth is decreased (rotated clockwise). Conversely, the maximum gain is available in Bell mode when Bandwidth is fully clockwise; in Bell mode less band gain is available as Bandwidth is decreased (rotated counter-clockwise). Due to the parallel EQ topology, the four band Gain controls also interact with each other unlike typical EQs. For example, if two bands in the same channel are boosted 20 dB at 2.7kHz, youll get much less than 40 dB of boost at 2.7kHz. This also implies that if you first boost one band, that the next three will not seem to do anything if they are at similar frequencies and bandwidths. Bandwidth Bandwidth adjusts the slope or Q of the band filter in both Bell and Shelf modes. Bandwidth does not have a lot of range and it also affects the maximum boost and cut (like a Pultec). The widest Q (which is obtained at maximum boost or cut) is approximately 1 for the 221K (leftmost) band, and 1.5 for the other three bands. The narrowest Q is approximately 2.5 to 3 for all of the bands.
Bell Mode
In Bell mode, rotating the control counter-clockwise increases the bandwidth (lowers the Q) of the band and a broader range frequencies is affected. As Bandwidth is rotated clockwise, bandwidth is decreased (Q is increased) and a narrower range of frequencies is affected. At the narrowest settings (Bandwidth fully clockwise), the maximum boost/cut gain of 20 dB is available. As Bandwidth is broadened, the available band gain is decreased, down to about 6 dB of boost/cut at the widest (fully counter-clockwise) settings. The effect of the Bandwidth control in Shelf mode is shown in Figure 68 on page 220.
Shelf Mode
In Shelf mode, rotating Bandwidth counter-clockwise decreases the slope of the shelf and Gain adjustments are more gentle. As Bandwidth is rotated clockwise, the shelf slope steepens, and Gain changes will be more obvious.
- 219 -
As Bandwidth is increased in Shelf mode, a bell curve begins to be introduced in the opposite direction (i.e., overshoot). For example, if the Shelf is boosted, a dip is created at higher Bandwidth values. At maximum Bandwidth, this overshoot curve is pronounced. The effect of the Bandwidth control in Shelf mode is shown in Figure 69 below.
Figure 68. Effect of Bandwidth control on response curve in Bell mode
Figure 69. Effect of Bandwidth control on response curve in Shelf mode
- 220 -
Frequency
This control defines the center frequency (Bell mode) or edge frequency (Shelf mode) for the band. Each band provides a wide range of specially tuned overlapping and interleaving frequency choices. The available frequencies for each band are listed in Table 21 below.
Available Frequencies
Table 21. Available band frequencies (standard and mastering) Massive Passive Band Low Low Mid High Mid High Selectable Frequencies (Hz) 22, 33, 47, 68, 100, 150, 220, 330, 470, 680, 1K 82, 120, 180, 270, 390, 560, 820, 1.2K, 1.8K, 2.7K, 3.0K 220, 330, 470, 680, 1K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.3K, 4.7K, 6.8K, 10K 560, 820, 1.2K, 1.8K, 2.7K, 3.9K, 5.6K, 8.2K, 12K, 16K, 27K
Channel Controls
The controls for the two identical channels (left and right) are detailed below. Because both UAD Massive Passive plug-ins operate the same way (and the controls for each channel are identical), the control descriptions for each channel are only detailed once. Note: See Standard vs. Mastering Versions on page 217 for the exact differences between the Massive Passive parameters. EQ In The EQ In pushbutton switch enables the channel. When the button illuminates in a brighter blue, the channel is active and the other channel controls will affect the signal. When this control is disabled, all the desirable low-level system filtering and coloration is retained in the channel, just like the original hardware. This knob sets the overall gain for the channel. The range for the standard version is continuously variable from 6 dB to +4 dB. The range for the Mastering version is 2.5 dB, in 0.5 dB steps.
Channel Gain
- 221 -
The Channel Gain controls are intended to help match levels between Bypass and EQ enabled modes so that the EQ effect can be more accurately judged. With drastic EQ there may not be enough range to match levels, but with drastic EQ this kind of comparison is of little use. The range is small to allow easier and finer adjustments. Filters Low Pass and High Pass filters are available for both channels. The response curves of the filters are shown in Figure 70 below. The available Filter values differ between the standard and mastering versions; see Table 20 on page 217 for the available values for each version. The Low Pass filter allows the channels lower frequencies to pass while attenuating higher frequencies. The slope of the Low Pass filter depends on the value set for the filter. At 6K, 7K5, and 9K values, the filter slope is 18 dB/octave. At these values, a small (1.5 to 2 dB) bump occurs in the response before the curve drops off. At 12K, the slope is 30 dB/octave. At 18K, a modified elliptical filter is used. In the mastering version, when Low Pass is set to 27kHz the frequency response is down by about 0.6 dB at 20kHz. When the control is set to 52kHz, there is actually a boost of about 0.4 dB at 20kHz; the filter is slightly resonant at this setting so there is a slight boost before the filter starts rolling off. High Pass The High Pass filter allows the channels higher frequencies to pass while attenuating lower frequencies. The slope of the High Pass filter is 18 dB/octave.
Low Pass
- 222 -
Figure 70. High Pass and Low Pass filter response curves (standard version)
Mastering Filters
The Low Pass/High Pass filter frequencies in the mastering version are tuned specifically for mastering, and the slopes are flatter until the knee. The slopes are 18 dB per octave on the mastering filters except for the highest value (52K) which is 30 dB/octave.
Other Controls
The Power and Link controls are global to both channels. Power Power is a two-state knob that determines whether the plug-in is active. When the knob is in the Off (counter-clockwise) position, all LED elements are unlit, plug-in processing is disabled, and UAD DSP usage is reduced (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). The Link switch is a software-only addition that allows the two sets of controls for each channel to be linked for ease of operation when both channels require the same values, or unlinked when dual-mono operation is desired. The Link parameter is stored within presets and can be accessed via automation. Important: When unlink is switched to link, channel 1 controls are copied to channel 2. Control offsets between channels are lost in this case.
Link
- 223 -
When set to Link (up position), modifying any channel one or channel two control causes its adjacent stereo counterpart control to snap to the same position (channel 1 & 2 controls are ganged together in Link mode). When Link is active, automation data is written and read for channel one only. In this case, the automation data for channel one will control both channels. Note: When Link is active, changing channel two parameters from a control surface or when in controls only (non-GUI) mode will have no effect. When set to unlink (down position), the controls for channels one and two are completely independent. Unlink is generally used in mono mode. When unlinked, automation data is written and read by each channel separately. Note: If disparate values are set under the unlinked state, the left channel will override the right channel when Link is activated.
Massive Passive Latency

The Massive Passive and Massive Passive Mastering EQs use an internal upsampling technique to facilitate their amazing sonic accuracy. This upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information. Note: Compensating for Massive Passive is not required if the host application supports full plug-in delay compensation throughout the signal path, or when it is used only on the outputs.
Notes from Manley Laboratories

Do not assume the knob settings mean what you expect they should mean. Part of this is due to the interaction of the controls. Part is due to the new shelf slopes and part due to a lack of standards regarding shelf specication. You may nd yourself leaning towards shelf frequencies closer to the mids than you are used to and the action seems closer to the edges of the spectrum than your other EQs. Same reasons as above.
- 224 -
You may also nd yourself getting away with what seems like massive amounts of boost. Where the knobs end up, may seem scary particularly for mastering. Keep in mind that, even at maximum boost, a wide bell might only max out at 6 dB of boost (less for the lowest band) and only reaches 20 dB at the narrowest bandwidth. On the other hand, because of how transparent this EQ is, you might actually be EQing more than you could with a different unit. Taste rules, test benches don't make hit records, believe your ears. Sometimes the shelves will sound pretty weird, especially (only) at the narrow bandwidth settings. They might seem to be having a complex effect and not only at the dialed in frequency. This is certainly possible. Try wider bandwidths at rst. If you seem to be boosting all 4 bands at widely separated frequencies and not hearing much EQ as you might expect (except for level) this is a side-effect of a passive EQ and probably a good thing. To get drastic sounding EQ you should try boosting a few bands and cutting a few bands. In fact, it is usually best to start with cutting rather than boosting. A reasonable starting point for the Bandwidth for shelves is straight up or between 11:00 and 1:00. It was designed this way and is roughly where the maximum atness around the knee is, combined with a well dened steep slope. The Massive Passive may sound remarkably different from other high end EQs and completely different from the console EQs. Yes, this is quite deliberate. Hopefully it sounds better, sweeter, more musical and it complements your console EQs. We saw little need for yet another variation of the standard parametric with only subtle sonic differences. We suggest using the Massive Passive before tape, for the bulk of the EQ tasks and then using the console EQs for some ne tweaking and where narrow Q touch-ups like notches are needed. The Massive Passive is equally at home doing big, powerful EQ tasks such as is sometimes required for tracking drums, bass and guitars, or for doing those demanding jobs where subtlety is required like vocals and mastering.
- 225 -
Additional Information
The original (and rather lengthy) user manual written by Manley Labs for the hardware unit contains a wealth of great information about the philosophy, design decisions, and use of the Massive Passive EQ. It is highly recommended reading for those interested in technical details. The manual can be found on their website, along with info about their other great products: http://www.manley.com/manuals.php
The Massive Passive EQ hardware interior
All visual and aural references to the Massive Passive EQ and all use of MANLEYs trademarks are being made with written permission from MANLEY LABORATORIES INCORPORATED. Special thanks to EveAnna Manley.
- 226 -
CHAPTER 22
Moog Multimode Filter

Overview
If UA were able to conceive a product with Moog, what would it be? The answer is revealed in the new UAD Moog Multimode Filter, which delivers the first truly analog-sounding VCF (voltage controlled filter) emulation made for mixing, performing, creating, or destroying. The Moog Multimode Filter is a digital-only tabletop filter set that combines the best of Bob Moogs classic designs with select features from his final Voyager instrument. UA modeled the analog behavior of the historical 4-pole ladder filter conceived by the worlds most recognizable electronic instrument maker right down to the self-oscillation, saturation and non-linearities of its analog counterpart. As the name suggests, the heart of the Moog Multimode Filter is the switchable Lowpass, Highpass and Bandpass filter that allows Moogs signature self-oscillation and extreme resonance in any of the three modes, bringing a new level of sophistication to Moog filter designs of the past. The UAD Moog Filter algorithm uses a special filter structure that was created especially to eliminate digital artifacts for time-varying filters. An expensive DSP technique was used to calculate the response of the nonlinear feedback loop surrounding the saturation and filter elements. Warning: Like most resonant filters, UAD Moog Filter has the potential to create unpredictable sonic results that can result in unexpected jumps in output amplitude. Depending on the source material, input levels, and parameter values, the filter output can suddenly get extremely loud, with the potential to damage speakers and/or hearing. This condition is particularly susceptible when the simultaneous conditions of high gain, low filter cutoff, and high resonance values are applied, and/or when the LFO sweeps into these conditions. Use caution and/or low monitoring levels when dialing in extreme parameter values to avoid speaker and/or hearing damage!
- 227 -
Chapter 22: Moog Multimode Filter
Moog Filter Screenshot
Figure 71. The UAD Moog Filter plug-in window
Moog Filter Controls

The Moog Filter is true stereo, with separate filters for the left and right channels. The dual filters share the same controls. The only time the left and right filters diverge is when Filter Spacing or LFO Offset are not zero. Drive Drive controls the amount of saturation gain before the filter. Drive is where much of the sonic juice in the UAD Moog Filter originates. Drive can change the signal from clean to slightly overdriven to extremely distorted, particularly when used in conjunction with the Boost switch (see Boost on page 233). The non-linear modeling of Drive characteristics is extremely DSP-intensive. For this reason, Drive is not available on the SE version of UAD Moog Filter. In UAD Moog Filter SE, the parameter is named Gain instead of Drive, and is a straight (non-modeled) input gain control. The range of Drive/Gain is 0 to +40 dB of gain. Drive/Gain affects both the wet and dry signals (the control is heard when Mix is zero and/or when Bypass is engaged). This gain range closely mimics the external input section of the Minimoog.
Gain (SE only)
- 228 -
Warning: Due to these differences in input structure, cut and pasting of full-to-SE and SE-to-full presets may cause noticeable differences in gain. Keep hold of the master fader! Drive/Gain LED The Drive/Gain multicolor LED indicates the plug-in signal level just after the Drive/Gain control. The Drive/Gain LED operates when the plug-in is in Bypass mode, but not when Power is off. The Envelope controls (Envelope knob, Smooth/Fast switch) closely mimic the controls of the MF-101 Moogerfooger. However, UA has broadened the sonic palette with a negative range allowing unique negative envelope effects. The cutoff frequency of UAD Moog Filter can be modulated by the amplitude of the signal coming into the plug-in. This function is typically called an envelope follower or auto wah because the cutoff frequency follows the signal input level. The amount and speed of the envelope response can be adjusted. The envelope knob determines how much the filter cutoff frequency is affected by the signal input level. Positive and negative values are possible. Positive values increase the filter cutoff as the input amplitude increases (the filter opens as the signal gets louder). Negative values decrease the filter cutoff as input amplitude increases (the filter closes as the signal gets louder). The greater the value (either positive or negative), the greater the amount of filter modulation (the cutoff frequency range is increased with greater values). Tip: Click the knob label (ENVELOPE) to return the value to zero. Envelope LED This LED indicates the relative peaks of the control envelope. The envelope LED does not illuminate when the plug-in is in Bypass mode or when Power is off. This toggle switch determines the release time of the control envelope. In Smooth mode, the release time is 200 milliseconds. In Fast mode, the release time is 40 milliseconds. In both modes, the attack time is 25 milliseconds. In typical applications, Fast mode is useful on percussive sounds, while Smooth mode is better suited to sounds with longer and/or uneven decays.
Envelope
Smooth/Fast
- 229 -
Cutoff
This parameter defines the cutoff frequency of both filter channels in all modes (lowpass, bandpass, highpass). UA has expanded the available frequency range of 20 Hz to 12 kHz on the MF-101 Moogerfooger to the broader available range of 12 Hz to 12 kHz on the Moog Mulitmode Filter. In lowpass mode, frequencies above the cutoff are attenuated. In highpass mode, frequencies below the cutoff are attenuated. In bandpass mode, the cutoff value is the center frequency; attenuation occurs above and below the cutoff value in this mode. Tip: The cutoff value can be adjusted in musical semitone (1/2 step) increments/decrements using coarse control shortcuts, and 1/4 semitone increment/decrement using fine control shortcuts. See Shortcuts in Chapter 7 of the UAD System Manual for details.
Resonance
Resonance determines the amount of filter feedback, which accentuates the harmonic content at the cutoff frequency. Higher values can produce a whistling quality to the filter, and at very high values the filter may self-oscillate. Resonance works the same way in all three filter modes.
Pole (Slope)
The filter slope is determined by this switch. The slope defines how steep the frequencies above the cutoff in lowpass mode (or below the cutoff in highpass mode) are rolled off.
2-Pole
In 2-pole mode, the filter has a slope of 12 dB per octave. For example, in lowpass mode frequencies that are double the cutoff frequency (an octave) are attenuated by 12 dB. 2-pole filtering is less aggressive than 4-pole mode, but has its own unique sound that you may find is better suited for certain types of signals.
4-Pole
4-Pole mode has a steeper slope (24 dB per octave), so the filtering is more obvious. This is the classic (and luscious) Moog filter, in all its glory, that has been employed on just about every Moog product, from the Modular to the Minimoog to the Voyager.
- 230 -
Step/Track
This switch is a smoothing control for the filter cutoff frequency parameter. Smoothing is most obvious on continuous filter sweeps when varying the cutoff rapidly with the knob or automation. Step mode can be desirable when sudden cutoff changes are automated and other creative purposes. Smoothing is on in the Track position, and off in the Step position. Note: When set to Track, the plug-in does not track the input signal frequency like a synthesizer filter.
Mode
This control is the heart of the Moog Multimode filter, combining Moogs classic lowpass filter with highpass and bandpass in one control. Unlike Moog highpass and bandpass filters of the past, UA's design presents Moog's signature self-oscillation in all three modes, bringing a new level of sophistication to Moog filter designs of the past. The knob switches between the available filter types.
Lowpass
Frequencies above the cutoff value are filtered.

Bandpass
Frequencies above and below the cutoff value are filtered.

Highpass
Frequencies below the cutoff value are filtered. Spacing Spacing inversely offsets the filter cutoff values for the left and right channels. In other words, positive Spacing values increase the right channel cutoff while lowering the left channel cutoff, and vice versa. Spacing is borrowed from Bob Moog's Voyager instrument, and separates the hard-panned filters by up to three octaves. Unlike the original however, both filters are moving away from each other in pitch, rather than one fixed filter plus one adjustable filter pitch. Positive or negative values enable positioning the de-tuned filters from left to right, low to high, or high to low. Spacing can create great stereo spacial effects. When the filter is in Mono mode, both filters are still heard. Tip: Click the knob label (SPACING) to return the value to zero.
- 231 -
LFO
The LFO (low frequency oscillator) modulates the filter cutoff frequency. Several waveform shapes are available. The LFO can be synchronized to the tempo of the host (see Free/Sync below). Amount controls the depth of the LFO filter cutoff modulation. A higher value will have a broader filter sweep. Rate controls the speed of the LFO. The available range is from 0.03 Hz to 25 Hz in Free mode, or 16/1 to 1/64 to in Sync mode. The LFO Rate LED illuminates in conjunction with the LFO rate, once per LFO cycle. Clicking this LED resets the LFO cycle (see LFO Reset below). The LFO is reset to its zero crossing by clicking the LFO Rate LED. This parameter can be automated for mixing or bouncing. Normally the LFO is free running but this behavior is not always desirable. For example, if you are using LFO filter modulation, you may want playback to always sound exactly the same when bouncing or mixing. To accomplish this, the LFO must be started at the same place (zero crossing) of the LFO waveform. Reset enables this sonic consistency when using the LFO.
Amount
Rate
Rate LED
LFO Reset
Free/Sync
This switch defines whether the LFO is synchronized to the tempo of the host application (if this feature is supported by the host). See Chapter 8 Tempo Sync in the UAD System Manual for more information. To ensure the LFO phase is consistent when in Sync mode, automate the Reset parameter (see LFO Reset on page 232).
Value
The Value display depends upon the setting of the Free/Sync switch. Value displays the LFO frequency in Free mode, and the tempo sync note value in Sync mode. See Chapter 8 Tempo Sync in the UAD System Manual for more information. This control determines the waveform shape used by the LFO. Six waveshapes are available: Sine, Triangle, Sawtooth-Up, Sawtooth-Down, Square, and Random.
Wave
- 232 -
Offset
Offset adjusts the polarity between LFO signals for the left and right channels. The available range is 180 degrees. Offset can create great stereo spacial effects. When the filter is in Mono mode, both filters are still heard. Tip: Click the knob label (OFFSET) to return the value to zero.
Mix
Mix varies the amount of filtering that is occurring. It is not a true dry/wet control; it mimics the mix function on the MF-101 Moogerfooger. When Mix is at zero, the Drive/Gain control (and Boost on non-SE version) are still active and audible. Setting Mix at zero is the same as setting the Effect/Bypass switch to Bypass.
Stereo/Mono
The left and right channel filters are always independent in the UAD Moog Filter. However, when this switch is set to Mono, the left and right output channels are summed. In Stereo mode, the left/right separation is retained. The Output control changes the gain at the output of the plug-in. The available range is 20 dB. This LED gives a visual indication of the plug-in output level. The Output LED is active when Bypass is enabled, but not when Power is off. When the LED is red, the output is 0 dBfs. When Bypass is enabled, filter processing is inactive. Drive/Gain and Output still operate in Bypass mode. Enabling Bypass has the same effect as setting Mix to zero. If the Free/Sync switch is set to Free, the LFO phase is reset to zero when Bypass is switched to Effect.
Output
Output LED
Effect/Bypass
Boost
Boost shifts the Drive gain range up a full 20 dB, while simultaneously shifting the Output range down 20 dB. This mimics the behavior of the external input on the Minimoog. Note: This control is not available on the SE version.
Power
Power disables the plug-in altogether and disables DSP processing. When off, the background will dim much in the same way the Voyager's panel does when powered off.
- 233 -
Moog Filter SE
Overview The UAD Moog Filter SE is derived from the UAD Moog Filter. Its algorithm has been revised (primarily the elimination of the Drive circuit) in order to provide sonic characteristics very similar to the Moog Filter but with significantly less DSP usage. It is provided to allow Moog Filter benefits when DSP resources are limited. The UAD Moog Filter SE sounds great even without Drive, and is very usable in many situations. The Moog Filter SE interface can be differentiated from the full Moog Filter by color and the module name. The Moog Filter SE is uses the Luna background and maple sides borrowed from the Voyager Select Series. The full version uses the Voyager's electric blue backlighting and mahogany sides.
Figure 72. The UAD Moog Filter SE plug-in window
Moog Filter SE Controls
The Moog Filter SE controls are nearly the same as the Moog Filter. The exceptions are the Drive related controls (Drive and Boost) are unavailable on the SE model, and the Drive control is replaced with a straight (non-modeled) Gain control. Please refer to the Moog Filter section for Moog Filter SE control descriptions (see Moog Filter Controls on page 228). Note: When preset settings are copied from the full Moog Filter version to the SE version, the Boost (+20) switch value is retained, even though the parameter is not available for SE. If you subsequently copy from SE back to the full version, the original Boost value is pasted.
- 234 -
Moog Filter Latency

The Moog Filter (but not the Moog Filter SE) uses an internal upsampling technique to facilitate its amazing sonic quality. This upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information. The Moog Filter SE does not require additional latency compensation because it is not upsampled. Note: Compensating for Moog Filter is not required if the host application supports full plug-in delay compensation throughout the signal path, or when it is used only on the outputs.
The venerable Dr. Robert Arthur Moog
Moog is a registered trademark of Moog Music, and is used under license with kind permission.
- 235 -
CHAPTER 23
MXR Flanger/Doubler
Classic Electronic Flanging
For more than 30 years, musicians and engineers have relied upon the MXR Flanger/Doubler as one of best-sounding bucket-brigade flanging effects ever made. Through its signature flanging, doubling, and delay effects, the MXR Flanger/Doubler imprints a unique stamp on guitars, bass, keys, drums, or just about any source needing movement and depth. Developed in close collaboration with Dunlop Manufacturing, the MXR Flanger/Doubler plug-in for the UAD-2 platform replicates the legendary sound of this classic studio and stage effect with unparalleled accuracy. The MXR Flanger/Doubler plug-in for UAD-2 is perfect for adding that special something to your tracks, and getting the creative juices and sound-shaping possibilities flowing. This plug-in models the original hardware unit in meticulous detail, and makes all its chewy analog goodness available for the first time in plug-in form. From guitars and basses to drum breaks, the MXR Flanger/Doubler plug-in will get your tracks moving. History Flanging originated as a tape effect where two tape machines are playing two identical and synchronized signals, and one is gradually delayed to create unique comb filtering effects. In the late 70s, MXR introduced the famed Flanger/Doubler unit which, unlike tape flanging, recreated this effect electronically via bucket brigade design. A bucket-brigade device (BBD) is an analog circuit that produces a delay by storing the signal in a series of capacitors, passing the stored signal from one capacitor to the next with each clock cycle. Because the signal is degraded with each pass, audio delay lines using BBDs tend to significantly color the signal. The name is derived from human bucket brigades, whereby a line of many people remain stationary while passing many buckets from one person to the next. Bucket brigades were commonly used by firefighters to deliver water to a fire more efficiently than would be possible if each person were to carry a single bucket from the water source to the destination.
Bucket-Brigade Technology
- 236 -
Chapter 23: MXR Flanger/Doubler
MXR Flanger/Doubler Screenshot
Figure 73. The UAD MXR Flanger/Doubler plug-in window
Model 126 The MXR Model 126 Flanger/Doubler is an analog delay processor that uses bucket-brigade technology to create short signal delays. The delay time can be modulated manually, or automatically with a low frequency oscillator (LFO). The delayed signal can be mixed with itself in a feedback loop (regenerated), and its polarity can be inverted. The amount of processed signal relative to the original signal is adjustable. All sonics and control behaviors are authentically modeled, including the inherent aliasing characteristics and dry signal path coloration. Modes
Flanger
The flanging effect in MXR Flanger/Doubler is generated by using very short delay times whereby the delayed (wet) signal is not heard as separate from the original (dry) signal. When this delayed signal is combined with the dry signal, the comb filtering that is the essence of the flanging effect is generated. By modulating (sweeping) the delay time, the response of the comb filtering is modified, and the characteristic swoosh is produced. Additional sonic options are possible by increasing the delayed signal feedback (regeneration) to produce a deeper and more resonant effect, and/or reversing the polarity (invert) to give the sound a more hollow character.
Doubler
When in Doubler mode, all controls have the exact same functionality as Flanger mode; the only difference is that the available delay times are longer in this mode. The delayed signal produces a very short echo, hence a double of the original signal is heard.
- 237 -
Software-Only Features
The UAD MXR Flanger/Doubler plug-in has some features not included in the original hardware. The LFO rate can be synchronized to the tempo of the DAW session; the LFO can be reset; Stereo mode can apply processing to both sides of a stereo signal; and stereo output can be summed to mono. The original hardware is monophonic. To accommodate modern applications, the plug-in can be used in mono-in/stereo-out and stereo-in/stereo-out configurations. Two different stereo modes are available, and the stereo output can be summed to mono if desired. See Stereo Mode on page 239 for details. The MXR Flanger/Doubler is well suited for sound-shaping, recording, and mixing, and even for adding some post-production flavor. Flanging is particularly popular as an individual effect on a wide range of musical sources including guitar, bass, drums, keyboards, full source material, and more. Another common use for the MXR Flanger/Doubler is as a group effect, where effecting more than one signal is desired. Try applying the MXR Flanger/Doubler to drum busses or even the entire mix, most often for a brief period in the song, such as a break or bridge. In addition to Flanging, the Flanger/Doubler excels as a short-range delay/doubler.
Stereo Functionality
In Use
MXR Flanger/Doubler Controls

Buttons The buttons on MXR Flanger/Doubler are two-state switches. The buttons are ON when they are in the DOWN position. When ON/DOWN, they are gray with a darker shadow. When OFF/UP, they are white. Power is the plug-in bypass control. Power is ON when the LED is red. When set to OFF, emulation processing is disabled, the LEDs are dimmed, and DSP usage is reduced (if DSP LoadLock is inactive). Power is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal. Effect This button switches between Flanger and Doubler modes. It defines the range of signal delay available for the mode. The function of all the other controls is the same in both modes. See Modes on page 237 for additional details about the two effects.
Power
- 238 -
Flanger
When in the down (gray) position, Flanger mode is active. This is the default setting.
Doubler
Doubler mode is active when the button is in the up (white) position. Stereo Mode This software-only switch modifies the processed signals at the outputs when used in a stereo-output configuration. The control does not switch the processor between mono and stereo modes; both modes are true stereo (when configured for stereo output). In both stereo modes (Single and Dual), stereo separation of the dry signals is maintained, and the stereo signal is not mixed to mono before processing is applied. Note: This function is only available when the plug-in is used in a mono-in/stereo-out or stereo-in/stereo-out configuration. When used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration, the switch has no effect.
Single
When in the up (white) position, Single mode is active. This is the default setting. In Single mode, the left and right signals are processed identically and the Sweep LFO for both channels are in phase.
Dual
When in the down (gray) position, Dual mode is active. When Dual mode is enabled in a stereo-out configuration, the processing is applied to both the left and right channels. In this mode, the settings are the same for both processors, but a phase difference of 180 (antiphase) is applied between the Sweep LFO of the two channels. When Sweep Width is above 0% in Dual mode, this phase offset produces a swirling effect that pans back-and-forth.
- 239 -
Manual
This continuous control determines the delay time of the processor. The delay time is modulated by the Sweep LFO when the Width value is higher than 0%. The available range of the control depends on the setting of the Effect button. In Flanger mode, the available delay time range is 4.9 milliseconds to 0.33 milliseconds. In Doubler mode, the available delay time range is 66 milliseconds to 18.5 milliseconds.
Sweep
The Sweep parameters (Width and Speed) control the LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) that modulates the delay time of the processor.
Width
Sweep Width controls the amount of modulation applied to the delay time LFO. The available range is 0 100%. At 0%, no modulation occurs and delay time is determined by the Manual setting. As Width is increased, the amount of modulation becomes wider (a broader sweep). At 100%, the delay time sweeps throughout its entire range, automatically creating the same sound as moving the Manual control repeatedly back and forth from minimum to maximum.
Speed
Sweep Speed controls the rate of modulation applied to the delay time LFO. The available range is 0.02 Hz to 15.96 Hz (this is the actual range of the original hardware; the knob text on the hardware panel doesnt match exactly). The current speed is indicated by the Sweep LEDs and also shown in the Rate Display. The Sweep Speed can be synchronized to the tempo of the host application by engaging the Sync function.
- 240 -
Mix
This continuous control adjusts the blend between the original dry signal and the processed wet signal(s). The available range is 0 100%. When set to minimum, only the dry signal is heard. When set to maximum, the signal is almost entirely wet, however a small amount of dry signal is present (like the original hardware). When Mix is set to the minimum/dry position, the input signal is colored by the electronics of the unit (like the original hardware).
Regeneration
This is a feedback control for the delay processor. The available range is 0 100%. When set above its minimum value, the output of the effect is routed back to its input. As the value increases, a more resonant signal is produced. Regeneration has a governor that prevents feedback runaway (overload) even when set to the maximum value of 100%.
Mono
This switch sums the stereo output of the dry and wet signals to mono when the plug-in used in a stereo-output configuration. This function is useful for creative purposes or checking phase relationships. The output is stereo when the switch is in the up (white) position, and mono when the switch in the down (gray) position. Mono is only available when the plug-in is used in a mono-in/stereo-out or stereo-in/stereo-out configuration. When used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration, the switch is locked in the Mono position. Note: See Stereo Mode on page 239 for additional details about stereo output.
Invert
This switch inverts the polarity (phase) of the processed signal. The wet signal polarity is normal when in the up (white) position, and inverted when in the down (gray) position. When the processed signal is inverted and combined with the dry signal, the resultant comb filtering has a different timbre than when polarity is normal. This is particularly evident in Flanger mode, which often sounds more hollow when polarity is inverted.
- 241 -
Sync
The speed of the Sweep LFO can be synchronized to the tempo of the host application by engaging the Sync button. Tempo Sync is engaged when the button is in the down (gray) position and the LED above the button is illuminated. See Chapter 8 Tempo Sync in the UAD System Manual for complete details about this feature.
Rate Display
The rate of the Sweep LFO is displayed here. When Sync is inactive, the LFO speed is displayed in Hertz. When Sync is active, the LFO speed is shown as a beat division (or multiplier). The Rate Display is unique to the plug-in; the original hardware does not have this feature. The Sweep LEDs, located above the Manual knob, perform two functions: LFO rate indication and LFO reset.
Rate
Sweep LEDs
The Sweep LEDs illuminate in tandem with the current Sweep Speed, providing a visual indication of the LFO rate. The Width amount must be higher than 0% for the LEDs to blink. As Width increases, the blinking is more obvious. The manner in which the LED response manifests depends on the state of the Manual, Width, and Speed controls; their quirky behavior is the same as the original hardware.
Reset
The LEDs provide a mechanism to reset the Sweep LFO so the sweep cycle can be consistently controlled. The LFO cycle is reset to begin sweeping downwards in pitch (negative sweep) by clicking either LED. This function, which is not available on the hardware unit, can be automated for mixing or bouncing. Normally the Sweep LFO is free running but this behavior is not always desirable. For example, you may want playback to always sound exactly the same when bouncing or mixing. To accomplish this sonic consistency, the Sweep LFO must be started at a specific place in the LFO cycle by using the Reset function.
- 242 -
MXR Flanger/Doubler Latency

This plug-in uses an internal upsampling technique. The upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than most other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information. Note: Compensating for additional latency is not required if the host application supports full plug-in delay compensation throughout the signal path, or when it is used only on the outputs.
The MXR Model 126 Flanger/Doubler hardware unit
- 243 -
CHAPTER 24
Neve 1073 Equalizer
Overview
Designed by the Rupert Neve company in 1970, perhaps no other studio tool is as ubiquitous or desirable as the Neve 1073 channel module. Without exaggeration, Neve consoles such as the 8014 (where the 1073 originated) have been used on a majority of popular recordings of the late 20th century, and the 1073 easily tops the short-list of audio design masterpieces. The 1073 is famous for adding an unmistakable sheen and clarity of presence to elements in the mix that is deemed unattainable with any other unit. Modeling the 3-band EQ and high-pass filter in painstaking detail and thoroughness, Universal Audio's Neve 1073 EQ will deliver the same sonic experience expected from its analog cousin with exacting detail. Bundled together come two versions: The 1073 EQ with absolute sonic accuracy, and the 1073SE EQ for high instance counts.
Neve 1073 Screenshot
Figure 74. The Neve 1073 plug-in window
Neve 1073 and 1073SE Controls

Each feature of the UAD Neve 1073 and 1073SE interfaces are detailed below.
- 244 -
Chapter 24: Neve 1073 Equalizer
Input Gain
The Input Gain control sets the level at the input of the plug-in. The range is from 20 dB to +10 dB. When the Input Gain knob snaps to the OFF position, plug-in processing is disabled and UAD DSP usage is reduced (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Clicking the OFF screen label toggles between OFF and the previously set Input Gain value. You can also click the Neve logo to toggle between OFF and the previous state.
Note:
High Shelf
The High Shelf knob offers approximately 18 dB of smooth fixed frequency shelving equalization at 12 kHz. Rotate the control clockwise to add the famous high-end Neve sheen, or counter-clockwise to reduce the treble response.
Midrange Band
The midrange band is controlled by dual-concentric knobs, delivering smooth semi-parametric midrange equalization. The response for this band has a dependence on the bandwidth as the gain is adjusted. At higher center frequencies, the Q goes up, for a more focused peak. The inner knob controls the band gain, and the outer ring selects the frequency or band disable. These two controls are detailed below.
Midrange Gain
The equalization gain for the midrange band is selected with the inner knob of the dual-concentric control. The available range is approximately 18 dB.
Midrange Frequency
The Mid frequency is selected with the outer ring of the dual-concentric knob controls. The ring control can be dragged with the mouse, or click directly on the silkscreen text to specify a frequency or disable the Mid band.
Note:
You can also click the midrange symbol above the knob to cycle through the available values, or shift + click to step back one frequency.
- 245 -
The available midrange center frequencies are 360 Hz, 700 Hz, 1.6 kHz, 3.2 kHz, 4.8 kHz, 7.2 kHz, and OFF. When OFF is specified, the band is disabled. UAD CPU usage is not reduced when the band is OFF. Low Band The low frequency band is controlled by dual-concentric knobs, delivering smooth shelving equalization. The inner knob controls the band gain, and the outer ring selects the frequency or band disable. These two controls are detailed below.
Low Gain
The equalization gain for the low band is selected with the inner knob of the dual-concentric control. The available range is approximately 15 dB. Rotate the control clockwise to boost the selected low band frequency, or counter-clockwise to reduce the bass response.
Low Frequency
The Low frequency is selected with the outer ring of the dual-concentric knob controls. The ring control can be dragged with the mouse, or click directly on the silkscreen text to specify a frequency or disable the Low band.
Note: You can also click the low shelf symbol above the knob to cycle through
the available values, or shift + click to step back one frequency. The available low band center frequencies are 35 Hz, 60 Hz, 110 Hz, 220 Hz, and OFF. When OFF is specified, the band is disabled. UAD CPU usage is not reduced when OFF. Low Cut This knob specifies the fixed frequency of the Low Cut filter. This filter has an 18 dB per octave slope. The available frequencies are 50 Hz, 80 Hz, 160 Hz, 300 Hz, and OFF. When OFF is specified, the low cut filter is disabled. UAD CPU usage is not reduced when OFF.
Note: You can also click the low cut symbol above the knob
to cycle through the available values, or shift + click to step back one frequency.
- 246 -
Phase
The PHASE button inverts the polarity of the signal. When the switch is in the In (darker) position, the phase is inverted. Leave the switch Out (lighter) position for normal phase. The equalizer is engaged when the EQL switch is in the In (darker) position. To disable the EQ, put the switch in the Out (lighter) position. Click the button to toggle the state. In the hardware 1073, the audio is still slightly colored even when the EQL switch is in the Out position. This is due to the fact that the signal is still passing through its circuitry. Therefore, the signal will be slightly colored when this switch is in the Out position. UAD DSP usage is reduced when the EQ is bypassed with this control (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). If a true bypass is desired, use the OFF position of the Input Gain on page 245 control.
EQL
Neve 1073SE
Figure 75. The Neve 1073SE plug-in window
Overview
The UAD Neve 1073SE is derived from the UAD Neve 1073. Its algorithm has been revised in order to provide sonic characteristics very similar to the 1073 but with significantly less DSP usage. It is provided to allow 1073-like sound when DSP resources are limited. Nobody with golden ears will say it sounds exactly like the 1073, but it still sounds great and is very usable in most situations. The 1073SE interface can be differentiated from the 1073 by color and the module name. The 1073SE is black instead of the 1073s dark blue, and the module name on the lower right of the interface panel includes SE.
Neve 1073SE Controls
The Neve 1073SE controls are exactly the same as the Neve 1073. Please refer to the Neve 1073 section for Neve 1073SE control descriptions (see Neve 1073 and 1073SE Controls on page 244).
- 247 -
Neve 1073 Latency

The Neve 1073 (but not the 1073SE) uses an internal upsampling technique to facilitate its amazing sonic quality. This upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than other UAD plug-ins. The latency, and its compensation, is identical to that of the UAD Precision Equalizer. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information. The Neve 1073SE does not require additional latency compensation because it is not upsampled.
Note:
Compensating for Neve 1073 is not required if the host application supports full plug-in delay compensation throughout the signal path, or when it is used only on the outputs.
All visual and aural references to the Neve 1073, 1081, 31102, 88RS, and 33609 products and all use of AMS-Neves trademarks are being made with written permission from AMS-Neve Limited.
- 248 -
CHAPTER 25
Neve 1081 Equalizer
Overview
The Neve 1081 channel module was first produced in 1972 by Neve, and was used to provide the mic/line amp and EQ sections in consoles such as the Neve 8048. Vintage 8048 consoles, with 1081 modules, are still in wide use today at classic facilities such as The Village in Los Angeles, and have been chosen by artists ranging from The Rolling Stones to The Red Hot Chili Peppers. Universal Audios Neve 1081 EQ delivers the same sonic experience as its analog cousin with exacting detail. The 1081 EQ also includes a DSP optimized 1081SE EQ for higher instance counts.
- 249 -

Overview The Neve 1081 channel module is a four-band EQ with high and low cut filters. The 1081 features two parametric midrange bands, with Hi-Q selections for tighter boosts or cuts. Both the high and low shelf filters have selectable frequencies and may be switched to bell filters. Other features include a 20 to +10 dB input gain control, phase reverse, and EQ bypass. The bands are arranged and grouped as in Figure 77 below. The bands feature dual-concentric controls. For each of the main bands, the inner knob controls the gain while the outer ring controls the frequency. The low and high cut filters are grouped as one knob/ring set, but they are actually two independent filters. Band Layout
High band
High-mid band
Gain (inner knob)
Frequency (outer ring)
Low-mid band
Low band
Low cut (ring) High cut (knob)
Figure 77. Neve 1081 band control layout
Input Gain
The Input Gain control sets the level at the input of the plug-in. The range is from 20 dB to +10 dB. When the Input Gain knob snaps to the OFF position, plug-in processing is disabled and UAD DSP usage is reduced (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Clicking the OFF screen label toggles between OFF and the previously set Input Gain value. You can also click the Neve logo to toggle between OFF and the previous state.
Note:
- 250 -
High Band
The high band delivers smooth high frequency shelving or peak equalization. The inner knob controls the band gain, and the outer ring selects the frequency or band disable.
High Gain
The equalization gain for the high band is selected with the inner knob of the dual-concentric control. Rotate the control clockwise to add the famous high-end Neve sheen, or counter-clockwise to reduce the treble response. The available range is approximately 18 dB.
High Frequency
The high band frequency is selected with the outer ring of the dual-concentric knob controls. The ring control can be dragged with the mouse, or click directly on the silkscreen text to specify a frequency or disable the band.
Note: You can also click the shelving symbol above the knob to cycle through
the available values, or shift + click to step back one frequency. The available high band center frequencies are 3.3 kHz, 4.7 kHz, 6.8 kHz, 10 kHz, 15 kHz, and OFF. When OFF is specified, the band is disabled. UAD DSP usage is not reduced when the band is OFF.
High Peak Select
The High Peak button switches the high band from a shelving EQ to a peaking EQ. The band is in shelf mode by default; it is in peak mode when the button is down (darker). High-Mid Band The high-midrange band delivers smooth high-mid frequency peak equalization with a choice of two bandwidths. The inner knob controls the band gain, and the outer ring selects the frequency or band disable.
High-Mid Gain
The equalization gain for the high-midrange band is selected with the inner knob of the dual-concentric control. The available range is approximately 18 dB.
- 251 -
High-Mid Frequency
The high-midrange band frequency is selected with the outer ring of the dualconcentric knob controls. The ring control can be dragged with the mouse, or click directly on the silkscreen text to specify a frequency or disable the band.
Note:
You can also click the midrange symbol below the knob to cycle through the available values, or shift + click to step back one frequency.
The available high-mid band center frequencies are 1.5 kHz, 1.8 kHz, 2.2 kHz, 2.7 kHz, 3.3 kHz, 3.9 kHz, 4.7 kHz, 5.6 kHz, 6.8 kHz, 8.2 kHz, and OFF. When OFF is specified, the band is disabled. UAD DSP usage is not reduced when the band is OFF.
High-Mid Q Select
The High Q button switches the response of the high-mid band from normal to a narrower bandwidth for a sharper EQ curve. The band is in normal mode by default; its in high Q mode when the button is down (darker). Low-Mid Band The low-midrange band delivers smooth low-mid frequency peak equalization with a choice of two bandwidths. The inner knob controls the band gain, and the outer ring selects the frequency or band disable.
Low-Mid Gain
The equalization gain for the low-midrange band is selected with the inner knob of the dual-concentric control. The available range is approximately 18 dB.
Low-Mid Frequency
The low-midrange band frequency is selected with the outer ring of the dualconcentric knob controls. The ring control can be dragged with the mouse, or click directly on the silkscreen text to specify a frequency or disable the band.
Note:
You can also click the midrange symbol below the knob to cycle through the available values, or shift + click to step back one frequency.
- 252 -
The available low-mid band center frequencies are 220 Hz, 270 Hz, 330 Hz, 390 Hz, 470 Hz, 560 Hz, 680 Hz, 820 Hz, 1000 Hz,1200 Hz, and OFF. When OFF is specified, the band is disabled. UAD CPU usage is not reduced when the band is OFF.
Low-Mid Q Select
The High Q button switches the response of the low-mid band from normal to a narrower bandwidth for a sharper EQ curve. The band is in normal mode by default; its in high Q mode when the button is down (darker). Low Band The low band delivers smooth low frequency shelving or peak equalization. The inner knob controls the band gain, and the outer ring selects the frequency or band disable.
Low Gain
The equalization gain for the low band is selected with the inner knob of the dual-concentric control. The available range is approximately 18 dB.
Low Frequency
The low band frequency is selected with the outer ring of the dual-concentric knob controls. The ring control can be dragged with the mouse, or click directly on the silkscreen text to specify a frequency or disable the band. The available low band center frequencies are 33Hz, 56 Hz, 100 Hz, 180 Hz, 330 Hz, and OFF. When OFF is specified, the band is disabled. UAD CPU usage is not reduced when the band is OFF.
Note: You can also click the shelving symbol above the knob to cycle through
the available values, or shift + click to step back one frequency.

Low Peak Select
The Low Peak button switches the low band from a shelving EQ to a peaking EQ. The band is in shelf mode by default; it is in peak mode when the button is down (darker).
- 253 -
Cut Filters
The independent low and high cut filters are controlled by the dual-concentric knobs to the right of the low band (see Figure 77 on page 250). The controls specify the fixed frequency of the cut filter. The cut filters have an 18 dB per octave slope. Click+drag the control to change the value, or click the silkscreen frequency values.
Note: You can also click the high cut/low cut symbols below the knob to cycle
through the available values, or shift + click to step back one frequency.
High Cut
The inner (blue) dual-concentric knob controls the high cut filter. The available frequencies for the high cut filter are 18 kHz, 12 kHz, 8.2 kHz, 5.6 kHz, 3.9 kHz, and OFF. When OFF is specified, the high cut filter is disabled. UAD CPU usage is not reduced when OFF.
Low Cut
The outer (silver) dual-concentric ring controls the low cut filter. The available frequencies for the low cut filter are 27 Hz, 47 Hz, 82 Hz, 150 Hz, 270 Hz, and OFF. When OFF is specified, the low cut filter is disabled. UAD CPU usage is not reduced when OFF. Phase The Phase (PH) button inverts the polarity of the signal. When the switch is in the In (lit) position, the phase is reversed. Leave the switch in the Out (unlit) position for normal phase. The equalizer is engaged when the EQ switch is in the In (lighted) position. To disable the EQ, put the switch in the Out (unlit) position. Click the button to toggle the state. In the hardware 1081, the audio is still slightly colored even when the EQ switch is in the Out position. This is due to the fact that the signal is still passing through its circuitry. Therefore, the signal will be slightly colored when this switch is in the Out position. UAD DSP usage is reduced when the EQ is bypassed with this control (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). If a true bypass is desired, use the OFF position of the Input Gain on page 250 control.
EQ Enable
- 254 -
Neve 1081SE
Overview
The UAD Neve 1081SE is derived from the UAD Neve 1081. Its algorithm has been revised in order to provide sonic characteristics very similar to the 1081 but with significantly less DSP usage. It is provided to allow 1081-like sound when DSP resources are limited. Nobody with golden ears will say it sounds exactly like the 1081, but it still sounds great and is very usable in most situations. The 1081SE interface can be differentiated from the 1081 by color and the module name. The 1081SE is black instead of the 1081s dark blue, and the module name on the lower right of the interface panel includes SE.
Neve 1081 Latency

The Neve 1081 (but not the 1081SE) uses an internal upsampling technique to facilitate its amazing sonic quality. This upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information. The Neve 1081SE does not require additional latency compensation because it is not upsampled.
Note:
All visual and aural references to the Neve 1073, 1081, 31102, 88RS, and 33609 products and all use of AMS-Neves trademarks are being made with written permission from AMS-Neve Limited.
- 255 -
CHAPTER 26
Neve 31102 Console EQ
Overview
The Neve 8068 console, featuring the 31102 EQ, was used to hand-mix one of the best selling debut albums of all time; Appetite For Destruction by GunsN-Roses. Artists ranging from Primus and Metallica to My Morning Jacket and The Red Hot Chili Peppers have also called on the distinct tone of the Neve 8068 and 31102 EQ in the studio. Universal Audios officially licensed and endorsed Neve 31102 EQ plug-in delivers the same sonic experience as its analog cousin with exacting detail. Complete with its own distinct filter shaping and unmistakable sheen and bite, the 31102 provides another step in the evolution of classic Neve EQs. 3-band active EQ and High/Low filters offer enhanced tone-shaping possibilities and a feature complexity that sits squarely between its cousins, the 1073 and the 1081. The Neve 31102/SE EQ is a three band (10, 12 and 16 kHz) high shelving EQ, a six frequency (7.2, 4.8, 3.2, 1.6, 0.7 and 0.35 kHz) peaking EQ with two Q types, a four frequency (220, 110, 60 and 35 Hz) low shelving EQ, a four frequency high pass filter (45, 70, 160 and 360 Hz) and five frequency (6, 8, 10, 14 and 16 kHz) low pass filter. Other features include a 30 dB range of Gain Trim, plus phase reverse and EQ bypass. The UAD Neve 31102 license also includes a DSP-optimized 31102SE Special Edition EQ for higher instance counts.
- 256 -
Chapter 26: Neve 31102 Console EQ

Input Gain The Input Gain control sets the level at the input of the plugin, and doubles as a plug-in bypass control. The range is from 20 dB to +10 dB, and off. When the Input Gain knob snaps to the off position, plug-in processing is disabled and UAD DSP usage is reduced. only) UAD-2 DSP usage is reduced only when DSP LoadLock is disabled. If DSP LoadLock is enabled (the default setting), setting Input Gain to off will not reduce DSP usage.
Tip: Clicking Note: (UAD-2
the off screen label toggles between off and the previously set Input Gain value. You can also click the Neve logo to toggle between off and the previous state.
High Shelf
The high shelf delivers smooth high frequency shelving equalization, controlled by dual-concentric knobs. The inner knob controls the band gain, and the outer ring selects the frequency or band disable.
High Shelving Gain
The gain for the high band is selected with the inner knob of the dual-concentric control. Rotate the control clockwise to add the famous high-end Neve sheen, or counter-clockwise to reduce the treble response. The available range is approximately 15 dB. The gain value is zero when the knob position indicator is pointing straight down.
High Shelving Frequency
The high shelving frequency is specified with the outer ring of the dual-concentric knob. The ring knob pointer can be dragged with the mouse, or click the shelving symbol above the knob to cycle through the available frequencies (shift+click to step back one frequency). The available high shelving frequencies are 16 kHz, 12 kHz, 10 kHz, and off. When off is specified, the high shelf band is disabled. UAD DSP usage is not reduced when the band is off.
- 257 -
Midrange Band
The midrange band is controlled by dual-concentric knobs, delivering smooth semi-parametric midrange equalization with a choice of two bandwidths. The inner knob controls the band gain, and the outer ring selects the frequency or band disable.
Midrange Gain
The equalization gain for the midrange band is selected with the inner knob of the dual-concentric control. The available range is approximately 15 dB. The gain value is zero when the knob position indicator is pointing straight down.
Midrange Frequency
The midrange frequency is specified with the outer ring of the dual-concentric knob controls. The ring knob pointer can be dragged with the mouse, or click the peak/dip symbol above the knob to cycle through the available frequencies (shift+click to step back one frequency). The available midrange center frequencies are 7.2 kHz, 4.8 kHz, 3.2 kHz, 1.6 kHz, 0.7 kHz, 0.35 kHz, and off. When off is specified, the band is disabled. UAD DSP usage is not reduced when the band is off.
High Q Select
The High Q button switches the response of the midrange band from normal to a narrower bandwidth for a sharper EQ curve. The band is in normal mode by default; its in high Q mode when the button is down (darker). Low Shelf The low band is controlled by dual-concentric knobs, delivering smooth shelving equalization. The inner knob controls the band gain, and the outer ring selects the frequency or band disable.
Low Gain
The equalization gain for the low band is selected with the inner knob of the dual-concentric control. The available range is approximately 15 dB. The gain value is zero when the knob position indicator is pointing straight down.
- 258 -
Rotate the control clockwise to boost the selected low band frequency, or counter-clockwise to reduce the bass response.
Low Frequency
The low frequency is selected with the outer ring of the dual-concentric knob controls. The ring knob pointer can be dragged with the mouse, or click the shelving symbol above the knob to cycle through the available frequencies (shift+click to step back one frequency). The available low band center frequencies are 35 Hz, 60 Hz, 110 Hz, 220 Hz, and off. When off is specified, the band is disabled. UAD DSP usage is not reduced when off. Cut Filters The independent low and high cut filters are controlled by the dual-concentric knobs to the right of the low band. The controls specify the fixed frequency of each cut filter. The knob pointers can be dragged with the mouse, or click the respective cut symbols above the knob (left symbol for low cut, right symbol for high cut) to cycle through the available frequencies (shift+click to step back one frequency).
High Cut
The inner (blue) dual-concentric knob controls the high cut filter. The available frequencies for the high cut filter are 18 kHz, 14 kHz, 10 kHz, 8 kHz, 6 kHz, and off. When off is specified, the high cut filter is disabled.
Low Cut
The outer dual-concentric ring controls the low cut filter. The available frequencies for the low cut filter are 45 Hz, 70 Hz, 160 Hz, 360 Hz, and off. When OFF is specified, the low cut filter is disabled.
Note: Each
cut filter is disabled when its respective knob position indicator is pointing straight down. UAD DSP usage is not reduced when the cut filters are off. The Phase () button inverts the polarity of the signal. The signal is inverted when the button is engaged (darker). Leave the button inactive (lighter) for normal phase.
Phase
- 259 -
EQL
The equalizer is engaged when the EQL switch is in the In (darker) position. To disable the EQ, put the switch in the Out (lighter) position. Click the button to toggle the state. In the hardware 31102, the audio is still slightly colored even when the EQL switch is in the Out position. This is due to the fact that the signal is still passing through its circuitry. Therefore, the signal will be slightly colored when this switch is in the Out position. UAD DSP usage is reduced when the EQ is bypassed with this control (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). If a true bypass is desired, use the OFF position of the Input Gain control (Input Gain on page 257).
Neve 31102SE
Overview
The UAD Neve 33102SE is derived from the UAD Neve 31102. Its algorithm has been revised in order to provide sonic characteristics very similar to the 31102 but with significantly less DSP usage. It is provided to allow 31102like sound when DSP resources are limited. Nobody with golden ears will say it sounds exactly like the 31102, but it still sounds great and is very usable in most situations. The 31102 interface can be differentiated from the 31102 by color and the module name. The 31102SE background is black instead of the 31102s dark blue, and the module name on the lower right of the interface panel includes SE.
The Neve 31102SE controls are exactly the same as the Neve 31102. Please refer to Neve 31102 and 31102SE Controls on page 257 for Neve 31102SE control descriptions.
- 260 -
Neve 31102 Latency

The Neve 31102 (but not the 31102SE) uses an internal upsampling technique to facilitate its amazing sonic quality. This upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than other UAD plug-ins. The latency and its compensation is identical to that of the other UAD Neve EQs. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information. The Neve 31102SE does not require additional latency compensation because it is not upsampled.
Note:
One Neve 31102 EQ hardware module and 31102s installed in a Neve 8068 console
All visual and aural references to the Neve 1073, 1081, 31102, 88RS, and 33609 products and all use of AMS-NEVEs trademarks are being made with written permission from AMS-Neve Limited.
- 261 -
CHAPTER 27
Neve 33609 Compressor
Overview
Derived from the original Neve 2254 compressor, circa 1969, the 33609 stereo bus compressor/limiter utilizes a bridged-diode gain reduction circuit and many custom transformers. The uniquely musical character of this circuit made the 33609 a studio standard since its release. The UAD Neve 33609 is the only Neve-sanctioned software recreation of the Neve 33609 (revision C). Every detail of the original unit is captured, and matches its hardware counterpart with absolute precision. The 33609 plug-in includes a DSP-optimized 33609SE which allows for higher instance counts. The completely step-controlled 33609 is made up of separate compression and limiter sections, each with their own threshold, recovery and bypass controls. Two of the recovery selections for each section are dedicated to a program dependent auto release. The compressor section also offers five ratio selections and 20 dB make-up gain, while the limiter offers a fast or slow attack. The mono/stereo switch couples and decouples the left and right gain reduction elements. The UAD Powered Plug-In version of the Neve 33609 adds a few control enhancements not found on the hardware: An additional stepped output control with 20 dB of gain, a link switch allowing ganged left/right control of all parameters, and a headroom switch, which allows the DAW user to take advantage of the full range of 33609 gain coloration.
- 262 -
Chapter 27: Neve 33609 Compressor
Operation
The UAD Neve 33609 is a two-channel device capable of running in stereo or dual-mono modes. The active mode is determined by the mono/stereo switch (see Mono/Stereo on page 267). When the 33609 is used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration, the channel 2 controls are disabled. Each channel consists of a compressor and a limiter. Each of these functions has its own separate group of controls. Since the controls for each of the two channels are identical, they are detailed only once. Signal Flow In the 33609, the output of the compressor is fed to the input of the limiter. Like the original hardware, the signal does not flow from the left to the right of the interface. Understanding this signal flow will help you obtain a more predictable result (see Figure 82 below).
Input
Compressor
Compressor Gain
Limiter
Output Gain
Output
Figure 82. Signal flow within UAD Neve 33609
- 263 -
Modeling
The UAD Neve 33609 models all aspects of the original 33609 hardware, including the desirable harmonic distortion characteristics. These qualities are more prominent at higher input levels (see Headroom on page 269 for more info). When the compressor and limiter are both disabled, some (good) coloration of the signal occurs, just like the hardware. If a true bypass is desired, use the power switch (Power on page 271) to disable the plug-in.
Technical Article
The article Ask the Doctors: Modeling of the Neve 33609 compressor/limiter contains interesting technical details about the 33609. It is available at our online webzine: http://www.uaudio.com/webzine/2006/august/index2.html
Neve 33609 and 33609SE Controls Limiter

Controls in this section only function when the limiter is enabled with the limit In switch (the Power switch must also be on). The compressor precedes the limiter (see Signal Flow on page 263).
Note:
Limiter Threshold
Threshold determines how much limiting will occur. When the input signal exceeds the threshold level, the signal above the threshold is limited. A smaller value results in more limiting. The available range is from +4 dB to +15 dB, in 0.5 dB increments. If the compressor is enabled, the Gain control in the compressor section (Compressor Gain on page 266) will affect the input level into the limiter. In this case, the compressor gain can affect the limiter threshold response.
Limiter Recovery
Recovery (release) is the time it takes for the limiter to stop processing after the signal drops below the threshold value. The available values (in milliseconds) are 50, 100, 200, 800, a1, and a2.
- 264 -
The automatic settings (a1 and a2) are program dependant. The value for a1 can be as fast as 40ms, but after a sustained period of high signal level, the period is 1500ms. The value for a2 can be as fast as 150ms, but after a sustained period of high signal level, the period is 3000ms. Limiter In This toggle switch enables the limiter portion of the plug-in. The limiter has no effect unless this switch is in the In (down) position. Attack determines how fast limiting will engage when the signal exceeds the limiter threshold. The Fast setting is 2 milliseconds, and the Slow setting is 4 milliseconds.
Attack
Compressor
Controls in this section only function when the compressor is enabled with the compress In switch (the Power switch must also be on).
Note:
The compressor precedes the limiter (see Signal Flow on page 263).
Compressor Threshold
Threshold determines how much compression will occur. When the input signal exceeds the threshold level, the compressor engages. A smaller value results in more compression. The available range is from 20 dB to +10 dB, in 2 dB increments. Recovery (release) is the time it takes for the compressor to stop processing after the signal drops below the threshold value. The available values (in milliseconds) are 100, 400, 800, 1500, a1, and a2. The automatic settings (a1 and a2) are program dependant. The value for a1 can be as fast as 40ms, but after a sustained period of high signal level, the period is 800ms. The value for a2 can be as fast as 150ms, but after a sustained period of high signal level, the period is 1500ms.
Compressor Recovery
- 265 -
Compressor Gain
This makeup gain control increases the signal level out of the compressor to compensate for reduced levels as a result of compression. The available range is 0 to +20 dB, in 2 dB increments. Make sure to adjust the Gain control after the desired amount of compression is achieved with the Threshold control. The Gain control does not affect the amount of compression.
Note: If the limiter is also enabled, this gain is applied before the limiter stage.
Ratio
This control determines the compressor ratio. The available values are 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, and 6:1, selectable in discrete increments. This toggle switch enables the compressor portion of the plug-in. The compressor has no effect unless this switch is in the In (down) position.
Compressor In
Other Controls
The interface elements that are not directly contained within the compressor or limiter are detailed below. Output Gain This control is a software-only addition not found on the original hardware. It is an overall makeup gain stage at the output of the plug-in to compensate for reduced levels as a result of compression and/or limiting. The available range is 2 to +20 in 1 dB increments. The Gain Reduction Meters indicate the amount of gain reduction that is occurring in dB. There is one meter for each channel. The gain reduction displayed is the total reduction of the limiter plus the compressor.
Gain Reduction Meters
- 266 -
Note: The
meter indicator moves farther to the right as more gain reduction is occurring. This meter behavior is opposite that of many compressors.
Link
This switch is a software-only addition that allows the two sets of controls for each channel to be linked for ease of operation when both channels require the same values, or unlinked when dual-mono operation is desired. The Link parameter is stored within presets and can be accessed via automation.
Unlink
When set to unlink (up position), the controls for channels one and two are completely independent. Unlink is generally used in mono mode. When unlinked, automation data is written and read by each channel separately. When unlink is switched to link, channel 1 controls are copied to channel 2. Control offsets between channels are lost in this case.
Note:
Link
When set to link (down position), modifying any channel one or channel two control causes its adjacent stereo counterpart control to snap to the same position (channel 1 & 2 controls are ganged together in link mode). When link is active, automation data is written and read for channel one only. In this case, the automation data for channel one will control both channels.
Note:
When link is active, changing channel two parameters from a control surface or when in controls only (non-GUI) mode will have no effect.
Mono/Stereo
The Neve 33609 can operate in true stereo or dual-mono mode. This switch determines the active mode.
Mono
In mono mode, channels 1 and 2 are completely independent and the 33609 functions as a dual-mono device, each channel with its own compressor and limiter.
Note:
To read and write automation data for both channels independently when in mono mode, link mode must be disabled.
- 267 -
Stereo
In stereo mode, the left channel is fed to the channel one compressor, and the right channel is fed to the channel two compressor. The two compressors are constrained so that they both compress the same amount at any instant. This prevents transients which appear only on one channel from shifting the image of the output. Any big transient on either channel will cause both channels to compress. The amount of compression will be similar to the amount of compression for a transient which appears on both channels at the same time. In stereo operation the controls for channels 1 and 2 are independent and can be set separately. Generally, the channel with the most processing occurring controls the processing for the other channel. For example, if the same signal is fed to both channels in stereo mode and channel 1 has a lower threshold setting than channel 2, the channel 1 threshold value is used for both channels. Similarly, if channel 1 were disabled (using In switches), channel 2 settings would be used because more processing occurs with the channel 2 settings. It's not always so simple though, as in the following cases: If you feed the same signal into both channels, you can have a lower threshold with a lower ratio on one channel, and a higher threshold with a higher ratio on the other channel. In this case, you will get a double knee, with the lower ratio being used between the knees, and the higher ratio above both knees. If you feed the same signal into both channels, you can have a lower threshold with a faster release on one channel, and a higher threshold with a slower release in the other channel. In this case, you will get a two-stage release after a transient, with the rst channel releasing at the fast rate until you get down to where the other one is; then the release will continue at the slower rate.
Expert Question
Is there any reason I would want to use stereo mode and still have the settings for the two channels different? Yes. Linking the sidechains simply prevents left-right image shifting. Threshold, attack, and recovery can be set independently to cause the compressor to be more sensitive to instruments which are panned to one side or the other. Output controls can be set separately in order to correct an overall image shift at the output.
- 268 -
Headroom
Background
The hardware Neve 33609 can accept an analog signal level of approximately +26 dBu before undesirable signal clipping occurs. As the signal increases up to this point however, desirable audio-path nonlinearities and good harmonic distortion characteristics occur. This musically pleasing warmth at higher levels is what gives the unit much of its revered sonic character. Because analog mixing consoles can typically output high signal levels, audio engineers often take advantage of the ability to push the hardware 33609 into the colorful arena. This complete pallet of sonic nuance, including the dynamic input response, is captured in the UAD Neve 33609 model. The plug-in is calibrated internally so that 0 dBFS at its input is equivalent to an input level of approximately +26 dBu on the 33609 hardware, where the coloring is more prominent. The result is that a typical signal within a DAW will drive the UAD Neve 33609 into these virtual higher levels, resulting in fairly high amounts gain reduction.
Headroom Switch
The Headroom switch is provided to accommodate applications where high amounts of gain reduction are not desired. Headroom simply lowers the internal operating level so that the plug-in is not pushed into gain reduction as much. Headroom can be set to 22 dB, 18 dB, or 14 dB. At 22 dB, signals will push the plug-in into gain reduction (and more non-linearity and good harmonic distortion) more easily. Set the switch to a lower value when less gain reduction and color is desired. The numbers on the switch indicate where 0 dBFS falls relative to nominal +4 dBu. For example, with 22 dB of headroom, 0 dBFS corresponds to +4 dBu + 22 dB = 26 dBu. With 18 dB of headroom, 0 dBFS corresponds to +4 dBu + 18 dB = 22 dBu. The headroom selected will cause the plug-in to behave as though it were a hardware 33609 connected to a nominal +4 dBu interface with the selected amount of headroom. Industry standards for most DAW interfaces are +14 dB and +18 dB headroom. The +22 dB setting approximates some analog mixing environments, and allows the entire useful dynamic range of the 33609 to be exercised. The following settings are application guidelines for the Headroom switch:
- 269 -
22 dB
Typical starting point for individual track inserts where maximum gain reduction is desired. This setting is equivalent to having a real hardware 33609 connected to a +4 interface with +22 dB headroom.
18 dB
Typical starting point when used on a buss or group where nominal gain reduction is desired. This setting is equivalent to having a real hardware 33609 connected to a +4 interface with +18 dB headroom.
14 dB
Typical starting point for mastering where minimal gain reduction is desired. This setting is equivalent to having a real hardware 33609 connected to a +4 interface with +14 dB headroom.
Note:
Keep in mind there are no hard and fast rules. Use the above recommendations as guidelines and feel free to experiment with the various positions of the headroom switch regardless of the audio source. If it sounds good, use it!
Factory Presets
The UAD Neve 33609/33609SE includes a bank of factory presets. These presets can be useful starting points for your particular source audio. The factory preset names begin with MSTR, BUSS, or TRAK. These indicate the setting of the headroom parameter. (14 dB, 18 dB, and 22 dB respectively). Mastering (MSTR) presets are optimized for mixed program material that is already at a relatively high level. Buss/group (BUSS) presets are optimized for subgroups of audio, such as a drum group or vocal group. This type of application often has lower levels than full mixes, but higher levels than a track insert. Track (TRAK) presets are optimized for track inserts where signal levels typically arent as hot as groups or outputs. The preset names are guidelines and not rules. In many cases, you can use any preset on any source with good results. You will probably need to adjust the threshold and/or gain controls to obtain the optimum results with your particular source audio.
- 270 -
Power
The Power switch determines whether the plug-in is active. This is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal, or to bypass the plugin to reduce the UAD DSP load (load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Toggle the switch to change the Power state; the switch is illuminated in red when the plug-in is active. You can click-hold the power switch then drag it like a slider to quickly compare the enabled/disabled state.
Note:
Neve 33609SE
Overview
The UAD Neve 33609SE is derived from the UAD Neve 33609. Its algorithm has been revised in order to provide sonic characteristics very similar to the 33609 but with significantly less DSP usage. It is provided to allow 33609like sound when DSP resources are limited. Nobody with golden ears will claim it sounds exactly like the 33609, but it still sounds great and is very usable in most situations. The 33609SE interface can be differentiated from the 33609 by color and the module name. The 33609SE background is black instead of the 33609s blue/grey, and the module name below the link switch includes SE.
Neve 33609 Latency

The Neve 33609 (but not the 33609SE) uses an internal upsampling technique to facilitate its amazing sonic quality. This upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information.
Note: The
Neve 33609SE does not require additional latency compensation because it is not upsampled.
- 271 -
Note:
- 272 -
CHAPTER 28
Neve 88RS Channel Strip
Overview
In 2001, Neve launched the 88 Series: A new, large-format analog console that represented the best of all Neve designs that came before it. Considered the ultimate console for modern features and reliability, it is also heralded as one of the best-sounding consoles ever made by veterans of both the audio and film communities. The 88RS has found a home in some of the finest rooms and scoring stages around the world, including Ocean Way, Abbey Road, AIR, The Village, Sony Pictures, 20th Century Fox and Skywalker Sound. With a rich palette of modern sound-sculpting tools, the Neve 88RS Channel Strip captures the EQ and dynamics section from Neve's flagship console. The controls comprise 12 dB per octave high and low cut filters, a four-band EQ plus limiting, compression, gate and expansion. The middle EQ bands are fully parametric, while the flexible high and low bands provide the user with two fixed-Q types and the ability to switch to shelving EQ. The VCA-type Limit/Comp provides a 0.01 to 3s release, Auto Release and a continuously variable ratio control with a fixed fast or slow attack time. The Gate/Exp provides 0.01 to 3s release times, fast or slow attack times plus Threshold, Range and Hysteresis to tailor your gate or expansion effect to the perfect response for any source. Additionally, the user may engage the P-DYN button to reorder the signal chain so that the EQ is first. With the SC-EQ button, the user may engage a sidechain feature to achieve frequency-dependent compression for such useful tasks as de-essing.
- 273 -
Chapter 28: Neve 88RS Channel Strip
Neve 88RS Screenshot
Figure 84. The Neve 88RS plug-in window
- 274 -
Neve 88RS Controls

Overview The UAD Neve 88RS controls are divided into four main sections: dynamics, EQ, cut filters, and global. Each section and control is detailed below. In the UAD Neve 88RS plug-in, 0 dBFS is calibrated to +4 dBU plus 18 dB of headroom, so 0 dBFS is equivalent to 22 dBU. Signal Flow The output of the cut filters is fed to the input of the dynamics or EQ section (dependent upon the Pre-Dyn switch). Understanding this signal flow will help you obtain a more predictable result (see Figure 85 below).
Input Dynamics Cut Filters Gate/Exp Comp/Limit Pre-Dyn Switch (swaps Dyn/EQ order) VCA EQ Output Gain
Output
Figure 85. Simplified signal flow within UAD Neve 88RS
Dynamics
The dynamics section consists of a gate/expander and a limiter/compressor. The controls for each of these two dynamics processors are arranged in vertical columns, with the gate/expander controls in the left column, and the limiter/compressor controls in the right column. Both processors can be individually activated or disabled. The settings of the gate do not affect operation of the compressor, and vice versa. The same sidechain signal (EQ'd or not, depending upon Pre EQ switch) is sent to both the gate and compressor. The gains for both the gate and compressor are computed based on that same signal, then both the gate and compressor gains are applied in the same place, by a single gain-reduction VCA (see Figure 85 above).
- 275 -
Gate/Expander
The gate/expander module operates in either gate or expansion mode. In gate mode, signals below the threshold are attenuated by the range (RGE) amount (see Figure 86 on page 276), and hysteresis is available (see Figure 87 on page 277). Expansion mode is enabled by rotating the hysteresis (HYST) control fully counter-clockwise (or clicking the EXP label). In expansion mode, the gate applies downwards expansion at a fixed 1:2 ratio, with the amount of gain reduction determined by the range control. Two attack speeds and a continuously variable release time are available in both modes.
Figure 86. The Neve 88RS Gate/Expander diagram
Gate/Exp Enable (G/E)
This button activates the gate/expander module. The module is active when the button is gray and the green indicator illuminates. You can use this button to compare the gate/expander settings to that of the original signal, or to bypass the module altogether. UAD DSP load is reduced when this module is inactive (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled).
- 276 -
Gate/Exp Hysteresis (HYST)
The Hysteresis knob sets the difference in threshold for signals that are either rising or falling in level. Signals that are rising in level are passed when the level reaches the threshold value plus the hysteresis value. Signals that are falling in level are not passed at the lower threshold level. Up to 25 dB of hysteresis is available. See Figure 87 on page 277. Hysteresis makes the gate less susceptible to stuttering by making the threshold value dependent upon whether the gate is off or on. Raising the threshold for rising signal levels prevents noise from turning the gate on, while allowing a lower threshold for falling levels. This prevents reverb tails from being prematurely gated. For example, if the threshold is set at 50 and the hysteresis is set at 10, the level would have to rise above 40 dB before the signals pass, and the gate would remain open until the level falls below 50 dB. This control also activates expander mode. Rotating Hysteresis fully counterclockwise switches the gate off and the 1:2 downward expander on.
Note:
Expander mode can also be activated by clicking the EXP label text near the knob. When EXP is clicked again, the knob returns to the previous value in gate mode.
Figure 87. Hysteresis in the Neve 88RS Gate
Gate/Exp Threshold (THR)
Threshold defines the input level at which expansion or gating occurs. Any signals below this level are processed. Signals above the threshold are unaffected.
- 277 -
The available range is 25 dB to +15 dB. A range of 25 dB to 65 dB is available when the 40 dB switch is engaged (see Gate/Exp Threshold 40 dB on page 278). In typical use its best to set the threshold value to just above the noise floor of the desired signal (so the noise doesnt pass when the desired signal is not present), but below the desired signal level (so the signal passes when present). Gate/Exp Threshold 40 dB The 40 dB button increases the sensitivity of the gate and expander by lowering the range of the available threshold values. When 40 dB mode is active, the threshold range is 25 dB to 65 dB. When 40 is inactive, the threshold range is 25 dB to +15 dB. To activate 40 dB mode, click the pull 40 label text or the red indicator just below the Threshold control. 40 dB mode is active when the red indicator illuminates. Gate/Exp Range (RGE) Range (RGE) controls the difference in gain between the gated/expanded and non-gated/expanded signal. Higher values increase the attenuation of signals below the threshold. When set to zero, no gating or expansion occurs. The available range is 0 dB to 60 dB. Gate/Exp Fast The Fast mode switch defines the gate/expander attack time, which is the duration between the input signal reaching the threshold and processing being applied. Two times are available: 500 microseconds (when Fast is off) and 50 microseconds (when Fast is active). To activate Fast mode, click the pull FAST label text or the red indicator just below the Range (RGE) control. Fast mode is active when the red indicator illuminates. Gate/Exp Release (REL) Release sets the amount of time it takes for processing to engage once the input signal drops below the threshold level. The available range is 10 milliseconds to 3 seconds.
- 278 -
Slower release times can smooth the transition that occurs when the signal dips below the threshold, which is especially useful for material with frequent peaks. Fast release times are typically only suitable for certain types of percussion and other instruments with very fast decays. Using fast settings on other sources may produce undesirable results.
Note:
Gate/Exp Meter
This meter displays the amount of gain attenuation (downward expansion) occurring in the gate/expander module.
Limiter/Compressor
The limiter/compressor module offers a continuously variable ratio between 1:1 (no compression) and infinity:1 (limiting). Signals above the threshold are attenuated according to the ratio (RAT) value. Two attack speeds and continuously variable release times are available, along with a pleasing automatic triple time-constant program-dependent release mode (auto mode has a threestage release). A makeup gain control and a hard/soft knee setting are also available in the module. From the AMS-Neve 88RS User Manual: Anti pumping and breathing circuitry allows the unit to operate on the source musically whilst retaining absolute control over the dynamic range. The 88RS compressor has another nifty property: Two thresholds. When the signal falls below the threshold, the compressor is releasing. But, if the signal falls below a second (non-adjustable) threshold, which is roughly 40 dB below the adjustable threshold value, then the release slows down drastically. This acts as a silence detector. The concept is that if there is a quiet signal, then the compressor should release to reduce the dynamic range. But if there is a sudden onset of silence, it is likely that, when the signal returns, it will be at about the same level as the region before the silence. So in that case, the compressor doesn't release quickly.
- 279 -
An example: When compressing a snare track with a standard compressor, if the snare hits are sparse, the compressor will release between each hit, so that each hit has a squashed sound. With the 88R compressor, distortion will be reduced, because the compressor will not come out of compression as much between the snare hits. The compressor will still release somewhat during the snare hits, however. For additional information, see The LA-2 captures one of the earliest Teletronix examples. This exceedingly rare unit preceded the LA-2A by a few years and incredibly, still has the original T4A fully intact. The LA-2 provides the slowest response and a unique mellowed sound due to 50 years of luminescent panel aging inside the T4 module. Use the LA-2 with legato tempos and your most vowel-like sources for a transparency and sublime mood unlike any other compressor. on page 470.
Note:
L/C Enable (L/C)
This button activates the limiter/compressor module. The module is active when the button is gray and the green indicator illuminates. You can use this button to compare the limiter/compressor settings to that of the original signal, or to bypass the module altogether. UAD DSP load is reduced when this module is inactive (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled).
L/C Gain
The Gain control adjusts the output level of the limiter/compressor module. The available range is 0 dB to 30 dB. Generally speaking, adjust this makeup gain control after the desired amount of processing is achieved with the Threshold control. The Gain control does not affect the amount of processing.
L/C Hard Knee (HN)
Normally, the limiter and compressor operate with soft knee characteristics. This switch gives the limiter and compressor a hard knee instead. To activate Hard Knee mode, click the pull HN label text or the red indicator just below the Gain control. Hard Knee mode is active when the red indicator illuminates.
- 280 -
L/C Threshold
Threshold defines the input level at which limiting or compression begins. Signals that exceed this level are processed. Signals below the threshold are unaffected. The available range is +20 dB to 10 dB. A range of 0 dB to 30 dB is available when the 20 dB switch is engaged (see L/C Threshold 20 dB on page 281). As the Threshold control is increased and more processing occurs, output level is typically reduced. Adjust the Gain control to modify the output of the module to compensate if desired.
Note:
L/C Threshold 20 dB
The 20 dB switch increases the sensitivity of the limiter/compressor by lowering the range of the available threshold values. When 20 dB mode is active, the threshold range is 0 dB to 30 dB. When 20 is inactive, the threshold range is +20 dB to 10 dB. To activate 20 dB mode, click the pull 20 label text or the red indicator just below the Threshold control. 20 dB mode is active when the red indicator illuminates.
L/C Ratio (RAT)
Ratio defines the amount of gain reduction to be processed by the module. For example, a value of 2 (expressed as a 2:1 ratio) reduces the signal by half, with an input signal of 20 dB being reduced to 10 dB. A value of 1 yields no gain reduction. When the control is at maximum (lim), the ratio is effectively infinity to one, yielding the limiting effect. The available range is 1 to infinity.
L/C Fast
The Fast mode switch defines the attack time (the duration between the input signal reaching the threshold and processing being applied) of the limiter and compressor. Attack time is program dependent. Two ranges are available: 3 milliseconds to 7 milliseconds (Fast off) and 1 millisecond to 7 milliseconds (Fast active). To activate Fast mode, click the pull FAST label text or the red indicator just below the Ratio (RAT) control. Fast mode is active when the red indicator illuminates.
- 281 -
L/C Release
Release sets the amount of time it takes for processing to cease once the input signal drops below the threshold level. The available range is 10 milliseconds to 3 seconds, and automatic. Automatic triple time-constant program dependent release time is activated by turning the release control fully clockwise (to 3s) or by clicking the AUTO label text. Slower release times can smooth the transition that occurs when the signal dips below the threshold, which is especially useful for material with frequent peaks. However, if the release is too long, compression for sections of audio with loud signals may extend to sections of audio with lower signals. Fast release times are typically only suitable for certain types of percussion and other instruments with very fast decays. Using fast settings on other sources may produce undesirable results.
Note:
L/C Meter
This meter displays the amount of gain attenuation occurring in the limiter/compressor module.
EQ
The UAD Neve 88RS Formant Spectrum EQ (AMS-Neve's descriptor) is divided into four frequency bands (see Figure 88 on page 283): High Frequency (HF), High Midrange Frequency (HMF), Low Midrange Frequency (LMF), and Low Frequency (LF). The high and low bands can be switched into shelving and/or High-Q modes. The two midrange bands are fully parametric. The EQ module can be disabled altogether. When the high frequency (HF) and/or low frequency (LF) band is in shelf mode, the band gain affects the band frequency. As gain is increased, the shelf frequency more closely matches the knob value. As gain is reduced however, the low shelving frequency moves higher, and the high shelving frequency moves lower.
- 282 -
With the UAD Neve 88RS EQ, the Q value and range is dependent on the gain setting of the band. With any non-zero gain setting, the Q will be calcuEQ gain module lated in real-time for that band. But if the band is zero, Q will always disenable switch play zero. The unique sound of AMS-Neve EQ is the result of years of research and extensive studio experience. 88RS EQ Band Layout
High Frequency (HF) band controls
High Midrange Frequency (HMF) band controls
Low Midrange Frequency (LMF) band controls
Low Frequency (LF) band controls
Figure 88. Neve 88RS EQ Controls Layout
EQ Enable (EQ)
This button activates the equalizer module. The module is active when the button is gray and the green indicator illuminates.
- 283 -
You can use this button to compare the equalized signal to the original signal or bypass the EQ altogether. UAD DSP load is reduced when this module is inactive (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). HF Freq This parameter determines the HF band center frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the band Gain setting. The available range is 1.5 kHz to 18 kHz.
HF Gain
This control determines the amount by which the frequency setting for the HF band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 20 dB.
HF Hi-Q Enable
The filter slope of the HF band can be changed with this control. When Hi-Q is off, the Q is 0.7. When Hi-Q is active, the Q is 2. Higher Q values mean the peak (or trough) has steeper slopes. Hi-Q is active when the button is gray and the yellow indicator illuminates. HiQ is off by default.
Note:
Hi-Q has no effect when the band is in shelf mode. The HF band can be switched from bell mode to shelving mode by clicking the shelf enable button. Shelf mode is active when the button is gray and the yellow indicator illuminates. Shelf is off by de-
HF Shelf Enable
fault. HMF Freq This control determines the HMF band center frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the HMF Gain setting. The available range is 800 Hz to 9 kHz.
HMF Gain
This control determines the amount by which the frequency setting for the HMF band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 20 dB.
- 284 -
HMF Q
The Q (bandwidth) control defines the proportion of frequencies surrounding the HMF band center frequency to be affected by the band gain control. The filter slopes get steeper (narrower) as the control is rotated clockwise. The available range is 0.4 to 10. This control determines the LMF band center frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the LMF Gain setting. The available range is 120 Hz to 2 kHz. This control determines the amount by which the frequency setting for the LMF band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 20 dB. The Q (bandwidth) control defines the proportion of frequencies surrounding the LMF band center frequency to be affected by the band gain control. The filter slopes get steeper (narrower) as the control is rotated clockwise. The available range is 0.4 to 10. This parameter determines the LF band center frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the band Gain setting. The available range is 33 Hz to 440 kHz. This control determines the amount by which the frequency setting for the LF band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 20 dB. The LF band can be switched from bell mode to shelving mode by clicking the shelf enable button. Shelf mode is active when the button is gray and the yellow indicator illuminates. Shelf is off by default. The filter slope of the LF band can be switched with this control. When Hi-Q is off, the Q is 0.7. When Hi-Q is active, the Q is 2. Higher Q values mean the peak/trough has steeper slopes. Hi-Q is active when the button is gray and the yellow indicator illuminates. HiQ is off by default.
Note:
LMF Freq
LMF Gain
LMF Q
LF Freq
LF Gain
LF Shelf Enable
LF Hi-Q Enable
Hi-Q has no effect when the band is in shelf mode.
- 285 -
Cut Filters
In addition to the four-band EQ, UAD Neve 88RS offers two cut filters, one each for low and high frequencies. The slope of the cut filters is 12 dB per octave. Each cut filter has two controls: Cut Enable and Frequency. Both controls are detailed below. DSP load is not reduced when the cut filters are disabled. Cut Enable This button activates the cut filter. The cut filter is active when the button is gray and the red indicator illuminates. This knob determines the cutoff frequency for the cut filter. The available range is 7.5 kHz to 18 kHz for the high cut filter (lighter blue control), and 31.5 Hz to 315 Hz for the low cut filter (darker blue control).
Note: UAD
Cut Frequency
Global
Sidechain EQ (SC-EQ) This control enables the UAD Neve 88RS sidechain function. When sidechain is active, signal output from the EQ module is removed from the audio path and is instead routed to control the dynamics module. Sidechaining is typically used for de-essing and similar frequency-conscious techniques. To listen to the sidechain key, simply disengage SC-EQ to hear the EQ'd signal. The sidechain dynamics/EQ implementations are true stereo when used in a stereo in/stereo out configuration.
Note:
The EQ module must be active in conjunction with SC-EQ for the sidechain to function (see EQ Enable (EQ) on page 283). This button re-routes the UAD Neve 88RS signal. Normally, the audio signal is routed from the dynamics module into the EQ module (i.e., the EQ is post-dynamics). When P-DYN is enabled, the EQ module precedes the dynamics module.
Pre-Dynamics (P-DYN)
Pre-dynamics is active when the button is gray and the red indicator illuminates.
- 286 -
Phase
The Phase () button inverts the polarity of the signal. The signal is inverted when the button is gray and the red indicator illuminates. Leave the button inactive (unlit) for normal phase. The Output knob controls the signal level that is output from the plug-in. The default value is 0 dB. The available range is 20 dB.
Output
Power
The Power switch determines whether the plug-in is active. This is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal or bypassing the plug-in to reduce the UAD DSP load (load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Toggle the switch to change the Power state; the switch is illuminated in red when the plug-in is active. You can click-hold the power switch then drag it like a slider to quickly compare the enabled/disabled state.
Note:
The Neve 88RS at Skywalker Sound in California
- 287 -
CHAPTER 29
Ocean Way Studios

Dynamic Room Modeling
Welcome to Ocean Way Studios the Worlds First Dynamic Room Modeling Plug-In
Developed by Universal Audio and Allen Sides, the Ocean Way Studios plug-in re-writes the book on whats possible with acoustic space emulation. By combining elements of room, microphone and source modeling, Ocean Way Studios moves far beyond standard impulse response players and reverbs giving you an authentic dynamic replication of one of the worlds most famous recording studios. Ocean Way Studios allows you to virtually book unlimited time at Ocean Way Recording in Hollywood, California (formerly a part of United/Western Recorders). This plug-in provides everything you need to help make your music sound as if it were recorded in the beautifully balanced, performance-inspiring rooms that were designed and built by modern recording pioneer and Universal Audio founder M.T. Bill Putnam. Additionally, the Ocean Way plug-in grants virtual access to $250,000 worth of hand-picked, vintage microphones from Allen Sides' personal collection one of the largest in the world all of which are capable of being moved and changed dynamically within the studio spaces as three separate stereo microphone pairs. UA's proprietary Dynamic Room Modeling combines DSP and exclusive measurement techniques to reinvent room ambience processing. The end result is an uncanny recreation of Ocean Way's iconic studio rooms A and B. By nature of its specialization, the Ocean Way Studios plug-in invites its users to explore the entire space of these never-before-available temples of legendary sound. Allen Sides microphone setups are the centerpiece of Ocean Way Studios. They capture the ideal microphone selections and placements for each room and source type, and create Ocean Way Studios' fundamental sound. Mr. Sides' eight expertly chosen positions are featured per studio as discrete instrument or vocal source selections; each is designed to recreate its inherent
- 288 -
Chapter 29: Ocean Way Studios
dispersion patterns. This enables users to recreate the same set-ups used to record some of the biggest acts of all time including Michael Jackson, Madonna, U2, Ray Charles, Radiohead, Beck, Tom Petty, The Rolling Stones, and many, many more. Even the unique consoles in each room have been incorporated into the overall sound the Ocean Way Recording-modified Focusrite ISA 110 console in Studio A, and the famous custom-modified Putnam/Dalcon console in Studio B.
Ocean Way Studios Screenshot
Figure 89. The UAD Ocean Way Studios plug-in window
- 289 -
What Is Ocean Way Studios?

Ocean Way Studios is a dynamically adjustable room emulator for adding the ambience of Ocean Way Recordings acclaimed studios A or B to audio signals.
Figure 90. Interior photos of Room A (left) and Room B (right) at Ocean Way Recording
Ocean Way Studios offers two modes of operation. It can be used as a traditional reverb using send/return paths mixed with dry signals, or as a Re-Mic processor when full immersion of the original source audio within Ocean Ways studio spaces is desired. Re-Mic mode is by nature fully wet and includes the impulse responses direct signal. Re-Mic can be used to entirely replace previous rooms and microphones, or create new complimentary room sounds. Allen Sides Ocean Way Studios was collaboratively developed under the creative direction of renowned producer/engineer Allen Sides. As the owner/operator of Ocean Way Recording for more than 30 years (see The History of Ocean Way Recording on page 315), his knowledge of how to record various sources within these studios is integral to the high quality results that can be achieved with Ocean Way Studios. Allen Sides is not only known for his audio engineering expertise, but also for his collection of prized microphones. The specific microphones that were used to develop Ocean Way Studios, and their placement positions on a variety of sources, were selected by Mr. Sides himself.
Microphones
- 290 -
Hybrid Technology
Ocean Way Studios is not a general impulse response (IR) convolution reverb nor a typical algorithmic reverb. Instead, Ocean Way Studios utilizes breakthrough hybrid technologies, combining expertly sampled impulse responses with advanced algorithmic DSP techniques. Ocean Way Studios focuses on a limited set of studio spaces and exhaustively models numerous room positions, microphones, and sound source dispersion patterns which all combine to provide the ultimate in acoustic realism. Ocean Way Studios is sonically superior in terms of overall model accuracy and dynamic customization. The factory presets are of particular importance with the Ocean Way Studios plug-in, because they are designed by Allen Sides and they capture his ideal microphone selections and placement positions for each studio and source. 32 presets are available in the internal factory bank, providing optimum control settings in both Re-Mic and Reverb modes. 10 additional presets that use the guitar cabinets as source can be accessed via the UAD Toolbar. Choosing presets differs from simply choosing different Studio, Source, and Microphone selections. Because with Ocean Way Studios its possible to select a variety of microphones and place the microphones in positions that dont sound optimum (just like in the physical realm), the presets provide excellent starting points for customizations and an easy way to quickly return to a great sound. The factory presets have only one microphone pair enabled to ensure there are no undesirable phase interactions. Of course, more than one microphone pair can be used for sonic variety and/or to enable creative applications. See Phase Considerations on page 300 for related information. Note: Switching through presets is not instantaneous and sonic artifacts can occur while the presets are loading. See Load Time on page 302 for related information.
Concise Modeling
Presets
- 291 -
Operational Overviews
Overviews of important underlying concepts are presented below. For details about how to operate the specific controls, see Ocean Way Studios Controls beginning on page 304.
Modes Overview
Ocean Way Studios offers two modes of operation: Re-Mic and Reverb. These modes process signals in fundamentally different ways. Recorded Sound Components Whenever a sound source is recorded in a naturally reverberant space, there are three primary sound components (Figure 91) that are captured by the microphone:
1. The
direct signal. This is the sound path that travels directly between the source and the microphone, without any reected sounds from the walls, oor, ceiling, and objects. reected off the walls, oor, ceiling, and objects before reaching the microphone.
2. The early reections. These are the still-distinct individual reections that are
3. The late eld (aka reverb tail or ambience). This is the indistinct wash that
decays over time, comprised of all reections in the room. The tail is usually considered the main component of reverb.
Figure 91. The main signal components in an acoustically recorded sound
- 292 -
Its important to notice that the recorded direct signal component (#1 on previous page) is different than pre-existing dry (unprocessed) acoustic recordings in a DAW. This is because within a DAW, the dry audio was already recorded so it already contains the direct signal component (along with all the other components) that was captured by the microphone originally used. This distinction is fundamental to the Re-Mic process. Re-Mic Processing Re-Mic mode is a tool for replacing the original dry audio signal. When Ocean Way Studios is in Re-Mic mode, the original dry signal is not mixed back in with the wet processed signal. Instead, the dry signal is processed to sound as if it were recorded inside the studio space itself, by emulating the direct signal component. This processed source signal thus inherits the sonic characteristics of the studio acoustics, source dispersion patterns, and microphones with more accuracy and realism than is possible with reverb processing. The concept is similar to that of guitar re-amping whereby previously recorded guitar tracks are routed out of the DAW, into a guitar amplifier, then re-recorded using a microphone to replace the original guitar track with a new track that inherits the sonic characteristics of the amp. This technique is also used in studios to great effect by re-micing any pre-existing audio to inherit the sonic characteristics of the recording room. In the same way, with Ocean Way Studios, any track or bus can be routed into the plug-in to re-record the original source so it inherits the sonic characteristics of the Ocean Way studio acoustics, source dispersion patterns, and microphones. Reverb Processing In artificial reverb processors, the direct signal component is not actually part of the processed signal. Instead, the original dry signal is simply mixed back in with the reverb ambience (the wet signal). Although great results can be obtained with this method, it is only an approximation of what really happens in the physical realm. When Ocean Way Studios is in Reverb mode, the plug-in behaves like most artificial reverb processors. The direct signal component is not in the processed signal. Instead, the original dry signal is mixed back in with the wet reverb ambience. For additional details about Reverb and Re-Mic modes, see Using Ocean Way Studios on page 298.
- 293 -
Microphones Overview
In addition to the studio room acoustics, the microphones used in the development of Ocean Way Studios are a significant contributor to the tonality and fidelity of the plug-in. Microphone Selections Ocean Way Studios contains 11 different microphone pairs. Additionally, some of these microphone pairs are available with cardioid and omnidirectional polar frequency response patterns. The microphones that are available, along with their descriptions, are listed in Table 22 below.
Table 22. Available microphones in Ocean Way Studios Microphone* C12 C12A M50 Description Allen's incredibly clear and present C12s, these large diaphragm tube condenser mics use a dual backplate design providing great off-axis frequency response. The next-generation, multi-pattern tube condenser mic provides excellent close mic response and consistent low frequency response at further distances. Noted for its far distance placement consistency, the response of this medium diaphragm omnidirectional mic becomes more cardioid above 800 Hz. Allen Sides favorite microphone. The studio standard KM54 is a nickel capsule, medium diaphragm, pressure gradient cardioid condenser tube mic, providing maximum on-axis sensitivity. The secret weapon omni MKH20 provides rise in directionality at high frequencies. OWR B Far Strings, Horns and Vocal Group has Allen placing the MHK20s at the walls. Distance is unavailable when this mic is used for the OWR B Far selection. A multi-pattern dual diaphragm tube condenser mic with a distinct sonic signature. This best of the best set was picked by Allen from his collection. One of the most recognizable mics in recording, this multi-pattern tube condenser is prized for its amazing realism and clarity. Only about a hundred of these amazing cardioid ribbon mics were ever made, providing an impressionistic sound useful within a multi-pair setup. The iconic American figure-8 ribbon velocity mic used for broadcast, studio, and live sound is noted for its strong off-axis rejection and smooth tone. No mic locker is complete without this cardioid pattern, high rejection dynamic studio workhorse, which features a familiar bass roll-off and mid-range presence. A razor-flat small diaphragm omni reference grade mic found in OWR Bs loft as a permanent installation. Distance is unavailable when this mic is used for Far selection.
KM54 MKH20
U67 U47 KU3A 44 SM57 4006
*Microphone names are all trademarks of their respective owners, which are in no way associated or affiliated with Universal Audio or Ocean Way Recording. These microphone names, descriptions and images are provided for the sole purpose of identifying the specific microphones studied during Universal Audios sound model development and to describe certain microphone sound qualities and performance characteristics. Ocean Way Studios is a trademark used under license by Ocean Way Recording Inc.
- 294 -
Polar Patterns
All microphone selections are denoted with O, C, or 8 after their name. Microphones with O after the name indicates the polar frequency response pattern of the mic is omnidirectional. Microphones with C after the name indicates the polar pattern of the mic is cardioid. Microphones with 8 after the name indicates the mic has a figure 8 polar pattern. In simplistic terms, omni microphones are equally sensitive to sound pressure levels from all directions, while cardioid microphones are more sensitive to sound from the front of the mic and less sensitive from the rear of the mic. Figure 8 microphones are equally sensitive at the front and rear of the mic, but less sensitive at the sides.
Near/Mid/Far
Up to three microphones pairs (Near, Mid, Far) are available. Each microphone pair can be active simultaneously for creative sonic blending.
Independent Controls
Each microphone pair has its own set of controls that can be independently adjusted. The individual microphone controls are Selection, Distance, High Cut Filter, Low Cut Filter, Polarity Invert, Mute, Balance, and Level. For details about how to operate these controls, see Mic Selection on page 309. Generally speaking, the closer a microphone pair is to the source, the less room ambience is captured by the microphones, so a Far microphone pair will tend to have more ambience (more live) than a Near microphone pair. Note: Just as in the physical realm, there can be signal phase interactions when using more than one microphone simultaneously. For details, see Phase Considerations on page 300. Mic Positions The microphone placement positions within the studio rooms are specified by Allen Sides based on his expertise of which microphone positions produce great results for a given studio and source. Although these pre-defined microphone positions cannot be moved from side-to-side, they can be moved closer or farther with the Distance control.
- 295 -
Distance
The distance from the microphone pair to the source can be dynamically adjusted using the Distance control. Just as when recording with microphones in the physical realm, the mic-to-source distance can have a significant impact on the sound that is captured. The room will sound tighter and more present the closer the mics are to the source; conversely, the room gets bigger when the mics are farther away from the source. The Ocean Way Studios modeling includes the proximity gain that occurs in the physical realm; the signal can be notably louder as microphones are positioned closer to the source.
Stereo Separation
The separation between a stereo microphone pair varies depending on the microphone pair selected and its Distance setting. With most settings, the separation increases incrementally as the distance from the source increases.
Fixed Distance Microphones
When Studio is set to OWR B and Source is set to Strings, Horns, or Vocal Group, the 4006 and MKH20 selections for the Far microphone cannot be repositioned with the Distance control. With the Far MKH20, this is a specialized setup whereby Mr. Sides chose to set the microphones near the walls for the best sound. With the Far 4006, this is because these mics are fixed installations in the studio loft (they cannot be adjusted in the real studio either). Distance Delay (Aligned) Overview When recording a sound source with a microphone, there is an inherent delay between the source and the microphone. This delay is the time it takes for the sound waves to physically travel from the source to the mic (see Figure 92 on page 297). The farther the distance is from the source to the mic, the longer the delay time. When a microphone pair in Ocean Way Studios is set to aligned by clicking its Distance knob, this inherent mic delay is artificially removed so the sound source reaches the mic instantaneously. The setting is useful when the source audio signals need to remain time-aligned, or simply for its own physically-impossible sonic effect.
- 296 -
Removing this inherent delay can be especially useful in these scenarios: If a source is recorded with a distant room mic, it will play back later in relation to sources that are close-miced. Typically, this delay can be compensated in the DAW by manually shifting the track forward in time so it aligns with the other instruments. With Ocean Way Studios, removing the microphone delay will align the distant mics automatically. When the microphone pair is distant from the source, the additional microphone delay can be problematic for performers tracking in realtime while monitoring through the plug-in. Setting the microphone pairs to aligned reduces realtime latency. Tip: The most realistic acoustic emulations are recreated when the distance delay is retained (aligned off). This is because the inherent source-to-mic delays provide subtle yet important auditory cues that our brains use to interpret the acoustic space.
Figure 92. Illustration of Distance Delay. When set to aligned, this extra time is eliminated.
Acoustic Balancing
All rooms have frequency-dependent resonances that impact the loudness and sonic balances within the room. Furthermore, microphone selections and their placement within the room, as well as the audio source itself, all impact the relative levels and timbres that are captured in a recording. Although the studios at Ocean Way are beautifully designed and tuned, they are naturally subject to the same acoustic principles. Because the plug-in accurately models the ingredient interdependencies, certain combinations of studios, sources, mic selections, and mic placements may cause the level balances to seem too quiet or too loud, or the balance may not be perfectly centered. Microphone Gain and Balance controls are provided to compensate for these imbalances, providing ample practical and creative flexibility to achieve the desired results.
- 297 -
Using Ocean Way Studios

For details about how to operate the specific controls, see Ocean Way Studios Controls beginning on page 304. Best On Dry Sources Ocean Way Studios does not remove already-recorded ambience from existing audio signals. For optimum ambience control when using the plug-in, the source audio should be as dry as possible. However, Ocean Way Studios is very forgiving, and great results can be obtained even if the original source has existing ambience. Tip: Using ambience reduction tools prior to processing with Ocean Way Studios can yield improved results with particularly ambient audio. Which Mode?
When to use Reverb mode
Use Reverb mode to add Ocean Way Studios ambience to existing sources just as you would with other reverb processors and methodologies. See Reverb Processing on page 293 for an overview of Reverb mode. Figure 93 shows a traditional auxiliary effect bus send/return configuration in a DAW. In this example, Ocean Way Studios is inserted on the effects bus, the plug-in is in Reverb mode, and its Wet Solo control is enabled (100% wet). Individual reverb amounts are set with the send control for each individual channel, and the overall reverb amount is set with the bus return fader. Tip: This configuration conserves UAD DSP resources when the same effect settings are desired for multiple channels (instead of using the plug-in on individual channels).
Figure 93. DAW signal routing in Reverb mode using a traditional effect send/return configuration.
- 298 -
When to use Re-Mic Mode
Use Re-Mic mode to replace existing audio with new audio that inherits the sonic characteristics of Ocean Way Studios. The original dry signal component is removed and completely immersed with Ocean Way room sound. See Re-Mic Processing on page 293 for an overview of Re-Mic mode. Figure 94 shows how to configure the Re-mic workflow in a DAW. In this example, all the drums are routed to a submix bus instead of the main outputs. Ocean Way Studios is inserted on the submix bus return, and the plug-in is in Re-Mic mode. Note that the effect sends are not used in this configuration. In Re-Mic mode, the Dry/Wet (mix) control is automatically fixed at 100% wet so the original dry signal does not stack or phase against the modeled direct component signal. Instead of an effect bus return (or mix control), the desired ambience is adjusted with the studio, source, and microphone selections, along with microphone placements and their relative levels. Note: Because Re-Mic mode includes the direct signal path component in addition to the reverb components, the plug-in output is inherently louder in Re-Mic mode.
Figure 94. DAW signal routing with OWS in Re-Mic mode on a drum submix
- 299 -
Dual-Mode Example
Figure 95 shows how to use both Re-Mic and Reverb modes with two instances of the plug-in, combining the workflows of the two previous examples. The illustration combines a drum submix is being used for Re-Mic mode, while send/return routing is being used for guitar and vocals in Reverb mode.
Figure 95. DAW signal routing in a workflow with two Ocean Way Studios plug-in instances. One uses Re-Mic mode for the drum submix, and the other uses Reverb mode for the guitar and vocals.
Phase Considerations
When recording in the physical world, it is possible for phase issues to manifest when more than one microphone is used on a source. The sonic characteristic of phasing (more accurately called comb filtering) results when frequencies that are being captured by more than one microphone are emphasized because they are summed (signals in phase) or de-emphasized because they are canceled (signals out of phase). Phase issues resulting from the use of multiple microphones can usually be diminished by simply adjusting the placement position(s) of the microphone(s), or switching its signal polarity.
Phasing with Ocean Way Studios
Phasing is intrinsic when recording with multiple microphones. Because Ocean Way Studios accurately models the acoustic space and the microphones within the space, it is possible for the plug-in to sound phasey due to phase issues if the controls are not properly set, especially in Re-Mic mode (phasing is generally not an issue in Reverb mode).
- 300 -
Whenever more than one microphone pair is simultaneously enabled, careful attention should be paid to the Distance (position) and Polarity Invert parameters to avoid potential phase issues. Just as with moving microphones around and changing signal polarity when recording acoustically, changes to Distance and Polarity Invert can have a dramatic effect on the sound. Note that sometimes phasing can sound just fine, and can be useful for creative purposes. Ocean Way Studios sounds amazing when set properly. If using more than one microphone and the plug-in doesnt seem to sound right, adjust the Distance and/or Polarity parameters on one (or more) of the microphones to taste until phasing is minimized.
Dont Include Original Dry Signal in Re-Mic Mode
Because Re-Mic mode includes the direct signal component, if the original dry signal is mixed with the processed signal when Ocean Way Studios is in Re-Mic mode, phasing is likely to occur in this configuration (for example, if the plug-in is in Re-Mic mode when used in a traditional effects bus send/return configuration). For illustrations of proper DAW routing in Re-Mic mode, see Figure 94 on page 299 and Figure 95 on page 300. Important: For the intended design results and to minimize phasing when Ocean Way Studios is in Re-Mic mode, exercise caution to ensure the original dry signal is not mixed with Ocean Way Studios processed output. Latency Ocean Way Studios is not an upsampled plug-in. However, due to its unique design requirements, Ocean Way Studios is subject to increased latency versus other UAD plug-ins. The increased latency may be objectionable when tracking through Ocean Way Studios if the plug-in is in Re-Mic mode and/or on individual inserts in Reverb mode. This impediment also applies with Apollo when using the Console application for Realtime UAD Processing. The latency is typically not an issue when used in a typical effect send/return configuration in Reverb mode, nor during mixdown when latency is not a concern. Therefore, when tracking live performances and the performer is monitoring through Ocean Way Studios, we generally recommend using it in Reverb mode using a typical effect send/return configuration where latency with time-based effects does not affect the monitored performance. Note: Latency can be reduced further with Distance Delay on page 309.
- 301 -
The latency of Ocean Way Studios depends on the sample rate. The exact latency values are provided in Table 23.
Table 23. Latency in Ocean Way Studios Sample Rate (kHz) 44.1 48 88.1 Latency (samples) 192 192 688 Latency (time) 4.3 ms 4.0 ms 7.8 ms Sample Rate (kHz) 96 176.4 192 Latency (samples) 688 1568 1568 Latency (time) 7.1 ms 8.9 ms 8.2 ms
Note: As with all UAD plug-ins, the latency of Ocean Way Studios is automatically compensated by the DAW. See Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for related information. Load Time When certain Ocean Way Studios controls are modified (items in the two left-most columns in Table 24 on page 303), the impulse response engine is updated and/or microphone recalculations are performed by the plug-in. These IR updates and recalculations are not instantaneous; there is a time lag before the new control values are heard. Additionally, sonic artifacts and/or host CPU increases can occur while these recalculations are performed if audio is currently being processed by the plug-in. Because there are extensive interdependencies within the plug-in, the specific load time depends on the control(s) being modified. The Load Progress LED on page 308 is a status indicator that flashes during the reload.
Automation Limitations
The load time can be an impediment if the specific controls are modified with automation during a mix. We recommend against changing specific controls with automation to avoid sonic artifacts and/or host CPU increases. If automation must be used on these controls, only snapshot automation should be used (instead of continuous automation), and only when the signal being processed is not audible (for example, between musical phrases). Parameter automation recommendations are listed in Table 24 on page 303.
- 302 -
Table 24. Parameter Automation Recommendations Automation Not Recommended Studio: Select Source: Select Microphone: Select Automation May Cause Zippering Artifacts* Microphone: Distance Microphone: Delay Microphone: High Cut Microphone: Low Cut Microphone: Polarity Microphone: Mute Microphone: Gain Microphone: Gain Master: Predelay Continuous Automation OK Mode (Re-Mic/Reverb) Master: EQ Low Frequency Master: EQ Low Gain Master: EQ High Frequency Master: EQ high Gain Master: L/R Swap Master: Mono Sum Master: Wet Solo Master: Dry/Wet Mix Master: Output Level Master: Bypass
*Snapshot (static) automation between audio passages is recommended if automation is used
- 303 -
Ocean Way Studios Controls

Mode Ocean Way Studios offers two modes of operation: Re-Mic and Reverb. Click a mode control to activate the mode. The button of the current mode is illuminated. For details about the differences between these two modes, see Modes Overview on page 292.
Re-Mic
In Re-Mic mode, the dry signal path is eliminated and the audio is processed as if it was recorded inside Ocean Way Recording. Important: For the intended design results and to minimize phasing when Ocean Way Studios is in Re-Mic mode, exercise caution to ensure the original dry signal is not mixed with Ocean Way Studios processed output.
Reverb
In Reverb mode, the plug-in behaves like most reverb plug-ins; the modeled direct signal component is not included. Due to inherent nature of the Ocean Way Studios design, changes to the microphone Distance and Gain settings are less audible in Reverb mode than Re-Mic mode. Studio Ocean Way Studios contains meticulous models of rooms A and B at Ocean Way Recording. Each room (Figure 90 below) has unique sonic characteristics.
Figure 96. Interior photos of Room A (left) and Room B (right) at Ocean Way Recording
- 304 -
OWR A
Ocean Way Recording A is Ocean Way's most spacious studio (45 x 52), suitable for four-piece bands to full orchestras. With a rich sound, exceptionally clear low end, and super smooth decay, OWR A is a study in classic studio design. Associated artists include John Mayer and Whitney Houston, to classics like Frank Sinatra and Count Basie.
OWR B
Ocean Way Recording B is M.T. Bill Putnams crowning achievement in studio design. This flawless miniature concert hall (35 x 45) makes recordings bigger than life. The separate isolation room (18 x 45) is a second studio ideal for guitars, providing an amazing response for distance micing. Radiohead and Green Day to Ray Charles and Duke Ellington have all made Room B their home.
Studio Menu
The Studio menu selects between the two recording rooms at Ocean Way Recording: OWR A and OWR B. To change the active studio, click the current studio name then select the desired room from the drop menu. Tip: To change the studio room without altering the current microphone selections, press Shift on the computer keyboard while changing the studio selection.
Studio Defaults
When the studio is changed, the default settings for mic selections and distances are loaded for the near, mid, and far microphones. This menu does not change the mic filter, polarity, mute, balance, or level settings.
- 305 -
Source
A variety of audio sources (dispersion patterns) were modeled for Ocean Way Studios. The Source menu sets the optimum placement of the source within the room, as determined by the expertise of Allen Sides. Because an audio sources placement within a room determines the dispersion pattern of sound waves throughout the room, the active source can have a significant impact on the sound in the room. Note: Although the source placements are optimized for the source in the title (drums, strings, etc), any type of audio source can be used with any Source selection. Experimentation is encouraged.
Source Menu
To change the active source, click the current source name then select the desired source from the drop menu. The current source is displayed in the menu and as an icon in the Position display panel. The modeled sources (dispersion patterns) that are available in Ocean Way Studios are shown at right. Cab is short for electric guitar amplifier speaker cabinet. The letter is a brand name indicator. Note: Cab O is available as a source only when Room B is active. When the source is changed, the default source settings for mic selections and distances are loaded for the Near, Mid, and Far microphones. This menu does not change the microphones Filter, Polarity, Mute, Balance, or Level settings.
- 306 -
Display Panels
The Display Panels show helpful information about the current state of the plug-in. The four available panels are shown in Figure 97. Click the buttons beneath the Display Panels to choose one. The button of the currently active panel is illuminated. Note: The Display Panels are for informational purposes only. There are no parameter controls within any of the Display Panels, and the Panel selection controls cannot be automated.
Figure 97. The Display Panels
Position
The Position panel shows an overhead representation of the current studio room. The relative positions of the source and active microphone(s) are displayed within the room.
- 307 -
The locations of the source and microphones within the room are determined by the Source and Distance parameters. Note: Microphones that are muted are not shown in the Position Display Panel. Master EQ The Master EQ panel displays the state of the Master EQ settings. When the Master EQ is disabled (or when both Master EQ Gain values are zero), the frequency spectrum is flat. The Interior panel displays a photograph of the currently selected studio. This panel is a helpful static background when visual feedback is undesirable. This panel displays information about the currently selected studio and microphone(s). General information is displayed initially; when the studio or microphones are changed, text in the panel is updated with information about the selection. The Load Progress LED flashes when the plug-in is updating the impulse response, which is triggered whenever the Studio, Source, Mic Select, or Mic Filter controls are modified. The new control settings are not heard until the LED stops flashing. Sonic artifacts and/or host CPU increases may occur during IR updating. See Load Time on page 302 for related information. Note that studio and source changes take longer than microphone changes, because these changes update all three microphone pairs, while microphone changes update only one microphone pair.
Interior
Information
Load Progress LED
Microphones
The Near, Mid, and Far microphone pairs each have their own set of controls. The control set for each mic is identical. See Microphones Overview on page 294 for related information.
- 308 -
Mic Selection
The microphones used in the room are selected with this menu. To change the active microphone, click the current microphone name then select the desired mic from the drop menu, or click the microphone image to cycle through the available microphones. Tip: To maintain the current Distance value for the selection when changing microphones, press Shift on the computer keyboard when making the mic selection. Not all microphones are available for all sources. For a list of available microphones and their descriptions, see Table 22 on page 294.
Distance
Distance varies the length between the microphone pair and the source. The available ranges and default values for Distance depend on the Studio and Source settings. Some microphones have fixed positions. See Fixed Distance Microphones on page 296 for details. Note: The colored rings around the encoders match the color of the microphone pair icons in the Position display panel for visual feedback. Tip: To return to the default value for the current microphone pair, click the DISTANCE text label. Note: Because these knobs are continuous encoders (they dont have end stops), mouse control is always linear even if controls mode is set to circular or relative circular.
Distance Delay
When a Distance encoder is clicked, the colored ring around the encoder changes to black and aligned is displayed as the value. When microphone pairs are aligned, the sonic character of their placement in the room is maintained, but the time delay between the source and the microphone that occurs in the physical realm is eliminated. Click the encoder a second time to return to normal Distance mode. For additional details about this feature, see Distance Delay (Aligned) Overview on page 296. For related information, see Latency on page 301.
- 309 -
Cut Filters
Independent High Cut and Low Cut filters can be enabled on each microphone. Click the switch to toggle the filter state. The filter is active when the switch is illuminated. The cutoff frequency and filter slope varies for each of the microphones, as shown in Table 25 below.
Table 25. Microphone Cut Filter values High Cut Filter (6 dB/Octave) Near Mid Far 10 kHz 8 kHz 6 kHz Low Cut Filter (12 dB/Octave) Near Mid Far 50 Hz 75 Hz 150 Hz
Polarity Invert
This switch inverts the polarity (phase) of the microphone. The signal polarity is inverted when the switch is illuminated. Polarity is especially useful when more than one microphone pair is enabled. See Phase Considerations on page 300 for related information.
Mute
Mute turns off the microphone pair so it is no longer heard. Click the switch to toggle the mute state. When mute is active, the switch is illuminated, and the mic placement indicators are hidden from the Position Display. Tip: To quickly solo any microphone pair, shift-click any Mute switch. When a Mute switch is shift-clicked, that mic is un-muted and the other mics are muted.
Balance
Balance sets the position in the stereo panorama. When the plug-in is used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration, this control is locked in the center position. Tip: To quickly return to the center position, click the BALANCE text label.
- 310 -
Gain
This fader controls the volume level of the microphone. Gain has a logarithmic taper for a more musical response. The gain range is off to +12 dB. Gain is at unity when set to the zero position. Tip: To quickly return to the 0 dB (unity) position, click the associated NEAR/MID/FAR text label beneath the fader, or the associated 0 text label at the faders unity gain position.
Master Controls
Predelay The amount of time between the dry signal and the onset of the reverb is controlled with this knob. The range is from 0 to 125 milliseconds. Predelay is cumulative with the inherent microphone delays. Note: Predelay is unavailable in Re-Mic mode. Bypass Bypass disables the plug-in. The button glows red when Ocean Way Studios is disabled. Bypass can be used to compare the processed and original signals. Note: The UAD DSP load is not reduced when bypassed with this switch. To reduce UAD DSP usage when bypassed, use the hosts bypass switch instead. L/R Swap This switch reverses the left and right channels at the output of the plug-in. L/R Swap is useful for changing the listener perspective from the audience position to the performer position. When the switch is not illuminated (the default), output is from the audience position. Ocean Way Studios can be used in a mono-in/mono-out, mono-in/stereo out, or stereo-in/stereo-out configuration. The left/right stereo outputs are summed to mono when the Mono switch is engaged. When the plug-in is used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration, this control is always engaged and the left/right output channels are summed.
Mono
- 311 -
Mono Output
When the plug-in has monophonic output (when in a mono-out configuration or set to mono with the Mono switch), the microphone icon(s) in the Position panel shows a single icon for each active microphone, as shown at right. This is a convenient visual reminder that the plug-in output is monophonic.
Stereo Output
When the plug-in has stereo output, the microphone icon(s) in the Position panel shows dual icons representing the matched stereo set for each active microphone pair, as shown at right. Each microphone signal is routed to the left and right plug-in channel outputs respectively. Tip: The color of the microphone icons matches the color of the ring around each Distance knob for visual feedback. Dry/Wet When the plug-in is used in Reverb mode in a track insert (versus effect send/return) configuration, Dry/Wet determines the balance between the original dry signal and the processed signal. The range is from 0% (dry, unprocessed) to 100% (wet, processed signal only). Dry/Wet is used to set the amount of ambience when the plug-in is used in a track insert (versus aux send/return) configuration. Note: If Wet Solo is enabled, this control is unavailable. Wet Solo Wet Solo puts Ocean Way Studios into 100% wet mode. When Wet Solo is on, it is the equivalent of setting the Dry/Wet knob value to 100%.
- 312 -
Wet Solo defaults to On, which is optimal when using Ocean Way Studios in Reverb mode in the traditional reverb configuration (placed on an effect group/bus that is configured for use with channel sends). When Ocean Way Studios is used on a channel insert in Reverb mode, this control should be deactivated so the Dry/Wet mix can be adjusted. Wet Solo is fixed in the enabled position in Re-Mic mode so the original dry signal cannot be mixed with the modeled direct signal component within the plug-in. This control uses a logarithmic taper to provide increased resolution when selecting lower values. When the knob is in the 12 oclock position, the value is approximately 15%. Note: Wet Solo is a global (per plug-in instance) control. Master Level This fader controls the volume level at the output of the plug-in. It has a logarithmic taper for a more musical response. The gain range is from off to +12 dB. Gain is at unity when set to the zero position. Tip: To quickly return to the 0 dB (unity) position, click the MASTER text label beneath the fader, or the 0 text label at the faders unity gain position.
- 313 -
Master EQ
This group of parameters contains the controls for Ocean Way Studios master equalizer. It is a two band (low and high) shelving EQ that uses analog-sounding algorithms for great tonal shaping options. The slope of both filters is 12 dB per octave. The Master EQ section is independent from the reverb algorithms. A graph of the current curve is displayed in the Master EQ display panel. Tip: To quickly return to the 0 dB position for either of the Master EQ Gain controls, click the GAIN text label above the knob.
Master EQ In/Out Low Shelf Frequency
The Master EQ is enabled with this switch. The equalizer is active when the button is illuminated. This parameter specifies the low shelving band transition frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the low shelf Gain setting. The range is from 20 Hz to 2 kHz. Because this is a shelving EQ, all frequencies below this setting will be effected by the low shelf Gain value.
Low Shelf Gain
This parameter determines the amount by which the transition frequency setting for the low band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 12 dB. This parameter determines the high shelving band transition frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the high shelf Gain setting. The range is from 200 Hz to 20 kHz. Because this is a shelving EQ, all frequencies above this setting will be affected by the high shelf Gain value.
High Shelf Frequency
High Shelf Gain
This parameter determines the amount by which the frequency setting for the high band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 12 dB.
- 314 -
The History of Ocean Way Recording
Ocean Way Recording in Hollywood California is the world's most awarded studio complex. Albums recorded at the studio have sold over 1 billion units. Generations of music icons, from Frank Sinatra, Nat King Cole, Ray Charles to The Rolling Stones, Eric Clapton, and Michael Jackson, all the way to contemporary artists like Green Day, Dr. Dre, Radiohead, Kanye West, and The Red Hot Chili Peppers, all choose Ocean Way for its phenomenal sounding rooms, customized equipment, impeccable electronic maintenance, and access to the music industry's most famous collection of vintage tube microphones. In 1972, Allen Sides began building custom loudspeakers and leased a garage in Santa Monica, California as a hi-fi demo room. This garage was within steps of the Pacific Ocean and was situated on a street appropriately named - Ocean Way. Since he knew exactly what kinds of sounds were most impressive on his speakers, Sides did limited live to two-track recordings as demo material. During these demos, listeners became as interested in the recordings as the speakers and before long, they were asking Allen to make their recordings. In order to service those clients, Ocean Way Recording was born. Five Grammys and a thousand albums later Allen is still rolling.
- 315 -
Putnam moves to Los Angeles
In order to be a proper studio, Sides needed a recording console. This is where the story of Ocean Way truly begins; How Sides ended up purchasing Western Recorders' original tube console and came face to face with M.T. Bill Putnam. Putnam was a true renaissance man in the world of sound and music. His combined skills as a record producer, audio engineer, songwriter, singer, electrical engineer, inventor, studio owner and businessman are unparalleled to this day. Putnam owned and operated the largest independent recording facility in the country, Universal Recording in Chicago. But with a large chunk of his business moving west, clients like Frank Sinatra and Bing Crosby urged him to open a Los Angeles facility. Finally in 1957, Bill moved to 6050 Sunset Blvd. in Hollywood and started constructing brand new studios for his newly named studio enterprise, United Recording Corporation. The ultimate result was in 1961, when he purchased the neighboring Western Studio at 6000 Sunset, creating the United/Western Recorders studio complex.
A young Allen Sides in his natural element Get This Stuff Out of Here So how was it that Allen Sides and Bill Putnam come together at this key moment? Sides explains, I needed a console. I heard that Bill's factory manager Ray Combs needed to clear some space-much of it occupied by all the old tube equipment from United/Western Studios. Allen was a runner at United/Western in the late 60's and knew everyone, but had never met Bill. I knew Bill was out of town, so I went to Ray and said, How about I give you $6,000 for all this junk including the trailer in the back with the old Western console in it. He said, I'll take it; get this stuff out of here.
- 316 -
One man's junk is another man's treasure; and in this case, I was able to acquire some old Fairchild limiters, UA tube limiters, Macintosh tube amps, and enough equipment to completely fill my garage studio. It was the deal that really put me in business. However, there was a slight problem. I didn't actually have the 6 grand, so I wrote a check, picked up the stuff, and within six hours had sold enough gear to cover my check. When Putnam returned and found that his manager had been snookered into selling all this equipment for $6,000, he wanted to meet him. As Sides explains, There was no way to ever anticipate what would take place. When I walked into Bill's office, he gave me a long, stern look. That look eventually turned into a smile, and he proceeded to offer me a partnership which involved buying out studios all over the United States. Bill and I just clicked immediately and we became very good friends and business partners in the following years. By 1976, things were going well at the Ocean Way garage, with sessions around the clock. Bill was a frequent guest and loved listening to the tri-amplified front loaded theater horns in Allen's control room. Unfortunately, trying to keep a low profile while running a commercial studio in a quiet residential neighborhood proved to be much more tricky. The Opportunity of a Lifetime As fate would have it, a lease was about to expire for Studio B in the United building. When Sides approached his friend about leasing the studio, Bill offered him a sweetheart deal on the space. Sides quickly redesigned and rebuilt the Studio B control room, and moved all his equipment in. Studio B was an astounding acoustic space and Sides was thrilled. Bill felt that of all the rooms he had designed and built, this was his favorite and he was very pleased that his protg would carry on the tradition. Early sessions ranged from Neil Diamond, Chick Corea, Bette Midler, and all the way to Frank Zappa. In 1982 towards the end of his career, Bill also leased Studio A to Allen. Sides made a few control room changes, and Studio A immediately became one of the most popular rooms in town again. One of the first projects was Lionel Ritchie's Can't Slow Down, which sold 25 million records and Michael Jackson's Thriller. Lionel and Michael became two
- 317 -
of Allen's best long term clients. A couple years later, Bill sold United/Western to Allen, at which time United Recorders then became Ocean Way Recording. It was also during this time Sides began buying close to a thousand tube microphones from overseas: The European studios and broadcasters were dumping loads of antiquated tube mics for brand new phantom-powered transistor mics. He carefully went through every mic, picking the absolutely best of the best and selling off the rest. This is how, along with mics from previous studio buyouts with Putnam, Ocean Way amassed one of the largest collection of tube mics in the world. A New Era Now the Hollywood Studio has changed hands again after nearly 30 years. Neighboring Sunset/Gower Soundstage now has purchased the studios and equipment from Allen and entered into a licensing agreement to keep Ocean Way and its staff in place, acquiring the studios to form a strategic alliance between their 100-year-old film and TV studios and soundstages and the neighboring music recording studios, creating one unified production complex. Allen Sides continues to consult and work at the studios on all his recording projects. The original control rooms and recording spaces have always stayed true to Putnam's designs, and those rooms will remain untouched under the new ownership - with top staff and equipment in place. According to Ocean Way's new day-to-day manager Robin Godchild, the studios are still very much available for commercial bookings, and clients can expect to see some improvements and additions in the coming months. Ocean Way Recording is now captured as a tool developed by Universal Audio and Allen Sides. The Ocean Way Studios plug-in rewrites the book on what's possible with acoustic space emulation.
- 318 -
- 319 -
CHAPTER 30
Precision Buss Compressor
Overview
The Precision Buss Compressor is a dual-VCA-type dynamic processor that yields modern, transparent gain reduction characteristics. It is specifically designed to glue mix elements together for that cohesive and polished sound typical of master section console compressors. A flexible and intuitive tool, the Precision Buss Compressor is intended primarily for controlling the final output of your mix, but can be usefully applied to a variety of sources from drum busses or overheads to vocal groups, or even as a channel compressor on individual track inserts. The Precision Buss Compressors control set features Threshold, Ratio, Attack and Release, with all parameters specifically tailored to buss compressor usage. The Release control includes a multi-stage Auto Release also designed for a wide variety of program material. Input and Output Gain control is offered with metering for input, output and gain reduction. A high pass Filter is offered for the internal control signal sidechain to reduce the sensitivity of the compression to lower frequencies while retaining them in the output signal. An automatic Fade feature is included, which allows the user to set a custom fade-out or fade-in of the mix between 1 and 60 seconds long. Rounding out the feature set is a Mix control that allows the user to achieve parallel style dynamics control, without the need for a second buss or channel.
- 320 -
Chapter 30: Precision Buss Compressor
Precision Buss Compressor Screenshot
Figure 98. The Precision Buss Compressor plug-in window
Precision Buss Compressor Controls

Control knobs for the Precision Buss Compressor behave the same way as with all UAD plug-ins. Parameters with text values can be modified with text entry. Filter Filter regulates the cutoff frequency of the filter on the compressor's control signal sidechain. Removing low-frequency content from the sidechain can reduce excessive gain reduction and/or pumping on bass-heavy audio signals without reducing bass content of the audio signal itself. The filter is an 18 dB per octave, coincident-pole high-pass filter. The available range is 20 Hz500 Hz and Off.
Note:
The Filter parameter affects the control signal (sidechain) of the compressor only. It does not filter the audio signal. This parameter determines the threshold level for the onset of compression. Incoming signals that exceed this level are compressed. Signals below the level are unaffected.
Threshold
The available threshold range depends on ratio setting. At higher Ratio values, more headroom is available. Since the plug-in is designed primarily as a buss compressor, where signal levels typically run hotter than individual tracks, this feature increases the control resolution for fine-tuning these higher levels.
- 321 -
When Ratio is changed, the Threshold value is updated accordingly: When Ratio is set to 2:1, the Threshold range is 55 dB to 0 dB. When Ratio is set to 4:1, the Threshold range is 45 dB to +10 dB. When Ratio is set to 10:1, the Threshold range is 40 dB to +15 dB.
Note:
When Ratio is changed, Threshold numerical values are updated but the Threshold knob position does not move.
As the Threshold control is decreased and more compression occurs, output level is typically reduced. Adjust the Gain control to modify the output to compensate if desired. Ratio Ratio determines the amount of gain reduction for the compressor. For example, a 2:1 ratio reduces the signal above the threshold by half, with an input signal of 20 dB being reduced to 10 dB. The available Ratio values are 2:1 (default), 4:1, and 10:1. Attack Attack sets the amount of time that must elapse once the input signal reaches the Threshold level before compression is applied. The faster the Attack, the more rapidly compression is applied to signals above the threshold. The Attack range is from 0.10 milliseconds to 32 milliseconds. The availability of relatively slow attack times (as compared to other compressors) is one factor that can provide the in-your-face-pumping quality that is so popular with large console VCA-style compressors. Release Release sets the amount of time it takes for compression to cease once the input signal drops below the threshold level. The available range is from 0.10 seconds to 1.20 seconds, with Automatic release available at the full-clockwise position. The Auto release characteristic for Precision Buss Compressor has a unique quality that is optimized for program material.
- 322 -
Slower release times can smooth the transition that occurs when the signal dips below the threshold, especially useful for material with frequent peaks. However, if you set too large of a Release time, compression for sections of audio with loud signals may extend to lengthy sections of audio with lower signals. Fade The Precision Buss Compressor provides a Fade function that, upon activation, automatically reduces the plug-in output to minimum within a specified time period. This function enables extremely smooth-sounding fade outs (and fade ins), plus it can be automated as well. The Fade function processes the signal at the output of the compressor.
Fade Set
Fade Set determines the amount of time that will pass between the Fade button being activated and the plug-in output level being reduced to minimum (or being raised to 0 dB in the case of a fade in). The available range is from 1.0 second to 60 seconds. Fade times immediately reflect the current Fade Set value. Therefore a fade out that has already been initiated can be accelerated by changing Fade Set during the fade out. Conversely, a fade in can be accelerated by changing Fade Set during the fade in. Note that although the Fade Set control itself has linear taper, the fade signal level that is output has an exponential curve.
Fade Switch
Activating the Fade switch initiates a fade out. The fade out time is determined by the Fade Set parameter. The Fade switch flashes red when a fade out is in progress, and glows solid red when the fade out is complete (when the Fade Set time has elapsed). Deactivating Fade initiates a fade in. During a fade in, the signal level is increased from the current level of attenuation to 0 dB of attenuation. The Fade switch flashes blue when a fade in is in progress, and is no longer illuminated when the fade in is complete (when the Fade Set time has elapsed).
- 323 -
Toggling the Fade switch causes an already active fade to reverse direction, without a jump in output level. The Fade Set rate is constant even if an active fade is interrupted. For example: If the Fade Set value is 30 seconds and a fade out is initiated, then Fade is clicked again after 20 seconds, it will take 20 seconds to fade back in.
Note: Shift+click the Fade button to instantly return the level back to 0 dB (this
feature cannot be automated). Input Level Input controls the signal level that is input to the plug-in. Increasing the input may result in more compression, depending on the values of the Threshold and Ratio parameters. The default value is 0 dB. The available range is 20 dB. Mix The Mix control determines the balance between the original and the processed signal. The range is from 0% (dry unprocessed signal only) to 100% (wet processed signal only). The default value is 100%.
Output Level
Output controls the signal level that is output from the plug-in. The default value is 0 dB. The available range is 20 dB. Output controls both the dry unprocessed and wet processed signals (as determined by the Mix control). Generally speaking, adjust the Output control after the desired amount of compression is achieved with the Threshold and Ratio controls. Output does not affect the amount of compression.
Level Meters
The stereo peak/hold Input and Output Meters display the signal level at the input and output of the plug-in. The range is from 30 dB to 0 dB. Signal peaks are held for 3 seconds before resetting.
- 324 -
Gain Reduction Meter
The Gain Reduction meter displays the amount of gain reduction occurring within the compressor. More blue bars moving to the left indicate more gain reduction is occurring. The meter range is from 16 dB to 0 dB. Signal peaks are held for 3 seconds before resetting.
Power
The Power switch determines whether the plug-in is active. Click the toggle button or the UA logo to change the state. When the Power switch is in the Off position, plug-in processing is disabled and UAD DSP usage is reduced (unless UAD2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). When the plug-in is bypassed with this switch (but not by the host bypass), the I/O meters and the Input Level knob remain active.
- 325 -
CHAPTER 31
Precision De-Esser
Overview
The Precision De-Esser seamlessly and accurately removes sibilance from individual audio tracks or even composite mixes via its intuitive interface and sophisticated yet transparent filter processing. The Threshold knob dials in the amount of sibilance reduction, while the twoposition Speed button gives control over the envelope (attack and release) of the detector. The Frequency knob sweeps a continuous target frequency range from 2-16 kHz, allowing repairs on a large range of voices (or even overheads and hi-hats), while the Solo button allows the user to isolate and monitor the target sibilant frequencies. The Width control offers a variable 1/6 to 1 2/3 octave bandpass filter that is perfect for complex program material, adapting technology from the TEC-nominated Precision Multiband. The Width control also switches into a more traditional highpass filter more commonly employed when tailoring individual voices. For even greater transparency, the Split feature gives the user the option to compress only the sibilant range, or may be turned off to compress the entire spectrum for more traditional de-essing.
Precision De-Esser Screenshot
Figure 99. The Precision De-Esser plug-in window
- 326 -
Chapter 31: Precision De-Esser
Precision De-Esser Controls

Control knobs for the Precision De-Esser behave the same way as all UAD plug-ins. Threshold, Frequency, and Width values can be modified with text entry. Threshold Threshold controls the amount of de-essing by defining the signal level at which the processor is activated. Rotate Threshold counter-clockwise for more de-essing. Signals peaks as determined by Frequency (Frequency on page 327) and Width (Width on page 328) that exceed the Threshold level are compressed by a ratio of 7:1. The available range is 40 dB to 0 dB. Speed Speed determines the response of the sibilance detector. Fast mode will usually make sibilance reduction more obvious. In Slow mode the effect is usually more subtle but can produce a more naturalsounding result. The actual times of the two modes are as follows: Fast: Attack = 0.5ms, Release = 30ms. Slow: Attack = 2.0ms, Release = 120ms. Click the Speed button to change the mode. Alternately, you can click+hold the LED area and drag like a slider to change the value. Frequency This control defines the center frequency of the de-esser when in bandpass mode, or the cutoff frequency of the de-esser when in highpass mode. For bandpass use, the value is set to the center of the undesirable frequency range that is to be reduced. For highpass use, the value is set below the frequency range that is to be reduced. Used in conjunction with the Width control (Width on page 328), a broad range of de-essing is possible. The available range is 2 kHz 16 kHz. Solo The Solo button isolates the de-essing sidechain (the signal defined by Frequency and Width). Solo makes it easier to hear the problem frequencies to be attenuated. Click the button to active Solo mode. The button is red when Solo is active.
- 327 -
Note: When Solo is active, changes to the Threshold and Split controls cannot
be heard. Width Width controls the bandwidth of the de-essing sidechain when in bandpass mode. Bandpass mode is active when the control is in any position except fully clockwise. Smaller values have a narrower bandwidth, causing a tighter, more focused de-essing effect. Higher values have wider bandwidth, for de-essing when undesirable frequency ranges are broader. When Width is rotated fully clockwise, High Pass mode is activated. In High Pass mode, Frequency (Frequency on page 327) defines the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter (instead of the center frequency of the bandpass filter). High Pass mode is useful when you want to attenuate all frequencies above the cutoff frequency. The available range is 0.15 (about 1/6 octave) to 1.61 (about 1 2/3 octaves), plus High Pass mode.
Note: UAD DSP usage is slightly decreased when Precision De-Esser is in High
Pass mode versus bandpass mode (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Split Split determines if attenuation (compression) is applied to the sidechain signal only, or to the entire audio signal. In normal use Split should be enabled, causing only the ess spectrum as defined by Frequency and Width (i.e., the sidechain), to be attenuated. This provides the most precise de-essing control. Split can be disabled, which causes the entire input signal to be attenuated (instead of just the ess sidechain) which results in more traditional compression. However, the sidechain still controls attenuation when Split is off. Click the Split button to change the mode. Alternately, you can click+hold the LED area and drag like a slider to change the value.
Note:
UAD DSP usage is slightly decreased when Split is disabled (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled).
- 328 -
Gain Reduction
The Gain Reduction meter provides a visual indication of how much attenuation (compression) is occuring. Signal peaks are held for 3 seconds before resetting. When Split is on, the amount of sidechain attenuation is displayed. When Split is off, it displays the attenuation of the entire signal.
Power
The Power switch determines whether the plug-in is active. This is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal or bypassing the plug-in to reduce the UAD DSP load (load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Toggle the switch to change the Power state; the UA logo is illuminated in blue when the plug-in is active. You can click-hold the power switch then drag it like a slider to quickly compare the enabled/disabled state.
Note:
Operating Tips
For taming sibilance for a full mix/mastering, best results will usually be obtained by enabling Highpass and Split modes. Generally, female ess and shh sounds vary more in frequency than those of males. Due to this situation, you may nd that using the sidechain lter in Highpass mode (or Bandpass mode with a large width) may be more responsive. Over de-essing can degrade the natural sound of a vocal.
- 329 -
CHAPTER 32
Precision Enhancer Hz
Overview
The Precision Enhancer Hz allows the user to selectively add upper harmonics to bass fundamentals, sometimes referred to as phantom bass. This significantly enhances the perception of low-end energy beyond the conventional frequency response of small speakers. These harmonics stimulate a psychoacoustic bass-enhancing effect in the listener, giving even the smallest speakers greater translation of low frequency sources. Universal Audios unique approach to this common problem combines a simple control set that yields exacting results with minimal adjustment and allows the widest range of tonality available in its class, from subtle to decidedly audible. The Hz Frequency control sets the corner frequency of the bass-isolation low pass filter, while Effect blends the generated signal into the original signal. Four effect slopes are available for variations in harmonic density, while five modes present various internal control configurations to support the widest array of source material. Finally, the Precision Enhancer Hz includes control over the final output with metering to compensate for gain changes created by the effect. Precision Enhancer Hz does for low frequencies what Precision Enhancer kHz does for the highs. Together, they are a great complementary pair.
Precision Enhancer Hz Screenshot
Figure 100. The Precision Enhancer Hz plug-in window
- 330 -
Chapter 32: Precision Enhancer Hz
Precision Enhancer Hz Controls

Control knobs for the Precision Enhancer Hz behave the same way as with all UAD plug-ins. Effect, Hz Frequency, and Output values can be modified with text entry. Effect Knob The Effect Knob controls the amount of processing that occurs in the plug-in. The available range is from 0.00 to 100.0%. Technically speaking, Effect scales the input to the enhancer. Increasing this parameter makes the enhancer have a higher amplitude output for a given input level. Increasing Effect increases the overall enhancement effect.
Note:
The signal level at the plug-in input will interact with the Effect control.
Effect Meter
The Effect Meter indicates the amount of signal processing that is occurring. More illuminated blue segments indicate more signal enhancement. Effect Solo isolates the generated signal and is affected by Effect level. Effect Solo is active when the button is red. The Effect Solo signal is pure and contains no added original or filtered bass signal. Therefore the soloed signal may not sound pleasant when heard by itself. When Effect Solo is used in conjunction with Hz Solo on page 333, the complete mixed effect is heard.
Effect Solo
Mode
The five Modes (A, B, C, D, and All) optimize the plug-in internally to support the widest array of source material. The Mode control determines the type of enhancement that will be applied to the signal.
Tip: The active Mode can be selected by clicking the Mode button repeatedly
to rotate through the Modes, or by clicking each Mode letter or LED.

Mode A (Bass 1)
Mode A is tuned for both acoustic and electric bass instruments. Adds low frequency emphasis when set to low frequency value, mid to high frequencies aid in phantom bass generation for smaller sound systems.
- 331 -
Mode B (Bass 2)
Mode B is primarily for electric and DI bass with balanced mid range harmonics to help the bass stick out of the mix.
Mode C (Synth)
Mode C is tuned specifically for synth bass and other full-range material. It produces a wider range of harmonics than the Bass modes A and B. Mode C also works well on sub-mixes and program material. Moderate compression is applied to the harmonics signal, increasing the amplitude of the harmonics and altering their timbre.
Mode D (Kick)
Mode D has a short decay, which makes this setting ideal for kick drum sounds and other percussive instruments. Moderate compression is applied to the harmonics signal, increasing the amplitude of the harmonics and altering their timbre.
All Mode
All mode offers a more exaggerated and audible effect for creative purposes or when less subtle results are desired. Compression is applied to the harmonics signal, increasing the amplitude of the harmonics and altering their timbre. The frequency range is similar to Mode A.
Tip:
All mode can be selected by shift+clicking Mode letters or LEDs.
Slope
Slope changes the shape of the high pass filter that is applied to the effect signal. The high pass filter helps eliminate rumble/muddiness in the signal. Slope can be set to 6, 12, 24, or 36 dB per octave. The active Slope can be selected by clicking the Slope button repeatedly to rotate through the values, or by clicking each Slope value or LED. When the Hz Frequency is set to a low value, Slope may have little or no audible effect.
Note:
- 332 -
Hz Frequency
Through filter isolation of the original bass content, the Hz Frequency parameter defines the cutoff frequency for the enhancement process. Frequencies below this value are enhanced by the processor. The available range is 16 Hz to 320 Hz. Hz Solo isolates the original bass signal and can be combined with Effect Solo. Hz Solo is active when the button is red. Output controls the signal level that is output from the plug-in. The available range is 20 dB to 0 dB. Generally speaking, adjust the Output control after the desired amount of processing is achieved with the Effect and Hz Frequency controls. Output does not affect the amount of enhancement processing, nor does it have any effect when the plug-in is disabled.
Output Meter
Hz Solo
Output
The stereo Output Meter displays the signal level at the output of the plug-in. When the plug-in is disabled with the plug-in Power switch (but not the host plug-in enable switch), the output meters still function. Power The Power switch determines whether the plug-in is active. This is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal or bypassing the plug-in to reduce the UAD DSP load (load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Toggle the switch or click the UA logo to change the Power state. The UA logo is illuminated in blue when the plug-in is active. You can click-hold the power switch then drag it like a slider to quickly compare the enabled/disabled state.
Note:
- 333 -
Precision Enhancer Hz Usage Notes

The Precision Enhancer Hz effect can serve multiple purposes. When the frequency control is set low, the effect extends into the audible low end. Lower frequencies work well for adding a low end thump or beeng up percussive bass/kicks, but be careful not to overdo it. With the frequency control set to mid to higher frequencies, the effect is designed to add bass tone that would ordinarily disappear on smaller speakers. For the most predictable results, it is recommended to audition your mix on both full range systems with a subwoofer, as well as small consumer systems such as a boombox or computer speakers. A different effect response will be achieved when the plug-in is used precompression. It is recommended to experiment with processing order as results can vary substantially.
- 334 -
CHAPTER 33
Precision Enhancer kHz
Overview
The Precision Enhancer kHz is a sophisticated tool with a simple control set, primarily designed to bring dull or poorly recorded tracks to life. However, with five distinct Enhancement Modes, the Precision Enhancer kHz will find uses on virtually any source. It can be used to minimally massage the middle and upper frequencies of a mix, or drastically alter the presence or dynamics of individual tracks or groups; Unlike other enhancers that function by frequency delay or filtered clipping, the Precision Enhancer kHz works on specialized techniques of equalization and dynamic expansion that can be used as a highly versatile effect. The five Modes (A, B, C, D and the shift-clickable All) present various control configurations to support the widest array of source material. With Modes A and B, the filtered audio is mixed in with the dry signal according to the Effect control. For Modes C, D and All, audio is passed through a unique upwards expander where the expanded audio is then filtered before being mixed with the dry signal. For these modes, Effect is used as a fader on the way into the expander. The release can be adjusted to either Fast or Slow via the Speed button, giving a greater range of dynamic/frequency enhancement. For Mode C, the sweepable filter applied to the expander's output is identical to the filter used with Mode A. For Mode D and All, the expander's output is passed to a set of filters in parallel. Finally, the Precision Enhancer kHz includes control over the final Output level metering to compensate for gain changes created by the effect.
- 335 -
Chapter 33: Precision Enhancer kHz
Precision Enhancer kHz Screenshot
Figure 101. The Precision Enhancer kHz plug-in window
Precision Enhancer kHz Controls

Control knobs for the Precision Enhancer kHz behave the same way as with all UAD plug-ins. Effect, kHz Frequency, and Output values can be modified with text entry. Effect Knob The Effect Knob controls the amount of processing that occurs in the plug-in. The available range is from 0.00 to 100.0%. Technically speaking, Effect scales the input to the enhancer. Increasing this parameter makes the enhancer have a higher amplitude output for a given input level. Increasing Effect increases the overall enhancement effect.
Note:
The signal level at the plug-in input will interact with the Effect control.
Effect Meter
The Effect Meter indicates the amount of signal processing that is occurring. More illuminated blue segments indicate more signal enhancement. The Mode control determines the type of enhancement that will be applied to the signal. The active Mode can be selected by clicking the Mode button repeatedly to rotate through the Modes, or by clicking each Mode letter or LED. All mode is selected by shift+clicking Mode letters or LEDs.
Mode A
Mode
Mode A enhances the high frequency content statically. Input dynamics do not affect on the enhancement process.
Mode B
Mode B is optimized for vocal range content. The kHz Frequency parameter is disabled in this mode.
- 336 -
Mode C
Mode C dynamically enhances the high frequency content. The enhancement amount is increased as the input signal level increases.
Mode D
Mode D dynamically enhances both high and low frequency content. The enhancement amount is increased as the input signal level increases. The kHz Frequency parameter is disabled in this mode.
All Mode
All mode is selected by shift+clicking Mode letters or LEDs. All Mode expands all frequencies of the input signal. The enhancement amount is increased as the input signal level increases. The kHz Frequency parameter is disabled in this mode. Speed The Speed parameter defines the attack and release characteristic of the enhancement process.
Fast
In Fast mode, the enhancement processor has a quick response time of 30ms, which yields a more percussive bite and/or a more aggressive sound.
Slow
Slow mode has a slower response time of 180ms which can deliver a smoother sound overall. kHz Frequency The kHz Frequency parameter defines the cutoff frequency for the enhancement process in Mode A and Mode C. Frequencies above this value are enhanced by the processor. The available range is 1.00 kHz to 10.0 kHz.
Note:
kHz Frequency is disabled in Modes B/D/All. Output controls the signal level that is output from the plug-in. The available range is 20 dB to 0 dB.
Output
- 337 -
Generally speaking, adjust the Output control after the desired amount of processing is achieved with the Effect and kHz Frequency controls. Output does not affect the amount of enhancement processing, nor does it have any effect when the plug-in is disabled.
Output Meter
The Output Meter displays the signal level at the output of the plug-in. When the plug-in is disabled with the plug-in Power switch (but not the host plug-in enable switch), the output meters still function. Power The Power switch determines whether the plug-in is active. This is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal or bypassing the plug-in to reduce the UAD DSP load (load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Toggle the switch or click the UA logo to change the Power state; the UA logo is illuminated in blue when the plug-in is active. You can click-hold the power switch then drag it like a slider to quickly compare the enabled/disabled state.
Note:
- 338 -
CHAPTER 34
Precision Equalizer
Overview
The Universal Audio Precision Equalizer is a stereo or dual-mono four band EQ and high-pass filter designed primarily for mastering program material. The Precision Equalizer may also be used in recording and mixing where the utmost in EQ quality is required. The Precision Equalizer is based on industry standard analog mastering filters, and uses the classic parametric controls arrangement. The Precision Equalizer utilizes the best from those designs while incorporating features convenient to digital mastering. To preserve the greatest sonic detail and ensure a minimum of artifacts in the upper frequency range, the Precision Equalizer is upsampled to 192 kHz.
Precision Equalizer Screenshot
Figure 102. The UAD Precision Equalizer plug-in window
- 339 -
Chapter 34: Precision Equalizer
Precision Equalizer Controls

The easy to use Precision Equalizer features stepped controls throughout for easy recall. Both the left and right channels feature four bands of EQ, grouped in two overlapping pairs. There are two bands for low frequencies (L1 and L2), and two for highs (H1 and H2). There is also a shelving or peak/notch filter available for each band, along with five peak/notch (Q) responses per band. The high-pass filter is a far-reaching 18 dB per octave, which enables precise filtering of power-robbing sub-harmonic content, or other creative uses. The Precision Equalizer also features flexibility in auditioning. There are three separate EQ configurations, allowing selection of two complete sets of stereo parameters or the Dual mode when disparate channel adjustments are necessary. In addition, parameter values can be easily transferred between parameter groups using the Copy buttons.
Control Grouping
The L and R equalizer sections are independent groups of parameters, each controlling one side (left or right) of the stereo source signal. The L and R controls are linked except when in Dual mode. In Dual mode, control groups L and R can be independently adjusted.
Modes
The Mode switches define the operating mode of Precision Equalizer. The currently active mode is indicated by a blue light. Each mode is detailed below. Stereo Mode In Stereo mode, the L and R equalizer sections both control one side of the stereo source signal. The L and R controls are linked in stereo mode. In stereo mode there are two sets of EQ settings (referred to as A and B), with each set containing the full set of L and R parameter values (the high-pass filter value is global per preset). This feature enables easy switching between two EQ settings for comparison purposes. Both the A and B parameter sets are contained within a single Precision Equalizer preset.
- 340 -
Dual Mode
In Dual mode (dual-mono mode), the left and right parameters can be independently adjusted so that each side of the stereo signal can have different EQ settings. Note that this mode is infrequently used during mastering because phase, imaging, and level inconsistencies may be induced in the resulting stereo signal.
Mode Selection
Any of the below methods may be used to modify the Mode value: Click the Stereo button to cycle through modes A and B Click the Dual button to activate dual-mono mode Click the indicator light above each mode Click+hold+drag the indicator light above each mode. Parameter Copy Buttons The Parameter Copy buttons provide an easy method for copying parameter values. The behavior of the buttons is determined by the current operating mode of Precision Equalizer.
Note:
The values that existed at the destination before copying are lost.
Stereo Mode
When in Stereo mode (see Stereo Mode on page 340), clicking A > B copies the left AND right parameter values from parameter set A to parameter set B, and clicking the A < B button copies all the values from parameter set B to parameter set A. This feature is useful when you want to make an EQ change to a stereo signal while maintaining the original values so the two settings can be easily compared.
Note: The high-pass filter parameter is global per preset and is not affected by
this control.
Parameter Copy in Dual Mode
When in Dual mode, the A and B buttons behave as left and right channel copy buttons. Clicking A > B copies all the values from the left channel parameters to the right channel parameters, and clicking A < B copies all the values from the right channel parameters to the left channel parameters.
- 341 -
Power Switch
The Power Switch determines whether the plug-in is active. This is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal, or to bypass the plug-in to reduce the UAD DSP load (load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Click the rocker switch to change the Power state. Alternately, you can click the blue UA logo to toggle the Power state.
Band Controls
Each control set (L and R) has four EQ bands. Two bands are overlapping low frequency bands labeled L1 and L2, and two bands are overlapping high frequency bands labeled H1 and H2. Each of the four bands has a control for bandwidth, enable, frequency, and gain. All four of the EQ bands can be used in parametric or shelf mode. The controls are exactly the same for each band; only the available frequency values differ. Bandwidth Knob The Bandwidth (Q) knob defines the proportion of frequencies surrounding the band center frequency to be affected by the band gain control. The numbers represent the filter slope in dB per octave. The available selections are 4, 6, 9, 14, 20, and Shelf. When set to Shelf on the L1 and L2 bands, the band becomes a low shelving filter. When set to Shelf on the H1 and H2 bands, the band becomes a high shelving filter. Band Enable Button Each band can be individually engaged with the Enable button. All bands default to disabled. When a band is enabled, the button glows blue. To enable a band, click the Enable button or move the band Gain knob. You can use these buttons to compare the band settings to that of the original signal, or to bypass the individual band. UAD DSP usage is slightly decreased when a band is disabled (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled).
- 342 -
Frequency Knob
The Frequency knob determines the center frequency of the filter band to be boosted or attenuated by the band Gain setting. This knob is stepped with 41 values for easy reproducibility during mastering. To double the resolution of the available knob values (for fine control), press the shift key on the computer keyboard while adjusting the knob. This increased 2x frequency resolution (within the available range) can also be specified using text entry, parameter automation, or controls mode. The available values for each of the four bands is the same in both parametric and shelf modes, and are listed in Table 26 below.
Note:
Not all host applications support automation and/or controls mode.
Table 26. Precision Equalizer Band Frequency Ranges Low Frequencies (L1 and L2) High Frequencies (H1 and H2) 19 572 Hertz 617 27k Hertz
Gain Knob
The Gain knob determines the amount by which the frequency setting for the band is boosted or attenuated. The available Gain values are listed in Table 27 below.
Table 27. Precision Equalizer band gain values 0.0 dB 0.5 dB 1.0 dB 1.5 dB 2.0 dB 2.5 dB 3.0 dB 4.0 dB 5.0 dB 6.0 dB 8.0 dB
High-Pass Filter
The high-pass filter is useful for reducing low frequency content. It is a global filter; it always affects both left and right channels, regardless of the active mode. See Table 28 below for available settings.
Table 28. Precision Equalizer high-pass filter frequencies Off (disabled) 10 Hz 20 Hz 30 Hz 40 Hz 60 Hz 80 Hz 100 Hz
- 343 -
Precision Equalizer Latency

The Precision Equalizer uses an internal sample rate of 192 kHz to facilitate its amazing sonic quality. This upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information.
Note:
Compensating for Precision Equalizer is not required if the host application supports full plug-in delay compensation throughout the signal path, or when it is used only on the outputs.UAD-2 DSP LoadLock
- 344 -
CHAPTER 35
Precision K-Stereo Ambience Recovery

Psychoacoustic Ambience Recovery and Stereo Processor Created by Mastering Engineer Bob Katz
Universal Audios Precision K-Stereo Ambience Recovery plug-in is a psychoacoustic processor conceived and created by famed mastering engineer Bob Katz. Collaborating with Universal Audio to bring this unique, patented process to the UAD platform, Bob Katzs K-Stereo process uses elements of the Haas effect and other psychoacoustic principles to create a transparent, phase-accurate ambience recovery and stereo enhancement tool. Primarily designed for critical 2-track mastering applications, Precision K-Stereo extracts the ambient cues inherent in the source recording and provides features capable of spreading the uncorrelated ambience around the soundstage, enlarging the size of the soundstage both deeper and wider. It also increases the clarity and localization of the source material within its algorithm while increasing the third dimension of the sound. Precision K-Stereo does not have a sound of its ownit transparently enhances the existing ambience and early reflections of your sources to breathe new life into busy or narrow-sounding mixes. Precision K-Stereo enhances the depth and imaging of the instruments and vocals on your stereo master without adding artificial reverberation, or changing the ratio of center elements to side elements, thus providing a do-noharm approach to finalizing the stereo image of your critical mix source material.
Precision K-Stereo Screenshot
Figure 103. The Precision K-Stereo plug-in window
- 345 -
Chapter 35: Precision K-Stereo Ambience Recovery
Ambience Recovery The primary function of Precision K-Stereo is for ambience recovery and enhancement. The plug-in doesnt add new ambience or change the balance of the mix. Instead, it extracts, recovers, polishes, and embellishes the ambience that already exists in a source recording. Precision K-Stereo does not use any comb filters, matrixing, phase processing, or related techniques which are used in typical image processors. Instead, the ambience recovery process is accomplished using established psychoacoustic principles. The result is a smooth, natural, phase-coherent, and mono-compatible sound that meets professional mastering standards. In addition to ambience level and enhancement adjustments, the ambient portion of the source material can be further equalized using low/high cut filters and a fully parametric bell filter. These ambience filters affect the wet signal only and are completely independent from the dry portion of the recording. Primary Application Precision K-Stereo is designed for use during the mastering process to finetune the ambience that exists in previously-mixed stereo program material. Generally speaking, adjusting ambience during multitrack mixdown is best managed within the mix itself because of the higher level of control and detail available at that stage. Of course, Precision K-Stereo can be used across the stereo bus during mixing and/or in other creative applications as well. However, since the process is optimized for broad spectrum mixes with at least some ambient content, the effect may be extremely subtle on individual tracks, depending on the ambient content in the recording. Mid/Side Leveling The Precision K-Stereo processor does not use or require mid/side encoding or decoding techniques to achieve ambience recovery nor enhancement. However, the plug-in has an independent mid/side ratio leveling feature that can be useful during mastering to compensate for overall center-to-side level imbalances within the stereo field. The ambience recovery feature can then be used to recover ambience and space that is lost when the mid-channel level is increased (such as when raising a center-located vocal or instrument).
- 346 -
Congurations
Precision K-Stereo is optimized for use in stereo-in/stereo-out configurations. However, ambience recovery is possible on monophonic source recordings when the plug-in is used in a mono-in/stereo-out configuration. Mono signals are stereo-ized in the MISO context. Note: Due to the inherent stereo nature of the ambience recovery process, Precision K-Stereo is not intended for use in mono-in/mono-out configurations.
Presets
Precision K-Stereo includes factory presets designed by Bob Katz. A list of these presets and their application notes are at the end of this chapter.
Blog Article by Bob Katz

Bob Katz has contributed a blog article that contains lots of interesting details and application tips for Precision K-Stereo. The article is published on our website: www.uaudio.com/blog/k-stereo-tips-and-tricks.html
Precision K-Stereo Controls

Control Arrangements Precision K-Stereo controls are grouped into four sections: Ambience Recovery, Ambience Filters (EQ), Mid/Side, and L/R Gain. The detailed control descriptions are similarly grouped.
Switches
Control Adjustments
For the main switches (Recover, EQ, etc.), click the switch to toggle the setting. The switch is engaged when it is illuminated.
Precision K-Stereo switch engaged (left) and disabled (right).

Knobs
For the knob controls, values can be adjusted with the mouse or values can be entered directly via text entry. Additionally, when the tickmarks and/or values around the knob are clicked, the knob will jump to that setting. The big knobs (Ambience Gain, Mid/Side Gain, and L/R Gain) can be returned to the zero value by clicking the control label above the knobs.
- 347 -
Ambience Recovery
Refer to Figure 104 below for the controls in this section.
Figure 104. The Ambience Recovery controls
Recover Enable
This switch enables/disables the ambience recovery process. See Ambience Recovery on page 346 for an overview. Recover Enable must be engaged for the Ambience Gain, Enhance Deep/Wide, and Ambience Filters controls to have an effect. Note: This switch does not have any effect on the M/S Gain, L/R Gain, or Power controls.
Ambience Gain
The Ambience Gain knob controls the level of recovered ambience. The default 0 dB position is defined as the nominal or typical setting (ambience recovery is occurring when set to 0 dB). Increase or decrease Ambience Gain to change the amount of recovered ambience. The range is -20 dB to +9 dB, available in 0.5 dB steps. Click the 0 label to quickly return to 0 dB. To disable ambience recovery, use the Recover Enable switch. Note: Values below 0 dB do not remove ambience.
Enhance
The ambience recovery process can be manipulated further with the Deep and Wide switches. Note: The Enhance functions can only be enabled when the Recover switch is engaged.
Deep
Provides deeper ambience recovery when the switch engaged.

Wide
Spreads and enhances the stereo image when the switch is engaged.
- 348 -
Ambience Filters
The Ambience Filters (EQ) provide for frequency adjustments to the ambient portion of the signal. These controls do not affect the direct (dry) portion of the signal. The Ambience Filters consist of one Low Cut filter, one High Cut filter, and a single-band parametric bell filter. Note: Controls in the Ambience Filters section have no effect unless the Recover Enable switch is engaged. Refer to Figure 105 below for the controls in this section.
Figure 105. Ambience Filters controls
EQ Enable
The EQ switch enables/disables the Ambience Filters. This switch can only be engaged when the Recover Enable switch is engaged. The Low Cut and High Cut filters have a slope of 12 dB per octave. Each Cut Filter can be independently disabled by setting it to the OFF position (the default value).
Low Cut
Cut Filters
The available range is 20 Hz to 1 kHz.

High Cut
The available range is 5 kHz to 20 kHz.
- 349 -
Bell Filter
The bell filter is fully parametric, with independent control of frequency, gain, Q (bandwidth), and gain.
Bell Frequency
This control sets the center frequency of the bell filter. The available range is 150 Hz to 10 kHz.
Bell Q
Bell Q determines the bandwidth of the bell filter. The available range is 0.5 to 3. Smaller Q values cause the bell filter to effect a broader portion of the frequency spectrum, while high Q values affect a narrower spectrum.
Bell Gain
Bell Gain determines how much boost or cut is applied to the bell filter. The available range is 10 dB. To quickly return to the 0 dB setting, click the GAIN text label. Note: The two other Bell parameters (Frequency and Q) have no effect when Bell Gain is set to 0 dB.
- 350 -
Mid/Side Controls
The Mid/Side controls allow for level adjustments to the middle (center) and side portions of signals within a stereo field. Mid/Side adjustments can be made when ambience recovery is active or disabled. Note that the ambience recovery process does not use or require mid/side techniques to achieve ambience recovery or enhancement. Note: The Mid/Side controls are disabled when the plug-in is used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration. Refer to Figure 106 below for the controls in this section.
Figure 106. The Mid/Side controls
M/S Gain Enable Mid Gain
This switch enables/disables the Mid Gain and Side Gain controls.
Mid Gain adjusts the level of signals in the middle of a stereo signal. The available range is -12 dB to +6 dB, available in 0.1 dB steps. To quickly return to the 0 dB setting, click the MID text label. Side Gain adjusts the level of signals at the sides of a stereo signal. The available range is -12 dB to +6 dB, available in 0.1 dB steps. To quickly return to the 0 dB setting, click the SIDE text label.
Side Gain
- 351 -
Output Gain Controls

Refer to Figure 107 below for the controls in this section.
Figure 107. The Output Gain controls
L/R Gain Enable Link
This switch enables/disables the Left/Right Gain and Link controls. This switch links (gangs) the Left/Right Gain controls for ease of operation when both channels require the same value. Disable Link when independent left/right control is desired. Note: When Link is inactive and Link is engaged, the left gain value is copied to the right gain. Any offset between the gain values is lost.
Left/Right Gain
The independent Left and Right Gain have an available range of -24 dB to +12 dB, available in 0.1 dB steps. To quickly return to the 0 dB setting, click the respective LEFT or RIGHT text labels. Note: The right channel gain control is disabled when the plug-in is used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration.
- 352 -
Output Level Meters
The stereo peak/hold meters display the signal level at the output of the plugin. The meter range is from 30 dB to 0 dBFS. Signal peaks are held for 3 seconds before resetting.
Power
When the Power switch is in the OFF position, the interface elements do not illuminate, plug-in processing is disabled, and UAD DSP usage is reduced (unless UAD-2 LoadLock is enabled). Click the switch or the OFF/ON labels to change the setting, or click the UA logo to toggle the setting.
- 353 -
Factory Preset Notes by Bob Katz

Precision K-Stereo includes factory presets designed by Bob Katz for use with his signature plug-in. Descriptions about these presets are listed below. The Default preset and presets with the BK prefix are the settings created by Mr. Katz. Two categories are included: MIX presets for use during mixing, and MSTR for use during mastering. Default When Precision K-Stereo is instantiated, it automatically starts with the Default preset, which sets the Ambience Level to 0 dB (a nominal starting point which works well with a lot of music), engages Wide and Deep, and sets everything else to neutral. Feel free to turn the Ambience Level up or down to taste or to explore the possibilities. The rest of the factory presets are provided to demonstrate possibilities, but since there are very few controls, its easy to get the Precision K-Stereo working for any situation. This preset has Ambience Level at 0 dB, Wide and Deep engaged, and the Ambience Low Cut filter set to 125 Hz to maintain a tight bass instrument while increasing the size and depth of the rest of the instruments. This preset has Ambience Level at 0 dB, Wide and Deep engaged, Ambience Low Cut filter set to 125 Hz, Ambience High Cut Filter set to 10 kHz. This maintains the bass instrument tight (not as affected by the Ambience Level) as well as softens the ambience of the high frequencies to tighten the percussion, but it retains ambience in the midrange to enhance vocals and midrange instruments. This preset has Ambience Level at +1 dB, Wide is disengaged, Deep is engaged. This is very useful, as the name implies, for enhancing the ambience of a small ensemble or solo instrument without stretching it to the extreme sides, maintaining the ensembles small size but still help its richness and depth. Try this preset during mixing on a stereo-miked solo guitar (instead of a reverb chamber). This is the same as the default preset. Turn the Ambience Level up or down to taste. Perhaps add some Ambience EQ to warm up the sound, or add some presence to the ambience, depending on the nature of the reverberation in the original recording.
BK-MSTR-Rock Tight Bass
BK-MSTR-Rock Tight Drums
BK-MSTR-String Ensemble
BK-MSTR-Full Orchestra A
- 354 -
BK-MSTR-Full Orchestra B BK-MSTR-Clear Presence BK-MSTR-Raise Mid Instruments
Same as Full Orchestra A, but the high cut filter is set to 10 kHz which softens the high frequency ambience to tighten the percussion. If the hall or chamber in the original recording is missing some presence, heres a suggestion on what to do. This preset subtly raises the Mid level 1 dB above the side level and recovers a bit of the spacious ambience which is commonly lost when the mid/side ratio is raised. This preset adds overall warmth to the recovery settings.
BK-MSTR-Warm Ambience BK-MIX-Big Steinway
Try this preset on a stereo recording of a piano to enhance the size and body of the instrument without losing its definition. This preset will illustrate how ambience EQ is very different from direct EQ. Here we turn up the bottom end and lower midrange of the ambience channel. It might turn a six-foot Yamaha into a nine-foot Steinway, so be careful, or maybe thats exactly what you want to do! This preset turns up the ambience level a bit to quickly show you the possibilities. This preset turns up the ambience level very far to quickly show you extreme possibilities.
BK-MIX-Big
BK-MIX-Too Big
K-Stereo is a trademark of Robert Katz and Digital Domain, Inc.
- 355 -
CHAPTER 36
Precision Limiter
Overview
The Universal Audio Precision Limiter is a single-band, look-ahead, brickwall limiter designed primarily for mastering with program material. The easyto-use Limiter achieves 100% attack within a 1.5ms look-ahead window, which prevents clipping and guarantees zero overshoot performance. Both the attack and release curves are optimized for mastering, which minimizes aliasing. Since the Precision Limiter is a colorless, transparent mastering limiterno upsampling is used, nor does the UA Precision Limiter pass audio through any filtersaudio remains untouched unless the compressor is working, in which case only gain is affected. To really be considered a professional limiter, the metering needs to be superb. The Precision Limiter features comprehensive, high-resolution metering and conforms to the Bob Katz K-System metering specifications. This metering allows the user to see what is happening to audio with a great deal of accuracy, with simultaneous RMS and Peak metering and adjustable Peak Hold. And since we know how valuable good metering is, the plug-in can also be bypassed and used strictly as a high-resolution meter. Key features include user-adjustable Release or intelligent Auto Release, which allows for fast recoveryminimizing distortion and pumpingand a unique selectable Mode switch, which allows you to delicately tailor the attack shape and control the presentation for different material. Mode A is the default shape, suitable for most material, while Mode B can be particularly useful on minimal and/or acoustic program material, yielding a more subtle touch. The Precision Limiter is yet another indispensable UAD tool for your audio arsenal.
- 356 -
Chapter 36: Precision Limiter
Precision Limiter Screenshot
Figure 108. The Precision Limiter plug-in window
Controls Overview
Control knobs for the Precision Limiter behave the same way as all UAD plugins. Input, Output, and Release values can be modified with text entry. The Precision Limiter introduced a new control style for UAD plug-ins. For the Mode, Meter, Scale, and Clear parameters, click the parameter label, the value text, or the LED to toggle between available values.
Precision Limiter Controls

Input The Input knob controls the signal level that is input into the limiter. Increasing the input will result in more limiting as the input signal exceeds 0 dB. The default value is 0 dB. The available range is 6 dB to 24 dB. Output The Output knob determines the maximum level at the output of the plug-in. This control does not affect the actual limiting. The Precision Limiter always limits the signal to 0 dB internally, and the actual output is set by attenuating this internal level. Likewise, the input control can drive the signal over 0 dB to get more limiting. If the Precision Limiter is the last processor in the signal path when mixing down to disk (bouncing), the Output value will be the level of the highest peak in the resultant audio file. The default value is 0.10 dB. The available range is from 12 dB to 0 dB. Non-zero values are always negative, therefore during text entry operations positive or negative values may be entered and the result will be negative.
- 357 -
Release
The Release knob sets the value of the limiter release time. The default value is Auto. The available range is from 1 second to 0.01 milliseconds.
Auto Mode
When the Release knob is fully clockwise, Automatic mode is active. In Auto mode, release time is program-dependent. Isolated peaks will have a fast release time, while program material will have a slower release. Note: You can type A or a to enter Auto mode during text entry. Mode The Mode switch affects the attack shape of the limiter. Subtle tonal variations are possible by switching the Mode between A and B. Mode A is the default shape, suitable for most material, while Mode B can be particularly useful on minimal and/or acoustic program material, yielding a more subtle touch. Power The Power switch determines whether the plug-in is active. When the Power switch is in the Off position, plug-in processing is disabled and UAD DSP usage is reduced (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). When the plug-in is bypassed with this switch (but not by the host bypass), the VU meter displays the unprocessed input signal level.
Precision Limiter Meters Overview

K-System The Precision Limiter has precise, calibrated stereo metering. It offers the option to use K-System metering, which is a method devised by renown audio engineer Bob Katz (http://digido.com). The K-System is essentially a method of integrating metering and monitoring levels to standardize the apparent loudness of audio material while providing useful visual feedback of average and peak levels.
Integrated Meter/Monitor System
The K-System is not just a metering system; it is designed to be integrated with calibrated monitoring system levels. In a full K-System implementation, 0 dB on the level meter yields 83 dB sound pressure level (SPL) per channel in the monitor output level (86 dB running two channels in stereo), when measured
- 358 -
with 20-20 kHz pink noise on an SPL meter set to C-weighted slow (i.e. average) response. It is this calibrated meter/monitor relationship that establishes a consistent average perceived loudness with reference to 0 dB on the meter.
Sliding Meter Scale
With the K-System, programs with different amounts of dynamic range and headroom can be produced by using a loudness meter with a sliding scale, because the moveable 0 dB point is always tied to the same calibrated monitor SPL. The Precision Limiter provides several meter ranges for various types of program material (see Type on page 359).
Long Live Dynamic Range!
The K-System can help combat the bane of the loudness wars which is alltoo common in todays music, whereby material is made to appear louder when compared to other material at the same playback volume, at the expense of dynamic range and fidelity. Type The Type switch defines the 0 dB point in the meter scale (see Sliding Meter Scale on page 359). There are three different K-System meter scales, with 0 dB at either 20, 14, or 12 dB below full scale, for typical headroom and SNR requirements of various program materials.
- 359 -
Each of these modes displays the The RMS and instantaneous peak levels, which follow the signal, and the peak-hold level (see Meter Response on page 361). PK-RMS
K-20
K-14
K-12
Figure 109. Precision Limiter Meter Types
K-20
K-20 mode displays 0 dB at 20 dB below full scale. K-20 is intended for material with very wide dynamic range, such as symphonic music and mixing for film for theatre.
K-14
K-14 mode displays 0 dB at 14 dB below full scale. K-14 is intended for the vast majority of moderately-compressed material destined for home listening, such as rock, pop, and folk music.
K-12
K-12 mode displays 0 dB at 12 dB below full scale. K-12 is recommended for material intended for broadcast.
Peak-RMS
This is what is often considered a normal digital meter, where 0 dB is fullscale digital code.
- 360 -
Note: When the meters are in the K-modes, the displayed RMS level is 3.01 dB higher when compared to the same signal level in the Peak-RMS mode. This is done to conform to the AES-17 specification, so that peak and average measurements are referenced to the same decibel value with sine waves. Meter Response The main stereo Input/Output meter actually displays three meters simultaneously: The RMS and instantaneous peak levels, which follow the signal, and the peak-hold (also known as global peak) level. The peak-hold level is the maximum instantaneous peak within the interval set by the Hold button, and is also displayed as text to the right of the meters. To reset the peak hold levels, press the Clear button. Precision Limiter metering is also active when plug-in processing is deactivated with the Precision Limiter Power switch. Metering is disabled when the plug-in is bypassed by the host application. Gain Reduction Meter The Gain Reduction meter displays the amount of limiter gain reduction. More green bars moving to the left indicate more gain reduction is occurring. Gain reduction only occurs when the input signal level exceeds 0 dB. Therefore, increasing the Input knob usually results in more gain reduction. Meter The Meter switch specifies the signal source for the main stereo meter, either input or output.
Input
When the Meter switch is in Input mode, the main level meters display the signal level at the input of the plug-in (and is not affected by the Input knob).
Output
When the Meter switch is in Output mode, the main level meters display the level at the output of the plug-in. When the Limiter is enabled, the Output and Input knobs will affect this display. Scale The meter Scale switch increases the resolution of the main stereo level meter (See Figure 110 below). The meter range that is displayed in Normal and Zoom modes is dependent upon the meter Type setting (see Type on page 359).
- 361 -
Figure 110. Precision Limiter meter scale in PK-RMS Zoom mode
The main level meters in Normal mode, and the gain reduction meter in both Normal and Zoom modes, are linear (level differences between LED segments is the same). In PK-RMS and K-20 Zoom modes however, the main level meters use two different linear ranges for increased accuracy. The ranges and response for each meter type and scale is detailed below.
PK-RMS
In Normal mode, the meter range is 60 dB to 0 dB with a linear response of 0.5 dB per segment. In Zoom mode, the range is 18 dB to 0 dB with two different linear responses: 0.2 dB per segment from 18 to 6 dB, and 0.1 dB per segment from 6 to 0 dB.
K-20
In Normal mode, the meter range is 40 dB to 20 dB with a linear response of 0.5 dB per segment. In Zoom mode, the range is 8 dB to 20 dB with two different linear responses: 0.2 dB per segment from 8 to 15 dB, and 0.1 dB per segment from 15 dB to 20 dB.
K-14
In Normal mode, the meter range is 46 dB to 14 dB with a linear response of 0.5 dB per segment. In Zoom mode, the range is 10 dB to 14 dB, with linear response of 0.2 dB per segment.
K-12
In Normal mode, the meter range is 48 dB to 12 dB with a linear response of 0.5 dB per segment. In Zoom mode, the range is 12 dB to 12 dB, with linear response of 0.2 dB per segment.
- 362 -
Hold
The meter Hold Time switch determines how much time will pass before the peak values for the main meter and the gain reduction meter are reset. It affects both the peak LEDs and the peak text display. Values of 3 seconds, 10 seconds, or Infinite (indicated by the lazy-8 symbol) can be selected.
Clear
The meter Peak Clear switch clears the meter peak value display. It affects both the peak LEDs and the peak text display.
Precision Limiter Latency

The Precision Limiter has a 1.5ms look-ahead window to ensure clipping does not occur. This look-ahead function results in a slightly larger latency than other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information. Note: Compensating for Precision Limiter is not required if the host application supports full plug-in delay compensation throughout the signal path, or when it is used only on the outputs.
- 363 -
CHAPTER 37
Precision Maximizer
Overview
The Precision Maximizer is a dynamic impact processor that uniquely enhances the apparent loudness, warmth, and presence of individual tracks or program material without appreciably reducing dynamic range or peak level control. Significant audio improvements can be achieved without the fatiguing artifacts typically associated with traditional dynamic processors. The plug-in uses a proprietary soft-saturation process that maximizes signal energy while minimizing undesirable distortion and aliasing. A wide variety of sounds are available using relatively few controls. The primary sonic parameter is the Shape control, which can range from simply increasing the apparent loudness at lower settings, to dramatically improved clarity, punch, and musical tube-like distortion at higher values. The nature of the source material, as well as the input levels to the processor, also greatly affect the sonic character at the output. The Limit function and 3band mode enable further manipulation of signal levels for additional creative options.
Note:
See Operating Tips on page 369 for practical usage information.
Signal Flow
The input signal first passes through the Input control (page 365), then the Input Meter (page 365), before arriving at the Bands divider (page 366). After being optionally divided by the Bands parameter, the signal is then split into the dry path and the wet saturation path. The saturation path is processed by the Shape control (page 366), then the wet and dry signals are combined with the Mix control (page 367). Finally, the mixed signal is processed by the Limit control (page 367) before being passed to the Output control (page 368) and Output Meter (page 368).
- 364 -
Chapter 37: Precision Maximizer
Precision Maximizer Screenshot
Figure 111. The Precision Maximizer plug-in window
Precision Maximizer Controls

Control knobs for the Precision Maximizer behave the same way as all UAD plug-ins. Input, Shape, Mix, and Output values can be modified with text entry. Input Meter The stereo peak Input Meter displays the signal level at the input of the processor, after the Input control. 0 dB represents digital full scale (0 dBFS). Precision Maximizer can utilize input signals up to +6 dB at the input before input clipping occurs. The displayed range is from 40 dB to +6 dB. Input The Input Level knob controls the signal level that is input to the plug-in. Increasing the input will generally result in more processing (depending on the settings of the other parameters). By increasing the Input knob, input levels higher than 0 dBFS (up to +6 dBFS) within the plug-in can be processed. This can increase the distortion characteristic at the output, particularly when the Limit function (Limit on page 367) is engaged. The available range is 12 dB. A good starting point for sonic experimentation is to set the input level so the input peaks occur around 0 dB, then adjust the other controls to taste.
- 365 -
Shape
The Shape knob is the primary saturation control for the Maximizer effect. It contours the harmonic content and apparent dynamic range of the processor by changing the small-signal gain of the saturator. The available range is 0100%. At lower settings, apparent loudness is not as dramatic but harmonic processing still occurs, producing a richer sound with minimal reduction of dynamic range. As Shape is increased, the sound becomes more saturated with sonically pleasing distortion and perceived loudness, punch, and clarity. Shape values between 0-50% will make the effect more subtle, but a richer sound is still obtained. Lower Shape values accentuate louder peaks, which can sound great on percussive instruments. Solo instruments can also benefit from lower Shape values by taming the peaks while maintaining dynamic range. As Shape is increased beyond 50%, presence, excitement, and harmonic coloration can be dramatic, yet still highly musical and without the dynamic squashing of typical limiters. The most natural warmth and tube-like distortion is obtained with Shape at 50%. This setting generates the lowest amount of higher order harmonics and most closely emulates characteristic tube qualities.
Bands
Precision Maximizer can operate in one-band or three-band mode. In one-band mode, all frequencies are processed equally. In threeband mode, the frequency spectrum is split into three separate bands before maximizing is applied. One-band mode is the normal setting for general usage. In this mode, more dramatic results can often be obtained because more saturation effect is possible before the output is clipped. At higher levels of distortion, the phase of the harmonics are also better retained in this mode, which usually produces a more desirable sound quality. Higher levels of perceived loudness may be obtained in three-band mode, especially if the frequency spectrum of the source material is not balanced. In this mode, certain settings can produce higher output levels than input levels (and potential clipping), so it may be necessary to compensate by reducing the input/output levels, and/or engaging the Limit control.
- 366 -
The crossover frequencies in three-band mode are 200 Hz and 2.45 kHz. Click the Bands button to change the mode. Alternately, you can click+hold the LED area and drag like a slider to change the value.
Note:
UAD DSP usage is increased when three-band mode is active (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). The Limit function provides a second stage of soft-saturation just before the output control for the plug-in. It prevents digital overs by protecting the plug-in output from exceeding 0 dBFS. Limit enters into clipping range gradually instead of hard-clipping at 0 dB.
Limit
The Limit function has the same saturation form as the Shape parameter, but the effect is milder. Limit is especially useful for three-band mode, where output peaks over 0 dB (and clipping) can occur. However, great results can also be obtained in one-band mode when Limit is engaged. If Limit is used to reduce levels by a significant amount, it is usually best to have Mix set to 100% in order to minimize audio artifacts (aliasing). Click the Limit button to engage Limit. Alternately, you can click+hold the LED area and drag like a slider to change the value.
Note:
UAD DSP usage is slightly decreased when Limit mode is inactive (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). The Mix knob is a mix control for the plug-in. Mix determines the balance between the original and the processed signal. The range is from 0% (no processing) to 100% (wet, processed signal only). Note that when Mix is at 0%, the signal is still processed by the Limit control if it is enabled, and by the band splitter when in three-band mode. For a true bypass, the Power switch should be used.
Mix
- 367 -
Output
The Output knob controls the signal level that is output from the plug-in. The available range is 12 dB to 0 dB. Note that when Limit is not engaged, it is possible for the output level to exceed 0 dB. In this case, Output can be lowered to eliminate any associated clipping. When Precision Maximizer is used for CD mastering and it is the last processor in the signal chain, the recommended Output value is 0.10 dB
Output Meter
The stereo peak Output Meter displays the signal level at the output of the plug-in. The displayed range is from 40 dB to 0 dB. The very top segment of the Output Meter is a clip LED (one each for the left and right channels) which illuminates when the signal exceeds 0 dB. The clip segments are held for three seconds before resetting.
Note: The Limit function prevents the output signal from exceeding
0 dB. Therefore, the clip LEDs will only illuminate if Limit is off. Power The Power switch determines whether the plug-in is active. This is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal or bypassing the plug-in to reduce the UAD DSP load (load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Toggle the switch to change the Power state; the UA logo is illuminated in blue when the plug-in is active. You can click-hold the power switch then drag it like a slider to quickly compare the enabled/disabled state.
Note:
- 368 -
Operating Tips
As a starting point for general loudness enhancement, set Precision Maximizer to one-band mode with Limit engaged, with Mix at 100% and Shape at 50%. Then set Input so signals peak at around 0 dB on the Input Meters. These settings offer good results under most conditions, producing more presence with a warmer sound and enhanced detail (especially with lower frequencies), while retaining the apparent dynamic range of the original signal. The most natural warmth and tube-style distortion can be obtained with Shape at 50% in one-band mode, with Limit off, and signal peaks just touching 0 dB at the input. Shape at 50% delivers the lowest amount of higher order harmonics and most closely emulates a tube characteristic. More overdrive may be obtained by disengaging the Limit function. Up to +6 dB of additional headroom is available before clipping occurs when Limit is off. This can cause clipping at the output, so reduce the Input and/or Output control to compensate if necessary. Input clipping can dramatically change the distortion characteristic, and may yield signicantly different results in one-band versus three-band mode. Generally speaking, the input should be set as high as possible before undesirable sound quality is obtained. For optimum results (especially when Limit is off) ensure the source signal is not clipped before it arrives at the Precision Maximizer input. Output clipping can be completely avoided by enabling Limit. One-band mode is generally recommended for program material. Set Mix at 100% in order to hear the full affect of the Maximizer process. Reduce Mix when blending in the original signal is desired. Changing the order of plug-ins in the signal path can have a dramatic affect on Precision Maximizer results. Sonic experimentation is highly encouraged!
Precision Maximizer Latency

The Precision Maximizer uses an internal upsampling technique. This upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information.
- 369 -
CHAPTER 38
Precision Multiband
Overview
The Precision Multiband is a specialized mastering tool that provides five spectral bands of dynamic range control. Compression, expansion or gate can be chosen separately for each of the five bands. The unparalleled flexibility and easy to follow graphical design of the Precision Multiband make it the ideal tool for the novice as well as the seasoned mastering engineer. The Precision Multiband can be used for anything from complex dynamic control to simple de-essing. Two filter bank modes offer precise linear-phase or minimum-phase gain control; use the linear-phase option for perfectly phasecoherent results, or minimum-phase for a more analog sound. Both filter bank modes achieve the magnitude response of a Linkwitz-Riley filter and provide perfect magnitude reconstruction.
Precision Multiband Screenshot
Figure 112. The UAD Precision Multiband plug-in window
- 370 -
Chapter 38: Precision Multiband
Precision Multiband Interface

The Precision Multiband interface is designed to make this complex processor easier to use. Five separate frequency bands are available for processing. Each band is identied by a unique color, and all controls specic to the band have the same color. This helps to visually associate parameters to the band that they affect. The band names and their colors are: Low Frequency (LF): Red Low-Mid Frequency (LMF): Orange Mid Frequency (MF): Yellow High-Mid Frequency (HMF): Green High Frequency (HF): Blue The interface is divided into four primary areas of control: The Band Controls section contains the dynamic response parameters for each of the ve bands. One set of band controls is displayed at a time. See Band Controls on page 372. The EQ Display contains the band frequency parameters and shows a graphic representation of the band frequency response. The overall equalization response is also displayed (if enabled). See EQ Display on page 377. The Dynamics Meters display the amount of gain reduction or expansion occurring on each band. The band enable and solo controls are here also. See Dynamics Meters on page 380. The Global controls affect aspects of the plug-in not associated with individual bands. These include input/output controls and meters, power, and other controls. See Global Controls on page 381.
- 371 -
Band Controls
The Band Controls contain the parameters that are used to specify all the settings for each band (except the frequencies; see Frequency Controls on page 379). The Band Controls for each of the five bands are identical. Only one set of Band Controls is displayed at a time. The control set for any particular band is displayed by selecting the band (see Band Select on page 372).
Band Select
Selecting a band causes the controls for that band to be displayed in the Band Controls area. Bands can be selected by using the Band Select buttons, or by clicking in the EQ display.
Band Select Buttons
The Band Select buttons at the top of the EQ Display specify which band parameters are displayed in the band controls section. Click the button to display the parameters for the band.
- 372 -
EQ Display Selection
A band can also be selected by clicking within the area of the band in the EQ Display. For example, clicking within the area shown here will select the LMF band.
Band Parameters
Because the Band Controls for each of the five bands are identical, they are only described once. All Button The ALL button provides a facility to link controls and copy parameter values to all bands when adjusting the current band. Each of the Band Controls has an ALL button. The behavior of the ALL button is the same for all the Band Controls in all the bands (with the exception of the Type switch; see Type Switch on page 374) The ALL button can perform three functions: Relative Link, Absolute Link, and Copy Value. Note that the ALL button cannot be automated.
Relative Link
In Relative mode, changes to a band control will change the same control in the other bands by a relative amount (i.e. the same amount), until any single band reaches its minimum or maximum value. Single-click the ALL button to enter Relative mode; the button background changes to blue. When adjusting a control in Relative mode, it may appear that the full range of the active control is unavailable; this occurs when a different band (not the active band) has reached the end of its range. In Relative mode the Gain value can also be adjusted by dragging the Gain handle in the EQ Display (see EQ Display on page 377).
Note: No change occurs to the parameter values unless the control is actually
moved. This allows you turn off relative linking without making any changes.
- 373 -
Note:
Relative mode is not available for the Type parameter because the available Type values are discrete. Click and shift-click both activate Absolute mode for Type.
Absolute Link
In Absolute mode, changes to a band control will force the same control in the other bands to snap to the same value as the current band. Shift-click the ALL button to enter Absolute mode; the button background changes to red. In Absolute mode the Gain value can also be adjusted by dragging the Gain handle in the EQ Display (see EQ Display on page 377).
Note: No change occurs to the parameter values unless the control is actually
moved. This allows you turn off absolute linking without making any changes.
Copy
Ctrl-click the ALL button when it is NOT in Relative or Absolute modes (not blue or red) to copy the current value of the active band control to the same control value in the other bands.
Note:
Careful with the control Copy function! It will delete the existing values in the other bands, and no undo is available. The Type button defines the dynamic nature of the band, allowing each band to function as a compressor, expander, or noise gate, independent of the Type value in the other bands. Click the Type switch to scroll through the three available values.
Type Switch
The Type text (compress, expand, gate) behaves as a vertical slider and can be used for changing the Type as well. Alternately, the Type can be changed using the Dynamics Meters label text (see Dynamics Meters on page 380).
Note:
When changing the band Type, the Ratio value for the band changes to 1:1. This prevents dramatic jumps in the output level that could result from extreme values of other band parameters.
- 374 -
COMPRESS
When a band is set to Compress, the dynamic range of the band will be reduced (dependent upon the band threshold and input level). This is the typical value in multiband compression.
EXPAND
When a band is set to Expand, the dynamic range of the band will be increased (dependent upon the band threshold and input level).
GATE
When a band is set to Gate, the band behaves as a gate. A gate stops the signal from passing when the signal level drops below the specified threshold value. Gates are generally used to reduce noise levels by eliminating the noise floor when the main signal is not present, but they are also useful for special effects. Threshold This parameter determines the threshold level for compression/expansion/gating. Any signals that exceed this level are processed. Signals below the level are unaffected. A Threshold of 0 dB yields no processing. The available range is 60 dB to 0 dB. As the Threshold control is decreased and more processing occurs, output level is typically reduced (compression) or increased (expansion). Adjust the Gain control to modify the output of the band to compensate if desired. Ratio Ratio determines the amount of gain reduction (or expansion) for the band. For example: When a band is set to Compress, a value of 2 (expressed as a 2:1 ratio) reduces the signal by half, with an input signal of 20 dB being reduced to 10 dB. The available range depends on the value of the Type parameter, as follows: Ratio range in Compress mode is 1:1 to 60:1 Ratio range in Expand mode is 1:1 to 1:4 Ratio range in Gate mode is 1:1 to 8:1
- 375 -
Attack
Attack sets the amount of time that must elapse once the input signal reaches the Threshold level before processing is applied. The faster the Attack, the more rapidly processing is applied to signals above the threshold. The available range is 50 microseconds to 100 milliseconds.
Release
Release sets the amount of time it takes for processing to cease once the input signal drops below the threshold level. Slower release times can smooth the transition that occurs when the signal dips below the threshold, especially useful for material with frequent peaks. However, if you set too large of a Release time, processing for sections of audio with loud signals may extend to lengthy sections of audio with lower signals. The available range is 20 milliseconds to 2 seconds. The Gain control adjusts the output level of the band. Generally speaking, adjust the Gain control after the desired amount of processing is achieved with the Threshold control. The Gain control does not affect the amount of processing. The available range is 12 dB.
Note:
Gain
The Gain for each band can also be modified by control points in the EQ Display (see Curve Control Points on page 377).
Band Frequencies Band Enable & Solo
For details about the band frequencies, see Frequency Controls on page 379. For details about the band enable and solo controls, see Dynamics Meters on page 380.
- 376 -
EQ Display
In the EQ Display, the entire audio spectrum from 20 Hz to 20 kHz is displayed along the horizontal axis. Gain and attenuation of the five band frequencies (up to 12 dB) are displayed along the vertical axis.
Figure 113. Precision Multiband EQ Display
Band Curves
The Band Curves show the relative frequency and gain settings of the bands. The sides of the colored curves are a representation of each bands frequency settings, and the top of each curve represents the bands gain setting.
Note:
The currently selected band is displayed with a thicker bold line. Disabled bands (see Band Enable & Solo on page 376) are displayed with a thinner line.
EQ Response
The EQ Display also shows the processed EQ response dynamically as a light blue line across all bands (if the Dynamic EQ display option is enabled; see EQ Display Switch on page 382). Band gain, center frequencies (cF), crossover frequencies (xF), and bandwidth can be modified by manipulating the colored band curves in the EQ Display with the cursor. When the cursor is moved over the pre-defined hot spots in the EQ Display, the cursor changes shape to indicate that adjustments can be made. Each of these control points and their corresponding available adjustments are detailed below.
Curve Control Points
- 377 -
Adjusting Gain
The gain of a band can be adjusted by click-dragging the top of its colored line. In this case the cursor changes to an up/down arrow when hovered over the hot spot to indicate the direction available for dragging. If the cursor is moved slightly lower than the above example, the gain and center frequency can be adjusted simultaneously, without adjusting the bandwidth. In this case the cursor changes to an up/down/left/right arrow when hovered over the hot spot to indicate the direction available for dragging. If the cursor is moved to the upper-left region of the three center bands (LMF, MF, HMF), the gain and bandwidth can be adjusted simultaneously, without changing the center frequency. In this case the cursor changes to a diagonal arrow when hovered over the hot spot to indicate the direction available for dragging. If the cursor is moved to where two bands crossover, the crossover frequencies can be adjusted, without changing the gain or center frequency. In this case the cursor changes to a left/right arrow when hovered over the hot spot to indicate the direction available for dragging.
Note: Frequencies
Adjusting Gain and cF
Adjusting Gain and Bandwidth
Adjusting xF
can also be adjusted by using the Frequency Value parameters (seeFrequency Values on page 379).
- 378 -
Frequency Controls
The crossover frequency (xF) between the bands and the center frequency (cF) of the Mid bands is shown at the bottom of the EQ Display (see EQ Display on page 377). The frequencies for each band can be modified by entering the values directly and by manipulating the colored band curves. Frequency Values All band frequency values are always displayed. Values can be input directly using text entry. If a value is entered that is outside of the minimum and maximum allowable value, the entry field will not accept the change and the value for the entry field will remain unchanged. For the center frequencies, if a value is entered that is still within the acceptable min/max range but the center frequency can not reach the input value because it would require a change to the width, then the nearest allowable value is set. If a lower or greater center frequency value is desired (i.e., the original center frequency value attempt), the width of the band must be reduced first, then the center frequency adjusted again. It's easiest to see the cF limits at the given width by dragging the center frequency with the mouse. To modify the frequency (and gain) values using the EQ Display, see Curve Control Points on page 377).
- 379 -
Dynamics Meters
Realtime display of Precision Multiband dynamics processing is shown in the Dynamics Meters. This area also contains the band enable and band solo controls. There is one vertical dynamics meter for each band. They are color coded to match the bands, and represent (from left to right) the LF, LMF, MF, HMF, and HF bands respectively. Dynamics processing for each band is indicated by light blue LED-style metering. Zero dB is at the center of the meter, and the range is 15 dB. Downward/negative metering indicates compression is occurring on the band. Upward/positive metering indicates expansion is occurring. In Gate mode, there is simultaneous inward metering from the top and bottom to the center, which provides a visual gate that opens and closes along with the gate processing. Dynamics Meters signal peaks are held for 3 seconds before resetting. Meter Labels The labels above the Dynamics Meters reflect the mode that each band is in: GR (Gain Reduction) for compression, EXP for expansion, and GT for Gate. Each band has an Enable button. The Enable button for the band is just below its dynamics meter. The band is active when its Enable button is light blue. Click the button to toggle the active state of the band. Disabling bands does not reduce UAD CPU usage. Band Solo Buttons Each band has a Solo button. The Solo button for the band is just below its Enable button. When one or more bands are in Solo mode, only the soloed bands can be heard and the other bands are muted.
Band Enable Buttons
- 380 -
The band is soloed when its Solo button is red. Click the button to toggle the solo state of the band. Soloing bands does not reduce UAD CPU usage. Solo Display When a band is in Solo mode, its curve in the EQ Display is highlighted. In addition to the Solo buttons, you can also control-click a band in the EQ Display to put any band (or bands) into Solo mode.
Note:
Global Controls
Input Level Meter The stereo peak/hold Input Meter displays the signal level at the input of the plug-in. Signal peaks are held for 3 seconds before resetting. The Input Level knob controls the signal level that is input to the plug-in. Increasing the input may result in more processing, depending on the values of the band parameters. The default value is 0 dB. The available range is 20 dB. The Mix control determines the balance between the original and the processed signal. The range is from 0% (no dynamics processing) to 100% (wet, processed signal only). The default value is 100%. Note that at 0% the signal is still being processed by the band splitter in the plug-in. In linear phase mode the splitter is inaudible, but in minimum phase mode you may hear a slight coloration of the signal at 0%.
Input Level Knob
Mix
- 381 -
Output Level Meter
The stereo peak/hold Output Meter displays the signal level at the output of the plug-in. Signal peaks are held for 3 seconds before resetting. The Output Level knob controls the signal level that is output from the plug-in. The default value is 0 dB. The available range is 20 dB. The EQ Display mode can be static or dynamic. The EQ Display switch determines the active mode. Click the switch to toggle the mode.
EQ
Output Level Knob EQ Display Switch
In this mode, the EQ Display is static. Only the colored frequency bands are displayed.
Dynamic EQ
In Dynamic EQ mode, a light blue line in the EQ Display indicates the actual frequency response of the processor in realtime. Phase Mode Switch The filter bank mode of Precision Multiband can be specified with the Phase Mode switch. Click the switch to toggle the mode. The default mode is Linear. Both filter bank modes achieve the magnitude response of a Linkwitz-Riley filter and provide perfect magnitude reconstruction.
Linear
Use linear phase mode when perfectly phase-coherent results are desired.
Minimum
Minimum phase mode provides a more analog (i.e., colored) sound and uses slightly less UAD CPU. While the DSP savings are rather negligible, there is a functional advantage to Min phase mode. When Precision Multiband is used as a track compressor, Min phase mode provides the advantage of rapid response time of the filters for smooth automation and filter sweeps.
- 382 -
Power Switch
The Power Switch determines whether the plug-in is active. Click the toggle button or the UA logo to change the state. When the Power switch is in the Off position, plug-in processing is disabled and UAD DSP usage is reduced (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). When the plug-in is bypassed with this switch (but not by the host bypass), the I/O meters and the Input Level knob remain active.
Precision Multiband Latency

The Precision Multiband requires a large processing buffer to perform its sonic wonders. This buffer results in a significantly larger latency than other UAD plug-ins, including all other upsampled plug-ins. You may use DelayComp or TrackAdv to compensate. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information. Compensating for Precision Multiband latency is not required if the host application supports full plug-in delay compensation throughout the entire signal path, or when it is used only on the outputs.
Important:
- 383 -
CHAPTER 39
Pultec Passive EQ Collection
Introduction
The Pultec Passive EQ Collection is the final word in fastidious circuit reproduction of Pulse Techniques revered passive EQs, considered to be the most popular outboard studio equalizers ever made. With the UAD-2s increased DSP power and ten years of UAs technological advancements since the original Pultec and Pultec-Pro plug-ins, UA has revisited the Pultec family. Maintaining the spot-on filter fits and all-important EQ band interactions, the Pultec Passive EQ Collection expands on sonic detail by modeling the overbuilt transformers and complex tube amplifiers of these must-have production tools. The sophisticated technology used in this new plug-in collection captures all of these tone-enhancing characteristics for individual sources to full program material.
- 384 -
Chapter 39: Pultec Passive EQ Collection
Pultec Passive EQ Collection Screenshots
Figure 114. The Pultec EQP-1A plug-in window
Figure 115. The Pulteq MEQ-5 plug-in window
Figure 116. The Pultec HLF-3C plug-in window
Figure 117. The Pultec-Pro Legacy plug-in window, which includes both the original EQP-1A and the original MEQ-5
- 385 -
Pultec Plug-In Family

The complete Pultec family is comprised of five individual plug-ins, as seen on the previous page. Each variation has its own unique sonic characteristics. Pultec Passive EQ Collection The Pultec Passive EQ Collection (introduced in UAD v7.1) provides access to three historical and highly coveted revisions in the Pultec product line. The plug-ins in the Pultec Passive EQ Collection benefit from the additional processing power afforded by the UAD-2, plus more than 10 years of UAs evolving sophistication designing plug-ins. While the original EQP-1A Legacy and Pultec-Pro Legacy plug-ins remain an excellent rendition of the hardware, the plug-ins in the newer Pultec Passive EQ Collection add the transformer and complex tube amplifier nonlinearities for even more authenticity. The sophisticated modeling technology used in the newer plug-in collection captures all of these tone-enhancing characteristics.
Pultec EQP-1A
Used on a myriad of recordings from the 1950s to today, the three-band, tube-amplified EQP-1A Program Equalizer has long been a studio staple of recording and mix engineers for its ability to bring out individual frequency ranges without significantly altering neighboring frequencies. This unit is equally famous for its ability to dial in seemingly dangerous amounts of boost and famously smooth-as-silk vintage tone. The EQP-1A is also known as the quintessential magic studio piece that makes audio simply sound better just by passing through it.
Pultec MEQ-5
The Pultec MEQ-5 Mid-Range Equalizer is the richly colorful tube-amplified companion piece to the EQP-1A. With two bands of midrange boost and one band of midrange dip, the MEQ-5 is designed to enhance and control the power region where sound energy is often concentrated, covering the finer tone requirements in the Pultec Collection with an abundance of band overlap and filter interaction.
Pultec HLF-3C
The HLF-3C completes the Pultec Passive EQ Collection. This plug-in has 12 dB per octave low and high cut filters, providing broad retro-tonal sculpting or bygone-era special effects, without the inconvenience of insertion loss found with the unamplified passive hardware.
- 386 -
Pultec Legacy
The Pultec EQP-1A Legacy and Pultec-Pro Legacy plug-ins (Figure 117 on page 385) are the original versions of our Pultec emulations that run on both UAD-1 and UAD-2 devices. They still have a great sound and are very usable, especially when there are not enough DSP resources to use the secondgeneration versions in the newer Pultec Passive EQ Collection. To accommodate the limited DSP resources of the original UAD-1, the transformer and I/O distortion characteristics were not modeled in these plug-ins. This makes these legacy versions especially useful in situations where less distortion, and less DSP usage, is desirable.
The Pultec EQP-1A/MEQ-5 combination is still standard fare in recording studios and was once widely used in mastering sessions. Whether used independently or together, mono or stereo, the Pultec Collection provides a complete vintage EQ palette for individual sources such as bass or kick drums, subgroups such rhythm, horn or string sections, or on the master bus. The EQP-1As 16 KCS high frequency setting is famous for adding air to master sources. Although unintended by its designers, the Pultec EQP-1A is coveted for its unique ability to boost and cut the same low frequency simultaneously, creating a tightening effect as a naturally interactive resonant dip near the selected frequency. This has the sonic effect of simultaneously tightening and boosting bass frequencies. Select the bass frequency then adjust the balance of Boost and Cut to tune the effect. EQP-1A Insertion Boost The original EQP-1A hardware unit has an inherent level boost of approximately 1.13 dB when it is in the signal path. This inherent boost is present in the EQP-1A plug-in models as well. The original Pultec hardware used frequency unit names that were conventional before the frequency unit of Hertz was widely adopted. The UAD Pultec plug-ins adopt the original frequency unit name conventions. CPS is an acronym for Cycles Per Second, which is now more commonly referred to as Hertz and abbreviated as Hz. KCS is an acronym for KiloCycles per Second, which is now more commonly referred to as KiloHertz and abbreviated as kHz.
Frequency Conventions
- 387 -
Artist Presets
The Pultec Passive EQ Collection includes artist presets from prominent Pultec users. Some of the artist presets are in the internal factory bank and are accessed via the host applications preset menu. Additional artist presets are copied to disk by the UAD installer so they can be used within Apollos Console application. The additional presets can be loaded using the Settings menu in the UAD Toolbar (see Using UAD Powered Plug-Ins in Chapter 7 of the UAD System Manual).
Note: Presets
created with the original Legacy plug-ins are incompatible with the equivalent newer model plug-ins.
Upsampling
All UAD Pultec plug-ins use an internal upsampling technique. The upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information.
Pultec EQP-1A Controls

Control Grouping The EQP-1A can control three frequency bands simultaneously, using three groups of interacting parameters. The first group adjusts the low frequencies and has three controls: boost, attenuation, and frequency select. The second group adjusts the high frequencies and has three controls: boost, bandwidth, and frequency select. The third group also adjusts the highs and has two controls: attenuation amount and frequency select. The placement and grouping of the sections and their related controls are shown in Figure 118.
Figure 118. Control grouping within the Pultec EQP-1A
- 388 -
EQ Enable
This is the EQ enable control. Like the original hardware, the signal is still colored even when this switch is in the out (down) position, because the signal is still passing through the I/O circuitry. If a true bypass is desired, use the Bypass/Gain knob.
Bypass/Gain
The function of this control differs between the newer EQP-1A and the Legacy version, as described below.
Pultec EQP-1A
This dual purpose knob is an output gain control, and the plugin bypass control. The available output gain range is 12 dB. Rotate the control fully counter-clockwise to disable plug-in processing and reduce UAD DSP load (DSP load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Click the OFF text label or the red power lamp to toggle between bypass and the previous value.
Tip: Tip:
Click the 0 text label to set the gain to 0 dB.
Pultec EQP-1A Legacy
This is the plug-in bypass control. The knob can be used to compare the processed settings to that of the original signal, or to disable the plug-in to reduce UAD DSP load (DSP load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled).
Note:
Output gain is unavailable on the Pultec EQP-1A Legacy plug-in.
Low Frequency Controls
Low Frequency
This switch determines the frequency of the low shelf portion of the equalizer. Four frequencies are available: 20, 30, 60, and 100 CPS.
Tip: To
cycle through the available values, click the CPS text label, or shift+click the text label to cycle through available values in reverse. This function is unavailable with the Legacy version of the plug-in.
- 389 -
LF Boost
This knob determines the amount of low shelf gain to be applied to the frequency set by the CPS switch.
LF Attenuation
This knob (ATTEN) determines the amount of low shelf cut to be applied to the frequency set by the CPS switch.
Background
In the documentation supplied with hardware version of the EQP-1A, it is recommended that both Boost and Attenuation not be applied simultaneously because in theory, they would cancel each other out. In actual use however, the Boost control has slightly higher gain than the Attenuation has cut, and the frequencies they affect are slightly different too. The EQ curve that results when boost and attenuation are simultaneously applied to the low shelf is an additional feature. High Boost Controls
High Frequency
This switch determines the frequency of the high boost portion of the equalizer. Seven frequencies are available: 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, 12, and 16 KCS. To cycle through the available values, click the KCS text label, or shift+click the text label to cycle through available values in reverse. These shortcuts are unavailable with the Legacy version of the plug-in.
Tip:
HF Q
This knob sets the proportion of frequencies surrounding the center frequency (determined by the KCS switch) to be affected by the high boost (this is a bandwidth control). Lower values yield a narrower band and effect fewer frequencies.
- 390 -
HF Boost
This knob controls sets the amount of gain for the high frequency portion of the equalizer. High Attenuation Controls
HF Attenuation Frequency
This switch (ATTEN SEL) determines the frequency of the high frequency attenuator. Three frequencies are available: 5, 10, and 20 KCS. To cycle through the available values, click the ATTEN SEL text label, or shift+click the text label to cycle through available values in reverse. These shortcuts are unavailable with the Legacy version of the plug-in.
Tip:
HF Attenuation
This knob (ATTEN) determines the amount of high shelf cut to be applied to the frequency set by the Attenuation Selector switch.
Pultec MEQ-5 Controls

The MEQ-5 can control three frequency bands simultaneously, using three groups of interacting parameters. The first group adjusts the lowmid frequencies and has two controls: frequency select and boost. The second group adjusts the mid frequencies and has two controls: frequency select and attenuation. The third group adjusts high-mids and has two controls: frequency select and boost. The placement and grouping of the sections and their related controls are shown in Figure 119.
Figure 119. Control grouping within the Pultec MEQ-5
- 391 -
EQ Enable
This is the EQ enable control. Like the original hardware, the signal is still colored even when this switch is in the out (down) position, because the signal is still passing through the I/O circuitry. If a true bypass is desired, use the Bypass/Gain knob (MEQ-5) or the Enable switch (Pultec-Pro Legacy; see page 389). Low Peak Controls
LM Frequency
This switch determines the frequency of the low-midrange portion of the equalizer. Five frequencies are available: 200, 300, 500, 700, and 1000 CPS.
Tip:
To cycle through the available values, click the PEAK text label, or shift+click the text label to cycle through available values in reverse. These shortcuts are unavailable with the Legacy version of the plug-in.
LM Boost
This knob determines the amount of low-midrange gain to be applied to the frequency set by the low-midrange frequency selector.
Dip Controls
Mid Frequency
This switch determines the frequency of the midrange portion of the equalizer. Eleven frequencies are available: 200 CPS, 300 CPS, 500 CPS, 700 CPS, 1 KCS, 1.5 KCS, 2 KCS, 3 KCS, 4 KCS, 5 KCS, and 7 KCS.
Tip: To cycle through the available values, click the DIP text
label, or shift+click the text label to cycle through available values in reverse. These shortcuts are unavailable with the Legacy version of the plug-in.
Mid Dip
This knob determines the amount of midrange cut (attenuation) to be applied to the frequency set by the midrange frequency selector.
- 392 -
High Peak Controls
HM Frequency
This switch determines the frequency of the high-midrange portion of the equalizer. Five frequencies are available: 1.5, 2, 3, 4, and 5 KCS. To cycle through the available values, click the PEAK text label, or shift+click the text label to cycle through available values in reverse. These shortcuts are unavailable with the Legacy version of the plug-in.
Tip:
HM Boost
This knob determines the amount of high-midrange gain to be applied to the frequency set by the high-mid frequency selector.
Bypass/Gain
This is dual purpose knob is an output gain control, and a plug-in bypass control. The available output gain range is 12 dB. Rotate the control fully counter-clockwise to bypass plug-in processing and reduce UAD DSP load (DSP load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Click the OFF text label or the red power lamp to toggle between bypass and the previous value.
Tip: Tip:
Click the 0 text label to set the gain to 0 dB.
Pultec HLF-3C Controls

Unity Gain The Pultec HLF-3C hardware unit is a true passive design; there are no input/output amplifiers and it does not require any external power. As a result, there is an inherent loss of signal level when using the HLF-3C hardware. The Pultec HLF-3C plug-in compensates for this inherent signal loss for simplified use in the modern era; it has unity gain upon insertion (there is no insertion loss until one or both of the cut filters is engaged).
- 393 -
The HLF-3C interface is very simple and includes only the three controls shown in Figure 120.
Figure 120. The Pultec HLF-3C controls
Enable
This toggle switch is the plug-in bypass control. When in the down position (bypassed), plug-in processing is disabled altogether. The plug-in is engaged with the switch is in the up position. This switch can be used to compare the processed settings to that of the original signal, or to bypass plug-in processing to reduce UAD DSP load (DSP load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled).
Note:
The behavior of this toggle switch differs from the other UAD Pultec plug-ins. Because the HLF-3C hardware is not internally amplified, there is no I/O circuitry modeling to maintain when the EQ portion of the circuit is bypassed (the entire hardware unit is the EQ portion).
Low Cut
This rotary switch specifies the cutoff frequency of the low cut filter. Eleven frequencies are available: 50, 80, 100, 150, 250, 500, 750, 1000, 1500, and 2000 CPS. To cycle through the available values, click the CPS text label, or shift+click the text label to cycle through available values in reverse.
Tip:
High Cut
This rotary switch specifies the cutoff frequency of the high cut filter. Eleven frequencies are available: 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, and 15 KCS. To cycle through the available values, click the KCS text label, or shift+click the text label to cycle through available values in reverse.
Tip:
- 394 -
History
In 1951, Pulse Techniques introduced the first passive Program Equalizer, the EQP-1. The passive EQ filter designs were originally licensed from Western Electric. Founders Ollie Summerland and Gene Shenk made up the Teaneck, New Jersey operation of Pultec. These two men comprised the engineering, marketing, sales and production staff for the entire history of the company, and made every item to order, all by hand. With the EQP-1A, Pultec improved the original design with tube amplification to overcome the typical insertion loss of passive equalizers. The EQP family of EQs would see many iterations, but the fundamental design would be Pultecs flagship product until the companys closure in the early 80s.
The Pultec Passive EQ Collection Original Hardware
- 395 -
CHAPTER 40
RealVerb Pro
Overview
RealVerb Pro uses complex spatial and spectral reverberation technology to accurately model an acoustic space. What that gets you is a great sounding reverb with the ability to customize a virtual room and pan within the stereo spectrum. Room Shape and Material RealVerb Pro provides two graphic menus each with preset Room Shapes and Materials. You blend the shapes and material composition and adjust the room size according to the demands of your mix. Controls are provided to adjust the thickness of the materials even inverse thickness for creative effects. Through some very clever engineering, the blending of room shapes, size and materials may be performed in real-time without distortion, pops, clicks or zipper noise. Once you've created your custom room presets, you can even morph between two presets in real-time, with no distortion. RealVerb Pro also includes intuitive graphic control over equalization, timing and diffusion patterns. To maximize the impact of your recording, we put independent control over the direct path, early reflections and late-field reverberation in your hands. Capitalizing on the psychoacoustic technology that went into the design of RealVerb 5.1, we have incorporated some of those principals into RealVerb Pro. Our proprietary Stereo Soundfield Panning allows you to spread and control the signal between stereo speakers creating an impression of center and width. The ability to envelop your listener in a stereo recording is an entirely new approach to reverb design. Don't rely on your old standby. Let RealVerb Pro bring new quality and space to your recordings!
Resonance, Timing and Diffusion
Stereo Soundeld Panning
- 396 -
Chapter 40: RealVerb Pro
RealVerb Pro Background

Pan Source Input Direct Path Wet/Dry Mix Early Reflections Pans & Distance Delay LateField Reverb
EQ Gain & Mute
Delay
Gain Output
Figure 121. RealVerb Pro signal flow
Figure 121 illustrates the signal flow for RealVerb Pro. The input signal is equalized and applied to the early reflection generator and the late-field reverberation unit. The resulting direct path, early reflection, and late-field reverberation are then independently positioned in the soundfield.
Figure 122. The RealVerb Pro plug-in window
- 397 -
The RealVerb Pro user interface is similarly organized (see Figure 122). Reflected energy equalization is controlled with the Resonance panel. The pattern of early reflections (their relative timing and amplitudes) is determined by the room shapes and sizes in the Shape panel; early reflection predelay and overall energy is specified at the top of the Timing panel. The Material panel is used to select relative late-field decay rates as a function of frequency. The overall late field decay rate is chosen along with the room diffusion, late-field predelay, and late-field level at the bottom of the Timing panel. Finally, the Positioning panel contains controls for the placement of the source, early reflections, and late-field reverberation.
Spectral Characteristics
The Shape and Material panels specify the room shape, room size, room material and thickness. These room properties affect the spectral characteristics of the rooms reflections. Shape and Size The pattern of early reflections in a reverb is determined by the room shape and size. RealVerb Pro lets you specify two room shapes and sizes that can be blended to create a hybrid of early reflection patterns. There are 15 room shapes available, including several plates, springs, and classic rooms; room sizes can be adjusted from 199 meters. The two rooms can be blended from 0100%. All parameters can be adjusted dynamically in real time without causing distortion or other artifacts in the audio.
First shape
Second shape
Blending bar First shape selector pop-up menu Second shape selector popup menu
First shape size control
Second shape size control
Figure 123. RealVerb Pro Shape panel
- 398 -
To congure the room shape and size: 1. Select
a room shape from the rst (left) pop-up menu. The selected shape appears in the left side of the Shape circle. Adjust the room size with the top horizontal slider. a room shape from the second (right) pop-up menu. The selected shape appears in the right side of the Shape circle. Adjust the room size with the bottom horizontal slider. the early reection patterns of the two rooms by dragging the Blending bar. The relative percentages of the two rooms appear above their popup menus. Drag to the right to emphasize the rst room shape; drag to the left to emphasize the second room shape. To use only one room shape, drag the Blending bar so the shape is set to 100%.
2. Select
3. Blend
The resulting early reflection pattern is displayed at the top of the Timing panel (see Figure 126 on page 405), where each reflection is represented by a yellow vertical line with a height indicating its arrival energy, and a location indicating its arrival time. Material and Thickness The material composition of an acoustical space affects how different frequency components decay over time. Materials are characterized by their absorption rates as a function of frequencythe more the material absorbs a certain frequency, the faster that frequency decays. RealVerb Pro lets you specify two room materials with independent thicknesses, which can be blended to create a hybrid of absorption and reflection properties. For example, to simulate a large glass house, a blend of glass and air could be used. There are 24 real-world materials provided, including such diverse materials as brick, marble, hardwood, water surface, air, and audience. Also included are 12 artificial materials with predefined decay rates. The thickness of the materials can be adjusted to exaggerate or invert their absorption and reflection properties. For a description of the different room materials, see About the Materials on page 401.
- 399 -
Second material First material Blending bar
First material selector popup menu
Second material selector pop-up menu
First material Thickness control Figure 124. RealVerb Pro Material panel
Second material Thickness control
Note: While materials are used to control decay rates as a function of frequency, the overall decay rate of the late-field reverberation is controlled from the Timing panel (see Figure 126 on page 405).
To congure the room material and thickness: 1. Select
a room material from the rst (left) pop-up menu. The selected material appears in the left side of the Material circle. the thickness for the rst material with the top horizontal slider:
2. Adjust
A default thickness of +100% yields normal, real-world decays for the material. Thicknesses beyond the default (up to +200%) exaggerate how the frequencies are absorbed and reected. Negative thicknesses invert the response of the material. If the material normally absorbs high frequencies (causing them to decay quickly) and reects low frequencies (causing them to decay slowly), a negative thickness will instead absorb low frequencies (causing them to decay quickly) and reect high frequencies (causing them to decay slowly). A thickness of 0% yields decay rates that are not affected by the material.
3. Select
a material from the second (right) pop-up menu. The selected material appears in the right side of the Material circle. Adjust the material thickness with the bottom horizontal slider.
- 400 -
4. Blend the absorption properties of the two materials by dragging the Blend-
ing bar. The relative amount of each material, expressed as a percentage, appears above their respective pop-up menu. Drag the Blending bar to the right to emphasize the rst material, and drag it to the left to emphasize the second material. To use only one room material, drag the Blending bar so the material is set to 100%. About the Materials Some materials absorb high frequencies and reflect low frequencies, while other materials absorb low frequencies and reflect high frequencies. This characteristic is determined by the material surface and density. Fiberglass, for example, absorbs high frequencies. When high frequencies strike fiberglass they bounce around inside the fibers and lose much of their energy. At a thickness of 100%, fiberglass rolls off the high frequencies, a little bit each millisecond. After a while the high frequencies dissipate and the low frequencies linger. If we were to take fiberglass and increase its thickness to +200%, the high frequencies would roll off even faster. At +200%, this high frequency decay happens at twice its normal rate, producing a very heavy reverberant tail. At 200%, a very sizzly late field is created. Some materials, such as plywood, naturally absorb low frequencies while reflecting high frequencies. Since plywood is usually very flat with little surface texture to capture high frequencies, high frequencies tend to be reflected. At +100%, the reverberation produced is very sizzly and increasingly bright. At 100%, it is very heavy. Keeping this in mind, if you look at the graphics in the material control panel, you can get a sense of how chosen materials, material blend, and thickness will affect the decay rate as a function of frequency. Hard materials that have lots of small cavities (Brick, Gravel, Plaster on Brick) and soft materials (Carpet, Grass, Soil) tend to absorb high frequencies. Flat, somewhat flexible materials (Heavy Plate Glass, Hardwood, Seats) tend to reflect high frequencies. Marble is the one material that tends to uniformly reflect all frequencies. You probably noticed the artificial materials the top of the Materials menu. These are materials designed to have predictable behavior and can be very handy for achieving a desired reverberation preset when you know what decay rates you desire. All these materials preferentially absorb high frequencies; they give the selected decay time at low frequencies, and a much shorter decay time at high frequencies. The frequency in each graphic is the transi-
- 401 -
tion frequency, the frequency at which the decay rate is halfway between the low-frequency and high-frequency values. At 100% thickness, the ratio of lowfrequency to high-frequency decay times is 10:1. This means that the high frequencies will decay 10 times faster than the low frequencies. At 200% thickness, this is multiplied by two (high frequencies decay at 20x the rate of the low frequencies). At negative 100%, the sense of low frequency and high frequency is swapped low frequencies decay 10 times faster than the high frequencies. Many hardware and software reverbs tend to compensate for the high frequency absorption that air provides. RealVerb Pro instead provides Air as a material. If you do not choose to use Air as one of the materials, you can effectively compensate for the high frequency absorption properties of air with the Resonance filters. Set the right-hand Transition Frequency slider to 4.794 kHz, and bring the level down about 10 dB to 15 dB for large to huge rooms, and down about 4 dB to 9 dB for small to medium rooms. To help you out, the following lists classify the materials under two headings: those that tend to reflect high frequencies, and those that tend to absorb them. They are listed in order of their transition frequencies, from lowest to highest.
Table 29. Materials with high-frequency absorption Audience Cellulose Drapery Plaster on Concrete Block Soil Gravel Paint on Concrete Block Carpet Fiberglass Grass Plaster on Brick Water Surface Sand Brick Air
Table 30. Materials with high-frequency reflection Heavy Plate Glass Plywood Hardwood Glass Window Cork Seats Marble Concrete Block Linoleum
- 402 -
Resonance (Equalization)
The Resonance panel has a three-band parametric equalizer that can control the overall frequency response of the reverb, affecting its perceived brilliance and warmth. By adjusting its Amplitude and Band-edge controls, the equalizer can be configured as shelf or parametric EQs, as well as hybrids between the two.
Amplitude controls, first and second bands Amplitude control, third band
Band Edge control, second band Figure 125. RealVerb Pro Resonance panel
Band Edge control, third band
To congure the reverbs Resonance as a parametric EQ: 1. Drag the Band Edge controls horizontally for the second and third bands to
the desired frequencies. The rst band is preset to 16 Hz. The frequencies for all three bands are indicated in the text elds at the bottom of the Resonance panel.
2. Adjust
the amplitude of the bands (from 60 dB to 0 dB) by dragging their Amplitude controls either up or down. The amplitude values for all three bands are indicated in the text elds at the bottom of the Resonance panel. The shape of the EQ curve is displayed in the Resonance graph.
To congure the reverbs Resonance as a high-shelf EQ: 1. Drag 2. Drag
the Amplitude control for the second EQ band all the way down.
the Amplitude controls for the rst and third bands all the way up, to equal values.
- 403 -
3. Adjust
the Band-edge controls for the second and third bands so they are adjacent to each other. To raise the frequency for the high-shelf, drag to the right with the Band-edge control for the second band. To lower the frequency for the high-shelf, drag to the left with the Band-edge control for the third band. attenuate the frequencies above the shelf frequency, drag the Amplitude controls for the rst and second bands up or down. For a true shelf EQ, make sure these amplitudes are set to equal values.
4. To
To congure the reverbs Resonance as a low-shelf EQ: 1. Drag 2. Drag
the Amplitude control for the second EQ band all the way up.
the Amplitude controls for the rst and third bands all the way down, to equal values. the Band-edge controls for the second and third bands so they are adjacent to each other. To raise the frequency for the low-shelf, drag to the right with the Band-edge control for the second band. To lower the frequency for the low-shelf, drag to the left with the Band-edge control for the third band. attenuate the frequencies below the shelf frequency, drag the Amplitude controls for the rst and second bands up or down. For a true shelf EQ, make sure these amplitudes are set to equal values.
3. Adjust
4. To
Timing
The Timing panel offers control over the timing and relative energies of the early reflections and late-field reverberations. These elements affect the reverbs perceived clarity and intimacy. The early reflections are displayed at the top of the Timing panel, with controls for Amplitude and Pre-delay. The late-field reverberations are displayed at the bottom, with controls for Amplitude, Pre-delay, and Decay Time. To illustrate the relation between both reverb components, the shape of the other is represented as an outline in both sections of the Timing panel (see Figure 126).
- 404 -
Amplitude control Predelay control Amplitude Control Predelay control Decay Time control Figure 126. RealVerb Pro Timing panel
Early Reflections display
Late-Field Reverberations display
Diffusion control
To adjust the timing of the early reections: 1. Drag
the Amplitude control for the early reections up or down (from 80 dB to 0 dB) to affect the energy of the reections. The Amplitude value is indicated in the text eld at the bottom of the Timing panel. the Predelay control for the early reections left or right (from 1300 milliseconds) to affect the delay between the dry signal and the onset of early reflections. The Pre-delay time is indicated in the text eld at the bottom of the Timing panel.
2. Drag
Note: The length in time of the early reflections cannot be adjusted from the Timing panel, and instead is determined by the reverbs shape and size (see Figure 123).
To adjust the timing of the late-eld reverberations: 1. Drag
the Amplitude control for the late-eld reverberations up or down (from 80 dB to 0 dB) to affect the energy of the reverberations. The Amplitude value is indicated in the text eld at the bottom of the Timing panel. the Predelay control for the late-eld reverberations left or right (from 1300 milliseconds) to affect the delay between the dry signal and the onset of late-field reverberations. The Predelay time is indicated in the text eld at the bottom of the Timing panel.
2. Drag
- 405 -
3. Drag
the Decay Time control for the late-eld reverberations left or right (from 0.1096.00 seconds) to affect the length of the reverb tail. The Decay Time is indicated in the text eld at the bottom of the Timing panel. affect how quickly the late-eld reverberations become more dense, adjust the Diffusion control at the right of Late Reection display in the Timing panel. The higher the Diffusion value (near the top of the display), the more rapidly a dense reverb tail evolves.
4. To
Positioning
One of the unique features of RealVerb Pro is the ability to separately position the direct path, early reflections, and late-field reverberation. The Position panel (see Figure 127) provides panning controls for each of these reverb components. In addition, a proprietary Distance control adjusts perceived source distance. These controls allow realistic synthesis of acoustic spaces for instance listening at the entrance of an alley way, where all response components arrive from the same direction, or listening in the same alley next to the source, where the early reflections and reverberation surround the listener. Note: The Direct, Early, and Late controls are unavailable in mono-in/monoout configurations.
Figure 127. RealVerb Pro Positioning panel
- 406 -
To pan the direct (dry) signal: 1. Drag
the Direct slider left or right. A value of <100 pans the signal hard left; a value of 100> pans the signal hard right. A value of <0> places the signal in the center of the stereo eld.
Set the positioning for the early reection or late-eld reverberation with any of the following methods: 1. Drag
the left and right slider handles to adjust the stereo width. The length of the blue slider is adjusted. For a full stereo signal, drag the left handle all the way to left, and right handle all the way to the right. nal. If you drag all the way to the left or right, the stereo width is adjusted. For a mono signal panned hard left or right, drag the slider all the way to the left or right.
2. Drag the blue center of the slider left or right to set the positioning of the sig-
Distance
RealVerb Pro allows you to control the distance of the perceived source with the Distance control in the Positioning panel (see Figure 127). In reverberant environments, sounds originating close to the listener have a different mix of direct and reflected energy than those originating further from the listener.
To adjust the distance of the source: 1. Drag
the Distance slider to the desired percentage value. Larger percentages yield a source that is further away from the listener. A value of 0% places the source as close as possible to the listener.
Wet/Dry Mix
The wet and dry mix of the reverb is controlled from the Mix slider in the Positioning panel (see Figure 127). The two buttons above this slider labeled D and W represent Dry and Wet; clicking either will create a 100% dry or 100% wet mix.
- 407 -
Levels
The Levels panel adjusts the Input Gain and Output Gain for RealVerb Pro. These levels are adjusted by dragging the sliders to the desired values. You can mute the input signal by clicking the Mute button.
Figure 128. RealVerb Pro Levels panel
Morphing
All RealVerb Pro controls vary continuously using proprietary technology to smoothly transition between selected values. This capability enables RealVerb Pro to morph among presets by transitioning between their parameter sets. This approach is in contrast to the traditional method of morphing by crossfading between the output of two static reverberators. The method employed by RealVerb Pro produces more faithful, physically meaningful intermediate states.
Figure 129. RealVerb Pro Morphing panel
Figure 129 depicts the Morphing Panel. Click the Morphing Mode button to enable Morphing mode. When RealVerb Pro is in morphing mode, the other RealVerb Pro spectral controls are grayed out and cannot be edited. In morphing mode, two presets are selected using the pull-down menus. Once the desired presets are selected in the pull-down menus, the morphing slider is used to morph from one preset to the other.
- 408 -
When in Morphing mode (Figure 130 on page 409), non user-adjustable con trols will change their appearance and will no longer be accessible. When in serted on a Send effect, the W button automatically turns on (to keep the mix at 100% wet). On an insert effect, the Mix will change back and forth between the two mix values of each preset.
Figure 130. RealVerb Pro in Morphing mode
- 409 -
RealVerb Pro Preset Management

Factory Presets In the preset menu there are thirty factory presets that can be changed by the user. Any modification to a preset will be saved even if you change presets. If you want to return all the presets to their default settings, select Reset all to Defaults at the bottom of the presets menu. Edits to any and all presets in the list are maintained separately within each instance of a plug-in within a session. Using Host Application Management Most host applications include their own method of managing plug-in presets. For example, the currently selected preset is saved in Cubase/Nuendo when Save Effect is used. Morphing parameters and the solo/mute buttons (wet, dry, input) are not saved. All presets and programs are saved in Cubase/Nuendo when Save Bank is used. They are also saved in the session file for each instance of the plug-in. Editing the name in Cubase/Nuendo modifies the current preset's name. The new name will appear in all preset select lists, and will be saved with the session, bank or effect.
RealVerb Pro Preset List

Table 31. RealVerb Pro Presets Acoustic Guitar Apartment Living Big Ambience Big Bright Hall Big Cement Room Big Empty Stadium Big Snare Big Warm Hall Cathedral Church Dark Ambience Drums in a Vat Eternity Far Away Source Ghost Voice Hairy Snare High Ceiling Room Jazz Club Large Bathroom Large Dark Hall Long Tube Medium Drum Room Nice Vocal 1 Nice Vocal 2 Slap Back Small Bright Room Small Dark Room Sparkling Hall Tight Spaces Wooden Hall
- 410 -
CHAPTER 41
Boss CE-1 Chorus Ensemble

Overview
The Boss CE-1 Chorus Ensemble is another classic effect faithfully reproduced by our ace modeling engineers. The CE-1 is considered by many to the definitive chorus effect, renowned for its rich and unique timbres. Even for the mix engineer, stomp boxes can provide secret weapon effects not found any other way. In 1976, BOSS originated the chorus effect pedal, and nobody has come close to matching the CE-1s captivating chorus sound since then. Its unmistakable warm analog stereo chorus and vibrato have been heard on countless tracks; particularly on guitars, bass and electric keys. Universal Audio has been commissioned by Roland to accurately model the CE-1, and the results are nothing short of spectacular.
Boss CE-1 Screenshot
Figure 131. The Boss CE-1 plug-in window
- 411 -
Chapter 41: Boss CE-1 Chorus Ensemble
Boss CE-1 Controls

The Boss CE-1 has two operating modes, chorus and vibrato. Only one mode can be active at a time. The operating mode is set using the Vibrato/Chorus switch. Clip LED The red Clip LED illuminates when signal peaks in the plug-in occur.
Normal/Effect Switch
This is an effect bypass switch. Click to enable/disable the chorus or vibrato effect. The effect that will be heard is determined by the Vibrato/Chorus switch. The active state is black text. The inactive state has gray text. The default state is effect. This is not a plug-in bypass switch. The hardware CE-1 has a slight affect on the sound even when the effect is bypassed in normal mode. We have modeled the plug-in faithfully and like the hardware unit, when the effect is bypassed with this switch, audio is still processed to sound like the CE-1 in normal mode. To disable audio processing, use the CE-1 Power Switch.
Rate LED
The yellow Rate LED blinks according to the current low-frequency oscillator (LFO) rate. When CE-1 is in Vibrato mode, the LFO rate is determined by the vibrato rate knob. When in Chorus mode, this LED is affected by the Intensity knob.
Note: In Chorus mode, the fastest LFO rate is slower than the slowest LFO rate
in Vibrato mode. Vibrato/Chorus Switch This switch determines the operating mode of the plug-in. Click to switch between chorus and vibrato modes. The active mode is black text. The inactive mode has gray text. The default mode is chorus.
Stereo Mode Switch
The Stereo Mode switch determines the operating mode of CE-1 when the plug-in is used in a stereo or mono-to-stereo configuration, such as a stereo audio track insert or stereo effects bus.
- 412 -
The hardware CE-1 has only a monophonic input. Its output can be mono (wet and dry signal mixed at one output jack) or stereo (dry signal in one output jack, wet signal in other output jack). Weve adapted the model for the modern era, enabling a true stereo input.
Note:
This switch has no affect in a mono-in/mono-out configuration.
The Stereo Mode switch affects the output as follows:

Dual Mode
In Dual mode the CE-1 behaves as a dual-mono device, functioning as two independent CE-1s, each running in mono mode on one side of the stereo signal. The left output contains a mix of the dry left input signal and the processed left channel signal, while the right output contains a mix of the dry right input signal and the processed right channel signal. Additionally, the LFOs of the dual CE-1 channels are 90 degrees out of phase (quadrature) for maximum effect.
Classic Mode
In Classic mode, the CE-1 behavior is similar to that of a mono-in/stereo-out configuration. The left and right channel inputs are mixed to mono, and the dry signal (mixed left and right channels) appear at the left output, and the wet effect signal appears at the right output. Output Level Knob This knob determines the signal level at the output of the plugin. The range is 0 100%.
Note:
This is not a wet/dry mix control.
Chorus Intensity Knob
When CE-1 is in chorus mode, the amount of chorusing effect is determined by this knob.
Note:
When in vibrato mode, chorus intensity has no affect.
- 413 -
Vibrato Controls
These two knobs control rate and depth of the vibrato effect when CE-1 is in vibrato mode.
Depth Knob
The depth knob controls the intensity of the vibrato effect.

Rate Knob
The rate knob controls the rate of the vibrato LFO. The rate is indicated by the the Rate LED indicator.
Note:
When in chorus mode, the vibrato controls have no affect. This switch determines whether the plug-in is active. This is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal, or to bypass the plug-in to reduce the UAD DSP load (load is not reduced if DSP LoadLock is enabled). Click the rocker switch to change the Power state.
Power Switch
- 414 -
CHAPTER 42
Roland Dimension D
Overview
The Roland SDD-320 Dimension D is another classic effect faithfully reproduced by our ace modeling engineers. The Dimension D is a one of a kind studio gem that adheres to the principle of doing one thing, and doing it extremely well. Its one and only function: some of the best sounding stereo chorus ever made. However, the Dimension D is more than a chorus, it is really a unique sound enhancer for adding spatial effects to mono or stereo sources. The Dimension D does not create a dramatically new sound, but enhances the characteristics of any voice or instrument, and gives a new dimension without the apparent movement of sound produced by other chorus devices. The strength of the Dimension D is in its subtlety. This classic 1979 Roland device has been heard on countless records, from luminaries such as Peter Gabriel, Talking Heads and INXS. Entrusted by the Roland company to emulate this classic studio tool, Universal Audio went to great lengths to preserve this Bucket Brigade chorus with all its unique design elements and sonic characteristics. With only four pushbutton dimension settings, the Dimension D is the ultimate in functional simplicity.
Roland Dimension D Screenshot
Figure 132. The Roland Dimension D plug-in window
- 415 -
Chapter 42: Roland Dimension D
Roland Dimension D Controls

The Roland Dimension D is very simple device to operate; it has only three controls: Power, Mono, and Mode. Each control is detailed below. Dimension Mode The Dimension Mode determines the effect intensity. Four different modes are available. Mode 1 is the most subtle effect, and Mode 4 is maximum intensity. True to the original hardware, multiple Dimension Mode buttons can be engaged simultaneously for subtle sonic variations of the four main modes. To engage multiple Dimension Mode buttons, press the Shift key on the computer keyboard while clicking the Mode buttons. The original Roland Dimension D has an input switch on the back that puts the unit into mono-in/stereo-out mode. We have included this function and moved the switch to the front for your processing convenience. When in Mono mode, the input to Dimension D is monophonic even when used in a stereo-input configuration (stereo inputs are summed to mono). This can be useful for sonic variation, such as when the plug-in is used in an auxiliary/effect send configuration. The default position (in) is stereo mode. Click the pushbutton switch (out) to enable Mono mode. Power Switch This switch determines whether the plug-in is active. This is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal, or to bypass the plug-in to reduce the UAD DSP load (load is not reduced if UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Click the pushbutton switch to change the Power state. The Power LED is illuminated when the plug-in is active. This LED-style meter indicates the level of the signal at the output of the plug-in. When the Dimension Mode is OFF but the Power switch is ON, audio is not processed but the Output Level meter is still active.
Multiple Buttons
Input Mode Switch
Power LED Output Level
- 416 -
Chapter 42: Roland Dimension D
CHAPTER 43
Roland RE-201 Space Echo

Overview
In 1973, Roland created the Space Echo system that utilized multiple play heads to create warm, highly adjustable echo effects, which added wonderful tape character and chaos to performances and recordings. The Space Echo can be heard on numerous recordings, from 70s space rock like Pink Floyd and David Bowie, to countless Reggae and Dub albums, to more recent bands like Portishead and Radiohead. Universal Audio has been entrusted by Roland to re-create the highly beloved RE-201 unit, considered the best of the Space Echo line. Our team spent over a year developing our RE-201 Space Echo, which truly captures the physical behavior of this complex device warts and all, down to the distortion, wow and flutter, pitch shifting, and warmth that tape based delays are famous for; but our plug-in goes even further, capturing the complex self-oscillation that makes the Space Echo more than an effect, but a unique instrument unto itself. UAs RE-201 Space Echo faithfully retains all the controls and features of the original, such as the Mode Selector for various head combinations, Repeat Rate for fine timing control, and Intensity which sets repeat count and allows the unit to achieve self-oscillation. The all-important Echo/Normal Dub switch is retained for muting, as well as the simple tone controls. Last but certainly not least, the atmospheric shimmer of the Space Echos spring reverb is faithfully captured, putting this fantastic plug-in on par with the original unit as a tool of infinite creativity.
- 417 -
Chapter 43: Roland RE-201 Space Echo
Roland RE-201 Screenshot
Figure 133. The Roland RE-201 plug-in window
Roland RE-201 Interface

The RE-201 interface is true to the original hardware, with a few customizations to bring it into the digital era. The original mic and instrument volume controls have been replaced with echo/reverb pan controls and an input control. Weve also added a Tape Age switch to emulate new and older tape, a Wet Solo control for use as a bus/send effect, and an output volume control for utility. The clever Splice switch allows the user to trigger the tape splice at will. Tempo synchronization controls round out the modernization of this classic analog processor. The fabulous sound of the original is untouched!
Roland RE-201 Controls

Each feature of the Roland RE-201interface is detailed below. Peak Level The Peak lamp indicates when transient signal peaks and clipping are detected just after the input volume control. It begins illuminating at approximately 2 dB to 1.5 dB, then gets brighter as the level increases. The VU meter indicates the average signal that is about to be written to the tape. Used in conjunction with the Peak lamp, an indication of signal level can be deduced.
VU Meter
- 418 -
The VU is essentially an input meter, therefore it doesnt react when the Echo/Normal switch is switched from Echo to Normal.
Note: The Peak lamp and VU meter measure signal just after the input volume
control. However, like the original hardware, echo intensity (feedback) is applied just before the level detection circuit. For this reason, the Intensity control will affect the level readings. Echo Pan Echo Pan determines the placement of the echo signal in the stereo panorama when the plug-in is used in mono-in/stereo-out and stereo-in/stereo-out configurations. When the RE-201 is used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration, this control is disabled. Reverb Pan determines the placement of the reverb signal in the stereo panorama when the plug-in is used in mono-in/stereo-out and stereo-in/stereo-out configurations. When the RE-201 is used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration, this control is disabled. This control determines the signal level that is input to the plug-in. Unity gain is at the 12 oclock position. Like the original hardware, clipping distortion at the input to the plug-in affects the tone of the echo and reverb. Clipping is often used as part of the desired effect. At unity gain clipping can be easily induced. However if a cleaner sound is desired, reduce the input volume below unity and increase the plug-in output volume to compensate. Mode Selector The RE-201 is a combination of a tape echo and a spring reverb effect. Echo, reverb, or both can be selected with the Mode Selector to determine which effect(s) are active. The original Space Echo has three tape playback heads. By changing the combination and positions of the heads, a total of 12 different echo variations can be obtained (4 echo only, 7 echo/reverb, and 1 reverb only). These modes are faithfully reproduced with the UAD Roland RE-201.
Note: The RE-201 uses less UAD DSP in reverb-only or echo-only modes versus
Reverb Pan
Input Volume
when both modes are used simultaneously.
- 419 -
The affect of each knob position is detailed in Table 32 on page 420.
Table 32. RE-201 Mode Selector Positions Mode Knob Position Active Tape Heads 1 2 3 REPEAT (echo only) 1 2 3 4 5 6 REVERB + ECHO 7 8 9 10 11 REVERB ONLY Reverb
Active Reverb
Bass
This knob controls the low frequency response in the tape echo portion of the signal. It does not affect the dry signal or the reverb signal. This is a cut/boost control; it has no effect when in the 12 oclock (straight up) position. This knob controls the high frequency response in the tape echo portion of the signal. It does not affect the dry signal or the reverb signal. This is a cut/boost control; it has no effect when in the 12 oclock (straight up) position. This control determines the volume of the spring reverb effect. Rotate the control clockwise for more reverb. Reducing the control to its minimum value will disable the reverb. On the original hardware the reverb output is quite low, and with some sources, unusable due to a high noise floor. Our model of the spring reverb has no noise, and has an increased available output level to improve usability.
Note:
Treble
Reverb Volume
Reverb Volume has no affect when the Mode Selector is in positions 1through 4. This control determines the output volume of the plug-in. It affects the dry and effect signals. The range of this control is 20 dB from unity gain. Therefore, some signal may still be heard when this control is set to its minimum value.
Output Volume
- 420 -
Repeat Rate
This knob controls the time interval of the echo effect. Rotating the control clockwise will decrease the delay time, and counterclockwise rotation will increase the delay time. The available delay times are as follows: Head 1: 69ms 177ms Head 2: 131ms 337ms Head 3: 189ms 489ms The head times available with this control are dependent upon the Mode Selector on page 419. As with the original hardware, this control varies the tape playback speed in realtime by manipulating the tape capstan motor and therefore has a musically useful ramp-up and ramp-down effect. When Tempo Sync is enabled, this control is quantized to allow only rhythmic notes available at the leading head.
Intensity
This knob controls the repeat level (feedback) of the echo signal. Rotating the control clockwise increases the number of echoes. Higher values will cause self-oscillation; the exact position is program and Mode dependent. The self-oscillation of the RE-201 is one of the magic features that really makes it more than a mixing tool; its also an instrument to be played. The effect may be used subtly, sending the unit into gentle oscillation on held notes, or can be put into over the top oscillation with extreme intensity settings. Different Modes will reveal different qualities of oscillation. Single head Modes tend to have simpler oscillation qualities, while multiple head modes will have a more complex sound when oscillating. The RE-201s oscillation qualities are heavily program and control dependent. Different sources of audio, gain, tone, repeat rate, and tape settings will all effect oscillation performance. The RE-201 can also achieve oscillation with no signal, making the RE-201 a truly unique instrument.
Echo Volume
This control determines the volume of the echo effect. Rotate the control clockwise for louder echo. Reducing the control to its minimum value will disable the echo.
- 421 -
Note:
Echo Volume has no affect when the Mode Selector is in the Reverb Only position. This switch determines whether the plug-in is active. This is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal, or to bypass the plug-in to reduce the UAD DSP load. Toggle the switch to change the Power state.
Power Switch
Toggling the power switch will also clear the tape echo. This can be useful if the RE-201 is self-oscillating and restarting the feedback loop is desired. Echo/Normal This switch disables the signal sent into the echo portion of the processor when set to NORMAL. The switch will have no effect if Mode Selector on page 419 is set to Reverb Only. This control is sometimes affectionately referred to as the dub switch. This switch puts the plug-in into tempo sync mode. See Chapter 8 Tempo Sync in the UAD System Manual for more information.
Sync
Delay Time Display
These LCD-style readouts display the current delay time(s) of the RE-201. The three displays correspond to the three virtual heads in the plug-in, and always maintain their proportional relationship to each other. The delay time values are displayed in milliseconds unless tempo sync is active, in which case beat values are displayed. When a particular head is inactive (see Mode Selector on page 419), a dash is displayed. When in tempo sync mode, note values that are out of range will flash. Imprecise note values due to head relationships are displayed with superscript + or symbol before the note.
Tape Age
In the original hardware, the tape loop is contained in a user-replaceable cartridge. As the tape wears out, it is subject to fidelity loss plus increased wow and flutter. The Tape Age switch allows the plug-in to mimic the behavior of new, used, and old tape cartridges. Newer tape may be ideal for a pristine vocal track, while older tape could be described as having more character and might be more appropriate for sources where greater chaos may be musical.
- 422 -
Splice
Normally, the splice on the tape loop comes around at regular intervals. This interval varies, and is determined by the selected Repeat Rate. Depending on what Tape Quality is selected, the splice can be subtle or obvious, and can work as a catalyst for chaos especially when the RE-201 is in a state of self-oscillation. This switch resets the location of the tape splice when the switch is actuated. It is a momentary switch that pops back into the off position immediately after it is activated, allowing the user to trigger the splice point at will. Note that the splice effect isn't immediate. It drops the splice at the write head, and it needs time to go over the read heads (at which point there will be a dropout), and then the tape capstan (where it will create some wow and flutter).
Wet Solo
When this switch is OFF, the dry/unprocessed signal is mixed with the wet/processed signal. When set to ON, only the processed signal is heard. Wet Solo is useful when the plug-in is placed on an effect group/bus that is configured for use with channel sends. When the plug-in is used on a channel insert, this control should generally be OFF.
Note:
Wet Solo is a global (per RE-201 plug-in instance) control.
Caution :-D
lf the RE-201 generates noise after installation, changing the location or position is indicated to correct the situation. Avoid prolonged use in dusty, hot or high humidity places.
The Roland RE-201 original hardware unit
Roland and RE-201 Space Echo are registered trademarks of Roland Corporation, Japan and are used under license. Portions of this RE-201 manual section is copyright Roland Corporation, Japan and are used under license with kind permission from Roland.
- 423 -
CHAPTER 44
SPL Transient Designer

Overview
Universal Audio has partnered with German company Sound Performance Lab (SPL) to bring you the Transient Designer, with its unique and compelling Differential Envelope Technology for shaping the dynamic response of a sound. Only two simple audio controls are required to allow you to effortlessly reshape the attack and sustain characteristics. SPL was the first company to design an analog solution for level-independent shaping of envelopes, allowing transients to be accelerated or slowed down and sustain prolonged or shortened. You can shorten or lengthen the attack and sustain of percussive signals such as kick drum, snare or toms, easily take the bleed from open mics, or expand the room sound of overheads. The Transient Designers magic can be applied to virtually any other signal as well: Amplify or reduce the picking sound of an acoustic guitar, hold the sound of strings longer, or reduce the reverb time of a choir.
SPL Transient Designer Screenshot
Figure 134. The SPL Transient Designer plug-in window
- 424 -
Chapter 44: SPL Transient Designer
SPL Transient Designer Controls

Containing only two primary controls, the UAD SPL Transient Designer is extremely simple to operate. The technology behind the processor isn't as important as how it sounds. However, for those who desire a deeper understanding of the process, a deeper explanation of the underlying technology is presented at the end of this chapter (see Technology on page 431). Attack Attack enables amplification or attenuation of the attack of a signal by up to 15 dB. The Attack control circuitry uses two envelope generators. One follows the shape of the original curve and adapts perfectly to the dynamic gradient. The second envelope generator produces an envelope with a slower attack. From the difference of both envelopes the VCA control voltage is derived. Positive Attack values emphasize attack events; negative values smooth out the attack envelopes of sound events. For more information, see The ATTACK Control Circuitry on page 431) Sustain Sustain enables amplification or attenuation of the sustain of a signal by up to 24 dB. The Sustain control circuitry also uses two envelope generators. One follows the shape of the original curve and adapts perfectly to the dynamic gradient. The second envelope generator produces an envelope with a longer sustain. From the difference of both envelopes the VCA control voltage is derived. The gradient of the control voltage matches the time flow of the original signal. Positive Sustain values lengthen the sustain; negative values shorten the sustain. For more information, see The SUSTAIN Control Circuitry on page 433. Gain Gain controls the signal level that is output from the plug-in. The available range is from 20 dB to +6 dB. The default value is 0 dB.
- 425 -
Signal
This 4-stage LED indicates the presence of audio signals at the input of the plug-in. When the input signal is below 25 dB, the indicator is off. At 25 dB to 19 dB, the indicator glows slightly. At 18 dB to 10 dB, it lights with medium intensity. At 9 dB to 0 dB, it shines brightly. The Overload LED illuminates when the signal level at the output of the plug-in reaches 0 dBFS. The indicator matches the behavior of the original hardware unit. However, in the software plug-in version, the output can be overloaded without causing distortion. Link indicates when stereo operation is active. It illuminates when used in a stereo-in/stereo-out or mono-in/stereo out configuration. It does not illuminate when used in a mono-in/mono-out configuration.
Note:
Overload
Link
Link is an indicator only; it does not control any plug-in parameter. The On and Power switches determine whether the plug-in is active. Click the On or Power switches to change the state. On and Power illuminate when the plug-in is active. When the plug-in is inactive, processing is disabled and UAD DSP usage is reduced (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled).
On/Power
Note:
The On and Power switches perform the exact same function.
- 426 -
Acknowledgement
In addition to creating an amazing piece of hardware, Sound Performance Lab also wrote an extensive user manual for the Transient Designer. Because Universal Audio has full license to make use of the Transient Designer technology, SPL has graciously authorized us to use their documentation as well. The remainder of this chapter is excerpted from the SPL Transient Designer (RackPack) User Manual, and is used with kind permission from SPL. All copyrights are retained by SPL.
Applications
The SPL Transient Designer is ideally suited for use in professional recording, in project or home studios and sound reinforcement applications. For the first time you can manipulate and control the attack and sustain characteristics of a signal regardless of level in the most intuitive and simple way. Usually equalizers are used to separate instruments in a mix the tonal aspect of the signal is considered, but not the temporal aspect. The Transient Designer opens this further dimension in signal processing. By manipulating the attack and sustain curves of a sound event, the mix can be made to sound more transparent. Instruments can be mixed at lower levels while still maintaining their positions in the mixbut occupying less space. During a remix or in general after micing you can arrange new positions of instruments. Reduce ATTACK and increase SUSTAIN to move signals back into the mix that are too present. Additionally the FX parts of too dry signals are strengthened. Applied to single instruments or loops the Transient Designer allows you to create entirely new sounds and/or effects. The following examples are given as suggestions and examples. The described procedures with specific instruments can of course be transferred to others that are not mentioned here. Drums & Percussions Processing drum and percussion sounds is probably the Transient Designers most typical range of application; both from samples to live drum sets Emphasize the attack of a kick drum or a loop to increase the power and presence in the mix.
- 427 -
Shorten the sustain period of a snare or a reverb tail in a very musical way to obtain more transparency in the mix. When recording a live drum set, shorten the toms or overheads without physically damping them. Usual efforts to damp and mike are reduced remarkably. Since mufing of any drum also changes the dynamic response, the Transient Designer opens up a whole new soundscape. Micing live drums is considerably faster and easier because you can correct the apparent distance of the microphone by simply varying the ATTACK and SUSTAIN values. The Transient Designer is a perfect alternative to noise gates in live drum micing. Adaptively reacting to the duration of the original signal, the sustain is shortened more musically than with xed release times and a drumset is freed from any crosstalk quickly and effectively. Create unusual dynamic effects including new and interesting pan effects. For example, patch a mono loop through two channels of the Transient Designer and pan fully left and right in the mix. Process the left channel with increased ATTACK and reduced SUSTAIN while you adjust the right channel the opposite way and you get very special stereo loop sounds. You have to try this to appreciate what it sounds like, but expect to hear a lot of unusual stereo movement. Enjoy an amazingly simple integration of drum sounds into a mix. If the acoustic level of a snare is expanded to approximately +4 dB by increasing the attack value, the effective increase of peak levels in the overall mix is merely about 0.5 dB to 1 dB. Drums: Ambience If your drums happen to sound as if the room mics have been placed in a shoe closet, the Transient Designer can immediately turn that sound into the ambience of an empty warehouse. Just send the stereo room mics through the Transient Designer and crank the ATTACK control to emphasize the first wave. Now slowly increase SUSTAIN values to bring up an all-buttons-in-1176sound room tonebut without pumping cymbals. For a solid and driving rhythm track just fine-tune the SUSTAIN control to make sure that the room mic envelope ends more or less exactly on the desired upbeat or downbeat.
- 428 -
Guitars
Use the Transient Designer on guitars to soften the sound by lowering the ATTACK. Increase ATTACK for in-the-face sounds, which is very useful and works particularly well for picking guitars. Or blow life and juice into quietly played guitar parts. Distorted guitars usually are very compressed, thus not very dynamic. Simply increase the ATTACK to get a clearer sound with more precision and better intonation despite any distortion. Heavy distortion also leads to very long sustain. The sound tends to become mushy; simply reduce SUSTAIN to change that. If you, however, want to create soaring guitar solos that would make even David Gilmour blush, just crank up the SUSTAIN control to the max and there you go. With miced acoustic guitars you can emphasize the room sound by turning up SUSTAIN. If you want the guitars to sound more intimate and with less ambience, simply reduce SUSTAIN.
Bass: Staccato vs. Legato
Speaking of bass: Imagine a too sluggishly played bass track... you may not have to re-record it: Reduce the SUSTAIN until you can hear clear gaps between the downbeatsthe legato will turn into a nice staccato, driving the rhythm-section forward. Always and everywhere the same reverb presets boring, arent they? Try sending the output of your reverb through the Transient Designer. Now crank the ATTACK control to the max and reduce SUSTAIN to a bare minimum. The intensity of the reverb is now much higher in the beginning while the reverb time is reduced. The opposite can be just as intriguing: manipulate a reverb pattern so that it takes on a pyramidal slope. Turn the ATTACK all the way to the left and SUSTAIN all the way to the right. Now the beginning of the reverb is strongly reduced whereas the sustain blossoms and seems almost endless (obviously that will only happen if the decay of the reverb in the actual reverb device has been set to a sufficient valuea signal must always be present as long as the sustain time lasts. You can also create a reverb effect that moves from one channel to the other. Reverb presets with a long decay or a long pre-delay and especially those that have flamboyant reflections set to appear after the beginning of the diffuse reverberation tail are predestined for that. Insert the left and the right
The ReInvention Of Reverb
- 429 -
channels of the reverb return through two separate Transient Designer instances. Turn the ATTACK fully right on one instance and reduce SUSTAIN slightly (about 1.5 dB). On the other instance turn the ATTACK fully left and the SUSTAIN to the 3-oclock position (about +12 dB). These settings preserve the original complexity of the reflections in the reverb but the maximum intensity of the effect will move from the left to the right in the mix while the reverb will maintain its presence in both channels. You can make this effect even more dramatic by setting all controls to their most extreme positions, but you run the danger of ending up with a lopsided effect that appears out of balance. Backings A common problem especially with tracks that are recorded and mixed in different studios: Backings lack of ambience, and finding a reverb that matches takes time... so simply emphasize the original ambience by turning up the Transient Designers SUSTAIN control. And the opposite problem, too much ambience, is similarly simply solved with the opposite processing just reduce SUSTAIN. Keyboards & Sampler Sounds in keyboards and samples are usually highly compressed and maintain only little of natural dynamics. Increase the ATTACK values to re-gain a more natural response characteristic. The sounds occupy less space in the mix and appear more identifiable even at lower volumes. When dealing with overdubs in movies you can easily add more punch and definition to effect sounds from any sample library. The same applies to outdoor recordings that suffer from poor microphone positioningsimply optimize them afterwards. Mastering Like with any good thing, you also have to know where not to use it. For example, using a Transient Designer in mastering is not recommended, as it is rarely a good idea to treat a whole mix at once. Instead, treat individual elements within the mix.
Post Production
- 430 -
Technology
Of course you dont have to know how the Transient Designer works in order to use it. However, since it offers a completely novel signal processing, nothing shall be concealed from the more curious users. Differential Envelope Technology (DET) SPLs DET is capable of level-independent envelope processing and thus makes any threshold settings unnecessary. Two envelopes are generated and then compared. From the difference of both envelopes the VCA control voltage is derived. The DET ensures that both low and loud signals (pianissimo to fortissimo) are treated the same way. Both ATTACK and SUSTAIN control circuitries operate simultaneously and dont affect each other. The ATTACK Control Circuitry The ATTACK control circuitry uses two envelope generators. The first one generates a voltage (Env 1) that follows the original waveform. The second envelope generator creates the envelope Env 2 with a slower attack envelope. Figure 135 on page 431 illustrates the original curve and the two created envelopes that control the ATTACK processing. Envelope generator Env 1 follows the original waveform. Env 2 is generated with reduced attack.
Figure 135. SPL Transient Designer Attack Envelopes
- 431 -
Figure 136 on page 432 shows the difference between Env 1 and Env 2 that defines the control voltage of the VCA. The shaded area marks the difference between Env 1 and Env 2 that controls the control voltage of the VCA. The amplitude of the attack is increased if positive ATTACK values are set. Negative ATTACK values reduce the level of the attack transient.
Figure 136. SPL Transient Designer Attack Control Voltage
Figure 137 on page 432 displays the processed waveforms with maximum and minimal ATTACK to compare against the original waveform in diagram 1.
Figure 137. SPL Transient Designer Processed Attack
- 432 -
The SUSTAIN Control Circuitry
The SUSTAIN control circuitry also plays host to two envelope generators. The envelope tracker Env 3 again follows the original waveform. The envelope generator Env 4 maintains the level of the sustain on the peak-level over a longer period of time. The control voltage of the VCA is again derived from the difference between the two voltages. Sustain amplitude is increased for positive SUSTAIN settings and reduced for negative settings. Figure 138 on page 433 illustrates the original waveform and the envelope creation to control the SUSTAIN processing. Envelope generator Env 1 follows the original waveform, Env 2 is generated with prolonged sustain.
Figure 138. SPL Transient Designer Sustain Envelopes
Figure 139 on page 433 shows the difference between Env 4 and Env 3 that defines the control voltage of the VCA.
Figure 139. SPL Transient Designer Sustain Control Voltage
- 433 -
Figure 140 on page 434 displays the processed waveforms with maximum and minimal sustain to compare against the original waveform in diagram 4.
Figure 140. SPL Transient Designer Processed Sustain
SPL Sound Performance Lab and Transient Designer are registered trademarks of SPL Electronics, GmbH Germany and are used under license. Portions of this SPL Transient Designer manual section is copyright SPL Electronics GmbH Germany and are used under license with kind permission from SPL.
- 434 -
CHAPTER 45
SSL E Channel Strip

Large Format Mix Module
The SSL 4000 is famous as the console employed on more Platinum-selling records than any other. With its wide range of VCA compression characteristics and intuitive EQ rich with colorful band interdependencies its easy to hear why. Today, working in close partnership with Solid State Logic, UA proudly unveils the SSL E Series Channel Strip plug-in for UAD-2 an exacting circuit emulation of this certified hit-making machine. The SSL E Series Channel Strip plug-in allows UAD-2 users on Mac and PC to apply classic SSL 4000 EQ curves and dynamics control to their music. This unique plug-in is distinguished by its remarkably authentic sound, and its inclusion of both the Type E black knob and brown knob four-band EQ and filters, long considered favorites in SSL lineage. Other features include high and low cut filters, independent Expander/Gate, and bespoke Compressor/Limiter. The E Series middle EQ bands are fully parametric, while the high and low bands provide the user with switchable bell or shelving filters. The Comp/Limiter provides Threshold, fast or slow Attack time, a 0.1 to 4 second Release, and a continuously variable Ratio control. The Exp/Gate offers Threshold, fast or slow Attack time, a 0.1 to 4 second Release time, and a Range control to tailor the Gate or Expansion effect. In addition, the SSL E Series Channel Strip plug-in adds a second Gate setting, featuring a no-chatter circuit borrowed from later SSL designs. For increased flexibility, a PRE-DYN button allows users to reorder the signal chain, placing the EQ before the dynamics section. With the DYN-SC button, users may engage a sidechain feature, providing frequency-dependent compression using the EQ filters, cut filters, or both. Lastly, a Link button adds the ability to link or unlink the sidechain when using the stereo version of the plug-in. Taken together, these features make the SSL E Series plug-in for UAD-2 among the most flexible and best-sounding channel strip emulations available today, bar none.
- 435 -
Chapter 45: SSL E Channel Strip
SSL E Channel Strip Screenshot
Figure 141. The UAD SSL E and 4K Channel Strip plug-in windows
SSL E Channel Strip Controls

The SSL E Channel Strip controls are divided into four main sections: filters, dynamics, EQ, and global. Note that knob settings, when compared to the graphical user interface silkscreen numbers, may not match the actual parameter values. This behavior is identical to the original hardware, which we modeled exactly. When the plug-in is viewed in parameter list mode (Controls View), the actual parameter values are displayed. Note: SSL consoles adopt a different pan law than what the host application may be set to by default. Most DAW's allow configuring the panning spread preference to match various consoles. In the event you want to capture SSL-style stereo response when using multiple instantiations of the SSL E Channel Strip, set the pan law preference in the host to a value of 4.5 dB.
- 436 -
Filters
In addition to the four-band EQ, UAD SSL E Channel Strip offers individual high and low pass filters. When the Filter control is at minimum value (fully counter-clockwise), the filter is disabled. The control ranges and sonics of these filters can be changed between Black and Brown modes with the EQ Type switch. See EQ Type on page 442 for more information.
High Pass
The left knob determines the cutoff frequency for the high pass filter. Rotate clockwise to reduce low frequencies. In Black mode, the slope of the high pass filter is 18 dB per octave and the available range is 16 Hz to 350 Hz. In Brown mode, the slope of the high pass filter is 12 dB per octave and the available range is 20Hz to 350 Hz. Low Pass The right knob determines the cutoff frequency for the low pass filter. Rotate clockwise to reduce high frequencies. In Black mode the slope of the low pass filter is 12 dB per octave and the available range is 22 kHz to 3 kHz. In Brown mode the slope of the low pass filter is 12 dB per octave and the available range is 16 kHz to 3 kHz. Filters to Sidechain (DYN SC) This button enables the Filters sidechain function. When the Filters sidechain is active, signal output from the Filters module is removed from the audio path and is instead routed to control (key) the dynamics module. Sidechaining is typically used for de-essing and similar frequency-conscious techniques. To listen to the sidechain key, simply disengage DYN SC to hear the filtered signal. The sidechain dynamics/EQ implementations are true stereo when used in a stereo-in/stereo-out (SISO) configuration. Note: The Filters module must be active (not at minimum value) in conjunction with the Filters DYN SC button for the Filters sidechain to function. An additional dynamics sidechain is available in the EQ section (EQ to Sidechain (DYN SC) on page 445).
- 437 -
Dynamics
Separate soft-knee compressor/limiter and expansion/gate modules are available in the dynamics section. Each module has their own set of controls. Important: Dynamics are not processed unless enabled by the Dynamics selector buttons (Dynamics In (DYN IN) on page 441).
Compressor/Limiter
Link When UAD SSL E Channel Strip is used in a stereo-in/stereo-out configuration, two separate dynamics processors are active (one for each stereo channel). When Link is engaged, the two compressors are constrained so that they both compress by the same amount at any instant. This prevents transients which appear only on one channel from shifting the stereo image of the output. Any big transient on either channel will cause both channels to compress. Link is active when the button LED is illuminated. When the plug-in is used in a mono-input configuration, Link has no affect. Compress Ratio Ratio defines the amount of gain reduction to be processed by the compressor. For example, a value of 2 (expressed as a 2:1 ratio) reduces the signal above the threshold by half, with an input signal of 20 dB being attenuated to 10 dB. The UAD SSL E Channel Strip compressor offers a continuously variable ratio between 1:1 (no compression) and infinity:1 (limiting). Note: Signals must exceed the Threshold value before they are attenuated by the Ratio amount. Compress Threshold Threshold defines the signal level at which the onset of compression occurs. Incoming signals that exceed this level are compressed. Signals below the level are unaffected. The available range is +10 dB to 20 dB. Rotate the control clockwise for more compression.
- 438 -
This compressor has an automatic make-up gain function. As Threshold is lowered and compression increases (as knob is rotated clockwise), output gain from the module is increased automatically to compensate. Compress Release Release sets the amount of time it takes for gain reduction to cease once the input signal drops below the threshold level. Longer release times can smooth the transition that occurs when the signal dips below the threshold, which is especially useful for material with frequent peaks. However, if you set the Release time too long, the gain reduction imposed by loud sections of audio may initially reduce the level of subsequent sections of audio with lower signals. Available Release times are continuously variable between 0.1 seconds and 4 seconds. Compress Attack Attack defines the duration between the input signal reaching the threshold and processing being applied by the compressor. Attack time is normally 30 milliseconds (slow mode in Controls View). When Fast Attack is enabled, attack time is 3 milliseconds. Fast Attack is active when the F.ATK LED (4K: F.ATT) is illuminated. To toggle Fast Attack, click the LED or its label text.
Gate/Expander
The gate/expander module operates in either gate or expansion mode, as determined by the Dynamics Select button. Two attack speeds and a continuously variable release time are available in both modes. Dynamics Select The Select button cycles through the three modes available in the gate/expander module: Expand, Gate 1, and Gate 2.
Expand (EX)
In Expand mode, the module applies downwards expansion at a fixed 1:2 ratio, with the amount of gain reduction determined by the Range control (Expand Range on page 440).
- 439 -
Gate 1 (G1)
In Gate 1 mode, signals below the Expand Threshold are attenuated by the Expand Range amount. Gate 1 is authentic to the gate mode on earlier hardware consoles.
Gate 2 (G2)
Gate 2 mode operates the same way as Gate 1, but has a different no-chatter response characteristic that is derived from later versions of the hardware. Expand Threshold Threshold defines the input level at which expansion or gating occurs. Any signals below this level are processed. Signals above the threshold are unaffected. Threshold is continuously variable from 30 dB to +10 dB. In typical use its best to set the threshold value to just above the noise floor of the desired signal (so the noise doesnt pass when the desired signal is not present), but below the desired signal level (so the signal passes when present). Expand Range Range (depth) controls the difference in gain between the gated/expanded and non-gated/expanded signal. Higher values increase the attenuation of signals below the threshold. When set to zero, no gating or expansion occurs. Range is continuously variable from 0 dB to 40 dB. Release sets the amount of time it takes for gate/expander processing to engage once the input signal drops below the Threshold value. The available range is 0.1ms to 4 seconds. Slower release times can smooth the transition that occurs when the signal dips below the threshold, which is especially useful for material with frequent peaks. Note: Fast release times are typically only suitable for certain types of percussion and other instruments with very fast decays. Using fast settings on other sources may produce undesirable results.
Expand Release
- 440 -
Expand Attack
Attack defines the duration between the input signal reaching the threshold and processing being applied by the expander/gate. Attack time is normally auto-sensing and program dependent. When Fast Attack is enabled, attack time is 1ms. Fast Attack is active when the F.ATK LED (4K: F.ATT) is illuminated. To toggle Fast Attack, click the LED or its label text.
Dynamics Enable
These three buttons determine the status of the dynamics processors.

Dynamics In (DYN IN)
The DYN IN button enables both the compressor/limiter and the expander/gate modules; neither module will function when DYN IN is disabled. Each dynamics module is enabled when the LED below the buttons are illuminated. DYN IN is useful for quickly comparing the original signal dynamics to the dynamically processed signal. Important: DYN IN must be engaged to enable compressor/limiter and/or expander/gate processing.
Expander In (EXP IN)
The EXP IN button enables the expander/gate module. The module is enabled when the EXP IN LED is illuminated. This button has no effect when DYN IN is disabled.
Compressor In (CMP IN)
The CMP IN button enables the compressor/limiter module. The module is enabled when the CMP IN LED is illuminated. This button has no effect when DYN IN is disabled. Dynamics Meters The Expansion Meter uses green LED's (left column) to display the amount of downward expansion occurring in the expander/gate module. Higher values indicate more gain reduction. The Compression Meter uses amber LED's (right column) to display the amount of gain attenuation occurring in the compressor/limiter module. Higher values indicate more dynamics compression.
- 441 -
EQ
The UAD SSL E Channel Strip EQ module is divided into four frequency bands: High Frequency (HF, blue knobs), High Midrange Frequency (HMF, green knobs), Low Midrange Frequency (LMF, yellow knobs), and Low Frequency (LF, orange knobs). The high and low bands can be switched from shelving mode into bell (peak/dip) mode. The two midrange bands are fully parametric. The EQ module can be disabled altogether or routed for dynamics sidechain keying. EQ Type Two different types of SSL EQ are available. The EQ Type button selects between the two types, either Black or Brown. The knob color of the LF band controls changes to reflect the current setting. The Black and Brown EQs sound different. Black is a bit deeper due to its higher gain values, while Brown is more gentle at extreme settings.
EQ Type Background
The original E series equaliser section was the Brown Knob circuit. This was standard on all early production E Series consoles. The two parametric mid-band sections feature a classic logarithmically symmetric design that ensures that the 3 dB up/down points retain the same musical interval from the centre frequency regardless of frequency and amplitude settings. The two shelving sections are traditional 6 dB/octave designs with an option for a fixed Q parametric response (Bell). The 02 EQ, to give it its correct name (the last two digits of the cards part number), was used on countless recordings and mixes in the early eighties. In 1983 a new 242 EQ circuit was developed in conjunction with the legendary George Martin for the first SSL console to be installed in AIR studios. The Black Knob EQ, as it became known, featured enhanced cut and boost ranges (18 dB instead of 15 dB) together with a different control law and a steeper 18dB/octave high pass filter for tighter control of low frequencies. It is this design which is retained today as the E-Series EQ option of the X-Rack, Duality and AWS consoles.
- 442 -
High Frequency (HF) Band
HF Gain
This control determines the amount by which the frequency value for the band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 15 dB in both Black and Brown modes. Tip: Click the 0 to return the Gain knob to its center position.
HF Frequency
This control determines the band frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the band Gain setting. The available range is 1.5 kHz to 16 kHz in both Black and Brown modes.
HF Bell
The Bell button switches the HF band from shelf mode to peak/dip mode. In normal (shelf) mode, only frequencies above the frequency value are boosted or attenuated. In Bell (peak/dip) mode, frequencies above and below the frequency value are boosted or attenuated. In Black mode, the HF Bell Q is 1.3 and in Brown mode the HF Bell Q is 0.8. High-Mid Frequency (HMF) Band
HMF Gain
This control determines the amount by which the frequency value for the band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 15 dB in both Black and Brown modes. Tip: Click the 0 to return the control knob to its center position.
HMF Frequency
This control determines the HMF band center frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the band Gain setting. The available range is 0.6 kHz to 7 kHz in both Black and Brown modes.
- 443 -
HMF Q
The Q (bandwidth) control defines the proportion of frequencies surrounding the band center frequency to be affected by the band gain control. The filter slopes get steeper (narrower bandwidth) as the control is rotated counter-clockwise. The available range is 0.5 to 2.5 in both Black and Brown modes. Low-Mid Frequency (LMF) Band
LMF Gain
This control determines the amount by which the frequency value for the band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 15 dB in both Black and Brown modes. Tip: Click the 0 to return the control knob to its center position.
LMF Frequency
This control determines the LMF band center frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the band Gain setting. The available range is 0.2 kHz to 2.5 kHz in both Black and Brown modes.
LMF Q
The Q (bandwidth) control defines the proportion of frequencies surrounding the band center frequency to be affected by the band gain control. The filter slopes get steeper (narrower bandwidth) as the control is rotated counter-clockwise. The available range is 0.5 to 2.5 in both Black and Brown modes. Low Frequency (LF) Band
LF Gain
This control determines the amount by which the frequency value for the LF band is boosted or attenuated. The available range is 15 dB in both Black and Brown modes. Tip: Click the 0 to return the control knob to its center position.
- 444 -
LF Frequency
This control determines the band center frequency to be boosted or attenuated by the band Gain setting. The available range is 30 Hz to 450 Hz in both Black and Brown modes.
LF Bell
The Bell button switches the LF band from shelf mode to peak/dip mode. In normal (shelf) mode, only frequencies below the frequency value are boosted or attenuated. In Bell (peak/dip) mode, frequencies below and above the frequency value are boosted or attenuated. In Black mode, the LF Bell Q is 1.3 and the Brown mode the Bell Q is 0.8. EQ Enable These three buttons determine the status of the EQ module.
EQ In
The EQ IN button enables the EQ module. The module is enabled when the LED below the button is illuminated.
EQ to Sidechain (DYN SC)
This control enables the EQ sidechain function. When the EQ sidechain is active, signal output from the EQ module is removed from the audio path and is instead routed to control (key) the dynamics module. The EQ sidechain is enabled when the LED below the button is illuminated. Sidechaining is typically used for de-essing and similar frequency-conscious techniques. To listen to the sidechain key, simply disengage DYN SC to hear the equalised signal. The sidechain dynamics/EQ implementations are true stereo when used in a stereo in/stereo out (SISO) configuration. Note: The EQ module must be active in conjunction with the EQ DYN SC button for the EQ sidechain to function. Note there is another dynamics sidechain available in the Filters section (Filters to Sidechain (DYN SC) on page 437).
- 445 -
Pre-Dynamics (PRE DYN)
During normal operation (PRE DYN disengaged) the audio signal is output from the dynamics module into the EQ module. Activating PRE DYN reverses this routing, so the EQ is ahead of the dynamics module instead. Pre-dynamics is active when the LED below the button is illuminated.
Global
I/O Meters The vertical LED-style metering provides a visual indication of the signal levels at the input and output of the plug-in (the meters are not calibrated). The input meter is the left LED column and the output meter is the right LED column. Note: Each meter column represents the sum of the left and right channels (it is not a stereo meter).
Input
Input controls the signal level at the input to the plug-in. The default value is 0 dB. The available range is 20 dB. Increasing the input may result in more compression, depending on the values of the Threshold and Ratio parameters. Tip: Click the 0 to return the control knob to its center position.
Output
Output controls the signal level that is output from the plug-in. The default value is 0 dB. The available range is 20 dB. Tip: Click the 0 to return the control knob to its center position.
Phase ()
The Phase () button inverts the polarity of the signal. The signal is inverted when the button is depressed. Leave the button out for normal polarity.
- 446 -
Power
The Power button determines whether the plug-in is active. Click the Power button to disable the processor. Power is useful for comparing the processed sound to that of the original signal.
Usage Notes
The SSL E Series channel has been used to mix more hit records than any other in history. Its no-nonsense feature and control set make it easy to get the sound you're looking for. A useful approach to getting to know the SSL E is to start with a fresh mix, where little to no EQ or dynamic mixing has been done yet. Even better, start you mix with the SSL G Bus Comp on the master fader as well, which will give you the complete SSL sound. For an even more authentic SSL experience, adjust your DAW's default pan rule (usually +3) to SSL's custom +4.5 rule. There are two four-band (LF, LMF, HMF HF) EQ options on the SSL E, known as brown and black. It is important to note that while only the LF bass knobs change color when switching EQ's, ALL bands are affected. Brown is the original SSL design, with gentler Q, and smaller gain and frequency ranges. It is the easier of the two to easily get a good, musical sound. LC and HC filtering is a gentle 12 dB. Brown is the recommended starting place for those unfamiliar with SSL. The black EQ is a later design, with the option for narrower Q and broader gain and frequency ranges, making it more useful for fixative EQ as sweetening. The black EQ design changes were recommended by famed Beatles producer George Martin. Each band is different from the brown design, plus the The LC is a steeper 18 dB per octave. The normal arrangement is dynamics first, but the EQ can be put as the first process with the PRE DYN (Pre Dynamics) button. It is interesting to note that the console labels did not change on the consoles moving from the 15 dB gain range to the 18 dB of the black EQ, nor did the frequency or Q labels. The gain section has remained largely the same on SSL consoles from the beginning until now, with dedicated VCA compressor and expand/gate circuits.
- 447 -
The compressor's simple control set allows for a wide variety dynamics control, from transparent to aggressive. A fully continuous ratio allows for the full range of knee from very gentle to fully limited. A fixed two position attack and the continuously adjustable release are perfect control sets for general console dynamics control. it is interesting to note that at heavy compression with quick release times, the SSL design has a similar room-expanding quality as the 1176 on things like drums and room mics. While gates are not as relevant in the DAW as they once were for analog mixing, the SSL has one of the most transparent and musical console gates available, which can be used for fixative or creative purposes. There are two gate modes, G1 is the original E series gate response, with G2 has a minimal chatter response borrowed from the later G series gate. The DYN SC (Dynamic Sidechain) button allows the user to create frequency dependent gain reduction arrangements with either the Compressor or Gate/expander.
UAD, UAD-1, UAD-2 and UAD 4K are trademarks of Universal Audio, Inc. All other names are trademarks of Solid State Logic, which are in no way associated or affiliated with Universal Audio, Inc. These trademarks of other manufacturers are used solely to identify the products of those manufacturers whose circuits and sounds were studied during the sound development of the UAD 4K products. Use of third party trademarks are for informational purposes only and do not imply an endorsement or sponsorship of Universal Audios products.
- 448 -
CHAPTER 46
SSL G Bus Compressor

Large Format Console Dynamics
The SSL G Series Bus Compressor plug-in for UAD-2 is an incredibly faithful circuit emulation of the legendary SSL 4000 G consoles bus compressor. The undeniable drive and punch of this G Series master compressor modeled to exacting detail by Universal Audio and fully authenticated by Solid State Logic helped make the original 4000 G Series the world's most successful studio production console. Engineers have come to rely on this master compressor to glue together mixes like nothing else, as well as patching into it for wonderful results on drums, pianos and more. With simple, intuitive controls and transparent compression characteristics, the G Series Bus Compressor plug-in for UAD-2 captures the iconic SSL sound with stunning accuracy. Plug-in controls comprise fixed Compression Ratios (2:1, 4:1 and 10:1), and Attack and Release controls with program-dependent Auto Release function. Continuous Threshold Control and Make-Up Gain, compressor bypass, and the original Auto Fade (1-60 seconds) feature provide full operational authenticity.
SSL G Bus Compressor Screenshot
Figure 142. The SSL G and 4K Bus Compressor plug-in windows
- 449 -
Chapter 46: SSL G Bus Compressor
SSL G Bus Compressor Controls

Threshold Threshold defines the signal level at which the onset of compression occurs. Incoming signals that exceed this level are compressed. Signals below the level are unaffected. The control range is 15 dB. As the Threshold control is decreased and more compression occurs, output level is typically reduced. Adjust the Make Up control to modify the output to compensate if desired. Make Up Make Up controls the signal level that is output from the plug-in. The range is 0 dB to +15 dB. Generally speaking, adjust the Make Up control after the desired amount of compression is achieved with the Threshold and Ratio controls. Make Up does not affect the amount of compression. Attack Attack sets the amount of time that must elapse once the input signal reaches the Threshold level before compression is applied. The faster the Attack, the more rapidly compression is applied to signals above the threshold. Available Attack times are discrete values of 0.1ms, 0.3ms, 1ms, 3ms, 10ms, and 30ms. The availability of relatively slow attack times (as compared to other compressors) is one factor that can provide the in-your-face-pumping quality that is so popular with large console VCA-style compressors. Release Release sets the amount of time it takes for compression to cease once the input signal drops below the threshold level. Slower release times can smooth the transition that occurs when the signal dips below the threshold, especially useful for material with frequent peaks. However, if you set the Release time too long, compression for sections of audio with loud signals may extend to lengthy sections of audio with lower signals.
- 450 -
Available Release times are discrete values of 100ms, 300ms, 600ms, 1.2s, and Auto. The Auto release characteristic for SSL G Bus Compressor has a unique quality that is optimized for program material. Ratio Ratio defines the amount of gain reduction to be processed by the compressor. For example, a value of 2 (expressed as a 2:1 ratio) reduces the signal above the threshold by half, with an input signal of 20 dB being reduced to 10 dB. The available Ratio values are 2:1, 4:1, and 10:1. The Power button determines whether the plug-in is active. Click the Power button to toggle the processor state. Power is useful for comparing the processed sound to that of the original signal. The Gain Reduction VU-style meter displays the amount of gain reduction occurring in the compressor. Higher values indicate more gain reduction. Increase the signal level into the plug-in and/or lower the Threshold control to increase gain reduction.
Power (IN)
Gain Reduction Meter
Fade
The SSL G Bus Compressor provides a Fade function that, upon activation, automatically reduces the plug-in output to minimum within a specified time period. This function enables extremely smooth-sounding fade outs (and fade ins), plus it can be automated as well. The Fade function processes the signal at the output of the compressor. The fade signal level that is output has an exponential curve.
- 451 -
Fade Rate
Fade Rate determines the amount of time that will pass between the Fade button being activated and the plug-in output level being reduced to minimum (or being raised to 0 dB in the case of a fade in). The available range is from 1.0 second to 60 seconds. Fade times immediately reflect the current Fade Rate value. Therefore a fade out that has already been initiated can be accelerated by changing Fade Rate during the fade out. Conversely, a fade in can be accelerated by changing Fade Rate during the fade in.
Auto Fade Button
Activating the Auto Fade button initiates a fade out. The fade out time is determined by the Fade Rate parameter. The Fade button blinks when a fade out is in progress, and is continuously lit when the fade out is complete (when the Fade Rate time has elapsed). Deactivating Fade (clicking the solid-lit button) initiates a fade in. During a fade in, the signal level is increased from the current level of attenuation to 0 dB of attenuation. The Fade button flashes when a fade in is in progress, and is no longer illuminated when the fade in is complete (when the Fade Rate time has elapsed). Toggling the Fade button causes an already active fade to reverse direction, without a jump in output level. The Fade Rate is constant even if an active fade is interrupted. For example: If the Fade Rate value is 30 seconds and a fade out is initiated, then Fade is clicked again after 20 seconds, it will take 20 seconds to fade back in. Tip: Shift+click the Fade button to instantly return the level back to 0 dB (this feature cannot be automated).
General Usage Notes

The SSL G Bus compressor has been used to put the final touch of cohesiveness or glue to more mixes than any other compressor in history! Its true usefulness and beauty is usually in its subtle ability to make your mix pop just a little more, with a subtle increase in energy and excitement. The SSL G is designed with the 2-bus in mind, and the control set adjusts the L/R simultaneously. The ratios, attack and release settings are also specially tailored for bus use, and give just the right variety of options to make it useful for a wide variety of source material. Attack and release times allow the compression behavior to be tuned to the tempo and feel of the song to some de-
- 452 -
gree, and the Auto setting provides a program-dependent, multi-stage release for the greatest degree of transparency. Use the 2:1 for the most transparent sound and 10:1 for tougher, more audible sound, or 4:1 for in between. Usually, this processor is meant to be used with minimal gain reduction. In most cases, setting the threshold for 1-2 dB average gain reduction is most common, with occasional transients that go beyond the average. In quieter passages little or no meter movement will occur. Use make up gain to get a good gain match between active and bypassed. Traditionally, the SSL G is most commonly used from the beginning of the mix process, and the engineer is mixing to the sound and behavior of the compressor. The ideal way to audition this plugin is on a new mix, dropped into an insert on your stereo master fader. In this case, you will be spending a lot of time keeping an eye on gain reduction metering and you may make tweaks to the setup as the mix progresses. Of course it can also be dropped in existing mixes at any time, but keep in mind it may take a bit more effort to dial in, especially if your ear is already used to the sound without its compression properties. The SSL G is also useful of groups, such as drum busses. in this case, a more aggressive approach may be appropriate, with a greater range of gain reduction. 10:1 will give a harder sound often desired for drum groups. Fast attacks releases will give the most audible sound of the compressor working. Finally Auto Fade is useful when the end of a song needs a gradual decrease in volume. The speed of the fade can be tuned from 1 to 60 seconds, and incorporates SSL's unique fade curves. fade in is also available.
UAD, UAD-1, UAD-2 and UAD 4K are trademarks of Universal Audio, Inc. All other names are trademarks of Solid State Logic, which are in no way associated or affiliated with Universal Audio, Inc. These trademarks of other manufacturers are used solely to identify the products of those manufacturers whose circuits and sounds were studied during the sound development of the UAD 4K products. Use of third party trademarks are for informational purposes only and do not imply an endorsement or sponsorship of Universal Audios products.
- 453 -
CHAPTER 47
Studer A800
Multichannel Tape Recorder
For more than 30 years, artists and engineers alike have been drawn to the warm sound, solid punchy low-end, and overall presence of the Studer A800 Multichannel Tape Recorder. The sheer number of albums recorded on this legendary 2 analog tape machine including classics from Metallica, Stevie Wonder, Tom Petty and Jeff Buckley serve as shining examples of the musicality of analog tape. Authenticated by Studer, and modeled by UAs world-renowned team of DSP engineers and AES magnetic recording expert Jay McKnight over a 12-month period, the Studer A800 Multi-Channel Tape Recorder plug-in for UAD-2 is the first and only product of its kind. This plug-in faithfully models the entire multitrack tape circuit path and electronics of an A800 machine plus the distinct sounds of multiple tape formulas. Put simply, it's the worlds most accurate representation of professional analog tape recording, now available on Mac and PC. As the first microprocessor-controlled tape machine, the Studer A800 marked a new generation of professional multitrack recorders when it was introduced in 1978. Years ahead of its time, the A800 remains a sonic benchmark, and can still be found in studios all over the planet. However, with their massive steel frame and meter bridge, twin half-horsepower motors and cast alloy deck plates, original A800 units tip the scales at a backbreaking 900 pounds (408 kg) not to mention the space required to house such a device. The UAD-2 plug-in version poses none of the hardware hassles of manual calibration and maintenance, nor the potential for tape degradation while retaining all the beautiful sonic qualities that make tape such a beloved recording medium. Just drop the A800 in your first insert on every track desired, and enjoy the benefits of having recorded to tape.
All visual and aural references to Studer products and all use of Studer trademarks are being made with written permission from Harman International Industries, Inc. Any references to third party tape formulations are used solely for identification and do not imply any endorsement by, or affiliation with, any tape manufacturer.
- 454 -
Chapter 47: Studer A800
Studer A800 Screenshot
Figure 143. The Studer A800 plug-in window
The Studer A800 for UAD-2 provides all of the original units desirable analog sweetness; like magnetic tape, users can dial in a clean sound, or just the right amount of harmonic saturation using the Input and Output controls. The reel deck IPS control steps through the three tape speed choices available on the original hardware (7.5, 15, or 30 IPS), each with distinct frequency shift, head bump and distortion characteristics. The Tape Type control lets users choose from four of the most popular magnetic tape formulas of the last three decades, each with their own subtle sonic variation and tape compression characteristics. The Cal control allows the user to choose between +3dB,
- 455 -
+6dB, +7.5dB, or +9dB calibration levels, which can be used at their recommended settings, or tweaked for additional tonal options. Input, Sync and Repro paths, plus Thru (bypass) are available for authenticity, providing all available circuit options of the A800. A huge time saver, the Studer A800 plug-in features an innovative Gang Controls setting, allowing for instant global adjustment of any parameters for all Studer A800 instances in your session. Secondary controls are hidden behind the reel deck, and can be exposed by clicking on the Studer badge or Open label of the plug-in GUI. The Equaliser control allows the user to select between the American (NAB) and European (CCIR) standardized EQs, providing regional pre-emphasis/de-emphasis filtering at 7.5 and 15 IPS, each with its own sonic qualities plus the AES EQ at 30 IPS. The HF Bias calibration parameter allows the user to tune the HF oscillation voltage feed to the magnetic record head, striking a balance between record sensitivity and distortion. This can also be used creatively as an effect from warm, overbiased sounds, to voltage-starved distortion and chatter. HF Record is a calibration filter that allows for HF makeup when the ideal Bias leaves a high frequency deficiency; both HF Bias and HF record are fed into the tape nonlinearity. Sync and Repro HF and LF calibration EQs allow for adjusting for a flat playback response, or can also be used creatively. All Secondary Controls (page 461) can be automatically calibrated to the manufacturers recommended settings via the A800s Auto Cal feature, or may be disabled. Finally, separate controls for Hiss and Hum are available each tuned to default settings to match the hardware behavior with a global noise bypass option. Multitrack Tape Machine The primary purpose of Studer A800 is to obtain multichannel tape sonics within the DAW environment. To obtain the classic multitrack tape sound, the plug-in should be placed as the first insert on individual tracks, before other processing is applied. Creative non-standard results can be obtained by placing the Studer A800 in subsequent inserts after other processors or on busses in a send/return configuration. Mixdown to two tracks can be emulated by placing the plug-in on the stereo output bus.
- 456 -
Primary & Secondary Controls
The primary controls (those that are typically most used) are on the main panel at the bottom portion of the interface. Additional (typically less used) controls are available on the secondary panel. The secondary panel (see Figure 144) is accessed by clicking the Studer A800 label or the OPEN text label above it. For detailed descriptions of the parameters, see Primary Controls on page 458 and Secondary Controls on page 461.
Figure 144. The Studer A800 plug-in window with exposed secondary controls
- 457 -
Ganged Operation
The UAD Studer A800 implements a control ganging feature that allows easy simultaneous parameter modification for all instances of the plug-in. The feature enables the DAW to emulate the multitrack tape deck scenario more accurately, where a single change to some multitrack machine parameters (such as tape speed, formula, and calibration settings) would affect all tape channels. See Gang Controls on page 463 for details. The UAD Studer A800 is designed with a single-channel interface, to emulate the individual channels of a multitrack tape recorder. However, when the plug-in is used on a stereo track, the mono controls affect both channels of the stereo signal identically.
Primary Controls
Path Select The Path Select buttons specify which of the four possible signal paths is active in the A800. The active mode is indicated by an illuminated button.
Thru
Thru is a bypass control. When enabled, emulation processing is disabled and DSP usage is reduced. Thru is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal. Thru is identical to the OFF position in the IPS control (page 460). Note: DSP usage is reduced only when DSP LoadLock is disabled. If DSP LoadLock is enabled (the default setting), activating Thru will not reduce DSP usage.
Input
Input mode emulates the sound of the A800 through the machine electronics only, without tape sonics. This is the scenario when the machine is in live monitoring mode but the tape transport is not running.
Sync
Sync mode models the sound of direct recording and playback via the sync/record head, plus all corresponding machine electronics.
- 458 -
Repro
Repro mode models the sound of recording through the record head and playback through the reproduction head, plus all corresponding electronics. Tape Type Tape Type selects the active tape stock formulation. Four of the most popular 2 magnetic tape formulas are modeled in the A800 plug-in: 250, 456, 900, and GP9. Each type has its own subtle sonic variation, distortion onset, and tape compression characteristics. Generally speaking, the lower the Cal Level for each formula, the higher the signal level required to reach saturation and distortion. Cal Level Cal Level automatically sets tape calibration/fluxivity. The Cal Level setting takes care of the setup one would need to make under equivalent hardware operation, and sets the reference tape/flux level without disturbing the (unity) gain of the plug-in. The record, repro, and sync gain trims found on the A800 channel cards are not present on the plug-in. Instead (when Auto Cal on page 463 is enabled), these controls are amalgamated into this single Cal Level gain control. As tape formulas advanced, their output level increased, thus lowering relative noise floor. +3, +6 and +9dB output formulas were available in the 2 format. Under normal use, the machine would be calibrated to the tapes output level. However, users would sometimes under-calibrate to leave more headroom for a broader sweet or to prevent electronics from clipping. Therefore, the user can go traditional and calibrate to the recommended levels, or select a non-corresponding calibration setting with Cal Level. As an example, if 456 is the selected Tape Type and when Cal Level is set at +6 (6 dB higher than the NAB tape standard), the reference fluxivity level is 355 nW/m (nanoweber per meter) and is 10 dB below the point where THD reaches 3% (referred to as the maximum operating level). Therefore, with a 1kHz test tone at 12dBFS sent to the plug-in, with Tape Type set to 456, Cal Level set to +6, and Auto Cal enabled, output levels of the plug-in will match the input level and fluxivity on the tape will be 355 nW/m. The manufacturers recommended calibration settings for each Tape Type are as follows:
- 459 -
250: +3 Calibration (251 nWb/m) 456: +6 Calibration (355 nWb/m) 900: +9 Calibration (502 nWb/m) GP9: +9 Calibration (502 nWb/m) Note: The noise floor is affected by Cal Level when Noise Enable (page 462) is active. Tip: The UAD Studer A800 default bank offers a variety of preset Tape Type, Tape Speed, CAL level, and EQ configurations that are commonly used for the recording of specific genres. IPS (Tape Speed) The IPS (Inches Per Second) control determines the speed of the tape transport and the associated head bump. (Head bump is bass frequency build-up that occurs with magnetic tape; the dominant frequencies shift according to transport speed.) 15 IPS is considered the favorite for rock and acoustic music due to its low frequency head bump (low frequency rise) and warmer sound, while 30 IPS is the norm for classical and jazz due to its lower noise floor, greater fidelity and flatter response. 7.5 IPS is also available for an even more colored experience, with even greater frequency shift. Tip: Click on the IPS text label to stop/start the spinning reels animation. The OFF position is a bypass control. When set to OFF, emulation processing is disabled, the VU Meter and control LEDs are dimmed, and DSP usage is reduced. OFF is useful for comparing the processed settings to the original signal. OFF is identical to the Thru position in the Path Select control (page 458). Note: DSP usage is reduced only when DSP LoadLock is disabled. If DSP LoadLock is enabled (the default setting), activating OFF will not reduce DSP usage. Input Input acts as an outside gain control (like an external console fader), and adjusts the signal level going into the tape circuitry. The available range is 12 dB to +24 dB.
- 460 -
Just like real magnetic tape, lower Input levels will have a cleaner sound, while higher levels result in more harmonic saturation and coloration. Higher Input levels will also increase the output level from the plug-in. The Output control can be lowered to compensate. Tip: Click the 0 control label text to return to the Input value to 0. Output Output acts as an outside gain control (like an external console fader) and adjusts the gain at the output of the plug-in. The available range is 24 dB to +12 dB. Tip: Click the 0 control label text to return to the Output value to 0. VU Meter The VU Meter provides a visual representation of the signal levels after the virtual tape. The Input control affects how hot the signal is. Higher VU levels typically indicate more harmonic saturation, coloration, and/or distortion. However, this will depend on the other control values. The plug-in operates at an internal level of 12 dBFS. Therefore a digital signal with a level of 12 dB below full scale digital (0 dBFS) at the plug-in input will equate to 0 dB on the plug-in meters.
Secondary Controls
The Secondary Controls are exposed by clicking the Studer A800 label or the OPEN text above it. See Figure 144 and Primary & Secondary Controls on page 457 for more information. Tip: The last-used state of the Secondary Controls panel (open or closed) is retained when a new Studer A800 plug-in is instantiated. The state of the panel (open or closed) settings retained with new plug-in instantiations.
- 461 -
Equaliser (Emphasis EQ)
The Equaliser buttons determine the active Emphasis EQ values and the frequency of the hum noise. Click the equaliser buttons to alternate between the two different types. NAB or CCIR curves can be selected when the Tape Speed is 7.5 or 15 IPS. When the Tape Speed is 30 IPS, neither value is available (the LEDs are dimmed) because the EQ is fixed with the AES emphasis curve. When the value is set to NAB, the Hum Noise frequency is 60 Hz (the United States standard). When set to CCIR, the Hum Noise frequency is 50 Hz (the standard in Europe and other regions). See Noise Enable on page 462 and Hum Noise on page 467 for more information about Hum. Note: When IPS (Tape Speed) is set to 30 IPS, the yellow LEDs are not illuminated, indicating that the Emphasis EQ is set to AES. However, in 30 IPS mode, the Equaliser switch can still be changed to set the frequency of Hum Noise. Tape Speed and Emphasis EQ were originally practical controls for record duration vs. noise and local standards. It is important to note that historically, the origin of the tape machine (US or European) dictated the built-in EQ emphasis, but later machines like the A800 had both circuits available. While the hardware A800 has discrete controls for tape speed and emphasis EQ, the user has to recalibrate the machine for various speeds and re-jumper the whole machine for 30/15 or 15/7.5 IPS usage. The A800 plug-in has three speeds and related EQ pre-emphasis/de-emphasis filtering, presented as two easy to use controls for simple auditioning of the sonic variations. CCIR (also known as IEC) is the EQ pre-emphasis made famous on British records and is considered the technically superior EQ; many say this EQ was part of the British sound during tapes heyday. NAB (also referred to as IEC2) was the American standard with its own sound. AES is truly standardized for 30 IPS and is the sole EQ found on the Studer A800 for 30 IPS.
Noise Enable
The Noise Enable buttons are a global enable/disable control for the individual hum and hiss components of the A800 model. The amount of hum and hiss noises are continuously variable and are set with the Hum Noise and Hiss Noise controls (page 466). Click the Noise buttons to alternate between OFF and ON.
- 462 -
While noise is historically considered a negative, and was the attribute that pushed the technical envelope for better machines and formulas, noise is still an ever-present component of the sound of using tape and tape machines. Auto Cal The Studer A800 has individual parameters for Bias, HF Record EQ, and Sync/Repro EQ. On the hardware tape machine, these calibration controls are usually adjusted whenever Tape Type, Tape Speed, or Emphasis EQ is changed. When Auto Cal (Automatic Calibration) is ON in the plug-in, these calibration controls (see Figure 145 on page 465) are automatically adjusted to the calibrated values whenever the Tape Type, Tape Speed, and Emphasis EQ are modified. After Auto Calibration occurs, the automatically adjusted parameters can then be modified to any value if desired. When Auto Cal is OFF, the calibration parameters do not change values when Tape Type, Tape Speed, and Emphasis EQ are modified. Note: Auto Cal is enabled by default. Tip: When making manual calibration settings, consider disabling Auto Cal so the manually calibrated settings are not accidentally lost if another control is modified. Gang Controls Gang Controls enables global control adjustments of all parameters for all Studer A800 instantiations. This functionality may be accessed from within any active Studer A800 plug-in. Click the Gang Controls buttons to alternate between the two states. A red flashing LED is present whenever Gang Controls is enabled as a reminder to use this feature with caution. Important: When Gang Controls is ON and a Studer A800 parameter is modified, the current value of that parameter on all other Studer A800 instantiations will be overwritten and cannot be recovered.
Gang Controls Notes
Gang Controls is a read-only, non-automatable parameter and its current value is not saved with the session.
- 463 -
Gang Controls is a static control without the ability to make relative offsets. Disable Gang Controls if offsets between the same control within different instantiations is desired. If Gang Controls is enabled when Auto Cal is enabled, any adjustments made to Tape Type, Tape Speed or Emphasis EQ causes the Calibration Controls to be automatically adjusted for all instantiations. However, if the Tape Type, Tape Speed or Emphasis EQ values do not already match between instantiations before Gang Controls is active, the resulting calibrated values may not match either. When Gang Controls is enabled, there are no audible or visual changes to the other Studer A800 instantiations until a control is actually changed. When Gang Controls is enabled and a Studer A800 settings preset is loaded via the UAD Toolbar, the loaded parameter settings are pushed to all Studer A800 instances. Calibration Controls Refer to Figure 145 on page 465 for the HF Record EQ, Bias, Sync EQ, and Repro EQ controls. These controls are automatically adjusted when Auto Cal is active, or they can be manually modified as desired. The flat calibrated position for these controls is determined by Tape Type and Tape Speed; therefore the available range for these controls is dependent on the current calibration. Tip: Clicking the text label for any of the HF Record EQ, Bias, and Sync/Repro EQ controls will return that parameter to the calibrated value. Note: When making manual calibration settings, consider disabling Auto Cal (page 463) so the manually calibrated settings are not accidentally lost if another control is modified.
- 464 -
Figure 145. The calibration controls for Studer A800
HF Record EQ
HF (High Frequency) Record EQ is provided to make up for common residual HF loss due to Bias optimization and system filtering. It is used to tune HF content into the incoming signal prior to the tape non-linearity. The control provides a continuous boost filter gain and affects saturation characteristics. Note: This filter is prior to the tape record circuit, while the other EQs (Sync, Repro) are for tape playback only.
HF Driver Bias
Bias is defined as an oscillator beyond the audible range applied to the audio at the record head, allowing for adjustment of the record behavior. Ideal bias voltage settings provide maximum record sensitivity and low distortion. Intentionally overbiasing is a common technique especially for tape compression of drums, giving a warmer, gently saturated sound. Underbiasing can also be used to add distortion and other nonlinear responses, similar to gate chatter or cold solder joints; extremely low voltages may even cause audio to drop out entirely. Bias voltage, HF Record EQ, and fixed Emphasis EQ (CCIR, NAB, AES) work together to provide a linear response to the recorded signal. Sync and Repro Playback EQ Controls are available for tape playback calibration. They affect the signal coming out of the tape circuitry.
Sync/Repro EQ
- 465 -
With the hardware machine, these controls enable compensation for any tape frequency loss or head wear. Under hardware use, the Sync and Repro playback heads are calibrated to normal operating standards and are nearly identical when set correctly. However, they may be tuned incorrectly to achieve a desired sound. Sync EQ and Repro EQ are used as filters to shape the frequency response of the system in maintaining a flat response, but they may be used on their own for high or low frequency adjustment.
Sync HF EQ
Adjusts the high frequency content when Path Select (page 458) is set to Sync. When Path Select is not set to Sync, the control has no effect.
Sync LF EQ
Adjusts the low frequency content when Path Select (page 458) is set to Sync. When Path Select is not set to Sync, the control has no effect.
Repro HF EQ
Adjusts the high frequency content when Path Select (page 458) is set to Repro. When Path Select is not set to Repro, the control has no effect.
Repro LF EQ
Adjusts the low frequency content when Path Select (page 458) is set to Repro. When Path Select is not set to Repro, the control has no effect. Noise The Noise controls allow the user to control the Hum and Hiss elements found on the original hardware. Separate controls for Hum and Hiss are available and each can be adjusted for creative purposes. Tip: Click the control label text to return to the Hum or Hiss value to 0. Hiss affects the signal at the tape head; Hum is added after the tape circuitry. Hum and Hiss values default to comparative levels found on the original hardware. The available range for both controls is 25 dB. The global Noise Enable control (page 462) must be ON for the Hum and Hiss parameters to have any effect.
- 466 -
Hum Noise
The Hum Noise frequency is dependent on the setting of the Equaliser (Emphasis EQ) control (page 462). The frequency is 60 Hz when set to NAB (US) and 50 Hz when set to CCIR (European). Note: When IPS (Tape Speed) is set to 30 IPS, the yellow Equaliser (Emphasis EQ) LEDs are not illuminated, indicating that the Emphasis EQ is set to AES. However, in 30 IPS mode, the Equaliser switch can still be changed to set the frequency of Hum Noise.
Hiss Noise
Just like the hardware, the amount of hiss is dependent on settings of the various controls. Overall Hiss Noise is set with this control, but may change based on the Path Select, Tape Speed, Tape Type, Emphasis EQ, Cal Level, Bias, Playback EQs, and Output Level controls. Because hiss noise is an element of t ape playback, Hiss is disabled when Path Select is to INPUT. Note: Hiss timbre and level can change with Tape Type.
Studer A800 Latency

The Studer A800 uses an internal upsampling technique. This upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than most other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information.
- 467 -
CHAPTER 48
Teletronix LA-2A Leveler Collection

History
For 50 years, the original and most revered and relied upon transparent optical gain reduction design
The Teletronix LA-2A Leveling Amplifier rivals only the Universal Audio 1176 as the most ubiquitous outboard processor on the planet, and is considered the most revered and relied upon vocal compressor in history. With its transparent, program dependent optical compression and meticulously designed tube amplifier, Teletronix Levelers instantly became favored for studio and broadcast use. Teletronix founder Jim Lawrence first used photocells for controlling gain in the early 60s. His ingenious optical compression design was a technological breakthrough surpassing the stability and transparency of earlier tube detector circuits. M.T. Bill Putnam later bought this patented technology and continued the manufacturing of the Teletronix LA-2A and its follow-up products for years to come. Universal Audio still hand makes this point-to-point, tube-amplified studio staple, including the LA-2As all-important T4 electro-luminescent gain reduction cell. 50 years later, the Teletronix LA2A is still the workhorse compressor and the most transparently musical method to control dynamics. Like with the 1176 Classic Limiter Collections redesign from UAs legacy 2001 UAD-1 plug-in, advances afforded by greater processing power and over a decade of emulation experience gave the team at Universal Audio the latitude to upgrade the LA-2A in luxurious, obsessive detail. From improvements to the time constant fit methods and gain reduction nonlinearities, to the addition of the transformer and tube amplifier distortion behaviors, the resulting effort furthers UAs position as having the most authentic, in-the-box optical compression tools on the market. Universal Audio is the only company with access to the original T4s highly-guarded chemical and manufacturing formula, and thus the only company with the ability to study the staggeringly complex interactions of the unique photoresistor and luminescent light source behaviors down to the quantum level. For discerning professionals, trust only the tools bearing the original Teletronix name.
- 468 -
Chapter 48: Teletronix LA-2A Leveler Collection
Teletronix LA-2A Leveler Collection Screenshots
Figure 146. The Teletronix LA-2A Silver plug-in window
Figure 147. The Teletronix LA-2A Gray plug-in window
Figure 148. The Teletronix LA-2 plug-in window
Figure 149. The Teletronix LA-2A Legacy plug-in window
- 469 -
LA-2A Plug-In Family

The complete LA-2A family is comprised of four individual plug-ins, as seen on the previous page. Each variation has its own unique sonic characteristics. Teletronix LA-2A Leveler Collection The Teletronix LA-2A Leveler Collection (introduced in UAD v6.5) provides access to three historical and highly coveted revisions in the Teletronix product line. The newer state-of-the-art algorithms in this bundle take full advantage of the extra power available on UAD-2 devices and the design sophistication and expertise gained since the introduction of the legacy LA-2A plug-in in 2001.
Teletronix LA-2A Silver
The LA-2A Silver captures the North Hollywood, California unit manufactured in the late 1960s by Bill Putnam, with its brushed aluminum panel and original T4B gain reduction module. Perhaps the most flexible of the three plug-ins in the collection, this units fast time constant makes it suitable on the widest variety of program material, including transient-rich sources like drums and percussion.
Teletronix LA-2A Gray
The LA-2A Gray covers Jim Lawrences original mid-1960s painted unit from Pasadena, California. This unit maintains an average time constant, covering the gamut of medium speed compression uses.
Teletronix LA-2
The LA-2 captures one of the earliest Teletronix examples. This exceedingly rare unit preceded the LA-2A by a few years and incredibly, still has the original T4A fully intact. The LA-2 provides the slowest response and a unique mellowed sound due to 50 years of luminescent panel aging inside the T4 module. Use the LA-2 with legato tempos and your most vowel-like sources for a transparency and sublime mood unlike any other compressor. Teletronix LA-2A Legacy The Teletronix LA-2A Legacy plug-in (Figure 149 on page 469) was, along with the UA 1176LN Legacy, the first plug-in available for the UAD platform. This first-generation plug-in runs on UAD-1 and UAD-2 devices. It still has a great sound and is very usable, especially when there are not enough DSP resources to use the second-generation models in the newer Teletronix LA-2A Leveler Collection. To accommodate the limited DSP resources of the UAD-1, the transformer and I/O distortion characteristics were not modeled in this plug-in. This makes the Teletronix LA-2A Legacy especially useful in situations where less distortion, and less DSP usage, is desirable.
- 470 -
Applications In the 60s and 70s, the LA-2A and 1176 became inextricably linked as the must-have dynamic tools of the day. If the 1176 is to the Stratocaster in terms of immediacy and flexibility, then the LA-2A is to the Gibson Les Paul in terms of warmth and one-of-a-kind, magical sonic distinction. An important characteristic of the T4 photocell response is that it is both program and frequency dependent. The T4 cell has a multi-stage release, and can take a few minutes to fully recover from the incoming signal. The primary use is as individual inserts for sources that require nominal transparent gain reduction, such as vocals, bass, strings or horns. These tools can also be used to isolate the color of the output amplifier by turning off the Peak Reduction control, even to extreme distortion settings. An interesting sidechain distortion can be achieved at the most extreme Peak Reduction settings, which primarily affects low frequencies. Parameters No compressor is as easy to operate or instantly satisfying to use as the Teletronix Levelers. Peak Reduction applies the compression threshold to the incoming signal up to 40 dB, while Gain amplifies the signal for level matching post Peak Reduction. Set the metering view on any of the units with either +4 or +10 dB Output Gain, or Gain Reduction. Both LA-2A Gray and Silver expose the hardwares rear Limit/Compress switch, as well as the units R37 FM Broadcast Emphasis filter as front panel parameters. Although not present on the unit originally, the LA-2 was hot-rodded to include Emphasis, which is exposed on the front panel. Lastly, Power bypasses all DSP processing, providing a handy level matching tool not found on the original hardware. The Teletronix LA-2A Leveler Collection includes artist presets from prominent LA-2A users. The artist presets are in the internal factory bank and are accessed via the host applications preset menu. The artist presets are also copied to disk by the UAD installer so they can be used within Apollos Console application. The presets can be loaded using the Settings menu in the UAD Toolbar (see Using UAD Powered Plug-Ins in Chapter 7 of the UAD System Manual). Note: Presets created with the original LA-2A Legacy plug-in are incompatible with the newer Leveler Collection plug-ins.
Artist Presets
- 471 -
Reference Level
Plug-ins in the Teletronix LA-2A Leveler Collection operate at an internal reference level of 12 dBFS. This enables more range in the primary controls (Peak Reduction and Gain) before the I/O distortion characteristics become apparent (signals at the input of these plug-ins can be pushed higher before they distort). For additional information about internal reference levels, see Operating Levels in Chapter 7 of the UAD System Manual.
Upsampling
The Teletronix LA-2A Leveler Collection plug-ins (but not the Teletronix LA-2A Legacy) use an internal upsampling technique. The upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than most other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information.
- 472 -
LA-2A Controls
Each model in the LA-2A plug-in collection has the same control set. The parameter descriptions below apply to all models unless otherwise noted. Peak Reduction This control sets the amount of signal compression by adjusting the trigger threshold. Increasing the value lowers the threshold, and therefore increases the amount of compression. The available range is 0 dB (fully counter-clockwise) to -40 dB (fully clockwise). Note: The front panel knob values, which range from 0-100, are arbitrary and do not reflect any particular dB value. Rotate this control clockwise until the desired amount of compression is achieved. To monitor the amount of Peak Reduction, set the VU Meter knob to Gain Reduction. Peak Reduction should be adjusted independently of the Gain control. When Peak Reduction is set to its minimum value, no compression (or limiting) occurs but the signal is still colored by the circuitry and the output level can be adjusted with the Gain control. Gain The Gain knob increases the output level by up to 40 dB to compensate for the reduced level that results from compression. Adjust the Gain control after the desired amount of compression is achieved with the Peak Reduction control. The Gain control does not affect the amount of compression. Note: The front panel knob values, which range from 0-100, are arbitrary and do not reflect any particular dB value. Meter Knob This rotary knob sets the mode of the VU Meter. When set to Gain Reduction, the VU Meter indicates the Gain Reduction level in dB. When set to +10 or +4, the VU Meter indicates the output level in dB (when set to +4, a meter reading of 0 corresponds to an output level of +4 dB). This is a standard VU meter that displays either the amount of gain reduction, or output level, depending upon the setting of the Meter Function switch. Determines whether the plug-in is active. When the Power switch is in the Off position, the plug-in is disabled and UAD DSP usage is reduced (unless UAD2 DSP LoadLock is enabled).
VU Meter
On/Power Switch
- 473 -
Compress/Limit
This switch sets the compression ratio of the leveler. When set to Compress, the compression ratio is approximately 3:1 and when set to Limit, the ratio is approximately infinity:1. However, the compression ratios are nonlinear and frequency dependent, so these figures are not absolute. Note: Like the original hardware, this control is unavailable on the Teletronix LA-2 plug-in. The plug-in is hardwired in Limit mode.
Emphasis
The (R37) Emphasis set screw knob controls a shelf filter circuit in the compressors sidechain input, thereby enabling frequency-dependent compression. When the control is fully clockwise (the default position), the sidechain signal is unfiltered and all frequencies in the source signal that exceed the compression threshold will trigger gain reduction equally (within the non-linear constraints of the electro-optical characteristics). Rotating the Emphasis control counter-clockwise increases filtering of the sidechain signal. The Emphasis filter gradually reduces the lower frequency content of the sidechain signal, resulting in compression that is less sensitive to those frequencies, and more sensitive to high frequency content. Therefore, as the sidechain filtering is increased, higher frequencies are compressed more. Note: Emphasis is unavailable on the Teletronix LA-2A Legacy.
Side-Chain Pre-Emphasis (R37) Background
The LA-2A hardware was designed for use in broadcast applications. The audio signal in FM broadcasting undergoes pre-emphasis and results in a 17 dB boost at 15 kHz. Due to this increase in signal level, transmitters are subject to over-modulation. The LA-2A hardware provides a control (R37) which controls the amount of high-frequency compression. This potentiometer is factory set for a flat side-chain response (clockwise). Increasing the resistance of this potentiometer by turning it counter-clockwise will result in compression which is increasingly more sensitive to the higher frequencies.
- 474 -
In the 1950s while at Parsons Electronics, Electrical Engineer Jim Lawrence was quietly asked to join the Titan Missile Program based at Cal Tech's Jet Propulsion Lab and was assigned to develop optical sensors for the program. Fortunately for everyone, the technology developed from Lawrence's work lead back to a more peaceful deployment of the optical sensor, as the detector in his future Leveling Amplifier. The interactions of the luminescent panel with the photo resistors in his T4 design are predominantly what gives the Teletronix Levelers their signature sound. Lawrence later broke out on his own to start Teletronix, setting up shop in his hometown of Pasadena, California in 1958. Among the Teletronix line of products were transmitter tubes, multiplex generators, to full-scale radio transmitters. Jim's first pass at his Leveling Amplifier was realized as the Teletronix LA-1; Around 100 units were made. Lawrence then updated the design to the LA-2 with improved specs and circuit layout, then moved quickly to the industry standard LA-2A. In 1965, just three years after the incarnation of the LA2A, Jim Lawrence sold the company to Babcock Electronics. Enter Bill Putnam. Putnam picked up Babcock's broadcast division including Teletronix, and rolled it into his parent company, Studio Electronics in 1967. From there, Universal Audio resumed manufacturing of the LA-2A, and Putnam began using the optical detector for new designs. Whether serendipity or by intent, Jim Lawrences Teletronix Levelers and his T4 design had the right musical response that allowed the LA-2A the sonic and technological longevity it still retains. Universal Audio spent a long time getting the T4 right for their hardware LA-2A reissue and the plug-in. But what was special about it wasnt fully understood until UA began the research to model the LA-2A for the UAD-1. Modern photocells are designed to be as fast as possible, but they don't have the right multi-stage response they need to sound like a Teletronix design. Our DSP research helped us understand how the original T4 worked at the quantum physics level. This not only allowed us to develop an accurate DSP model of the gain reduction behavior, it also helped us make our hardware T4 more consistent. This involved studying the original photocell formula, working with both modern device physicists and the people who developed the original photocells, locating the special equipment originally used to manufacture these back in the '60s, and re-qualifying the manufacturer. Whether hardware or DSP, it is this special qualified manufacturing process and recipe UA re-established that gives the LA-2A its unique, musical sonic quality to this day.
- 475 -
The Teletroniz LA-2A Leveler Collection Original Hardware
- 476 -
CHAPTER 49
Trident A-Range EQ
Overview
The original Trident A-Range desk holds near-mythic status in the professional recording industry, and is arguably the best loved of the classic Trident console designs. Particularly noted for its fantastic preamps and the unique band interactions of its colorful EQ section, the Malcolm Toft / Trident-designed A-Range console has made an indelible impact on the sound of record making. During the Golden Years of rock, the A-Range was employed to record some truly great records David Bowies The Rise and Fall of Ziggy Stardust, Lou Reeds Transformer and Queens Sheer Heart Attack, to name a few helping to solidify this consoles reputation forever. And now, this sound comes to the UAD Powered Plug-Ins platform, courtesy of the Trident A-Range Classic Console EQ plug-in. Working in partnership with Trident Audio Developments, UA scrupulously analyzed and faithfully reproduced the EQ section from the specific Trident A-Range console used to record classic albums by both The Police and Rush. One of only 13 A-Range consoles ever built, this desk was hand-picked by Elliott Smith for his private studio, and now resides at New Monkey Studio in Van Nuys, CA.
Trident A-Range EQ Screenshot
Figure 150. The Trident A-Range EQ plug-in window
- 477 -
Chapter 49: Trident A-Range EQ
Unique Band Interactions & Distinct Cut-Filter Combinations
The unique inductor-based EQ section of the board is what the Trident A-Range sound is all about. A series of three high pass filters and three low pass filters are arranged at the ends of the EQ section (see Figure 151). These are unique in that the switches can be pushed in simultaneously, offering distinct cut filter combinations with unusual filter curves. The rest of the EQ section contains four bands: low shelf, low-mid bell, high-mid bell, and high shelf (see Figure 151). Each band has four selectable fixed frequencies and 15 dB of gain. These were the good old days before sweepable frequencies and bandwidth controls, but the results are wonderfully warm and musical. The controls complement is rounded out with phase, output level, and bypass. There is band interaction between the high and low shelving filters, and also between the low-mid and high-mid bell filters. The midband interactions can be significant if the center frequencies are near each other. Band Layout Each of the four main EQ bands have similar controls. The band frequency is controlled by its knob, and the band gain is controlled by its slider.
low pass filters
high shelf band
low-mid band
high-mid band Figure 151. Trident A-Range band control layout
low shelf band
high pass filters
- 478 -
Trident A-Range EQ Controls

Phase The Phase () button inverts the polarity of the signal. The signal is inverted when the button is engaged (darker). Leave the button inactive (lighter) for normal phase. Phase is independent of the EQ IN setting. Three low pass filters are available, and they can be used simultaneously in any combination. The available cutoff frequencies are 15 kHz, 12 kHz, and 9 kHz with a slope of 12 dB per octave. Each filter is active when its button is engaged (darker). Each low pass filter adds to the others. For example, engaging the 15K filter will rolloff frequencies above 15 kHz, but engaging 9K as well will also attenuate frequencies above 15 kHz, even more than if 15K was used by itself. Note: See Figure 151 on page 478 and Figure 152 on page 480 when referring to the band parameters below. High Shelf The high shelf offers Trident-As famous high frequency shelving EQ.
High Shelving Frequency
Low Pass Filters
The edge frequency of the high shelf filter is specified by this knob. Four shelf edge frequencies are available: 15 kHz, 12 kHz, 10 kHz, and 8 kHz.
High Shelving Gain
The gain for the high shelf filter is specified by the horizontal slider control. The available range is 15 dB. The gain value is zero when the slider is in the center position. High-Mid Band The high-mid EQ offers peak/dip bell equalization for the high-to-middle frequencies.
High-Mid Frequency
The center frequency of the high-mid filter is specified by this knob. Four center frequencies are available: 9 kHz, 7 kHz, 5 kHz, and 3 kHz.
High-Mid Gain
The gain for the high-mid filter is specified by the horizontal slider control. The available range is approximately 15 dB. The gain value is zero when the slider is in the center position.
- 479 -
Low-Mid Band
The low-mid EQ offers peak/dip bell equalization for the middle-to- low frequencies.
Low-Mid Frequency
The center frequency of the low-mid filter is specified by this knob. Four center frequencies are available: 2 kHz, 1 kHz, 500 Hz, and 250 Hz.
Low-Mid Gain
The gain for the low-mid filter is specified by the horizontal slider control. The available range is approximately 15 dB. The gain value is zero when the slider is in the center position. Low Shelf The low shelf offers low frequency shelving equalization.
Low Shelving Frequency
The edge frequency of the low shelf filter is specified by this knob. Four shelf edge frequencies are available: 150 Hz, 100 Hz, 80 Hz, and 50 Hz.
Low Shelving Gain
The gain for the low shelf filter is specified by the horizontal slider control. The available range is 15 dB. The gain value is zero when the slider is in the center position. Gain slider shortcuts The band gain sliders can be instantly moved to any position by clicking anywhere within its range. Tip: Clicking just above or below the 0 (zero) graphic returns the associated slider to its center (zero gain) position.
The band gain sliders will jump to any position clicked within the red zones. Click near the 0 to return to zero gain.
Figure 152. Trident A-Range slider shortcuts
- 480 -
High Pass Filters
Three high pass filters are available, and they can be used simultaneously in any combination. The available cutoff frequencies are 100 Hz, 50 Hz, and 25 Hz with a slope of 18 dB per octave. Each filter is active when its button is engaged (darker). Each high pass filter adds to the others. For example, engaging the 50 Hz filter will rolloff frequencies below 50 Hz, but engaging 100 Hz as well will also attenuate frequencies below 50 Hz, even more than if 50 Hz was used by itself.
Output Level
The Output knob controls the signal level that is output from the plug-in. The default value is 0 dB. The available range is 24 dB to 12 dB. Tip: Click Output or 0 (zero) to return to zero gain position.
EQ In
The EQ In switch determines whether the plug-in is active. When the switch is in the Off (lighter) position, plug-in processing is disabled and UAD DSP usage is reduced (unless UAD-2 DSP LoadLock is enabled). Note the Phase setting (Phase on page 479) remains in effect even if EQ In is in the off position.
Trident A-Range Latency

The Trident A-Range EQ uses an internal upsampling technique. This upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 UAD Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information. Note: Compensating for Trident A-Range EQ is not required if the host application supports full plug-in delay compensation throughout the signal path, or when it is used only on the outputs.
- 481 -
The Trident A-Range Console, featuring the Trident A-Range EQ The Trident A-Range Console, featuring the Trident A-Range EQ
All visual and aural references to the TRIDENT A-RANGE EQ are trademarks being made with written permission from PMI AUDIO.
- 482 -
CHAPTER 50
UA 1176 Classic Limiter Collection

History
The Denitive Collection of the Worlds Most Famous Compressors
The original Universal Audio 1176, designed by audio Renaissance man and UA founder M.T. Bill Putnam, represented a major breakthrough in limiter technology. The first true peak limiter to feature all-transistor circuitry and FET gain reduction, the original 1176 offered superior performance and a signature sound including a lightning-fast 20 microseconds attack time. Ever since its announcement in 1967, the 1176 has lent its character and punch to some of the greatest recordings in history creating a solid framework for any mix, in any genre. Evolved from the popular Universal Audio 175 and 176 tube limiters, the 1176 retained proven qualities of these industry leaders, and set the standard for all limiters to follow. Entries found in Putnams design notebook point to his extensive experimentation with the newly developed FET (Field Effect Transistor) in various configurations. Eventually, he found a way of using the FET as the gain-controlling element of a compressor/limiter. While the 1176 has seen a huge number of revisions in its history, the most significant revision was by UREI engineer, Brad Plunkett, in an effort to reduce noise hence the birth of the 1176LN at Rev C. Numerous design changes have followed since, resulting in at least 13 revisions and variations of the 1176. Universal Audio released its first 1176 plug-in emulation, the UAD 1176LN, in 2001. This plug-in launched the UAD platform, and inspired a decade of analog emulation software. Today, with the Universal Audio 1176 Limiter Plug-Ins Collection, weve circled back to the 1176 and modeled its entire electronic path from stem to stern including its transformers, FET and bipolar transistor amplifiers, with improvements in its gain reduction nonlinearities and Attack/Release fits. The resulting 1176 Classic Limiter Plug-In Collection provides unrivaled emulations of three distinct 1176 units, and is indispensable for any serious engineer or producer.
- 483 -
Chapter 50: UA 1176 Classic Limiter Collection
UA 1176 Screenshots
Figure 153. The UA 1176 Rev A plug-in window
Figure 154. The UA 1176LN Rev E plug-in window
Figure 155. The UA 1176AE plug-in window
Figure 156. The UA 1176LN Legacy plug-in window
Figure 157. The UA 1176SE Legacy plug-in window
- 484 -
1176 Plug-In Family

The complete 1176 family is comprised of five individual plug-ins, as seen on the previous page. Each variation has its own unique sonic characteristics. UA 1176 Limiter Collection The UA 1176 Limiter Collection bundle (introduced in UAD v6.2) provides three distinct 1176 revisions, representing over 40 years of design iterations to the original 1176 the world's most recognized compressor. The newer state-of-the-art algorithms in this bundle take full advantage of the extra power available on UAD-2 devices and the design sophistication and expertise gained since the introduction of the legacy 1176LN plug-in ten years prior.
1176 Rev A Bluestripe
This model (Figure 153 on page 484) represents the original Putnam FET limiter design, complete with its higher distortion and unique FET gain amplifier characteristics. Although the input can clip even when gain reduction is not occurring in all the Limiter Collection bundle models, the input clipping is most evident on the Rev A model.
1176 Rev E Blackface
This model (Figure 154 on page 484) covers the early 70s / Brad Plunkett LN (Low Noise) era of the 1176 circuit lineage, with variations including a more linear compression response, transistor gain amplification, and a change to the program dependency.
1176AE Anniversary Edition
This model (Figure 155 on page 484) provides UAs rare 1176 40th Anniversary Edition, complete with exclusive hot-rod mods including its lower 2:1 compression ratio and a fixed super slow 10 ms attack mode.
- 485 -
UA 1176LN/SE Legacy
The 1176 legacy bundle includes the UA 1176LN Legacy and UA 1176SE Legacy plug-ins. These first-generation plug-ins run on UAD-1 and UAD-2 devices. To accommodate the limited DSP resources of the UAD-1, the input transformer and I/O distortion characteristics were not modeled in these plug-ins. This makes the legacy LN/SE versions especially useful in situations where less distortion is desirable.
UA 1176LN Legacy
The UA 1176LN Legacy plug-in (Figure 156 on page 484) was, along with the LA-2A, the first plug-in available for the UAD platform. It still has a great sound and is very usable, especially when there are not enough DSP resources to use the second-generation versions in the newer UA 1176 Limiter Collection.
UA 1176LN SE Legacy
The UA 1176SE Legacy Special Edition (Figure 157 on page 484) is derived from the UA 1176LN Legacy plug-in. Its algorithm was revised in order to provide sonic characteristics similar to the UA 1176LN Legacy, but with significantly less DSP usage. It provides 1176LN-like sound when DSP resources are particularly constrained. The UA 1176SE Legacy sound and behavior is practically identical to the UA 1176LN Legacy at nominal settings; at extreme (cranked) settings, the differences are more obvious.
- 486 -
Applications Generally speaking, the primary use for the 1176 plug-ins are as individual inserts for sources that require compression, such as an individual snare, vocal, or guitar track, or for multi-instrument sources such as a stereo drum buss. Because the UA 1176 Limiter Collection also models the input and output amplifiers, these models can also be used as tone boxes to add 1176 color without compression/limiting by disengaging the ratio control (all Ratio buttons up). Parameters Using an 1176 is a study in simplicity. Input simultaneously sets compression threshold and the level of the signal entering the 1176; Output sets the final signal level. Attack sets the time it takes the 1176 to respond to incoming signal, while Release sets the time it takes the 1176 to return to its initial level. The VU meter displays the amount of gain reduction (GR) or output level (+4/+8). The four Ratio buttons determine the degree of compression; lower ratios for compression, higher ratios for limiting. Disengaging all the Ratio buttons (Shift+Click the currently selected ratio) disables compression altogether, but signal continues to pass through the 1176 circuitry. This is commonly used to add the color of the 1176LN without any gain reduction. At the request of users, the wide range of Multi-Button combinations possible with the hardware is now possible including the famous All Button sound. Control Response & Interactions The UA 1176 Limiter Collection plug-ins are meticulous emulations of the original hardware in every regard, including control responses and interactions. Each 1176 has unique characteristics for gain, threshold, compression knee, distortion onset, and sweet spots. Setting the controls to the same positions on the different plug-ins may yield radically different results, especially depending on the source signals. This accurate control modeling also applies to the Input and Output control tapers and amplifier levels. The same knob positions on one 1176 could produce a dramatically louder (or softer) levels on another. For this reason (to prevent unexpected and potentially damaging output level jumps), presets are not interchangeable between the 1176 variations.
- 487 -
Grit
A simple 1176 trick is turning the attack and release up all the way to their fastest setting. This has the audible effect of adding compression distortion to the audio source, and is especially pronounced in all-buttons mode. What happens here is the attack and release are happening so fast that minute level fluctuations sound like distortion. It can add a very useful, gritty compression effect. This effect is useful on bass, where you might need compression and distortion at the same time, and the 1176 can provide both in a unique way. This trick also sounds great on screaming lead vocals.
Artist Presets
The UA 1176 Limiter Collection includes artist presets from prominent 1176 users. Some of the artist presets are in the internal factory bank and are accessed via the host applications preset menu. Additional artist presets are copied to disk by the UAD installer. The additional presets can be loaded using the Settings menu in the UAD Toolbar (see Using UAD Powered Plug-Ins in Chapter 7 of the UAD System Manual). Note: Presets created with the original 1176LN Legacy and 1176SE Legacy plug-ins are incompatible with the newer Classic Limiter Collection plug-ins.
Upsampling
The UA 1176 Classic Limiter Collection plug-ins (but not the UA 1176LN Legacy or UA 1176SE Legacy) use an internal upsampling technique. The upsampling results in a slightly larger latency than most other UAD plug-ins. See Chapter 9 Delay Compensation in the UAD System Manual for more information.
- 488 -
1176 Controls
Each 1176 plug-in variation has the same control set, so they are only detailed once. The parameter descriptions below apply to all models unless otherwise noted. Input Input adjusts the amount of gain reduction as well as the relative threshold. Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the compression amount. Like the original hardware, the label values are somewhat arbitrary; the knobs are not calibrated to any particular dB values and levels will vary between the various plug-in models. Even when the Input knob is set to signals can still pass into the processor and be compressed. Note: In the UA 1176 Limiter Collection plug-ins, increasing Input will increase distortion. Output Output determines the final output level of signal leaving the 1176. Once the desired amount of limiting or compression is achieved with the use of the Input control, the Output control can be used to make up any gain lost due to gain reduction. To monitor the Output level, set the VU Meter to +8 or +4. The Output control does not affect the amount of compression. Note: In the 1176 Limiter Collection plug-ins, increasing Output will increase distortion. Attack Attack sets the amount of time it takes the 1176 to respond to an incoming signal and begin gain reduction. The 1176 attack time is adjustable from 20 microseconds to 800 microseconds (both extremely fast). The attack time is fastest when the Attack knob is in its fully clockwise position, and is slowest when it is in its fully counter-clockwise position. When a fast attack time is selected, gain reduction kicks in almost immediately and catches transient signals of very brief duration, reducing their level and thus softening the sound. Slower attack times allow transients (or partial transients) to pass before limiting or compression begins on the rest of the signal. Note that the actual attack time varies slightly based on the selected ratio and the particular plug-in model in use. Lower ratios will maintain the fastest attack times.
- 489 -
The behavior of the Attack knob varies slightly between the models, as detailed below.
UA 1176AE Attack
The 1176AE offers a unique, fixed 10 ms SLO Attack mode when this control is moved to the fully counter-clockwise position.
UA 1176 Rev A and UA 1176LN Rev E Attack
When Attack is in the OFF position the I/O amplifiers remain active while the compression circuit is bypassed. This enables these models to add 1176 color without dynamics processing. This function is identical to disengaging all the Ratio buttons. Note: To avoid unexpected level changes that can result when compression is disengaged, on these models the OFF text label must be clicked to move the Attack knob to the OFF position.
UA 1176LN/SE Legacy Attack
The OFF position is unavailable in these plug-ins. To bypass plug-in processing in these models, use the Meter OFF button. Release Release sets the amount of time it takes the 1176 to return to its initial (pregain reduction) level. The 1176 release time is adjustable from 50 milliseconds to 1100 milliseconds (1.1 seconds). Note that the actual release time varies slightly based on the particular plugin model in use and also partially depends on the program material. The release time is fastest when the Release knob is in its fully clockwise position, and is slowest when it is in its fully counter-clockwise position. If the release time is fast, pumping and breathing artifacts can occur, due to the rapid rise of background noise as the gain is restored. If the release time is too slow, however, a loud section of the program may cause gain reduction that persists through a soft section, making the soft section difficult to hear.
- 490 -
About Program-Dependent Release
Program-dependent release is a feature of many compressors. The motivation for having program-dependent release is as follows: After a transient, it is desirable to have a fast release to avoid prolonged dropouts. However, while in a continued state of heavy compression, it is better to have a longer release time to reduce the pumping and harmonic distortion caused by repetitive attack- release cycles. The 1176 compressor employs a release mechanism that is heavily programdependent. There are three features to a program-dependent release: A fast release-time, a slow release-time, and a transition-time. The fast release time is the effective release time after transients; the slow release time is the release time after sustained high-RMS signals. The transition time expresses how long the signal must be in compression before the slow release time comes into effect. The original Bluestripe and 1176AE has a different slow release-time and transition-time when compared to the Blackface revisions. Ratio The four Ratio pushbutton switches (to the left of the VU Meter) determine the compression ratio of the plug-in. Ratios of 20:1, 12:1, 8:1, and 4:1 are available for all 1176 models except the UA 1176AE, which has 20:1, 8:1, 4:1, and 2:1 modes. The 20:1 ratio is typically used when peak-limiting is desired, while the lower ratios are typically used for general dynamic range compression. Multiple Ratio Buttons One of the most unique features of the 1176 hardware is the ability to press multiple Ratio buttons in simultaneously to create unusual compression or limiting behavior and increased compression distortion. See Figure 158 on page 492 for available modes. Engineers typically use All Button mode on drums or on ambience or room mics. It can also be used to make a bass or guitar sound dirty or for putting vocals in your face. In All-Button mode (sometimes also known as British Mode), distortion increases radically due to a lag time on the attack of initial transients.
All Button Mode
- 491 -
In All Button mode the ratio goes to somewhere between 12:1 and 20:1, and the bias points change all over the circuit, thus changing the attack and release times as well. The unique and constantly shifting compression curve that results yields a trademark overdriven tone that can only be found in this family of limiter/compressors. All Button mode is available in all 1176 models. Multi Button Modes The UA 1176 Limiter Collection includes the ability to select a variety of Multi Button combinations, offering various interpretations of the All Button idiosyncrasies. Various button combinations will yield audibly different compression characteristics.
In UA 1176 Limiter Collection
Selecting All/Multi Button Ratio Modes
To select the various combinations of multiple buttons, shift+click the Ratio buttons. Combinations are limited to the modes that actually affect the sound in the hardware. See Figure 158 below for the available combinations. For the combinations with three or more buttons, the shift-clicking the outer buttons will automatically engage the inner buttons (the inner buttons cannot be disengaged; such combinations dont affect the sound in the hardware). These models can be used as tone boxes without compression/limiting by disengaging the Ratio control altogether (all Ratio buttons up). This is accomplished by clicking any Ratio button so only one button is engaged, then shift-clicking the engaged button so none are engaged.
In UA 1176LN/SE Legacy
To select All Button mode on the UA 1176LN/SE Legacy, shift+click any Ratio button. Available Multi Button Modes
Figure 158. The Multi-Button modes available in the UA 1176 Limiter Collection. All-Button mode (far right) is available in 1176LN and 1176SE.
- 492 -
VU Meter
This is a standard VU meter that displays either the amount of gain reduction, or output level, depending upon the setting of the Meter Function switch. These four pushbutton switches (to the right of the VU Meter) determine the mode of the VU Meter, and whether the plug-in is enabled. When set to GR, the VU Meter indicates the Gain Reduction level in dB. When set to +8 or +4, the VU Meter indicates the output level in dB; when set to +4, a meter reading of 0 corresponds to an output level of +4 dB. When the Meter Function is set to GR mode and multiple Ratio buttons are engaged, the Meter will appear to behave strangely. This is normal behavior in the 1176 hardware, and is faithfully recreated in the plug-in. When the OFF switch is engaged, the plug-in is disabled and UAD DSP usage is reduced (unless UAD-2 LoadLock is enabled).
Meter Function
The UA 1176 Limiter Collection Original Hardware
- 493 -
INDEX
Numerics
1176 Classic Limiter Collection 483 1176 Controls 489 1176 History 483 1176 Plug-In Family 485 1176 Screenshots 484 1176LN 483 4K Buss Compressor 449 4K Channel Strip 435
B
Balance 168 Balance Control 132 Band Controls 271, Band Curves 377 Band Disable Button 87 Band Enable Button 342 Band Parameters 373 Bands 366 Bandwidth (Q) Knob 88 Bandwidth Knob 342 Bass 180 Blending Bar 104 Blending Bars 107 Boost Knob 390,
342, 414, 416, 422
A
A/B Selector 72,
271, 342, 414, 416, 422 acoustical space 105 AGC Mode 166 Air Blending 107 Air Density Menu 106 algorithm 104 All Button 373 Allen Sides 290 Ampex ATR-102 19 Ampex ATR-102 Manual Calibration Notes 43
Ampex ATR-102 Manual Calibration Procedure 40 Ampex ATR-102 Operational Overview 21, 210, 243 Ampex ATR-102 Parameter Dependencies 44 Ampex ATR-102 Primary Controls 24 Ampex ATR-102 Screenshots 20 Ampex ATR-102 Secondary Controls 32 Amplitude & Slope 110 API 500 Series EQ Collection 46 API 500 Series EQ Screenshots 47 API 550A Controls 48, API 560 Controls 51,
391, 392, 393
Boss CE-1 Chorus Ensemble 411 Boss CE-1 Controls 412 Boss CE-1 Screenshot 411 Bypass 108,
109
C
Cambridge EQ Controls 70 Cambridge EQ Screenshot 69 Cambridge Equaliser 69 CE-1 Chorus Intensity Knob 413 CE-1 Clip LED 412 CE-1 Depth Knob 414 CE-1 Normal/Effect Switch 412 CE-1 Output Level Knob 413 CE-1 Rate Knob 414 CE-1 Rate LED 412 CE-1 Stereo Mode Switch 412 CE-1 Vibrato Controls 414 CE-1 Vibrato/Chorus Switch 412 Channel Input Gain 164 Classic Mode 413 Compressor Output Knob 89
49, 56 68
API Vision Console Channel Strip 53 API Vision Console Channel Strip Controls 57 API Vision Console Channel Strip Screenshot 54 Attack 489 Attack Knob 88 Attenuation Knob 390, Auto Mode 358
391
Control Bats 71 Control Grouping 340
- 494 -
Index
INDEX
Controls Link 166, 171 Cooper Time Cube 80 Cooper Time Cube Controls 81 Cooper Time Cube Screenshot 80 CS-1 Channel Strip 86 Curve Control Bats 71 Curve Control Points 377 Customer Support 18 Cut Enable Button 73 Cut Filter 130 Cut Frequency Knob 74 Cut Type Menu 73 Dynamics Meters 380
E
Early 111 Early & Late Adjustment 111 EL7 FATSO 116 Empirical Labs EL7 FATSO 116 EMT 140 Controls 130 EMT 140 Plate Reverb 129 EMT 250 Electronic Reverberator 136 EMT 250 Functional Overview 137 EMT 250 Program Mode Controls 140 EMT 250 Screenshot 137 Enable Button 74 Enable/Bypass Switch 88, energy 101 EP-34 Classic Tape Echo 149 EP-34 Controls 150 EP-34 Hardware History 154 EP-34 Overview 149 EP-34 Tape Echo Screenshot 150 EQ Bands 74 EQ Display 377 EQ Enable Button 72 EQ Enable Switch 132 EQ Response 377 ER Relative Timing 110 EX-1 Compressor Controls 88 EX-1 Equalizer and Compressor 87 EX-1 Equalizer Controls 87 EX-1M Overview 89
D
Damper Controls (Reverb Time) 131 Damping Knob 92, 95 dbx 160 Compressor/Limiter 96 dbx 160 Controls 97 dbx 160 Screenshot 96 Decay Time 110 Delay Knob 94 Delay/Size Settings Interaction 94 Demo Mode 234 Depth Knob 91 Diffusion 110 Dimension D 415 Dimension D Controls 416 Dimension D Screenshot 415 Dimension Mode 416 Distance 112 DM-1 Controls 90 DM-1 Delay Modulator 90 DM-1L 90 DM-1L Overview 92 Documentation Overview 15 DreamVerb 99 Dry 113 Dual Mode 341, 413 Dynamic Room Modeling 288 Dynamics 275
89, 92, 95
F
Fairchild 670 156 Fairchild Controls 163 Fairchild screenshots 157 Fairchild Tube Limiter Collection 156 FATSO Controls 120 FATSO Functional Overview 117 FATSO Jr. 116
- 495 -
Index
INDEX
FATSO Screenshots 117 FATSO Sr. 116 Feedback 18 Filtering 108 Frequency 327 Frequency (fc) Knob 88 Frequency Controls 379 Frequency Knob 74,
K
KCS Selector Switch 390 K-Stereo Ambience Recovery 345 K-System 358
L
LA-2A Classic Leveler Collection Screenshots 469 LA-2A Controls 473 LA-2A Leveler Collection Screenshots 469 LA-2A Plug-In Family 470 LA-2A Screenshots 469 LA-3A Compressor 184 LA-3A Controls 185 LA-3A Screenshot 184 Late 111 Late-Field Relative Timing 109 Late-Field Start 110 L-Delay Knob 90 Levels 112 Lexicon 224 186 Lexicon 224 Controls 193 Lexicon 224 Screenshot 188 LFO Type Pop-up Menu 91 Limit 367 Limiter 356 Link Button 93 Little Labs IBP 206 Little Labs IBP Controls 207 Little Labs IBP Latency 208
343
G
Gain (G) Knob 88 Gain Knob 75,
343 Gain Reduction 329

Gain Reduction Meter 361 Grit 488
H
Harrison 32C EQ 173 Harrison 32C EQ and Harrison 32C SE Controls 174 Harrison 32C EQ Screenshot 173 Harrison 32C Latency 177 Headroom 167,
269 Headroom Switch 167, 269 Helios 69 Latency 182

Helios Type 69 Band Layout 179 Helios Type 69 Controls 179 Helios Type 69 Equalizer 178 Helios Type 69 Screenshot 178 Hidden Controls 135 High 391,
393 393
High Attenuation Controls 391, High Frequency Controls 390 High Frequency Knob 133 High Gain Knob 133 High-Pass Filter 343 Hysteresis 277
Little Labs IBP Screenshot 206 Little Labs VOG 209 Little Labs VOG Parameters 211 Little Labs VOG Screenshot 210 Little Labs Voice Of God 209 Low Cut / High Cut Filters 73 Low Frequency Controls 389,
392
I
Input 112,
Low Frequency Knob 132
489
Low Gain Knob 133 L-Pan Knob 92,
Input Mode Switch 416
95
- 496 -
Index
INDEX
M
Mac OS X 16 Manley Massive Passive EQ 214 Manual Conventions 16,
N
Neve 1073 Equalizer 244 Neve 1073 Latency 248, 271, 369 Neve 1073 Screenshot 244, 263 Neve 1073SE 247, 271 Neve 1073SE Controls 247, 271 Neve 1081 Band Layout 250 Neve 1081 Controls 179, 185, 250, 275, 327, Neve 1081 Equalizer 249 Neve 1081 Latency 255 Neve 1081 Screenshot 178, 184, 249, 274 Neve 1081SE 255 Neve 1081SE Controls 176, 255 Neve 31102 Console EQ 256 Neve 31102 Controls 257 Neve 31102 Latency 261 Neve 31102 Screenshot 256 Neve 31102SE 260 Neve 31102SE Controls 260 Neve 33609 Compressor 262 Neve 33609 Controls 264 Neve 33609 Screenshot 263 Neve 33609SE 271 Neve 88RS Band Layout 283 Neve 88RS Channel Strip 273 Neve 88RS Controls 275, 365 Neve 88RS Screenshot 274 Noise 148
18 Massive Passive Controls 217 Massive Passive EQ 214 Massive Passive Latency 224
Massive Passive Mastering EQ 216 Massive Passive Notes 224 Master 72 Master Level Knob 72 Materials Blending 107 Materials Blending Bars 107 Materials Menus 106 Materials Panel 105 Materials panel 101 Meter 493 Meter Pop-up Menu 89 Microphones 290 Mix 113,
336
367
Mix Knob 134 Mod Depth 133 Mod Rate 133 Mode Pop-up Menu 91 Mode Switch 358 Modes 340 Modulation 133 Moog Filter Controls 228 Moog Filter Latency 235 Moog Filter Screenshot 228 Moog Filter SE 234 Moog Filter SE Controls 234 Moog Multimode Filter 227 Multiple Buttons 416 Mute 113 MXR Flanger/Doubler 236 MXR Flanger/Doubler Controls 238 MXR Flanger/Doubler Screenshot 237
O
Ocean Way Studios 288 Ocean Way Studios Operational Overviews 292 Ocean Way Studios Screenshot 289 Online 17 Online Documentation 17 Output 112, 489 Output Knob 88, 92, 95 Output VU Meter 134 Overview 86, 96, 178, 184, 244, 249, 256, 262,
273, 320, 326, 330, 335, 364, 370, 417, 424
- 497 -
Index
INDEX
P
Parameter Copy Buttons 341 Parametric EQ 75 Parametric Type Selector 75 Peak 185 Peak Level 245, Precision Maximizer Operating Tips 369 Precision Maximizer Screenshot 365 Precision Multiband 370 Precision Multiband Latency 383 Precision Multiband Screenshot 370 Pre-Delay 113 Predelay Knob 134 Preset Design Tips 114 Preset Management 114 Primary Controls 193,
250, 257, 418 Peak Reduction 473 Plate 140 Overview 129 Plate Select Switch 131 Platforms 16 Positioning panel 101, 110 Power 414, 416 Power Lamp 135 Power Switch 135, 342 Precision Buss Compressor 96, 320
Precision Buss Compressor Controls 97,
458 Pultec EQP-1A 386, 388

Pultec EQP-1A Program Equalizer 384 Pultec HLF-3C 393 Pultec MEQ-5 391 Pultec Passive EQ Collection 384 Pultec Passive EQ Collection Screenshots 385
321 Precision Buss Compressor Screenshot 321 Precision De-Esser 320, 326 Precision De-Esser Controls 327 Precision De-Esser Screenshot 326 Precision Enhancer Hz 330 Precision Enhancer Hz Controls 331, 334 Precision Enhancer Hz Screenshot 330 Precision Enhancer Hz Usage Notes 334 Precision Enhancer kHz 335 Precision Enhancer kHz Controls 336 Precision Enhancer kHz Screenshot 336 Precision Equalizer 339 Precision Equalizer Controls 340 Precision K-Stereo Ambience Recovery 345 Precision K-Stereo Controls 347 Precision K-Stereo Screenshot 345 Precision Limiter 356 Precision Limiter Controls 357 Precision Limiter Latency 344, 363, 383 Precision Limiter Meters 358 Precision Limiter Screenshot 357 Precision Maximizer 364 Precision Maximizer Controls 365
Q
Q (Bandwidth) Knob 75
R
Rate Knob 91 Ratio 491 Ratio Knob 89 R-Delay Knob 90 ReadMe 15 RealVerb Pro 396 RealVerb Pro Background 397 Recirculation (RECIR) Knob 91, Recovery 264,
94
265
Reflections End 108 Reflections Panel 107 Reflections panel 101 Reflections Start 108 Release 490 Release Knob 88 Resonance panel 101 Response Curve Color 70 Response Curve Display 70 Reverb Time Meters 131
- 498 -
Index
INDEX
Reverberation panel 101, 109 Roland 415, 416 Roland CE-1 Controls 412 Roland CE-1 Overview 411 Roland Dimension D 415 Roland Dimension D Controls 416 Roland Dimension D Overview 415 Roland Dimension D Screenshot 415 Roland RE-201 417 Roland RE-201 Controls 418 Roland RE-201 Interface 418 Roland RE-201 Screenshot 418 Room Shape and Material 396 R-Pan Knob 92, 95 RS-1 Controls 94 RS-1 Reflection Engine 93 SPL Transient Designer 424 SPL Transient Designer Applications 427 SPL Transient Designer Controls 425 SPL Transient Designer Screenshot 424 SPL Transient Designer Technology 431 Split 328 SSL G Buss Compressor 449 SSL G Buss Compressor Controls 450 SSL G Buss Compressor Screenshot 449 SSL G Channel Strip 435 SSL G Channel Strip Controls 436 SSL G Channel Strip Screenshot 436 Stereo 185 Stereo Mode 340 Stereo Operation 472 Studer A800 454 Studer A800 Screenshot 455 Studer Operational Overview 455 Support Website 17 Sync Button 90,
S
Screen Shots 16 Secondary Controls 461 Shape 366 Shape Blending Bar 104 Shape Menus 104 Shape Panel 103 Shape panel 101 Shape Pop-up Menu 94 Shelf Enable Button 78 Shelf EQ 78 Shelf Type Button 78 Signal Flow 100 Size 113 Size Knob 94 Slope 110 Solo 327 Solo Display 381 Space 113 Spatial Characteristics 113 Spectral Characteristics 398 spectral characteristics 109 Speed 327
94
T
Teletronix LA-2A Classic Leveler Collection 468 The UAD System 15 Threshold 164,
321, 327 Threshold Knob 89 Time Constant 165 Transient Designer 424 Trident A-Range EQ 477
Trident A-Range EQ Controls 479 Trident A-Range EQ Screenshot 477 Trident A-Range Latency 481 Type I 76 Type II 76 Type III 77
U
UA 1176 Classic Limiter Collection 483 UA 1176 Limiter Collection 485 UA 1176 Screenshots 484
- 499 -
Index
INDEX
UAD Nomenclature 16 Users Forum 17
V
Video Documentation 17 VU Meter 418
W
Welcome 15 Wet 113 Wet Solo Button 134 Wet/Dry Mix Knob 92, Width 328 Width Knob 134 Windows 16 www 17
95
Z
Zoom Buttons 71
- 500 -
Index

UAD Plug-Ins Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UAD Plug-Ins Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

UAD Plug-Ins Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UAD PLUG-INS MANUAL

SOFTWARE VERSION 7.4

Important Safety Instructions

Service & Support

Universal Audio, Inc. End User License Agreement

Dual Mechanical Delay Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Cooper Time Cube Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Neve 33609 Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Large Format Console Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Documentation & Support

Windows Mac Operation Manuals

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 1: Documentation & Support

Windows Mac UAD Nomenclature

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 1: Documentation & Support

Support Website Videos

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 1: Documentation & Support

Main Website Feedback

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 1: Documentation & Support

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 2: Ampex ATR-102

Ampex ATR-102 Screenshots

Figure 1. The UAD Ampex ATR-102 plug-in window

Figure 2. Ampex ATR-102 secondary controls in open mode

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 2: Ampex ATR-102

Mixdown Tape Deck

Multiple Tape Types

Multiple Tape Heads

Multiple Tape Speeds

Multiple Calibration Levels

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 2: Ampex ATR-102

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 2: Ampex ATR-102

Low Level Tuning

Manual Calibration Tools

Primary & Secondary Controls

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 2: Ampex ATR-102

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 2: Ampex ATR-102

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 2: Ampex ATR-102

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 2: Ampex ATR-102

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 2: Ampex ATR-102

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 2: Ampex ATR-102

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 2: Ampex ATR-102

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 2: Ampex ATR-102

UAD Powered Plug-Ins Manual

Chapter 2: Ampex ATR-102

Figure 4. UAD Ampex ATR-102 secondary controls